Sony A3624011 Licensed transmitter User Manual

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	862860
Application ID	z7R13yUBGSazxHoBZ1Ek3g==
Document Description	08 user guide part 1
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	296.74kB (3709210 bits)
Date Submitted	2007-11-01 00:00:00
Date Available	2007-12-16 00:00:00
Creation Date	2007-10-23 09:00:03
Producing Software	Acrobat Distiller 7.0 (Windows)
Document Lastmod	2007-10-30 18:11:23
Document Title	untitled

Easy Search/Contents/
Precautions
Before Using the
Handset
Voice/
Videophone Calls
PushTalk
Manual for
Phonebook
’07.11
Sound/Display/
Light Settings
Security Settings
Camera
i-mode/i-motion/
i-Channel
Mail
i-αppli
Osaifu-Keitai/
ToruCa
GPS Function
One Seg
Full Browser
Data Display/Edit/
Management
Music&Video Channel/
Music Playback
Other Convenient Functions
Character Entry
Network Services
PC Connection
Overseas Use
Appendix/External Devices/
Troubleshooting
Index/
Quick Manual
NTT DoCoMo W-CDMA/GSM/GPRS System Mobile Phone
Thank you for your purchase of the new “FOMA SO905i” mobile phone.
For proper use of the FOMA SO905i, read this manual and each manual attached to
devices such as the battery pack carefully before and while you use the FOMA SO905i.
For more information on manuals, contact the inquiries on the backcover of this manual.
The FOMA SO905i is the efficient partner of yours. Please handle the FOMA SO905i with
care and use it regularly for a long time.
Before using the FOMA terminal
● Because a FOMA terminal operates using radio frequencies, it cannot be used inside a tunnel, underground,
in a building or other locations where radio waves do not reach the FOMA terminal, in locations with weak radio
wave condition, or outside of the FOMA’s service area. The FOMA services may not be available on high upper
floors of high-rise apartments or buildings, even if you can see no obstructions around you. On occasion, your
calls may become disconnected even in areas with strong radio wave condition, even if you are not moving, or
even if there are 3-antenna marks in the FOMA terminal’s display.
● Please use discretion and mind your manners when using the FOMA terminal in public areas or crowded/quiet
places to keep from bothering others.
● Note that because the FOMA terminal operates on radio frequencies, your calls are at risk of being intercepted
by the third party. However, the W-CDMA/GSM/GPRS system automatically scrambles all calls through a private
call feature. Therefore, even if the third party successfully intercepts your call, they will only hear noise.
● The FOMA terminal operates on radio frequencies by converting voice into digital signals. If the caller moves
into an area of adverse radio wave condition, the digital signal may not be restored accurately, and the voice
received in the call may differ slightly from the actual voice.
● The user hereby agrees that the user shall be solely responsible for the result of the use of SSL. Neither
DoCoMo nor the certifiers as listed herein make any representation and warranty as for the security in the use
of SSL. In the event that the user shall sustain damage or loss due to the use of SSL, neither DoCoMo nor the
certifiers shall be responsible for any such damage or loss.
Certifiers: VeriSign Japan K.K., Cybertrust, Inc., GlobalSign K.K., RSA Security Inc., and SECOM Trust Systems
Co., Ltd.
● The FOMA terminal has FOMA Plus-Area and FOMA HIGH-SPEED Area support.
● The FOMA terminal can be used only via the FOMA network provided by DoCoMo and DoCoMo’s roaming area.
● Always keep the information you save in the FOMA terminal (e.g. phonebook entries, schedules, text memos,
record messages, voice memos, videophone messages) in a separate note. Even if the data may be lost as a
result of malfunction, repair, change, or other handling of the FOMA terminal, under no condition will DoCoMo
be held liable for any lost data saved in the FOMA terminal.
● It is strongly recommended to save important data in the microSD memory card. Also, if you have a PC, you can
transfer/save data such as phonebook entries, mail, schedules in your PC using the DoCoMo keitai datalink.
● Before using this manual
The FOMA terminal supports the Kisekae tool (P.115). When you use the Kisekae tool to change the design of
the menu display, some menu types may change the menu structure depending on the frequency in use. The
digits assigned to menu items may not be applied.
In this case, you cannot operate the FOMA terminal as explained in this manual, so please change the menu to
the Standard menu or reset the menu settings (P.35, 116).
The latest information on this manual is ready for download at the NTT DoCoMo’s website.
ˎ “User’s Manual Download”
(http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/english/support/manual/index.html)
※ The URL and contents of the website are subject to change without notice.
Information on Using the Manual and How to Look up in the Manual
This manual guides you through the operating instructions with step-by-step screen
examples for each operating procedure to ensure that you operate the FOMA terminal
properly.
■ How to Look up in the Manual
This manual employs several search methods so that it can provide the most appropriate way to
find a page relating to your desired function or service flexibly according to your need or situation.
For details, see the next page.
◆ Index (P.418)
Search by a function or service name known to you or a function name to be displayed on
the FOMA terminal’s display.
◆ Easy Search (P.4)
Search a function that you want to know or you consider useful to know from a listing sorted
by purpose or by a function name.
◆ Headings on the cover (Cover page)
Search the description page of a desired function in the order of “Cover page” → “Chapter
opening page (the first page of a chapter)” → “Description page”. The opening page of
each chapter contains detailed contents of the chapter.
◆ Contents (P.6)
Search by purpose or a function name starting from chapters that are categorized by
functions.
◆ Main functions (P.8)
Search for main functions of SO905i, such as new and useful functions.
◆ List of menus (P.374)
The menu items, which appear on the display of the FOMA SO905i, and default settings at
the time of purchase are listed.
◆ Quick Manual (P.426)
The basic operations of the FOMA terminal are explained briefly. Cut and fold these pages
into a booklet and take it with you for convenient reference. The Quick Manual for “Overseas
Use” is also included for convenient reference when the FOMA terminal is used abroad.
● Please note that “FOMA SO905i” is called the “FOMA terminal” in this “Manual for FOMA SO905i”.
● This manual describes the functions that can be performed using the microSD memory card. To use these
functions, you need the optional microSD memory card.
ˎ About the microSD memory card (P.278)
● Reproduction or reprint of all or part of this manual without prior permission is forbidden.
● The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
A function, referred to as “Notify caller ID” here, can be searched in diverse ways as
follows.
Index (P.418)
Search by a function or service name known to you or a function name to be displayed on
the FOMA terminal’s display.
Ｎｏｔｉｆｙ Ｃａｌｌｅｒ ＩＤ
Ｓｅｔ Ｎｏｔｉｆｉｃａｔｉｏｎ
Ｃｈｅｃｋ ｓｔａｔｕｓ
eo Channel .............. 304
display .................... 291
list ........................... 307
........................ 290, 307
................................ 291
ading a Program ...... 305
er ............................. 289
nfo ............................ 291
ogram ...................... 307
ＭＥＮＵ
Name ........................................ 112
Network search mode............... 369
Network security code .............. 122
Network service ........................ 345
Notification display ...................... 32
P.44
To the description page
of the “Notify
caller ID”.
Notify caller ID ............................ 44
........................ 305, 307
Nuisance Call Blocking Service
............................................. 348
gram ......................... 304
................................ 290
Number of protected data items
............................................. 412
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ
Easy Search (P.4)
Search a function that you want to know or you consider useful to know from a listing sorted
by purpose or by a function name.
Useful Functions for a Call
Sending your phone number or keeping it anonymous .....Notify caller ID (P.44)
Switching to videophone during a voice call ...............Chg. to videophone (P.52)
Putting a current call on hold ...........................................Holding (P.66)
Adjusting the volume of a caller’s voice .....................Volume (P.105)
P.44
To the description page
of the “Notify
caller ID”.
Headings on the cover (Cover page)
Search the description page of a desired function in the order of “Cover page” → “Chapter
opening page (the first page of a chapter)” → “Description page”. The opening page of
each chapter contains detailed contents of the chapter.
Easy Search/Contents/
Precautions
Before Using the Handset
Before Using the
Handset
Voice/
Videophone Calls
Part Names and Functions .....................................................................................
.................................. 24
About the Style .......................................................................................................
.................................. 28
Using the Displays .................................................................................................
.................................. 30
PushTalk
About the Sub-display ............................................................................................
.................................. 33
Selecting the Menu ................................................................................................
.................................. 34
Using the UIM ........................................................................................................
.................................. 36
Phonebook
Sound/Display/
Light Settings
Attaching and Removing the Battery Pack .............................................................
.................................. 38
Charging the FOMA Terminal .................................................................................
.................................. 39
 41
 42
Powering On/Off ..............................................................................................
 42
Setting the Date and Time ...................................................................................
................. 43  44
P.44
To the description page
of the “Notify
caller ID”.
■ Typical layout of the operating instructions page
Function name
Notifying the Recipient of Your Phone Number
Index
Operation procedure described step
by step
Before Using the Handset
Chapter title

When placing a call, your phone number can be shown in the display of the recipient’s
phone you are calling.
 The caller ID is important personal information. Carefully decide whether you want to notify a recipient of your
caller ID.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Management] → [NW Services] → [Notify
Caller ID] → [Set Notification] and press
The network security code screen appears.
Select [Notify]/[Not notify] and press
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ Ｃａｌｌｅｒ ＩＤ
ｎｏｔｉｆｉｃａｔｉｏｎ
ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
A display sample if
important for proper
operation
Ｎｏｔｉｆｙ
Ｎｏｔ ｎｏｔｉｆｙ
Section title
An outline and objectives of
the function
Additional notes and
restrictions of the function
[Notify]
: Your phone number (caller ID) is notified to the recipient.
[Not notify] : Your phone number (caller ID) is not notified to the recipient.
The Notify caller ID is set.
To check the setting
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Management] → [NW Services]
→ [Notify Caller ID] → [Check setting].
● If you hear a guidance asking to send the caller ID when you place a call, call again after setting the Set
Notification to [Notify] or by adding “186” before the recipient’s phone number.
Options listed in the display
and their descriptions
Additional information
relating to the procedure
Useful information,
additional information, and points of
caution
Page number
44
※ Please note that the above page is only for explanation purpose and is partly different from the actual page.
■ About the menu operation
Throughout this manual the operations for selecting from the menu are described as follows.
Actual operations
Ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ
Ｓｔａｎｄ−ｂｙ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ
Ｓｕｂ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ
Ｂａｃｋｌｉｇｈｔ
Ｐｏｗｅｒ ｓａｖｅｒ
１ｍｉｎ
Ｍｅｎｕ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ｋｉｓｅｋａｅ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ａｎｉｍａｔｉｏｎ
Ｆｏｎｔ ｓｉｚｅ
Press
(MENU).
Use
to
move the cursor to [Settings]
and press
(Select).
Ｉｎｃｏｍｉｎｇ ｓｅｔ
Ｃａｌｌ
Ｉｎｃｏｍｉｎｇ ｓｅｔ
Ｍｉｓｓｅｄ ｃａｌｌ
ＯＮ
Ｖｉｄｅｏｐｈｏｎｅ
Ｃａｌｌ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ
Ｃａｌｌ ａｓｓｉｓｔ
Ｃａｌｌ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ｃａｌｌ ｑｕａｌｉｔｙ
Ｈｅａｄｓｅｔ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
ＯＦＦ
Ｓｅｌｆ ｍｏｄｅ
Ｍｅｌｏｄｙ Ｃａｌｌ
Use
to move
the cursor to [Call] and
press
(Select).
Typical description of the operations
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Call] → [Incoming set] and press
Ｉｎｃｏｍｉｎｇ ｃａｌｌ
Ｉｎｃｏｍｉｎｇ Ｖ．ｐｈｏｎｅ
ＰｕｓｈＴａｌｋ
Ｍａｉｌ
ＭｅｓｓａｇｅＲ
ＭｅｓｓａｇｅＦ
Use
to move the
cursor to [Incoming
set] and press
(Select).
● Display examples and illustrations used in this manual are just images for explanations and may be different
from actual ones.
● Some parts of the keys are deformed or omitted in the
Actual key
Illustration in this manual
illustration in this manual.
● Display examples in this manual show the conditions based on the Kisekae menu (Colorful White) of the
main body color: White, the Color theme setting (White2), and Clock set to [Digital clock1]. The position of
the clock in the main display in this manual is different from the default position.
● The shorter form “Osaifu-Keitai-compatible i-αppli” is used for “Osaifu-Keitai-compatible i-αppli software
supporting IC card function” in this manual.
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Easy Search
You can search the function that you want to know with simple words.
Useful Functions for a Call
Sending your phone number or keeping it anonymous .....Notify caller ID (P.44)
Switching to videophone during a voice call ...............Chg. to videophone (P.52)
Putting a current call on hold ...........................................Holding (P.66)
Adjusting the volume of a caller’s voice .....................Volume (P.105)
When Being Unable to Answer a Call
Putting an incoming call on hold ......................................On hold (P.66)
Informing of inability to talking on the phone ................Public mode (Drive mode) (P.66)
Public mode (Power off) (P.68)
Recording a message .....................................................Record message/
Videophone message (P.69)
How to Customize the Melody and Indicator
Using a ring tone, etc. specific to individual callers .........Des phone/mail tone/
Select phone/mail Illum. (P.92)
Changing a ring tone .......................................................Ring tone (P.103)
Adjusting the volume of the ring tone .........................Ring volume (P.103)
Setting the vibrator to notify incoming calls and mail .......Vibrator (P.103)
Changing the color of the indicator .............................Color (P.103)
Muting the keypad sound ...............................................Keypad sound (P.104)
Setting the Manner mode ...............................................Manner mode (P.108)
How to Customize the Display
Learning what the icons in the display represent .............Use display (P.30)
Switching the menu display ..........................................Menu setting (P.34)
Changing the stand-by display .....................................Stand-by display (P.110)
Displaying the calendar in the stand-by display ................Stand-by display (P.110)
Changing the font size .....................................................Font size (P.119)
Useful Functions for Mail
Sending Deco-mail ..........................................................Compose and send Deco-mail (P.180)
Sending an image .............................................................File attachment (P.183)
Sorting received mail automatically ............................Sort inbox/Sort outbox (P.195)
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Useful Functions for the Camera
Changing the recording size ..........................................Select size (P.147)
Turning on the photo light ...............................................Photo light (P.148)
Saving an image directly to the microSD
memory card ..................................................................Select save to (P.153)
Displaying a recorded image ........................................My picture (P.266)
For Secure Operations of the FOMA Terminal
Locking the FOMA terminal from a remote
location in case you misplace it ..........................................Omakase Lock※ (P.127)
Displaying saved secret contents .....................................Secret display (P.131)
Rejecting a call if no caller’s phone number is
presented ............................................................................Denied no ID (P.134)
Rejecting a call from a caller who is not saved
in the Phonebook ................................................................Reject unknown (P.135)
Storing the Phonebook data and
other information to prevent data loss ..........................Data Security Service※ (P.135)
※ Omakase Lock is a paid service and Data Security Service is a paid service that requires a subscription.
Useful Functions for One Seg
Watching One Seg .............................................................Activate 1Seg (P.243)
Changing the settings of video or sound ...................Activate 1Seg (P.245)
Setting a timer for watching/recording
a One Seg program ......................................................Booking list (P.247)
Recording a One Seg program .................................Record 1Seg (P.252)
Other Useful Functions
Suppressing the consumption of the battery ...........Power saver (P.114)
Reading the QR and bar codes .....................................Bar code reader (P.157)
Using the GPS function ...................................................GPS function (P.228)
Using the microSD memory card ................................microSD memory card (P.278)
Exchanging information using infrared communication ...Infrared communication (P.295)
Listening to music .............................................................MUSIC Player (P.307)
Using the FOMA terminal as an alarm clock ..................Alarm (P.320)
Using the FOMA terminal as a calculator .......................Calculator (P.330)
Using the FOMA terminal overseas .................................Int’l roaming (P.364)
Upgrading to the latest software ......................................Software update (P.402)
Updating security to the latest safeguards ......................Scan function (P.407)
ˎ For information on how to search the other operations than described above, see “Information on Using the
Manual and How to Look up in the Manual” (P.1).
ˎ The Quick Manual is included for convenient reference, in which operating instructions on the most commonly
used functions are summarized (P.426).
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Contents
Before using the FOMA terminal
Information on Using the Manual and How to Look up in
the Manual .......................................................................1
Easy Search ......................................................................4
Main Functions of the FOMA SO905i ...............................8
Making Full Use of SO905i ! ...........................................10
Safety Precautions (Observe Strictly) .............................12
Handling Precautions ......................................................18
Intellectual Property Right ...............................................20
Supplied and Optional Accessories ................................22
Before Using the Handset
23
Part names and functions, Style, Use display, Sub-display, Select menu, UIM, Attach and remove battery
pack, Charge the FOMA terminal, Battery level, Power on/off, Initial setting, Date/time, Notify caller ID, Own
number
Voice/Videophone Calls
47
Place voice/videophone call, Change to videophone/voice call, Redial/Received record, Chaku-moji, WORLD
CALL, Receive voice/videophone call, Any key answer, Setting when folded, Public mode, Record message/
Videophone message, Call Chara-den, Videophone setting, and so on...
PushTalk
77
What is PushTalk?, Originate PushTalk call, Receive PushTalk call, Add to PushTalk phonebook, Originate
from the PushTalk phonebook, Delete a PushTalk phonebook entry, PushTalk setting, and so on...
Phonebook
89
About phonebooks, Add to FOMA terminal phonebook, Add to UIM phonebook, Group setting, Display
phonebook, Search phonebook, Phonebook setting, Edit phonebook, Delete phonebook, Memory status,
2-touch dial, Data Security Service, and so on...
Sound/Display/Light Settings
101
Incoming set, Set basic tone, Volume, Manner mode, Stand-by display, Animation, Call display, Sub display,
Backlight, Menu setting, Kisekae setting, Kisekae menu, Font size, Select language, and so on...
Security Settings
121
About security codes, Change code, UIM setting, Cancel the PIN lock, Lock all, Omakase Lock, Self mode,
Personal data lock, Key dial lock, Auto lock SubKey, Record display, Secret display, Mail security, Data
security, Accept/Reject call, Denied no ID, Set ring start time, Reject unknown, Data Security Service, and so
on...
Camera
137
Record still images, Record movies, Change the camera settings, Adjust the camera, Set the camera
operation, Bar code reader, and so on...
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
159
What is i-mode?, i-mode menu, Display sites, Change i-mode password, Internet connection, Bookmark,
Screen Memo, Acquire image, Download, i-mode setting, SSL certificate, User certificate, What is i-motion?,
Download i-motion, What is i-Channel?, Display i-Channel, i-Channel setting, and so on...
Mail
177
What is i-mode mail?, Mail menu, Compose and send mail, Compose and send Deco-mail, Template, File
attachment, Save mail, Receive option, Check new message, Received/sent/saved mail, Mail setting,
MessageR/MessageF, Area Mail setting, Compose and send SMS, and so on...
205
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
i-αppli
What is i-αppli?, Download, Run i-αppli, Auto-start, i-αppli stand-by, Manage i-αppli, and so on...
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
219
What is Osaifu-Keitai?, Start an Osaifu-Keitai-compatible i-αppli, What is ToruCa?, Obtain a ToruCa card,
Display ToruCa, Manage ToruCa cards, ToruCa setting, IC act. notice, IC card lock, and so on...
GPS Function
227
Position location, Location provision, Location notice, Location history, and so on…
One Seg
239
About One Seg, Before using One Seg, Set channel list, Activate 1Seg, Program guide, Booking list, Data
broadcasting, TVlink, Record 1Seg, Time shift, 1Seg setting
Full Browser
257
Display website, Key operations, Manage bookmark, Full Browser setting
Data Display/Edit/Management
265
My picture, i-motion, Chara-den, Music, Melody, Kisekae Tool, 1Seg, microSD memory card, Data Box,
Infrared communication, iC communication, My document, and so on...
Music&Video Channel/Music Playback
303
What is Music&Video Channel?, What is MUSIC Player?, Transfer music data, Download Chaku-Uta Full®,
Play back music data, Manage playlist, MUSIC Player setting, and so on...
ˎ “Chaku-Uta Full” is a registered trademark of Sony Music Entertainment Corporation.
Other Convenient Functions
315
Multiaccess, Multitask, Lifetime Calendar, Alarm, Schedule, My Selection, Display rotated appli, Voice memo,
Call duration/cost, Calculator, Text Memo, Jog setting, Force reactor, Reset settings, Reset all data&set, and
so on...
Character Entry
337
Enter text, Enter common phrases, Pictographs/symbols, Cut/Copy/Paste, Reset data, Download dictionary,
and so on...
Network Services
345
Voice Mail Service, Call Waiting Service, Call Forwarding Service, Nuisance Call Blocking Service, Caller ID
Display Request Service, Dual Network Service, English Guidance Service, Service Numbers, Arrival Call
Act, Remote Control, Multi Number Service, 2in1, and so on...
PC Connection
357
About data communication, Before using data communication, Preparations and flow of data communication,
AT commands, About the supplied CD-ROM, Introduction of DoCoMo keitai datalink
Overseas Use
363
Overview of international roaming, Available services, Place call, Receive call, Network search mode, PLMN
setting, Operator name display, Roaming Guidance, Oversea service, and so on…
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
373
List of menus, Troubleshooting, Software update, Scan function, Specifications, and so on...
Index/Quick Manual
417
Index, Quick Manual, Quick Manual for “Overseas Use”
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Main Functions of the FOMA SO905i
“FOMA” is the name of NTT DoCoMo’s mobile service based on the W-CDMA (Wideband Code
Division Multiple Access) system, which has been approved as a global standard of third generation
(3G) wireless communication systems (IMT-2000 or International Mobile Telecommunications-2000).
It’s amazing because it’s i-mode
i-mode is an online service that enables you to take advantage of valuable information
from i-mode Menu sites (Program) and i-mode compatible sites. This service also
enables you to exchange e-mail with great ease.
Chaku-Uta Full®/Uta-hodai/
Music&Video Channel※/Video clip
i-mode mail/Deco-mail/Deco mail pict.
Besides the main body of text, you can attach up to 10
files (JPEG, ToruCa, PDF, etc.) of up to 2M bytes in total.
The FOMA terminal also supports Deco-mail and Decomail pictographs, allowing you to create and send more
impressive mail by providing a diversity of expression,
such as changing font color and size and using effect of
background color on mail main body (P.178).
Mega i-αppli/Virtual game
By downloading i-αppli from a relevant site, you can enjoy
games or obtain automatically updated information, such as
about market shares and weather.
Mega i-αppli is supported, enabling you to enjoy games
that require large amounts of memory, such as high
resolution 3D games and full-featured role playing games.
Additionally, the virtual games which are operated by
sensuously such as “tilting” the mobile phone are also
supported (P.206).
Compatible with High-Speed Communication
The FOMA HIGH-SPEED Area is supported and highspeed communication of the maximum reception speed
3.6Mbps and maximum transmission speed 384kbps can
be achieved (P.358).
International Roaming
You can use the same FOMA terminal, phone number, and
mail address as used in Japan when you are overseas
(supported GSM/3G areas). A voice/videophone call,
i-mode, i-mode mail, SMS, and network services are
available (P.364).
GPS
※ Music&Video Channel is a paid service that requires a
subscription.
Chaku-Uta Full® that allows you to download a whole track
of music and Uta-hodai that allows you to enjoy favorite
music as much as you want by the fixed fee are supported.
Also, Music&Video Channel is supported to download
a music program during the night only by setting it in
advance and enjoy it. You can enjoy program with video
by the SO905i. Moreover, because i-motion up to 10MB is
supported, video clip which allows you to enjoy a music clip
of a whole track of music is supported (P.304, 309).
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
Once you download the Osaifu-Keitai-compatible i-αppli,
you can use the FOMA terminal to deposit e-money to the
IC card incorporated in the terminal as well as to check
your credit balance and purchase history on a relevant site.
Furthermore, the i-αppli for “DCMX” credit service provided
by DoCoMo is preinstalled (P.212). The “iC transfer service”
is also supported, which allows you to easily transfer data
stored on the IC card to another one in a case such when
replacing a FOMA terminal with a new model.
ToruCa is an e-card which you can obtain from a reading
device (reader/writer) or site and exchanges with others
easily using e-mail or infrared communication (P.220).
Kisekae Tool
You can download data such as a display of your favorite
character from i-mode and change the stand-by display and
menu display to the data at once. For SO905i, you can also
change the orders of the menu items based on your usage
and customize the menu display to your taste (P.115, 117).
You can use various services using the location information
you obtain by GPS, such as viewing the map of your
location, searching for information on your neighborhood,
notifying your location information by attaching it to mail,
letting the FOMA terminal to navigate you to the destination.
The Map appli is preinstalled and allows you to use the
high-definition map easily (P.228).
Comprehensive Line-up of Network Services
ˎ
ˎ
ˎ
ˎ
ˎ
Voice Mail Service (Paid) (P.346)
Call Forwarding Service (Free) (P.347)
Caller ID Display Request Service (Free) (P.348)
English Guidance Service (Free) (P.349)
2in1 (Paid) (P.352)
ˎ
ˎ
ˎ
ˎ
Call Waiting Service (Paid) (P.347)
Nuisance Call Blocking Service (Free) (P.348)
Dual Network Service (Paid) (P.349)
Multi Number Service (Paid) (P.350)
microSD memory card
The small-sized microSD memory card is supported. You
can copy the data, such as the FOMA terminal phonebook,
mail, and images, to the microSD memory card and view the
saved data on the FOMA terminal display.
You can also use the FOMA terminal as a microSD memory
card reader/writer by connecting it to a PC (P.278, 285).
+JOG (Plus JOG)
You can select the items quickly by scrolling the JOG
upward and downward. The JOG gives you more convenient
operations with the 4-way keys (P.26).
“POBox Pro 2.0” and Convenient Text Input
The FOMA terminal is provided with the prediction
conversion function “POBox Pro 2.0” (Predictive Operation
Based On eXample Pro 2.0). Pressing
allows
you to move vertically and horizontally in the “POBox Pro
2.0”, enabling to select the target word. Also, switching tabs
allows you to enable the speedy selection of the matching
words list (P.339).
TV Style
Using the 2 Step 1Seg Stand allows you to place the FOMA
terminal in the horizontal orientation tilted with angles (of two
levels: about 35 and 45 degrees) suitable for watching One
Seg. Also, the Viewing Touch Key placed next to the display
is available for using when watching One Seg in the TV style
(P.27).
Stand-by books
There are five unique preinstalled Flash contents which
display various information such as bits of knowledge,
general knowledge, and picture books wave after wave
every time when the stand-by display appears.
You can set your favorite content selecting from the
[Preinstalled] folder in My picture of the Data Box and enjoy
it (P.110).
High-Definition Wide VGA Liquid-Crystal
Screen Display
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Camera Function
You can record still images and movies using two cameras,
Out- and In-camera. This FOMA terminal has a wide range
of installed camera functions including a scene selection
function, an auto focus function, and a maximum 16:1 zoom
function (P.138).
Out-camera : E ff e c t i v e n u m b e r o f p i x e l s - - a b o u t
3,200,000 (Maximum number of recording
pixels -- about 3,200,000)
In-camera
: Effective number of pixels -- about 110,000
(Maximum number of recording pixels -about 100,000)
A 3-inch high-resolution full wide liquid-crystal screen
display is employed as the main display. Not only you can
enjoy One Seg, but also perform mail and i-mode operations
in the large screen comfortably. The same aspect ratio with
wide-screen being employed, a full-screen view of wide
pictures is available. Moreover, the organic EL display is
employed as the sub-display, allowing a clear representation
of the displayed contents such as text information and time.
RealityMAX
The high-resolution engine for mobile display based on the
BRAVIA technology is employed. The contrast improvement
and edge enhancement technologies enable the high
contrast and sharply-edged screen image. Also, the rich
color reproduction which is optimized for watching One Seg
is achieved.
Lifetime Calendar
The Lifetime Calendar allows you to display an image, mail,
Schedule, and Phonebook (birthday) data directly from
the Calendar and provides you with more pleasant way of
retrieving your memories saved in the FOMA terminal (P.318).
Quick deco. Mail Function
Fun Deco-mail is available with simple steps (P.182).
Infrared Communication/
Infrared Remote Control
You can exchange data with other FOMA terminals using
the infrared communication function. You can also use the
FOMA terminal to operate equipment such as a TV that is
provided with infrared remote control. Moreover, the FOMA
terminal supports the high-speed infrared communication
standard IrSimple, allowing you to transfer high-quality
images to compatible devices at a high speed (P.295, 298).
MUSIC Player
You can play back Chaku-Uta Full® and music data saved
in the microSD memory card. You can operate the MUSIC
Player using the Music Touch Key while the FOMA terminal
is folded (P.307).
Multiaccess
You can use voice call and packet communication
simultaneously. You can receive i-mode mail even when
you are in a call and you can also make a call while you are
using i-mode (P.316).
Security Settings (P.121)
Omakase Lock
Data Security Service
If you misplace the FOMA terminal, it can be locked by your
request. You can cancel the lock as well. See the contact
address at the backcover of this manual for inquiries (P.127).
Please note that Omakase Lock is a paid service＊.
＊ When you subscribe to this service together with your
request to suspend the FOMA terminal or while the
FOMA terminal is suspended, the service charge is not
required.
ˎ Omakase Lock allows the FOMA terminal to be locked
by a request from a subscriber of the UIM inserted in the
FOMA terminal. Note that if the UIM subscriber and user
of the FOMA terminal are different, the FOMA terminal
may be locked without knowledge of the user by request
of the subscriber.
You can save the Phonebook, images, and mail of the FOMA
terminal at the Data Security Service Center, and restore the
data stored at the Center in case you lose any of it. You can
also use a PC to edit/manage the data stored at the Center
and update the FOMA terminal with newly edited data.
See the “Mobile Phone User’s Guide【i-mode】” to learn
about the precautions and details on how to use the Data
Security Service when you use this service. See the contact
address at the backcover of this manual for inquiries.
Data Security Service is a paid service that requires a
subscription (P.135).
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Making Full Use of SO905i !
Videophone
You can have a face-to-face conversation with a person in the
distance. You can hear the person’s voice from the speaker
without changing any settings, so you can start a conversation
soon. You can switch a call to a videophone call during a voice
call without hanging up as well (P.48).
Image of a
person you
are talking to
Your image
PushTalk
You can communicate among several persons
(up to five persons including yourself) with a
simple operation of selecting recipients from
the PushTalk phonebook and pressing
(P.78).
Recipient
Recipient
Recipient
Caller
Originating
a call
Recipient
(Speaker)
I’ll arrive soon.
i-Channel
You can receive graphical information such as News or weather.
You can also get rich and detailed information that is created with Flash (P.163) by selecting your
favorite channel from a list of available channels (P.174).
Unsubscribed
Subscribed
Connect
(i.ch)
→
最高１５℃
１０
※ i-Channel is a paid service that requires a subscription.
10
2in1 is a service that allows you to
use two phone numbers, two mail
addresses, and special mode functions
to make one mobile phone work like
using two mobile phones separately.
Phonebooks, mail boxes, redial/received
records, stand-by displays, etc. can
be managed by the “A mode” and “B
mode” separately and also you can use
the “Dual mode” to manage both the A
and B modes at the same time (P.352).
A mode
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
2in1
B mode
Phone No. : 090-AAAA-AAAA
Address : XXA@docomo.ne.jp
Phonebook : For A mode
Phone No. : 090-BBBB-BBBB
Address : XXB@docomo.ne.jp
Phonebook : For B mode
Dual mode
Phone/mail
by A mode
※ 2in1 is a paid service that requires a subscription.
Phone/mail
by B mode
Phonebook A
Mail box A
Records A
Voice mail A
・・
Phonebook A/B
Mail box A/B
Records A/B
Voice mail A/B
・・
Phonebook B
Mail box B
Records B
Voice mail B
・・
MUSIC Player
You can use the MUSIC Player to play
back Chaku-Uta Full ® downloaded
from a music distribution site or music
data that was saved in the microSD
memory card using Windows Media
Player or Napster ®. Also, a music
program of up to one hour that
is reserved for the Music&Video
Channel and automatically distributed
during the night can be played back
(P.304, 307).
Music CD
Chaku-Uta Full® distribution site
FOMA terminal
(microSD memory card)
PC
Chaku-moji
You can send a message that is displayed in the recipient’s
Incoming call display while calling the recipient. The recipient
can know the purpose of the call or feelings of the caller from a
message even before the recipient answers (P.55).
Ｉｎｃｏｍｉｎｇ ｃａｌｌ
Ｕｒｇｅｎｔ
Chaku-moji
One Seg
You can watch One Seg that is the Terrestrial digital TV broadcasting designed for mobile devices. You can record a One Seg
program while watching it or set a timer for watching/recording a One Seg program as well. Also, you can use convenient
functions such as Time shift that allows you to pause a One Seg program temporarily and start watching it again from the
point you paused and Rapid play with sound that allows you to play back a recorded video at about 1.3x speed (P.240).
When you watch One Seg in the
TV style, using the 2 Step 1Seg
Stand allows you to place the
FOMA terminal on the flat surface
in the horizontal orientation and
watch One Seg with full-wide
horizontal screen display.
Normal style
TV style
○ × ｃｈ ○ △ の不思議
○ △ の不思議
毎週木曜よる１０時∼
第２２５回
ペンギンの一生
○ ×ｃｈ
の不
○△
思議
Ｑｕ
Ｆｕ
Ｒｅ
Ｃｈ
Ｖｏ
ｌｕ
ｍｅ
ａｎ
ｎｅ
ｌ
ｃ
ｎｃ
ｉｔ
Ｖｏｌｕｍｅ
Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ
Ｒｅｃ
Ｆｕｎｃ
Ｑｕｉｔ
■豆知識
■クイズ
■撮影裏話
■次回予告
○ × ｃｈ ○ △ の不思議
録画
11
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Safety Precautions (Observe
Strictly)
For safe and proper use of the FOMA terminal, please
read the “Safety Precautions” prior to use. Keep the
Manual in a safe place for future reference.
ALWAYS observe the safety precautions since they
intend to prevent personal injury or property damage.
■ The following symbols indicate the different levels
of injury or damage that may result if the guidelines
are not observed and the FOMA terminal is used
improperly.
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
Failure to observe
these guidelines may
immediately result in
death or serious injury.
Failure to observe
these guidelines may
result in death or
serious injury.
Failure to observe
these guidelines may
result in injur y and
property damage.
■ “Safety Precautions” are described in the following
categories:
Handling the FOMA Terminal, Battery Pack,
Adapter (including the charger), and UIM ..... 12
Handling the FOMA Terminal .................................................... 14
Handling the Battery Pack......................................................... 16
Handling the Adapter (including the charger) .......................... 16
Handling the UIM ...................................................................... 17
Handling the FOMA Terminal Near
Electronic Medical Equipment ....................... 17
Handling the FOMA Terminal, Battery Pack,
Adapter (including the charger), and UIM
DANGER
Don’t
Doing so may cause the device to be
deformed or damaged, or the battery
pack to leak, overheat, explode, catch
fire, or deteriorate in performance and
longevity. Also, part of the case may heat
up and cause burns.
■ The following symbols indicate specific directions.
Indicates prohibited actions.
Don’t
Do not disassemble or modify the FOMA
terminal, battery pack, or adapter and do
not directly solder the battery pack to the
No
Disassembly FOMA terminal.
Doing so may cause accident such as fire,
injury or electric shock, or malfunction.
Also, it may cause the battery pack to
leak, overheat, explode, or catch fire.
Indicates not to disassemble.
No
Disassembly
No
liquids
Indicates not to use where it could get
wet.
Indicates not to handle with wet hands.
Do not get the FOMA terminal, battery
pack, or adapter wet.
No
liquids
No wet
hands
Do
Unplug
Indicates compulsory actions in
accordance with instructions.
Do
Indicates to remove the power plug
from the outlet.
Do not use or leave the FOMA terminal,
battery pack, adapter, or UIM in a place
subject to high temperature such as close
to fire, under direct sunlight, or in a car on
an extremely hot day.
If liquids such as water or pet urine get
into the device, it may cause overheating,
electric shock, fire, malfunction, or injury. Be
careful where and how you use the device.
Use the batter y packs and adapters
(including chargers) specified for the
FOMA terminal by DoCoMo.
The use of products that are not specified
may cause the FOMA terminal, battery
pack, or other device to leak, overheat,
explode, catch fire, or malfunction.
Battery Pack SO02, Desktop Holder SO07,
FOMA AC Adapter 01/02, FOMA DC Adapter
01/02, FOMA Portable Charging Adapter 01,
FOMA Dry Battery Adapter 01, FOMA AC
Adapter 01 for Global use, FOMA USB Cable
with Charge Function 01
※ Contact our service counter (DoCoMo shop, etc.)
for information on other compatible products.
12
Don’t
Don’t
Do not place the FOMA terminal, battery
pack, adapter (including the charger),
or UIM inside cooking appliance such
as a microwave oven or high-pressure
containers.
Don’t
Do
Don’t
Do not subject the FOMA terminal, battery
pack, or adapter to excessive force or
throw it.
Do
Do not allow the charge and external
connection terminals to come in contact
with conducting foreign substances (a
piece of metal, pencil lead, etc.). Never
allow these objects to get into the FOMA
terminal, battery pack, or adapter.
Power off the mobile phone before you
step into a place where flammable gas
can leak, such as gas stations.
Do not charge the battery as well because
it may cause gas to ignite.
Keep the mobile phone powered off even
when you use the Osaifu-Keitai in gas
station premises or other similar place.
(When the IC card lock is set, cancel
the lock and then power off the mobile
phone.)
Doing so may cause the device to fall
and cause injury or malfunction.
Do not keep in a place that is very humid,
dusty, or subject to high temperature.
Don’t
Doing so may cause fire or malfunction
due to short circuits.
Do
Do not place on an unstable or inclined
platform.
Doing so may cause the battery pack to
leak, overheat, explode, or catch fire, or
the FOMA terminal and adapter (including
the charger) to overheat, smoke, catch
fire, or damage the circuit parts.
Doing so may cause the battery pack to
leak, overheat, explode, or catch fire, or
cause the device to malfunction or catch
fire.
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
CAUTION
WARNING
Doing so may cause malfunction.
If children use the FOMA ter minal,
parents or guardians should give them the
proper instructions for use. Make sure that
they use the FOMA terminal as instructed.
Failure to do so may cause injury.
Do
Keep the FOMA terminal, battery pack,
adapter, and UIM out of the reach of
babies and infants.
Failure to do so may cause accidental
swallowing or injury.
Do
Be careful especially when you use
the FOMA terminal while it has been
continuously connected to the adapter
(including the charger) for a long period of
time.
If you continue using i-αppli, talking on
the videophone, or watching One Seg
for a long period of time with the battery
being charged, the temperature of the
FOMA terminal, battery pack, and adapter
(including the charger) may rise.
If you are directly in contact with hot parts
for a long period of time, it may cause
your skin to become red, itch, or develop
a rash depending on your physical
condition and also it may cause lowtemperature burn.
If you notice anything unusual about
the FOMA terminal, battery pack, or
a d a p t e r s u c h a s a n u nu s u a l o d o r,
overheating, discoloration or deformation
during operation, charging or storage,
i m m e d i a t e l y p e r fo r m t h e fo l l ow i n g
measures.
1. Remove the power plug from the
power outlet or cigarette lighter
socket.
2. Power off the FOMA terminal.
3. Remove the battery pack from the
FOMA terminal.
Failure to do so may cause the device to
overheat, explode, or catch fire, or the
battery pack to leak.
Continued
13
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Handling the FOMA Terminal
WARNING
Don’t
Do
Failure to do so may affect electronic
equipment and electronic medical
equipment. If you set the automatic
power-on function, cancel it before
powering off the FOMA terminal.
Follow the instructions of each medical
facility for the use of mobile phones on
their premises.
Prohibited acts such as mobile phone
usage on board an airplane may be
punished by law.
Do not aim the infrared data por t
towards eyes when using the infrared
communication.
Doing so may affect your eyes. Also,
aiming it towards other infrared devices
may interfere with the operation of these
devices.
Don’t
Do not turn on the photo light with the
lighting luminescence part close to the
eyes.
Doing so may cause vision impairment or
accident by dazzling eyes or surprising.
Don’t
Do
Do not leave the FOMA terminal in a
place such as the dashboard near the
automobile air bag, which can have an
adverse effect on the phone when it
inflates.
Don’t
If the FOMA terminal is used close to
electronic medical equipment, it may
cause malfunction.
Don’t
Do not turn on the light toward a driver
such as of a car.
Don’t
14
If you have a weak heart, set the vibrator
or ring volume carefully.
Do
Do
Do not allow a foreign substance such as
water and other liquids, metal parts, or
flammables to get in the UIM or microSD
memory card insertion slot on the FOMA
terminal.
Doing so may cause fire, electric shock,
or malfunction.
Doing so may disturb driving and cause
an accident.
Always keep the FOMA terminal (mova)
away from your ear when you talk setting
the hands-free function. Also, when you
play game or play back music connecting
the Earphone/Microphone to the FOMA
terminal, adjust the volume adequately.
If the volume is too loud, it may cause
difficulty in hearing.
M o r e o v e r, i f y o u b a r e l y h e a r t h e
surrounding sounds, it may cause an
accident.
Doing so may cause accidents such as
an injury, malfunction, or breakage, in
case the air bag inflates.
Do not put the FOMA terminal in your
breast pocket or inside pocket if you are
wearing any electronic medical equipment.
Power off the FOMA terminal in a place
where the use is prohibited such as in
airplane or hospital.
Failure to do so may affect your heart.
If you hear thunder while using the FOMA
terminal outdoors, put the antenna back,
power off immediately, and take shelter in
a safe place.
Failure to do so may cause injury or
electric shock from the lightning.
Do
Power off the FOMA ter minal near
electronic devices or equipment operating
on high precision control or weak signals.
Failure to do so may inter fere with
the operation of electronic devices or
equipment.
※ The followings are some electronic devices or
equipment that you should be careful of:
Hearing aids, implantable cardiac pacemaker,
implantable cardioverter defibrillator, other
electronic medical equipment, fire detector,
automatic door, and other automatically
controlled devices or equipment.
If you use an implantable cardiac pacemaker,
implantable cardioverter defibrillator, or other
electronic medical equipment, check with
the relevant medical electronic equipment
manufacturer or vendor whether the operation
can be affected by radio waves.
Don’t
The display and the camera lens are
designed not to be shattered when
broken using the plastic panel. But
they may cause injury if you touch a cut
surface or exposed portion mistakenly.
CAUTION
Failure to do so may cause blindness or
injury on your skin.
Do not swing the FOMA terminal around
by holding the antenna or the strap.
Don’t
The FOMA terminal may hit you or others
and doing so may cause accident such
as injury or damage to the FOMA terminal
or other property.
Don’t
The antenna may hit others and cause
injury.
Do
Don’t
When a broken antenna contacts with the
skin, it may cause injury such as burns.
To use the Motion tracking functions,
make sure that your surroundings are safe
to play, grip the FOMA terminal firmly, and
do not shake it around unnecessarily.
Do
Where it is used
One Seg
Antenna pipe
One Seg
Antenna hinge
(top)
One Seg
Antenna hinge
(bottom)
Plus JOG
Do not hit a person or objects by the strap
while using the Motion tracking functions
when you attach the strap made of metal
to the FOMA terminal.
Doing so may cause accidents such as
malfunction or damage.
Don’t
Do not place a magnetic card, etc. near
the FOMA terminal or let it caught by the
folded FOMA terminal.
Do
Do
Don’t
Material
Stainless
steel
Stainless
steel
Surface treatment
Tin-cobalt alloy
plating finishing
Tin-cobalt alloy
plating finishing
Brass
Tin-cobalt alloy
plating finishing
Aluminum Anodized
base alloy aluminum finishing
Be careful not to get your finger or the
strap caught in the folded FOMA terminal
when you fold and open it.
Failure to do so may cause injury or
damage.
Magnetic data on bankcards, credit
cards, telephone cards, floppy disks, etc.
may be erased.
Do not place magnetized devices near the
FOMA terminal.
The use of the FOMA ter minal may
cause itching, rashes, eczema, or other
symptoms depending on the user’s
physical condition. Immediately stop using
and get medical treatment in such a case.
Metals are used as listed below:
Motion tracking is a function to operate
the FOMA terminal by titling or shaking.
If you shake it too much and it hits a
person or objects, it may cause a serious
accident or damage.
Don’t
In rare cases, using the FOMA terminal
may interfere with the operation of
electronic devices in some types of
vehicle.
If there is any interference, do not use the
FOMA terminal when driving for safety
reasons.
Do not use the FOMA terminal if the
antenna is broken.
Don’t
Do not bring your ear closer to the
speaker when the ring tone sounds or
melody is played back on the FOMA
terminal.
Doing so may cause difficulty in hearing.
Do not use the FOMA terminal in crowded
places.
Don’t
If the display is mistakenly damaged and
when the liquid crystal is broken, do not
drink, absorb, or get it on your skin.
If the liquid crystal gets on your eye or
mouth, rinse with clean running water,
and get medical treatment immediately.
Also, if it gets on your skin or clothes, use
something such as alcohol to wipe off and
wash it with soap in clear water.
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Do
Be careful about broken glasses or
exposed internal from the FOMA terminal
if the display or the camera lens is broken.
When you watch a One Seg program,
watch in a bright place taking a safe
distance from the display.
Failure to do so may damage your
eyesight.
The strong magnetism may interfere with
the operation.
Continued
15
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Be careful about your pet not to bite the
battery pack.
Handling the Battery Pack
■ Check the type of the battery by the label on the
battery pack.
Display
Li-ion
Do
Type of Battery
Lithium Ion Battery
CAUTION
DANGER
Don’t
Do not touch the battery pack terminal with
a metal object such as a wire. Also, do not
carry or keep the battery pack together
with metal objects such as a necklace.
Do not dispose of the batter y pack
together with other garbage.
Don’t
Doing so may cause the battery pack to
leak, overheat, explode, or catch fire.
Don’t
Failure to do so may cause the battery
pack to leak, overheat, explode, or catch
fire, or cause the device to malfunction or
catch fire.
Do not forcibly attach the battery pack
to the FOMA terminal. Also, make sure
to attach the battery pack in the correct
direction.
The battery pack may become the source
of fire or environmental destruction. Take
the used battery pack to our service
counter (DoCoMo shop, etc.) after
insulating it by affixing an adhesive
tape on the terminal of it or follow the
instructions of the local authorities in
charge of collecting used battery packs.
Do not charge the wet battery pack.
Doing so may cause the battery pack to
leak, overheat, explode, or catch fire.
Don’t
Doing so may cause the battery pack to
overheat, catch fire, or explode.
Do not throw the battery pack into fire.
Don’t
Doing so may cause the battery pack to
leak, overheat, explode, or catch fire.
Don’t
Do not stick a nail into the battery pack,
hit it with a hammer, or step on it.
Don’t
Do
Doing so may cause the battery pack to
overheat, catch fire, or explode.
Doing so may cause the battery pack to
leak, overheat, explode, or catch fire.
If the battery fluid gets into your eyes, do
not rub, rinse with clean running water,
and get medical treatment immediately.
Do
Stop charging if the FOMA terminal is not
charged within the specified charging time.
Do
Do
Handling the Adapter (including the
charger)
WARNING
Failure to do so may cause the battery pack
to leak, overheat, explode, or catch fire.
If the battery pack leaks or hears an
unusual odor, immediately stop using and
move it away from fire.
Don’t
Do
Failure to do so may cause the battery pack
to leak, overheat, explode, or catch fire, or
cause the device to malfunction or catch fire.
16
Do not use the adapter (including the
charger) if the cord of the adapter or the
power cord is damaged.
Doing so may cause electric shock,
overheating, or fire.
The leaking liquid may ignite fire, catch
fire, or explode.
If any abnormality caused by an external
shock, such as deformation or damages
by falling is found in the battery pack, stop
using the battery pack immediately.
If the battery fluid gets on your skin or
clothes, immediately stop using the
battery pack and rinse with clean running
water thoroughly.
Failure to do so may cause injury on your
skin.
Failure to do so may cause blindness.
WARNING
Do not store or leave the battery pack in a
place subject to high temperature such as
under direct strong sunlight or in a car on
an extremely hot day.
Don’t
Do not use the AC adapter or desktop
holder in a very humid or steamy place
such as bathroom.
Doing so may cause electric shock.
Clean dust from the power plug.
Failure to do so may cause fire.
Do
Doing so may cause fire.
Don’t
Don’t
Do not touch the FOMA terminal and
adapter (including the charger) if you hear
thunder.
Do
Failure to do so may cause electric
shock, short circuit, or fire.
Do not short-circuit the charge terminal
of the charger while the power plug is
connected to the power outlet or cigarette
lighter socket. Do not touch the charge
terminal with your hands, fingers, or any
part of your body.
Hold the power plug, not the cord of the
adapter (including the charger) or the
power cord, when you remove the adapter
(including the charger) from the power
outlet or cigarette lighter socket.
Do
Pulling the cord may damage it and
cause electric shock or fire.
Doing so may cause fire, malfunction,
electric shock, or injury.
Don’t
Unplug
Do not place any heavy objects on the
cord of the adapter (including the charger)
or the power cord.
Unplug
No wet
hands
Failure to do so may cause fire or
malfunction. Use the AC adapter
available overseas when you use the
phone overseas.
AC adapter: AC 100 V
DC adapter: DC 12 V/24 V
(exclusively used for vehicles with a
negative ground)
AC adapter available overseas:
AC 100 to 240 V
(Make sure to connect the adapter to a
household AC power outlet.)
If the fuse of the DC adapter is blown,
replace it with the specified fuse.
Do
Unplug
Before cleaning, remove the power plug
from the power outlet or cigarette lighter
socket.
Failure to do so may cause electric
shock.
Doing so may cause electric shock.
Use the adapter only on the specified
power supply and voltage.
Do
If liquid such as water gets into the
adapter, immediately remove it from the
power outlet or cigarette lighter socket.
Failure to do so may cause electric
shock, smoking, or fire.
Doing so may cause electric shock or
fire.
Do not touch the cord of the adapter
(including the charger) or the power outlet
with wet hands.
Remove the power plug from the power
outlet when not used for a long period of
time.
Failure to do so may cause electric
shock, fire, or malfunction.
The FOMA terminal may fall off the charger
or heat up and cause fire or malfunction.
Don’t
When you connect the AC adapter to the
power outlet, make sure that it does not
come in contact with a metal object such
as a metal strap and insert it firmly.
Doing so may cause injury or electric
shock from the lightning.
Place the charger or the desktop holder
on a stable platform while charging. Do
not cover or wrap the charger or the
desktop holder with a cloth or bedding.
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Don’t
The DC adapter is for use in vehicles
with a negative ground. Do not use it in
vehicles with a positive ground.
Handling the UIM
CAUTION
Do
Please be careful not to touch a cut
surface, etc. when you remove the UIM (IC
portion).
Failure to do so may damage your hand
or fingers.
Handling the FOMA Terminal Near
Electronic Medical Equipment
■ The following instructions observe the guidelines of
the Electromagnetic Compatibility Conference, Japan
to protect electronic medical equipment from radio
waves from mobile phones.
The use of a fuse other than specified
one may cause fire or malfunction. See
the user’s manual supplied with the
adapter for the specified fuse.
Continued
17
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
WARNING
Please observe the following guidelines in
medical facilities.
Do
Do
ˎ Do not take the FOMA terminal into the
operating rooms, ICU (Intensive Care
Unit), or CCU (Coronary Care Unit).
ˎ Power off the FOMA terminal inside
hospital wards.
ˎ Power off the FOMA terminal in the
lobby and other places if there are
any electronic medical equipment
operating in the vicinity.
ˎ Follow the instructions of each
medical facility when they specify
areas forbidding to use and carrying a
mobile phone.
ˎ If you set the automatic power-on
function, cancel it before powering off
the FOMA terminal.
Power off the FOMA terminal in crowded
places such as rush-hour trains. There
may be a person with an implantable
c a r d i a c p a c e m a ke r o r i m p l a n t a bl e
cardioverter defibrillator near you.
The radio waves from the FOMA terminal
may affect the operation of implantable
cardiac pacemaker or implantable
cardioverter defibrillator.
Do
I f yo u u s e a n i m p l a n t a bl e c a r d i a c
pacemaker or implantable cardioverter
defibrillator, keep the FOMA terminal
more than 22 cm away from the implant at
all times.
The radio waves from the FOMA terminal
may affect the operation of implantable
cardiac pacemaker or implantable
cardioverter defibrillator.
Do
If you need to use electronic medical
equipment other than implantable cardiac
pacemaker or implantable cardioverter
defibrillator outside medical facilities
such as treating at home, check with the
relevant medical electronic equipment
manufacturer or vendor whether the
operation may be affected by radio waves.
The radio waves from the FOMA terminal
may affect the operation of electronic
medical equipment.
Handling Precautions
◆ Common Precautions
● Do not expose to water.
ˎ The FOMA terminal, battery pack, adapter (including the
charger), and UIM are not waterproof. Do not use them
in a humid place such as bathroom or in the rain. If you
carry the FOMA terminal on your body, perspiration may
corrode the internal parts of the FOMA terminal and cause
malfunction. Note that if a trouble is diagnosed as exposure
to water or other liquid, repairs of the FOMA terminal may
not be covered by the Warranty or it may not be possible to
repair such phones. In that case, even if the FOMA terminal
can be repaired, it is repaired at the owner’s expense.
● Clean the FOMA terminal with a dry soft cloth (such
as used for cleaning eyeglasses).
ˎ The color liquid crystal display of the FOMA terminal
has a special coating on it for better visibility. Do not
use unnecessary force to wipe the display when you are
cleaning it with a dry cloth. The display and its coating may
be damaged. Handle the display with care and use a dry
soft cloth (such as used for cleaning eyeglasses) to clean
it. If the display is left with water drops or stains, stains may
become permanent or the display coating may be peeled
off.
ˎ Do not use alcohol, thinner, benzene, cleaning detergent,
etc. to clean the FOMA terminal. These chemicals
may erase the printing on the FOMA terminal or cause
discoloration.
● Clean the terminals occasionally with a dry cotton
swab.
ˎ Soiled terminals may cause poor connection and loss of
power. If the terminals are dirty, use a dry cloth or cotton
swab to wipe them clean.
● Do not leave the FOMA ter minal near the air
conditioning vent.
ˎ Extreme temperature changes may produce condensation
and corrode the internal parts of the FOMA terminal,
causing it to malfunction.
● Make sure to use the FOMA terminal or battery pack
without excessive force.
ˎ If you put the FOMA terminal in a bag full of items or sit
down with the FOMA terminal in the pocket of your clothe,
it may damage the display, internal circuit board, and the
battery pack and cause the FOMA terminal to malfunction.
Also, while the external device is connected to the External
connection terminal or Earphone/Microphone jack, it may
damage the connector and cause malfunction.
● Make sure to see the user’s manuals supplied with
the FOMA terminal, battery pack, adapter (including
the charger), and desktop holder.
● Do not rob or scratch the display with metal.
ˎ The display may get scratched and it may cause
malfunction or damage.
◆ FOMA Terminal Precautions
● Do not use the FOMA terminal in extremely hot or
cold places.
Use the FOMA terminal within a temperature range
of 5°C to 35°C and a humidity range of 45% to 85%.
18
● Note down the information saved in the FOMA
terminal in a separate note and keep it safely.
ˎ Under no condition will DoCoMo be held liable for any
damaged or lost data saved in the FOMA terminal.
● Do not plug the connector of the external device
into the External connection terminal or Earphone/
Microphone jack at the slant and pull it while
connecting.
ˎ Doing so may cause malfunction or damage to the FOMA
terminal.
● Do not fold the FOMA terminal with an object
including the strap left inside.
ˎ Doing so may cause malfunction or damage to the FOMA
terminal.
● The FOMA terminal could become warm while in use
and charging. This condition is not abnormal and you
can continue using the FOMA terminal.
● Do not leave the camera under direct sunlight.
ˎ If you do so, some of the phone parts may melt or become
faded.
● Use the FOMA terminal with the covers of the
Earphone/Microphone jack, External connection
terminal, and microSD memory card slot closed.
ˎ Failure to do so may get dust or water inside and cause
malfunction.
● Do not use the FOMA terminal without the back
cover.
ˎ Doing so may cause the battery pack fall, malfunction, and
damage.
● Do not stick extremely thick sticker on the display or
keypad.
ˎ Doing so may cause malfunction.
● Do not rotate the display with the FOMA terminal
folded.
ˎ Doing so may get the display or keypad scratched or
cause malfunction or damage.
● Do not remove the microSD memory card or power
off the FOMA terminal while using the microSD
memory card.
ˎ Doing so may cause data loss or malfunction.
● If you conduct any criminal behavior using the FOMA
terminal that is a nuisance to the public, you may be
subjected to punishment by authorities in accordance
with related laws or ordinances (nuisance prevention
act, etc.).
Please be considerate of the privacy of individuals around
you when taking and sending photos using camera-equipped
mobile phones.
◆ Battery Pack Precautions
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
● Using the FOMA terminal near ordinary phone,
television or radio may cause interference in these
electric appliances. Make sure to move far away from
them when using the FOMA terminal.
● The battery pack is a consumable accessory.
ˎ Even if the operating time of the FOMA terminal varies
depending on the operating conditions and other factors,
when the length of time you can use the FOMA terminal
with a fully charged battery becomes unusually short, it
is time to replace the battery pack. Purchase the battery
pack specified in this manual.
● Charge the battery pack in an environment with the
proper ambient temperature (5°C to 35°C).
● Make sure to charge the battery pack before you
use the FOMA terminal for the first time or when you
have not been using it for a long period of time.
● The operating time of the battery pack varies
depending on the operating environment and the
secular degradation of the battery pack.
● Depending on the use condition, the battery pack
may be inflated as it comes to the end of its life. This
is not a malfunction.
● Do not store or leave the battery pack with the
condition of which the battery level is 0.
ˎ Doing so may decrement the performance or shorten the
life of the battery pack.
◆ Adapter (including the charger) Precautions
● Charge the battery pack in an environment with the
proper ambient temperature (5°C to 35°C).
● Do not charge in the following places.
ˎ Places that are very humid, dusty or exposed to strong
vibrations.
ˎ Near ordinary phone, TV or radio.
● The adapter (including the charger) could become
warm while charging. This condition is not abnormal
and you can continue charging the battery.
● When you charge the battery pack using the DC
adapter, keep the car engine running.
ˎ Charging the battery with the engine turned off may drain
your car battery.
● When you use the power outlet with a mechanism
to prevent the plug from being removed, follow the
instructions on the outlet’s user’s manual.
● Do not give a strong impact to the adapter. Also, do
not bend or deform the charging pins or pin guide on
the adapter.
ˎ If you do so, the adapter may not work properly.
◆ UIM Precautions
● Do not use unnecessary force to insert/remove the
UIM.
● The UIM could become warm while it is in use. This
condition is not abnormal and you can continue using
the card.
Continued
19
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
● Do not insert and use the UIM with another IC card
reader/writer. Please note that you are wholly liable
for any damage or malfunction as a result of such
action.
● Always keep the IC portion clean when you use the
card.
● Use a dry soft cloth (such as used for cleaning
eyeglasses) for cleaning and maintenance of the
UIM.
● Note down the information saved in the UIM in a
separate note and keep it safely.
ˎ Under no condition will DoCoMo be held liable for any
damaged or lost data saved in the UIM.
● Take an expended UIM to our service counter
(DoCoMo shop, etc.) for proper disposal in order to
protect the environment.
● Do not use the UIM in extremely high or low
temperature.
● Do not carelessly damage, contact, or short circuit
an IC.
ˎ Doing so may cause data loss or malfunction.
● Do not drop a UIM or subject it to impact.
ˎ Doing so may cause malfunction.
● Do not bend a UIM or place a heavy object on it.
ˎ Doing so may cause malfunction.
● Do not insert the UIM on which any label or seal is
stuck into the FOMA terminal.
ˎ Doing so may cause malfunction.
◆ FeliCa Reader/Writer
● The FeliCa reader/writer function of the FOMA
terminal uses extremely weak radio waves, so that
no license is required for use as a radio station.
● The FeliCa reader/writer function of the FOMA
terminal uses frequencies in the 13.56MHz
range. If there is another reader/writer used in
the neighborhood, keep enough distance from it.
Attention should be also paid to assure that no other
radio station which uses the same frequency range
exists near the FOMA terminal.
◆ Caution
● Never use the modified FOMA terminal. Using the
modified equipment is against the Radio Law.
The FOMA terminal satisfies certificates such as the
technology standard agreement of the specific wireless
equipment based on the Radio Law. The model sticker of the
FOMA terminal shows “技適マーク ” as the proof of it.
If you modify the inside of the FOMA terminal by taking
screws off, the certificates such as the technology standard
agreement, are counted as invalid.
Using the FOMA terminal, while the certificates such as the
technology standard agreement are invalid, is against the
Radio Law, so that never use it under those conditions.
20
● Be careful using the FOMA terminal while driving a
vehicle.
ˎ Holding the mobile phone with a hand while driving
applies the penal regulations.
When you are compelled to receive a call, tell “Call you
back” to the caller using the hands-free funcion and park
the vehicle in a safe place to place a call.
● Use the FeliCa reader/writer function only in Japan.
ˎ The FeliCa reader/writer function of the FOMA terminal
is designed to conform to the Japanese radio standard.
Overseas use of this function may be subject to
punishment.
● Use the IC card authentication function only in Japan.
ˎ The IC card authentication function of the FOMA
terminal is designed to conform to the Japanese radio
standard. Overseas use of this function may be subject to
punishment.
Intellectual Property Right
◆ Copyright and Right of Portrait
Copyrighted contents you recorded or obtained from
sites or Internet home pages using this product by
downloading or other means, such as documents,
images, music data, software, are prohibited from
reproduction, transformation and transmission over
public lines without consent of the copyright holders,
unless intended for personal use or any other purpose
permitted by law.
Note that some performances, shows, and exhibitions
may not allow photography, movie shooting, or sound
recording even for personal use.
You should also refrain from taking a picture of other
people and disclosing it by such means as posting it
on a site on the Internet without their consent because
of possible infringement of their right of portrait.
◆ Trademarks
ˎ “FOMA”, “mova”, “i-mode”, “i-Channel”, “PushTalk”,
“PushTalkPlus”, “ToruCa”, “i-αppli”, “i-αppliDX”, “i-motion”,
“i-area”, “Deco-mail”, “Chara-den”, “Short Mail”, “mopera U”,
“mopera”, “DoPa”, “WORLD CALL”, “WORLD WING”,
“Chaku-motion”, “FirstPass”, “Dual Network”, “DCMX”, “iD”,
“Public mode”, “Security Scan”, “2in1”, “sigmarion”, “musea”,
“V-live”, “visualnet”, “IMCS”, “OFFICEED”, “Chokkan Game”,
“FOMA” logo, “i-mode” logo, “i-αppli” logo, “DCMX” logo,
“iD” logo, “WORLD WING” logo, and “HIGH SPEED” logo are
trademarks or registered trademarks of NTT DoCoMo.
ˎ “Catch Phone (Call waiting service)” is a registered trademark
of Nippon Telegraph and Telephone Corporation.
ˎ Free Dial logo mark is a registered trademark of NTT
Communications Corporation.
®
ˎ McAfee is a registered trademark or trademark of McAfee,
Inc. and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and/or other countries.
ˎ G-GUIDE, G-GUIDE MOBILE, and their
logos are registered trademarks in Japan of
U.S. Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc.
and/or its affiliates.
ˎ “Multitask” is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation.
®
®
ˎ Microsoft , Windows , and Windows Vista™ are trademarks
or registered trademarks of the U.S. Microsoft Corporation in
the U.S. and other countries.
®
ˎ Windows Media is either a registered trademark or trademark
of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
ˎ Napster is a registered trademark of Napster, LLC. and/or its
affiliates in the US and/or other countries.
®
ˎ Mascot Capsule is a trademark of the HI Corporation.
ˎ “PostPet” is a registered trademark of So-net Entertainment
Corporation.
ˎ “BRAVIA” is a registered trademark of Sony Corporation.
ˎ POBox is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
ˎ Virtual Phone Technology (VPT) is a registered trademark of
Sony Corporation.
ˎ “ATRAC”, “SonicStage”, and “SonicStage” logo are registered
trademarks or trademarks of Sony Corporation.
ˎ “ATRAC AD” and
ˎ
ˎ
ˎ
ˎ
ˎ
ˎ
ˎ
ˎ
are trademarks
of Sony Corporation.
“ + J O G ” , “ S t a n d - b y b o o k s ” , a n d “ R e a l i t y M A X ” a re
trademarks or registered trademarks of Sony Ericsson Mobile
Communications Japan, Inc.
“BestPic” is a registered trademark of Sony Ericsson Mobile
Communications AB.
“mora” is a trademark of Label Gate Co.,Ltd.
Java and Java-related trademarks are trademarks or
registered trademarks of the U.S. Sun Microsystems, Inc. in
the U.S. and other countries.
ImageStar is a registered trademark of Ainix Corporation.
QR code is a registered trademark of Denso Wave Inc.
IrSimple™, IrSS™, and IrSimpleShot™ are trademarks of
Infrared Data Association®.
Other system names and/or product names mentioned in this
manual are generally trademarks or registered trademarks
of their respective owners. The trademark symbol ™ and
registered trademark symbol ® are omitted hereafter in this
manual.
ˎ GestureTek technology is installed in this product.
Copyright © 2007, Gesture Tek, Inc. All rights reserved.
ˎ Content owners use Windows Media digital rights
management technology (WMDRM) to protect their intellectual
property, including copyrights. This device uses WMDRM
software to access WMDRM-protected content.
If the WMDRM software fails to protect the content, content
owners may ask Microsoft to revoke the software’s ability to
use WMDRM to play or copy protected content.
Revocation does not affect unprotected content. When you
download licenses for protected content, you agree that
Microsoft may include a revocation list with the licenses.
Content owners may require you to upgrade WMDRM to
access their content. If you decline an upgrade, you will not
be able to access content that requires the upgrade.
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
ˎ QuickTime is a registered trademark of Apple Inc., in the U.S.
and other countries.
ˎ Powered by JBlend™ Copyright 2002-2006 Aplix
Corporation. All rights reserved.
JBlend and JBlend-related trademarks are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Aplix
Corporation in Japan and other countries.
ˎ “ ” is a registered trademark of FeliCa Networks, Inc.
ˎ microSD logo is a trademark.
ˎ T h i s p ro d u c t c o n t a i n s N e t F ro n t
Browser and NetFront Sync Client of
ACCESS CO., LTD.
ACCESS and NetFront are trademarks
or registered trademarks of ACCESS
C O . , LT D . i n J a p a n a n d o t h e r
countries.
Copyright © 2007 ACCESS CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
ˎ This product incorporates a program module developed by
Independent JPEG Group.
ˎ FeliCa is a contactless IC card technology developed by
Sony Corporation. FeliCa is a registered trademark of Sony
Corporation.
®
ˎ Powered by Mascot Capsule
ˎ Built with Linter Database.
Copyright © 2006-2007 Brycen Corp., Ltd.
Copyright © 1990-2003 Relex, Inc., All rights reserved.
ˎ POBox technology has been developed by Sony Computer
Science Laboratories, Inc.
ˎ This product is under the licensing agreement of the MPEG-4
Visual Patent Portfolio License, and is approved for private
and non-profit uses, such as those indicated below.
- For recording MPEG-4 Visual standards-compliant movie
(hereinafter referred to as MPEG-4 Movie).
- For playing back MPEG-4 Movie recorded by a consumer
who uses the product for private and non-profit activities.
- For playing back MPEG-4 Movie recorded by a provider
who owns an MPEG-4 license.
To use this product for other applications, such as promotional
activities, company use, or profit-making endeavor, contact
U.S. MPEG LA, LLC.
ˎ This product includes software licensed
from Symbian Software Ltd.
Symbian, Symbian OS, and all Symbian-related trademarks
and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Symbian Software Ltd.
© 1998-2007 Symbian Software Ltd. All rights reserved.
◆ Others
◆ Windows Title Conventions
®
ˎ This product contains Flash Lite™ and
Adobe® Reader® technology by Adobe
Systems Incorporated.
Flash Lite copyright © 1995-2007
Adobe Macromedia Software LLC. All
rights reserved.
Adobe Reader copyright © 1984-2007 Adobe Systems
Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Adobe, Flash, Flash Lite, and Reader are registered
trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in
the United States and/or other countries.
®
®
ˎ Windows 2000 is an abbreviation of the Microsoft Windows
2000 Professional operating system.
®
®
ˎ Windows XP is an abbreviation of the Microsoft Windows
XP Professional operating system or Microsoft® Windows® XP
Home Edition operating system.
ˎ Windows Vista is an abbreviation of the Windows Vista™
(Home Basic, Home Premium, Business, Enterprise, Ultimate).
21
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Supplied and Optional Accessories
■ Supplied accessories
FOMA SO905i
(w/warranty and back cover SO08)
Manual for FOMA SO905i
(this manual)
(w/Quick Manual P.426)
FOMA SO905i CD-ROM
(“Manual for PC connection setting”
(PDF format) and “Kuten Code
List” (PDF format) are included)
■ Optional accessories
FOMA AC Adapter 01/02
Desktop Holder SO07
Battery Pack SO02
(w/warranty and user’s manual)
(w/user’s manual)
(w/user’s manual)
Liion
ˎ Other optional accessories (P.389)
22
Before Using the Handset
Part Names and Functions ................................................................................................... 24
About the Style ..................................................................................................................... 27
Using the Displays ............................................................................................................... 30
About the Sub-display .......................................................................................................... 33
Selecting the Menu .............................................................................................................. 34
Using the UIM ...................................................................................................................... 36
Attaching and Removing the Battery Pack ........................................................................... 38
Charging the FOMA Terminal ............................................................................................... 39
Checking the Battery Level .............................................................................  41
Powering On/Off ..............................................................................................  42
Setting the Basic Functions ............................................................................. 42
Setting the Date and Time ................................................................................... 43
Notifying the Recipient of Your Phone Number ............................................ 44
Checking Your Own Phone Number ...............................................................  44
23
Part Names and Functions
Before Using the Handset
ͺ
ͦ
ͻ
ͼ
ͽ
ͱ
Ͳ
;
ͧ
ͨ
΄
ͩ
ͩ
ͳ
ͪ
ʹ
ͫ
͵
ͬ
Ͷ
ͷ
Ϳ
΀
΅
΁΂
Ά
΃
·
Έ
Ή
Ί
΋
Ό
΍
ͭ
ͮ
ͯ
ͩ
͸
͹
Ϳ
Ͱ
Connecting the Flat-plug Earphone/
Microphone with Switch (optional)
ͦ Earpiece
The caller’s voice is heard from here.
ͧ Main Display (P.30)
ͨ Brightness Sensor
Adjust the main display light brightness and set ON/OFF of the
keypad light automatically based on the Brightness Sensor to
adapt for the surrounding brightness (P.113).
ͩ 3 Units Front Speaker
ͫ
Sounds including the ring tone are heard from here (P.27).
Press to display the menu (P.34, 317).
ͪ
ͬ
Mail Key
In the stand-by display, press to display the Mail menu (P.178)
and press for over a second to perform the Check new message
(P.186, 199).
Press to select an item in the guide display (P.33).
24
MENU Key
Call/Hands-free Switch Key
Press to place a voice call or start talking on the phone of a
voice, videophone, or PushTalk call.
Press during a call to switch ON/OFF of the hands-free function
(P.51).
ͭ Keypad
ͽ Music Touch Key
Enter phone numbers or text (P.382).
for over a second to display
In the stand-by display, press
the Reset display (P.334).
In the stand-by display, press
for over a second and enter
the Security code to display the 2in1 setting display (P.352).
In the stand-by display, press
for over a second to check
your current location (P.228).
Operates the MUSIC Player or Music&Video Channel while the
FOMA terminal is folded (P.26).
ͮ
΀ FeliCa Mark
ͯ
Manner/
Key
In the stand-by display, press to display the Manner mode
display (P.109) and press for over a second to set/cancel the
Manner mode (P.108).
Press to scroll a page to the previous display.
Ͱ Microphone
Picks up the sound of your voice. Do not cover it with your hand.
ͱ In-Camera
Use to record a still image or movie (P.142, 146) or send the
image at your side during a videophone call (P.48).
Ͳ Viewing Touch Key
Operates One Seg, Camera, or Full Browser when the FOMA
terminal is in the TV style (P.148, 245, 253, 259).
ͳ Plus JOG (P.26)
ʹ
i-mode/i-αppli Key
In the stand-by display, press to display the i-mode menu (P.160)
and press for over a second to display the i-αppli folder list
display (P.208).
Press to select an item in the guide display (P.33).
͵
i-Channel Key
Press to place or receive a videophone call (P.49, 63).
In the stand-by display, press to display the Channel list display
(P.174) and press for over a second to activate the Camera
mode (P.138).
Press to select an item in the guide display (P.33).
Ͷ
Clear Key
Press to cancel the current operation.
In the i-αppli stand-by display, press to operate the software
(P.214).
In the stand-by display, press for over a second to turn off the
notification icon (P.32).
ͷ
Power/End/Hold Key
Press to power on/off the FOMA terminal (P.42).
Press to hang up or end the multitask functions.
Press while receiving a voice or videophone call to put a call on
hold (P.66).
͸
#/Public Mode (Drive Mode) Key
In the stand-by display, press for over a second to set/cancel
the Public mode (Drive mode) (P.66).
͹
Memo/
Key
In the stand-by display, press to display the Record msg display
(P.70) and press for over a second to set/cancel the Record
message (P.69).
Press to scroll a page to the next display.
ͺ Charge Indicator/FeliCa Sign
Lights in red while charging the battery (P.40).
Lights in green during iC communication or when the FOMA
terminal comes within the communication range with the reading
device (P.221, 299).
ͻ Sub-display (P.33)
ͼ Incoming Indicator
Flashes when receiving a call/mail. It flashes when there is a
missed call or new mail/unread message (P.118).
Flashes while obtaining the location information using the GPS
function (P.228).
Before Using the Handset
/IC Card Lock Key
In the stand-by display, press for over a second to lock the IC
card function or cancel the lock. To cancel the lock, enter the
Security code (P.226).
; Back Cover (P.38)
Ϳ 2 Step 1Seg Stand
Places the FOMA terminal in the horizontal orientation and
allows you to watch One Seg in the TV style (P.29).
Indication for a built-in IC card.
Hold this mark to the reading device to use the Osaifu-Keitai.
You can send and receive data by placing the FeliCa mark of
the FOMA terminal over that of another FOMA terminal provided
with the iC communication function. You cannot remove the IC
card (P.221, 299).
΁ Out-Camera
Use to record a still image or movie (P.142, 146) or send the
surrounding image during a videophone call (P.48).
΂ Photo Light/Auto Timer Indicator
Turn this light on when recording (P.148).
Lights (low light) during the Camera mode. Flashes (low light)
while recording or activating the Auto timer (P.138, 148).
΃ FOMA Antenna
The antenna is incorporated in the main body. To talk on the
phone with better condition, do not cover the antenna with your
hands.
΄ Earphone/Microphone Jack
Connect the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch
(optional), etc. Other traditional Earphone/Microphone with
Switch (optional) is also available by connecting it through the
Earphone Plug Adapter (optional) (P.332). Do not pull the cover
forcibly.
΅ External Connection Terminal
Connect the AC adapter (optional), FOMA USB Cable with
Charge Function 01 (optional), etc. (P.40, 285). Do not pull the
cover forcibly.
Ά
Shutter Key
In the stand-by display, press for over a second to activate the
Camera mode (P.138).
Press to record using the camera (P.142, 146).
Press halfway down to perform the Auto focus when you are
recording a still image (P.142).
·
TV Key
In the stand-by display, press for over a second to activate One
Seg (P.245).
Έ
MUSIC/HOLD Key
Displays the sub-display or lock/cancel the Music Touch Key
while the FOMA terminal is folded (P.130).
Press for over a second to activate the MUSIC Player when the
sub-display appears while the FOMA terminal is folded (P.311).
Ή Strap Attachment
Attach the strap here.
Ί
PushTalk Key
Press to originate or start talking on the phone of a PushTalk call
with the FOMA terminal opened (P.80, 82).
In the stand-by display when using the Normal style, press to
display the PushTalk phonebook (P.82).
Press while the FOMA terminal is folded to switch the display on
the sub-display (P.33).
΋ microSD Memory Card Slot
Insert a microSD memory card here (P.279). Do not pull the
cover forcibly.
Ό Infrared Data Port
When you perform infrared communication (P.295) or use the
FOMA terminal as a remote control (P.298), point this port to the
target device or equipment.
΍ One Seg Antenna
Use when using the One Seg function (P.241).
Charge Terminal Pins (P.40)
Continued
25
+JOG (Plus JOG)
Before Using the Handset
Operation
Symbols in
this manual
Up arrow
key
Down
arrow key
Left arrow
key
Right arrow
key
Left
Up
arrow key arrow key
Right
arrow key
JOG
Down arrow JOG
key
Description
Move the cursor upward. Press for over a second to
move the cursor continuously.
Press in the stand-by display to display the Data Box.
Move the cursor downward. Press for over a second to
move the cursor continuously.
Press in the stand-by display to display the Phonebook.
Move the cursor to the left. Press for over a
second to move the cursor continuously.
Or, press to return to the previous display.
Press in the stand-by display to display the
Received record.
Move the cursor to the right. Press for over a
second to move the cursor continuously.
Or, press to go to the next display.
Press in the stand-by display to display the
Redial record.
Set a selected item.
When you scroll it upward and downward, the
cursor moves upward and downward. If you
keep scrolling it, the cursor keeps moving.
In the stand-by display, when you scroll it
upward, the Data Box appears, and when you
scroll it downward, the Phonebook appears.
You can set the action of it in the matching
words list while entering words (P.340).
● You can set the scrolling amount of the JOG and functions to be activated when the JOG is scrolled in the
stand-by display, and also preset the JOG to be disabled (P.333).
About Touch Key
You can operate the FOMA terminal by patting the lighted Touch Key while the FOMA
terminal is folded or in the TV style.
The Touch Key is on the two places: back and main display.
■ Music Touch Key
■ Viewing Touch Key
Music Touch Key
Viewing Touch Key
ˎ The functions operated by the Music Touch Key
while the FOMA terminal is folded are as follows.
- Quit the MUSIC Player and operate it while
playing back (P.311)
- Operate while playing back Music&Video
Channel (P.306)
ˎ You can lock the Music Touch Key (P.130).
26
ˎ The functions operated by the Viewing Touch Key
are as follows.
- Adjust volume or change channels while
watching One Seg (P.245)
- Change zoom, turn on/off the Photo light,
and switch the Auto focus setting during the
Camera mode (P.148, 150, 155)
- Scroll during Full Browser (P.259)
■ Usage precautions
Before Using the Handset
ˎ To prevent from causing malfunction, do not stick any seals on the Touch Key.
ˎ The Touch Key only works when you pat it with your bare fingers. Use it after removing anything such as
gloves from your fingers.
ˎ Patting the Touch Key with wet or sweat fingers may cause malfunction. Wipe any moisture away from your fingers.
ˎ If you keep patting the Touch Key, it may cause malfunction. Release your finger and then retry the operation.
ˎ Please note that electrostatic action may cause malfunction.
ˎ To prevent from interfering with the operation, use the FOMA terminal as follows when you put it in a bag, etc.
- Music Touch Key : Lock it.
- Viewing Touch Key : Switch to the Normal style while using One Seg or activating the Camera or Full Browser.
ˎ Do not place the metal devices near while using the Touch Key. It may interfere with the operation.
● When you pat the Touch Key, it vibrates. You can disable the setting (P.334).
● While activating the functions that can be operated by the Touch Key, such as the MUSIC Player,
Music&Video Channel, or One Seg, the Touch Key lights. When the functions that cannot be operated by
the Touch Key are activated, it does not light.
About the Style
You can use the FOMA terminal in the Normal style and TV style in which the terminal is
placed horizontally.
■ Normal style
■ TV style
Speaker
Speaker
ˎ You hear sounds from speakers of the both side
in the Normal style.
When you watch One Seg in the TV style,
using the 2 Step 1Seg Stand allows you to
place the FOMA terminal on the flat surface in
the horizontal orientation and watch One Seg
with full-wide horizontal screen display.
ˎ In the TV style, you hear sounds from two
speakers placed in the upper side.
ˎ The available functions when the TV style is used
are as follows.
- Watch/record a One Seg program (P.243, 252)
- Shoot by photo (P.142)
- Movie shoot (P.146)
- Full Browser (P.259)
ˎ When the TV style is used, you can only use the
and
keys and Touch Key
, / .
ˎ When you answer a phone call while watching
One Seg with antenna extended, be very careful
with the point of the antenna not to harm people
around you or get into your eyes.
● You can set functions to be activated when switching to the TV style in the stand-by display (P.328).
Continued
27
■ Switching to TV style
Hold the FOMA terminal and
open the display straight.
Rotate the display 180 degrees
clockwise.
Fold the FOMA terminal.
Before Using the Handset
Cautions when rotating the display
ˎ When you rotate the display, be careful not to touch the corner of the display to the keys or body. Moreover,
you cannot rotate the display counterclockwise or over 180 degrees. Forcing to rotate the display may cause
damage or malfunction.
28
How to Use the 2 Step 1Seg Stand
Before Using the Handset
You can enjoy One Seg with two angles by placing the FOMA terminal horizontally in the
TV style.
■ How to place the 2 Step 1Seg Stand
Catch the dint portion with your finger and lift it
forward.
Lift it until it stops.
ˎ There are two stopping positions.
Dint portion
■ How to place the 2 Step 1Seg Stand back
Press the 2 Step 1Seg Stand toward the FOMA
terminal.
Push it until it clicks into place.
■ When the 2 Step 1Seg Stand comes off
Insert the other side of the raised portion of the back of the 2 Step 1Seg Stand while aligning it with the dent
portion of the FOMA terminal.
Push the raised portion of the back of the 2 Step 1Seg Stand until it clicks into the FOMA terminal.
Raised portion
Dint portion
■ Usage precaution
ˎ When you place/place back the 2 Step 1Seg Stand, do not force to do so. It may cause accident such as
injury or malfunction.
29
Using the Displays
Before Using the Handset
ˎ For details on the icons in the Camera mode or while watching One Seg, see P.141 or P.243 respectively.
ˎ The position of the clock in the main display can be changed (P.111).
Main display
Sub-display
ͦ∼ͨͪ ͬ ͷ,͸ ͺ Ͳ ͳ
ͦ∼ʹ
͵∼;
Clock (P.43)
Clock (P.43, 111)
Ｍｉｓｓｅｄ ｃａｌｌ
→
Ｍａｉｌ
ＭＥＮＵ
ͦ
１
最高１５℃
Ｌｉｎｋ
１０
ｉ−ｍｏｄｅ
ｉ．ｃｈ
Notification display (P.32)
i-Channel Telop text (P.175)
Guide display (P.33)
/ / / Radio wave condition
(Strong ‡ Weak)
During i-mode (P.161)
ͧ
During i-mode communication
During packet communication
While sending/receiving packet communication
data
Full Browser activating
During Full Browser (P.258)
During Full Browser communication
Full Browser activating (PC mode)
During Full Browser (PC mode)
During Full Browser communication (PC
mode)
(During Full Browser communication, the icon
becomes animation.)
Outside of the service area
ͨ
Self mode is set (P.128)
A card other than the UIM is inserted
While using the infrared communication
function (P.297)/During iC communication
(P.299)
While the infrared remote control is being
used (P.298)
While an SSL site is displayed (P.161)/While
ͩ
i-αppli software downloaded from an SSL
site is running (P.208)/While the software
update is using SSL communication (P.404)
30
ͪ
ͫ
Unread i-mode mail (P.185)/Unread SMS
(P.203)/Unread i-mode mail and unread SMS
The FOMA terminal is full of received i-mode
mail and SMS/The UIM is full of SMS/The
FOMA terminal is full of received i-mode mail
and SMS and the UIM is full of SMS
Mail at the i-mode center/The i-mode center
is full
Unread Area Mail (P.201)
Unread Message R/F (P.198)/The FOMA
terminal is full of Message R/F.
Message R/F at the i-mode center/The
i-mode center is full
Unread Message R (P.198), the FOMA
t e r m i n a l i s f u l l o f M e s s a g e F / U n re a d
Message R, Message F at the i-mode center
Unread Message R (P.198), the i-mode center
is full of Message F/The FOMA terminal is
full of Message R, the i-mode center is full of
Message F
Unread Message F (P.198), the FOMA
t e r m i n a l i s f u l l o f M e s s a g e R / U n re a d
Message F, Message R at the i-mode center
Unread Message F (P.198), the i-mode center
is full of Message R/The FOMA terminal is
full of Message R, Message F at the i-mode
center
/
ͭ
ͮ
ͯ
Ͱ
ͱ
Ͳ
ͳ
ʹ
Current time (Displayed in 24-hour format in
other than the stand-by display)
ˎ When the Clock is set to [Pict clock], the clock
is displayed in the stand-by display (P.111).
The vibrator is set for incoming calls (P.103)
The vibrator is set for incoming mail (P.103)
The vibrator is set for incoming calls and mail
(P.103)
Incoming call ring volume is OFF (P.103)
Incoming mail ring volume is OFF (P.103)
Incoming call and mail ring volumes are OFF
(P.103)
Manner mode is set ( is pink) (P.108)
Silent mode is set (P.108)
Original manner mode is set ( is blue) (P.108)
Public mode (Drive mode) is set (P.66)
Personal data lock is set (P.129)
Key dial lock is set (P.130)
Personal data lock and Key dial lock are set
(P.129, 130)
IC card lock is set (P.226)
During Music&Video Channel reservation
(P.305)
Alarm is set (P.320)
Schedule alarm is set (P.323)
Alarm and Schedule alarm are set (P.320, 323)
͵
Ͷ
ͷ
͸
͹
ͺ
ͻ
ͼ
ͽ
Before Using the Handset
ͬ
Message R at the i-mode center, the FOMA
terminal is full of Message F/Message R at
the i-mode center, the i-mode center is full of
Message F
The i-mode center is full of Message R,
Message F at the i-mode center/The i-mode
center is full of Message R, the FOMA
terminal is full of Message F
While providing location information by
GPS/While accepting to provide location
information during the period of accepting
the location request
While rejecting to provide location information
during the period of accepting the location
request
During GPS positioning
(Blue)/ (Red)
While connecting to the 3G network (Packet
communication: able)/While connecting to the
3G network (Packet communication: disable)
While connecting to the GSM network/While
connecting to the GPRS network
/ While running i-αppli (i-αppli stand-by
display)/While running i-αppli DX
/ i-αppli stand-by display is set/i-αppli DX
stand-by display is set (P.214)
The USB mode setting is set to Communication
mode (P.285)
The USB mode setting is set to microSD
mode (P.285)
/ / /
The USB mode setting is set to MTP mode:
Connecting/Transferring/Transfer completed/
Error (P.285)
The USB mode setting is set to ATRAC mode
(P.285)
While using a hands-free device (P.62)
Secret display is [ON] (P.131)
While the microSD memory card is inserted
(P.279)
(Flashes during preparation for access after
insertion of the microSD memory card)
While the microSD memory card management
information is being updated (P.284)
During a voice call
During a videophone call (P.48)
During PushTalk communication (P.78)
While using PushTalkPlus (P.86)
During 64K data communication
/ /
1/2/3 or more tasks are being executed
changes to
while playback
(P.317) (
is in progress on the MUSIC Player,
changes to
while watching One Seg, or
changes to
while recording a One Seg
program)
While data in the MUSIC Player is being
updated
/ / /
Battery level (P.41)
Record message is set ( is white) (P.69)
There are non-played back record messages
( is light blue)
There is no non-played back record message
( is blue)
Record message is OFF
(There are record messages) ( is gray)
There are non-played back record messages
( is light blue)
There is no non-played back record message
( is blue)
The number of recorded messages is
displayed at . When the number of recorded
messages becomes full, “ ” appears.
;
Videophone message is set ( is green) (P.69)
There are non-played back videophone
messages ( is light blue)
There is no non-played back videophone
message ( is blue)
Videophone message is OFF
(There are videophone messages) ( is gray)
There are non-played back videophone
messages ( is light blue)
There is no non-played back videophone
message ( is blue)
T h e n u m b e r o f re c o rd e d v i d e o p h o n e
messages is displayed at
. When the
number of recorded videophone messages
becomes full, “ ” appears.
● The FOMA terminal’s display is manufactured based on the leading edge technologies, and some pixels
unlit or lit may appear constantly in the display. This is not a malfunction.
Continued
31
Notification Display
Before Using the Handset
An icon is displayed in the notification display to alert you, for example, when you cannot
answer a call. The icon is displayed from the left in the order of the latest event.
Move the cursor to the icon to display the text information and select the icon to check
the notification information. The icon is turned off by checking the notification information
for over a second.
or pressing
Icon※1
Text information
Missed call X※2
) New mail X※3
Mail at center
) New MessageR X
) New MessageF X
) New ToruCa X
) New Record msg
) New V.phone msg
Exceed cost limit
Voice Mail X※2
※4
Timer Rec result X
USB cable cncted
PB update failed
※1
※2
※3
※4
32
Stand-by SW error
Download completed
Download failed
) Answer X
Update complete
Check for update
Update notification
Update schedule
※4
Update completed
※4
Update definitions
※4
SW not terminated
Description
There is a missed call of a voice, videophone, or PushTalk call, or
64K data communication (P.69).
i-mode mail/SMS is received (P.185, 203).
Mail is held at the i-mode center (P.186).
Message R is received (P.198).
Message F is received (P.198).
A ToruCa card is obtained from a reading device (P.222).
A record message is recorded (P.70).
A videophone message is recorded (P.70).
The total cost has exceeded the upper limit (P.330).
A record message is saved at the Voice Mail Service Center
(P.346).
Timer recording is completed (P.249).
The FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01 (optional), etc. is
being connected (P.285).
The Phonebook auto-update at the Data Security Service Center
has failed (P.100).
i-αppli stand-by display security error has occurred (P.214).
Downloading the Music&Video Channel is completed (P.305).
Downloading the Music&Video Channel is failed (P.305).
Location information is requested (P.233).
The software update is completed (P.405).
There is confirmation of a software update (P.405).
The software update is necessary (P.404).
Downloading the software is complete. Overwrite the software with
new one (P.403).
The pattern definition auto-update was completed successfully
(P.409).
The pattern definition auto-update was failed. The update is still
required (P.409).
There is an active function (excluding the i-αppli stand-by
display) (P.317).
The icons in parentheses appear in the sub-display. The number of data is not displayed in the sub-display.
When 2in1 is set to the Dual mode, the number of data is displayed separately for Number A/Number B.
When 2in1 is set to the Dual mode, the total number of mail sent to Address A and Address B is displayed.
for over a second, the icon is not turned off.
Even when you press
Guide Display
Display
Operation
Ｍａｉｌ
ＭＥＮＵ
Ｌｉｎｋ
ｉ−ｍｏｄｅ
ｉ．ｃｈ
Press
Ｍａｉｌ
ＭＥＮＵ
Ｌｉｎｋ
ｉ−ｍｏｄｅ
ｉ．ｃｈ
Press
up.
or scroll
Ｍａｉｌ
ＭＥＮＵ
Ｌｉｎｋ
ｉ−ｍｏｄｅ
ｉ．ｃｈ
Ｍａｉｌ
ＭＥＮＵ
Ｌｉｎｋ
Ｍａｉｌ
ＭＥＮＵ
Ｌｉｎｋ
Display
Before Using the Handset
To utilize the FOMA terminal’s functions when using the Normal style, use the 4-way keys
(Up/Down/Left/Right arrow keys), the JOG, the Mail key, the i-mode/i-αppli key, the MENU
key, and the i-Channel key according to the instructions shown in the guide display.
Operation
Ｍａｉｌ
ＭＥＮＵ
Ｌｉｎｋ
ｉ−ｍｏｄｅ
ｉ．ｃｈ
Press
Ｍａｉｌ
ＭＥＮＵ
Ｌｉｎｋ
ｉ−ｍｏｄｅ
ｉ．ｃｈ
Press
Press
or scroll
down.
Ｍａｉｌ
ＭＥＮＵ
Ｌｉｎｋ
ｉ−ｍｏｄｅ
ｉ．ｃｈ
Press
ｉ−ｍｏｄｅ
ｉ．ｃｈ
Press
Ｍａｉｌ
ＭＥＮＵ
Ｌｉｎｋ
ｉ−ｍｏｄｅ
ｉ．ｃｈ
Press
ｉ−ｍｏｄｅ
ｉ．ｃｈ
Press
● The display may differ from the above depending on websites and i-αppli software.
About the Sub-display
Images and messages are displayed in the sub-display when you receive a voice/
videophone call or mail, etc.
■ Switching the display
You can switch the display on the sub-display when there is a notification information or i-Channel
Telop text to be displayed.
ˎ When there is no notification information or the Ticker is set not to be displayed, neither the notification
information nor Telop text is displayed.
Fold the FOMA terminal and press
→
Notification information display
(P.32)
Display during stand-by
最高１５℃
Telop text display (P.175)
■ Other display examples
Ｉｎｃｏｍｉｎｇ ｃａｌｌ
ドコモ一郎
Receiving a call
Ｒｅｃｅｉｖｉｎｇ ｍａｉｌ
Receiving mail
Ａｃｔｉｖａｔｉｎｇ
１Ｓｅｇ
Activating One Seg
Ｏｎ ＰｕｓｈＴａｌｋ
ドコモ一郎
During PushTalk communication
０９：０５
Ａｌａｒｍ
Ｐｌａｙ ａｎｓｗｅｒ ｍｓｇ
ドコモ一郎
Record message in operation
Ｗｈａｔ Ｃａｎ Ｕ Ｄｏ （Ｍａｓｈ
Ｍａｋｏｕ
Alarm sounding
０９：０５
Ｂｏｏｋｉｎｇ ａｌａｒｍ
Booking alarm sounding
MUSIC Player
Ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎｉｎｇ ｌｏｃ．
Ａｃｃｕｒａｃｙ：★☆☆
During GPS measurement of location
33
Selecting the Menu
Before Using the Handset
Press
(MENU) to display the Menu display. You can select the menu display from
[Kisekae menu]/[Standard menu]/[My Selection].
ˎ The Kisekae menu is displayed at the time of purchase.
ˎ You can change the menu when you start or settings of icons for the Standard menu, and you can switch the
Kisekae menus (P.115, 117).
Ｃｈｇ．ＭＥＮＵ
ＴＡＳＫ
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ
Ｋｉｓｅｋａｅ
Main body color: White
Main body color: Red
Main body color: Black
Main body color: Champagne beige
Kisekae menu
Menu name
My Selection
i-mode
Mail
i αppli
Phone
Data Box
MUSIC
Osaifu-Keitai
LifeKit
Own number
Settings
1Seg
Description
Used to access My Selection.
Used to access an i-mode function.
Used to access an i-mode mail and SMS functions.
Used to access an i-αppli function.
Used to access mainly related to Phone such as Phonebook, Call record, PushTalk
phonebook, and Record message.
Used to access data such as those saved in My picture, MUSIC, Music&Video
Channel, i-motion, Melody, My document, Kisekae Tool, Chara-den, and 1Seg.
Used to access MUSIC player and Music&Video Channel functions.
Used to access IC card content, DCMX, and ToruCa functions.
Used to access functions such as Bar code reader, Receive Ir data, microSD,
Camera, Movie, Lifetime Calendar, Alarm, Schedule, Text Memo, Calculator, Data
Security Service, and GPS.
Used to display the own phone number.
Used to set items such as Display, Call, Application, Lock/Security, and Management.
Used to access a One Seg function.
(Help ON)/
(Help OFF).
● You can turn on/off the Standard menu guide by pressing
● Functions displayed in gray are not available.
● When another function is activated or the FOMA terminal is connected to a PC while the USB mode setting
is set to [MTP mode], the Standard menu is displayed by pressing .
● The Kisekae menu at the time of purchase varies depending on the color of the FOMA terminal and the
displayed menu changes based on the Kisekae Tool. The descriptions of this manual are written based on
the Kisekae menu (Colorful White) of the main body color: White and the Color theme setting (White2).
● For the list of menus in the Standard menu, see P.374.
Selecting a Function from the Menu Display
A function can be executed easily by going through the menus.
Press
(MENU).
The menu display appears.
34
2
Use
to select a menu and press
The function associated to the menu is selected.
Before Using the Handset
● You can execute a function in the menu display by pressing a key on the keypad. For the functions that can
be executed using a number key, see the list of menus (P.374).
Selecting a Function from the Function Menu
The Function menu is a menu that plays an auxiliary role for each function.
Whenever the Function menu is available, [Func] appears in the guide display. Press
to display a list of available Function menus.
ˎ The contents of the Function menu vary depending on the functions and displays. For details, see the
description of operation for the individual option.
ˎ When the numbers and symbols are displayed in the Function menu, press a key on the keypad to activate a
function.
Ｔｅｘｔ Ｍｅｍｏ ｌｉｓｔ
１／４
Ｂｏｏｋ ａｉｒｌｉｎｅ ｔｉｃｋｅｔ
Ｍｉｌｋ ａｎｄ ｓｕｇａｒ
０９０ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ
１２３４５
(Func)
Ｆｕｎｃ
ＭＥＮＵ
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ
Ｅｄｉｔ
Ｄｅｌｅｔｅ
Ｃｏｐｙ Ｔｅｘｔ ｍｅｍｏ
Ｓａｖｅ ｔｏ ｍｉｃｒｏＳＤ
Ｓｅｎｄ Ｉｒ ｄａｔａ
ｉＣ ｔｒａｎｓｍｉｓｓｉｏｎ
Ｃｌｏｓｅ
ＭＥＮＵ
Ｃｒｅａｔｅ
Ｅｄｉｔ
Ｄｅｌｅｔｅ
Ｄｅｌｅｔｅ ｏｎｅ
Ｃｏｐｙ Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ＆ｄｅｌｅｔｅ
Ｔｅｘｔ ｍｅｍｏ
Ｓａｖｅ Ｄｅｌｅｔｅ
ｔｏ ｍｉｃｒｏＳＤ
ａｌｌ
Ｓｅｎｄ Ｉｒ ｄａｔａ
ｉＣ ｔｒａｎｓｍｉｓｓｉｏｎ
Ｃｌｏｓｅ
ＭＥＮＵ
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ
● Function menus displayed in gray are not available.
Switching the Menu Display
You can switch the menu (Kisekae menu, Standard menu, and My Selection) to be
displayed temporarily.
in the stand-by display is the Kisekae menu. To
ˎ At the time of purchase, the activated menu when you press
change the activated menu, display the menu to be changed and press
(Chg.MENU) for over a second.
Press
(MENU) in the stand-by display and press
Kisekae menu
(Chg.MENU)
Ｃｈｇ．ＭＥＮＵ
ＴＡＳＫ
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ
Ｋｉｓｅｋａｅ
(Chg.MENU).
Standard menu
My Selection
(Chg.MENU)
Ｃｈｇ．ＭＥＮＵ
ＴＡＳＫ
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ
Ｈｅｌｐ ＯＮ
Ｃｈｇ．ＭＥＮＵ
ＴＡＳＫ
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ
Ｅｘｃｈａｎｇｅ
Ｄｅｌｅｔｅ
(Chg.MENU)
● When you use the Kisekae tool to change the design of the menu display, some menu types may change the
menu structure depending on the frequency in use. The digits assigned to menu items may not be applied.
In this case, you cannot operate the FOMA terminal as explained in this manual, so please change the
menu to the Standard menu or reset the menu settings (P.116).
35
Using the UIM
Before Using the Handset
The UIM (FOMA card) records user information such as your phone number. Insert a
UIM in the FOMA terminal to use it.
Inserting/Removing the UIM
When inserting/removing the UIM (FOMA card), make sure to power off and fold the
FOMA terminal, remove the battery pack, and perform the operation with the FOMA
terminal held with your hand.
ˎ If you insert the UIM forcibly, it may be damaged.
■ Inserting the UIM
Open the stopper.
Open the stopper until it stops.
Insert the UIM into the slot with
the IC side facing down.
R e t ra c e t h e s t o p p e r t o i t s
original position
Insert until it clicks into place.
■ Removing the UIM
Open the stopper.
Lift the 2 Step 1Seg Stand.
ˎ See “How to place the 2 Step
1Seg Stand” (P.29).
Slide the UIM with your finger to
take it out.
● Make sure to keep a removed UIM safely.
About the UIM Security Code
You can set two Security codes, namely “PIN1” and “PIN2”, for the UIM (FOMA card).
These codes are set to “0000” at the time of subscription. You can change them to any
4- to 8-digit number you want (P.125).
36
About the Function for Restricting UIM Operation
Before Using the Handset
The FOMA terminal provides a function for restricting UIM (FOMA card) operation in
order to protect your data and files. If you record a videophone message or download
files or data from sites or mail while the UIM is inserted in the FOMA terminal, the UIM
operation restriction function is automatically set for these data and files.
ˎ When you replace the UIM with another one or if you do not have a UIM inserted in the FOMA terminal, you are
unable to display or play back the data or files for which the UIM operation restriction function is set or if they
are sent using the infrared or iC communication or attached to mail.
ˎ The target data for operation restriction is as follows:
- Image (including GIF animation, Flash, and Stamp&Frame)
- Deco-mail pictograph
- Image downloaded from the Data Security Service Center
- Movie/i-motion
- Downloaded Kisekae tool
- Chara-den
®
®
- Image inserted in a ToruCa(detail) card
- Chaku-Uta /Chaku-Uta Full
- File attached to i-mode mail (excluding a ToruCa card)
- Melody
- Message R/F attached file (melody/image)
- PDF data
- Mail template (including target data for restriction)
- Videophone message
- Image inserted in Deco-mail or a signature
- Movable contents-compatible data
- i-αppli (including i-αppli stand-by display)
- Downloaded dictionary
- Screen Memo (including target data for restriction)
- Image trimmed from PDF data (downloaded PDF data only)
ˎ “ ” appears for the data with UIM operation restriction. Depending on the data, “ ” may not appear and a
message may appear instead when you select the data.
ˎ “Chaku-Uta” is a registered trademark of Sony Music Entertainment Corporation.
● If you replace the UIM with another one or use the FOMA terminal without inserting a UIM when data
targeted by the UIM operation restriction function is set for the stand-by display, call image, and ring tone,
then the sound and image settings are reset to the default settings. In this case, the sound and image you
have set and the actual sound and image may be different.
● You cannot set the UIM operation restriction function for data received using the infrared or iC
communication, the microSD memory card, or DoCoMo keitai datalink or images recorded with the built-in
camera.
● If you use the UIM on another i-Channel-compatible terminal, the Telop text does not appear. When the
information is automatically updated or if you press
(i.ch) to receive latest information, the Telop text
starts running automatically.
Settings Saved in the UIM
The following settings are saved in the UIM (FOMA card). If you replace the UIM with
another one, the settings in the new UIM come into effect.
- Select language
- SSL certificate
- SMS setting
- UIM setting
About the Differences in UIM Functions
A UIM (FOMA card) (blue) has the following functional differences from a UIM (green/white).
Item
Number of digits that can be saved for a phone
number in the UIM phonebook
User certificate operation for using FirstPass
Use of WORLD WING service
Service Numbers (Use of [ドコモ故障問合せ]
(Contact for Repairs) and [ドコモ総合案内・受付]
(General Inquiries))
UIM (blue)
Maximum 20 digits
UIM (green/white)
Maximum 26 digits
Page
P.93
Unavailable
Unavailable
Unavailable
Available
Available
Available
P.171
P.38
P.349
Continued
37
WORLD WING
Before Using the Handset
WORLD WING is the DoCoMo’s FOMA international roaming service that enables you to place or receive a
call using the same mobile phone number even if you are overseas, just by using the UIM (green/white) and a
WORLD WING service-compatible FOMA terminal.
※ If you subscribed to the FOMA services after September 1, 2005, you already have WORLD WING and no
application is required. If you declined to use WORLD WING when you subscribed to the FOMA services or
cancel the WORLD WING service halfway, you need to make an application again to use WORLD WING.
※ If you subscribed to the FOMA services before August 31, 2005 and did not make an application to “WORLD
WING”, you need to make a separate application.
ˎ This service is not available in some service charge plans.
ˎ If you should lose your UIM (green/white) or have it stolen abroad, please report it to DoCoMo and take
steps to cancel the use of the UIM as soon as possible. For information on where to call, see “General
Inquiries” on the backcover of this manual. Note that you are still liable for the call and communication
charge incurred after the loss or theft occurred.
Attaching and Removing the Battery Pack
When attaching/removing the battery pack, make sure to power off and fold the FOMA
terminal.
ˎ If you attach the battery pack forcibly, the terminal on the FOMA terminal may be damaged.
ˎ Holding too hard or attaching/removing the back cover in a manner other than described below may damage it.
■ Attaching the battery pack
Slide to remove the back cover
in the direction of the arrow.
Hold the battery pack with the
recycle-mark side up, align the
terminal of the battery pack with
that of the FOMA terminal, and
push it into place.
Align the back cover with the
grooves on the FOMA terminal
while holding it almost closed
(about 3 mm clearance) and
slide it in the direction of the
arrow.
Terminal
■ Removing the battery pack
Slide to remove the back cover
in the direction of the arrow.
Raise to remove the battery
pack in the direction of the
arrow by holding it by the tab.
Tab
● When you attach the battery pack, make sure that the stopper of the UIM tray is closed. If the stopper is not
closed completely, it prevents the insertion of the battery pack. If you use force to attach the battery pack,
the UIM or stopper may be damaged.
38
Battery Pack
To make full use of the FOMA terminal, make sure to use the Battery Pack SO02.
Before Using the Handset
■ Life of the battery pack
The battery pack is a consumable part. The usage duration of the battery per one charge decreases
gradually each time the battery is recharged. When the usage duration per one charge becomes
about half that of a new battery pack, the life of the battery pack is assumed to be almost over. It is
recommended that you replace the battery pack ahead of time. Depending on the usage condition,
the battery pack may be inflated as it comes to the end of its life. This is not a malfunction.
If you continue using i-αppli, talking on the videophone, or watching One Seg for a long period
of time with the battery being charged, the life of the battery pack may become shorter.
Return all spent battery packs to NTT DoCoMo or a dealer, or a recycling
shop to protect the environment.
Li-ion
Charging the FOMA Terminal
At the time of purchase, the battery pack is not fully charged. Make sure to fully charge
the battery pack before using the FOMA terminal for the first time.
About Charging the FOMA Terminal
ˎ For details, see the user’s manual of the FOMA AC Adapter 01/02 (optional), FOMA AC Adapter 01 for Global
use (optional), or FOMA DC Adapter 01/02 (optional).
ˎ The FOMA AC Adapter 01 is only compatible with AC 100 V. The FOMA AC Adapter 02 and FOMA AC Adapter
01 for Global use are compatible with AC 100 V to AC 240 V.
ˎ The shape of the AC adapter’s power plug is only for use with AC 100 V (domestic specification). For using
the AC adapter which is compatible with AC 100 V to AC 240 V overseas, a plug adapter that fits the electrical
outlets in the country you stay is needed. Do not use an electrical transformer for overseas use to charge the
FOMA terminal.
ˎ Make sure to attach the battery pack in the FOMA terminal before connecting it to the optional AC Adapter,
Desktop Holder, or DC Adapter. If the battery pack is not attached, the FOMA terminal cannot be charged.
ˎ If you use a function such as One Seg, videophone, data communication, and i-αppli while charging the battery,
the charging may stop because of high temperature of the FOMA terminal. The charging may not even start if the
FOMA terminal is in high temperature. Wait until the temperature of the FOMA terminal falls and restart charging.
ˎ If the charge indicator of the FOMA terminal flashes in red, wait until the temperature of the FOMA terminal falls
or remove the battery pack and attach it back again.
If it continues to flash in red, the battery pack may be defective. Stop charging immediately and contact our
service counter (DoCoMo shop, etc.).
ˎ Do not charge the battery pack for a long period of time (more than 24 hours) with the FOMA terminal powered
on. If the FOMA terminal is powered on when charging is completed, the battery level decreases. This causes
the FOMA terminal to restart charging. If you remove the FOMA terminal while it is recharging, the following
conditions may occur.
- The battery level is low. - The battery alarm sounds. - The operation time is short.
■ Estimated charging time/Battery time
Charging time
(AC adapter)
ab. 150m
One Seg
watching time
ab. 230m
(ab.: about, h: hour, m: minute)
3G/GSM
Network
Continuous stand-by time
setting
F O M A / 3G
Moving state : ab. 380h
3G
Auto
Moving state : ab. 360h
Stationary state : ab. 520h
GSM
Auto
Stationary state : ab. 300h
Continuous call time
Voice call : ab. 230m
Videophone call : ab. 130m
Voice call : ab. 230m
ˎ The charging time is an estimated time for charging when the battery pack is empty and the FOMA terminal
is powered off. When charging with the FOMA terminal powered on, the charging time becomes longer.
ˎ The continuous call time is an estimated time for a call when the FOMA terminal can send/receive radio
waves properly.
Continued
39
Before Using the Handset
ˎ The continuous stand-by time is an estimated battery time available on the FOMA terminal when it is folded
and can receive radio waves properly. The continuous stand-by time during the stationary state indicates the
average battery time available on the FOMA terminal that is placed stationary when it is folded and can receive
radio waves properly. The continuous stand-by time during the moving state indicates the average battery time
available on the FOMA terminal that is placed in mixture of the following states: “stationary”, “moving”, and
“outside of the service area” when it is folded and within an area where it can receive radio waves properly.
ˎ Note that the call (communication) time and stand-by time may be reduced to about half of the time indicated
above depending on the operating environment such as the charge level of the battery, how functions are
set, and temperature, and radio wave condition in the area where a call is placed (outside of the service area
or area with weak radio wave condition). Similarly, the call (communication) time and stand-by time become
shorter than the above when you use i-mode communication. Besides calls and i-mode communication, the
battery time is also reduced when you are composing i-mode mail, starting a downloaded i-αppli or i-αppli
stand-by display, performing data communication, executing multiaccess, using the camera, watching/
recording a One Seg program, and using the MUSIC Player.
ˎ Note that One Seg watching time may be reduced depending on the battery charge condition, function
settings, operating environment such as temperature, and radio wave condition in the area where One Seg is
used (outside of the service area or area with weak radio wave condition).
How to Charge the FOMA Terminal
Charge the battery pack using the optional
Desktop Holder SO07 with the FOMA AC
Adapter 01/02 connected. Make sure to see
the user’s manuals of the Desktop Holder
and AC Adapter. The battery pack cannot be
charged alone.
1 Insert the connector of the AC adapter horizontally
Insert the connector
horizontally with
the engraved side
facing up.
Charge
indicator
AC adapter
Terminal
with the engraved side facing up into the terminal (the
side labeled “ACアダプタ”) of the desktop holder.
Lift the power plug of the AC adapter and plug it
into an AC 100 V outlet.
Insert the FOMA terminal, which has the battery
pack attached, to the desktop holder and push it
into place.
Charging starts and the red charge indicator is turned on.
The indicator is turned off when charging is completed.
When you charge while the FOMA terminal is powered on
The battery level icon flashes and the Charge sound is
heard. When charging is completed, the icon changes
from flashing to lighting and the Charge sound is heard.
ˎ You can set to mute the Charge sound with the Set
basic tone (P.104).
When the charging is completed, lift to remove the
FOMA terminal while holding the desktop holder.
Remove the power plug of the AC adapter from the
AC 100 V outlet.
AC adapter
■ Charging with the DC adapter
With the optional FOMA DC Adapter 01/02, you
can charge the battery pack by using the cigarette
lighter socket of a vehicle (12 V/24 V). For details,
see the user’s manual of the DC adapter.
■ Charging with the AC adapter only
Insert the
connector
horizontally with
the engraved
side facing up.
Insert the connector horizontally
with the engraved side facing up.
Open the
terminal cover.
Release buttons
ˎ To remove the AC adapter, make sure to pull it horizontally
while holding the release buttons pressed. Pulling it
forcibly may cause malfunction.
40
Open the
terminal
cover.
Charge
indicator
Power
indicator
Connector
Plug
Checking the Battery Level
Before Using the Handset
● During iC communication or when the FOMA terminal comes within the communication range with the
reading device while charging the battery, the Charge indicator and FeliCa Sign light at the same time.
● When not using the AC adapter for a long period of time, remove its power plug from the AC outlet.
● Make sure that the phone strap, etc. does not get caught in between the FOMA terminal and the desktop
holder.
● The fuse (2.0 A) of the DC adapter is a consumable part. Purchase an equivalent fuse from an automobile
parts store when it is necessary to replace the fuse.

The estimated battery level is indicated in the display.
Display
(Flashes)
Charge level
Sufficiently charged.
Slightly low.
Very low. Charge.
The battery level is 0. Charge.
● When the battery level becomes nearly 0, the screen shown
to the right appears and warning sound is heard. The sound
may be suppressed by other sound, etc. in operation. It is
heard again when the battery level is 0 and the function you are
performing is terminated. During a call, the warning sound is
heard from the earpiece and the call is terminated when another
warning sound is heard after about 20 seconds. If you do not
charge the battery, the FOMA terminal is automatically powered
off after about 60 seconds.
Ｃｈａｒｇｅ ｂａｔｔｅｒｙ
Ｆｉｎｉｓｈ ｏｐｅｒａｔｉｏｎ
ａｎｄ ｃｈａｒｇｅ
ｂａｔｔｅｒｙ
Checking the Battery Level with the Sound and Display
ˎ The confirmation beep does not sound when the volume of the keypad sound is [OFF] (P.104).
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Management] → [Battery level] and press
The current battery level is displayed using bars in the display and the confirmation beep
sounds according to the remaining battery level.
Ｂａｔｔｅｒｙ ｌｅｖｅｌ
Sufficiently charged.
(three beeps)
Ｂａｔｔｅｒｙ ｌｅｖｅｌ
Slightly low.
(two beeps)
Ｂａｔｔｅｒｙ ｌｅｖｅｌ
Very low.
Charge. (one beep)
Ｂａｔｔｅｒｙ ｌｅｖｅｌ
Battery level 0.
Charge. (no beeps)
41
Powering On/Off

Before Using the Handset
ˎ When you power on the FOMA terminal, the screen informing to execute the software update automatically may
appear (P.402).
Press
(PWR) for over two seconds.
The FOMA terminal is powered on, the display and the keypad lights
are turned on, and an animation is displayed. After a while, the stand-by
display appears.
ˎ If you have set the PIN1 code setting to [ON], the PIN1 code input screen
appears. Enter the PIN1 code and press
(OK) (P.123).
To power off
Press
(PWR) for over two seconds.
● If you replace the UIM with another one (except when the Omakase Lock is set), you need to enter a 4- to
8-digit Security code when the FOMA terminal is powered on. When the entered code is correct, the stand-by
display appears. If you enter a wrong Security code five times consecutively, the FOMA terminal is powered
off. (You can still power on the FOMA terminal, however.)
Setting the Basic Functions

The Initial setting can be used to make basic settings such as the Date/time and Security
code. See the respective pages for details about the settings.
■ Available setting items
Item
Date/time
Change code
Keypad sound
Location request
All font size
setting
Description
Set the date and time of the FOMA terminal (P.43).
Change the Security code (P.124).
Set the volume of the tone to sound when you press the key (P.104).
Set whether to provide positioning information (P.234).
Set the size of fonts to be used for displaying the Phonebook, Call record, Mail, i-mode
sites, and Input text display (P.119).
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Management] → [Initial setting] and press
Ｉｎｉｔｉａｌ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ｄａｔｅ／ｔｉｍｅ
Ｃｈａｎｇｅ ｃｏｄｅ
Ｋｅｙｐａｄ ｓｏｕｎｄ
Ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ ｒｅｑｕｅｓｔ
Ｙｅｔ
１
Ｙｅｔ
Ａｌｌ ｆｏｎｔ ｓｉｚｅ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ｙｅｔ
Set each item.
● If you perform the Reset all data&set or do not change the Security code of the FOMA terminal or settings
of the Location request or All font size setting, the message “Initial setting is incomplete. Execute?” appears
when you power on the FOMA terminal. When you select [Yes], the display in step 1 appears and you can
perform the initial setting.
42
Setting the Date and Time

Before Using the Handset
You can set the date and time either by automatically correcting the time based on the
time information obtained from the DoCoMo network or by manually setting the time.
Example: Correcting the time automatically
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Management] → [Date/time] and press
Ｄａｔｅ／ｔｉｍｅ
Ａｕｔｏ ｔｉｍｅ ａｄｊｕｓｔ
ＯＮ
Ｍａｎｕａｌ ｃｌｏｃｋ ｓｅｔ
[Auto time adjust] : Set the time automatically.
[Manual clock set] : Enter the time manually. When you set the time using the
Manual clock set, the Auto time adjust is set to [OFF].
Select [ON] at [Auto time adjust].
[ON] : Correct the date and time automatically.
[OFF] : Do not correct the date and time automatically. Set the time using the Manual clock set.
To set the time manually
Select [Manual clock set] → [Yes] and enter the year and date within the range from
2000/01/01 to 2050/12/31, the time in 24-hour format (00:00 to 23:59), and select
time zone. Press
(Complete).
● When you set the Auto time adjust to [ON], the date and time are corrected automatically when the FOMA
terminal is powered on with a UIM installed. Note, however, that there may be an error lasting several
seconds. The time cannot be automatically corrected in the following cases.
- Outside of the service area (The time may not be corrected automatically even inside the service area
depending on the radio wave condition.)
- While i-αppli is running
● The date and time settings are retained even when you replace the battery pack. However, if you leave the
FOMA terminal without a battery pack or with a fully expended battery pack, the date and time may be reset
to “----/--/-- --- --:--”. In this case, set the date and time once again.
● If the date and time are not set, functions that use the clock, such as the current time icon, Schedule, Alarm,
Booking program, Timer recording, i-αppli Auto-start, and calendar/clock display cannot be used. The date
and time for the Redial/Received record and the date and time on images shot with the camera are also not
recorded.
● When you receive time correction information from the network of the carrier to which the FOMA terminal is
connected during international roaming, the time is automatically corrected when the Auto time adjust is set
to [ON].
When the time is corrected to the local time, the date and time used for the Redial/Received record and
sent/received mail also are corrected to the local time and “ ” appears. Note, however, that some overseas
networks may not perform time correction.
43
Notifying the Recipient of Your Phone Number

Before Using the Handset
When placing a call, your phone number can be shown in the display of the recipient’s
phone you are calling.
ˎ The caller ID is important personal information. Carefully decide whether you notify a recipient of your caller ID.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Management] → [NW Services] → [Notify
Caller ID] → [Set Notification] and press
Select [Notify]/[Not notify] and press
The Notify caller ID is set.
To check the setting
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Management] → [NW Services] → [Notify Caller ID] →
[Check setting].
● The setting, whether to originate a PushTalk call with/without the caller ID, follows this setting.
● If you hear a guidance asking to send the caller ID when you place a call, call again after setting the Set
Notification to [Notify] or by adding “186” before the recipient’s phone number. The caller ID is not displayed
even if you add “186” when you originate a PushTalk call.
● You cannot set the Notify Caller ID when the FOMA terminal is outside of the service area.
Checking Your Own Phone Number

Your phone number can be checked. You can also save your name, mail address, etc.
ˎ If the Own number is saved as Secret, the data other than your phone number is not displayed. Set the Secret
display to [ON] to display all data.
ˎ Number B does not appear on the Own number display of the B mode at the time of purchase. To display
Number B, perform the Check service (P.46).
From the Menu, select [Own number] and press
Ｂａｓｉｃ
Ｄｅｔａｉｌ
０９０ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ
ｄｏｃｏｍｏ．ｔａｒｏ． △△ ＠ｄｏｃｏｍ
ｏ．ｎｅ．ｊｐ
ドコモ太郎
ト゛コモタロウ
ＯＦＦ
Your phone number appears at [ ]. If the data other than a phone
number is saved, that data also appears.
To place a call
Press , move the cursor to a phone number, and press
To originate a PushTalk call
Press , move the cursor to a phone number, and press
To send i-mode mail
Press , move the cursor to a mail address, and press
(Mail).
To check the image
Press , move the cursor to the image, and press
(Play).
To switch the Own number display between the A and B modes when
2in1 is set to the Dual mode
Press
(Number A)/
(Number B).
● You cannot originate a PushTalk call from the Own number display of the B mode.
● When you replace the UIM (From 2in1 subscriber to 2in1 subscriber) while 2in1 is used, to obtain a correct
Number B, you need to perform the 2in1 function OFF (P.353) first, and then set the 2in1 to ON again.
When you replace the UIM (From 2in1 subscriber to 2in1 non-subscriber), perform the 2in1 function OFF.
● When you replace the UIM while 2in1 is used, you need to reset all the items of the personal data at the B
mode (P.46).
44
Saving Your Personal Data
Press
Before Using the Handset
You can save your personal data such as your name, postal address, and mail address,
and check saved data in the Own number display and quote this data in the text input
display.
(Edit) in the Own number display.
Ｂａｓｉｃ
Ｄｅｔａｉｌ
０９０ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ
ＯＦＦ
Save each item at the Basic display.
Icon
Settings
Enter your mail address within 50 half-width alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Enter your name within 16 full-width or 32 half-width characters.
When entering your name, the reading is automatically entered.
ˎ To edit the reading, enter a reading within 32 half-width characters.
Select [ON]/[OFF] of the Secret.
ˎ To display the entry saved as Secret, set the Secret display to [ON].
Continued
45
3
Press
Icon
and save each item at the Detail display.
Before Using the Handset
Settings
Select an image from My picture/i-motion of the Data Box or record one.
ˎ You can set the following files.
Category
My picture
i-motion※
File format
GIF/JPEG
MP4
File size
Max. 100K bytes
Max. 10M bytes
Image size
Max. [QVGA(240×320)]
Max. [VGA(640×480)]
※ Some i-motion may not be set.
ˎ It may take time to display a large-sized image.
ˎ To use an image after recording it by the camera, select [Camera]/[Movie] (P.142, 146).
You can record an image in the following sizes.
Still image
Movie
Out-camera
In-camera
Max. [QVGA(240×320)]
[sQCIF(128×96)]/[QCIF(176×144)]
Max. [VGA(640×480)]
ˎ To specify no image, select [None].
ˎ To check the image, move the cursor to the image and press
(Play).
Enter the postal code of your home address within seven half-width digits.
Enter the postal address of your home within 64 full-width or 128 half-width characters.
Enter your home phone number within 26 digits.
Enter your home mail address within 50 half-width alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Enter the name of your office within 64 full-width or 128 half-width characters.
Enter the postal code of your office address within seven half-width digits.
Enter the postal address of your office within 64 full-width or 128 half-width characters.
Enter your office phone number within 26 digits.
Enter your office mail address within 50 half-width alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Enter your birthday within the range from 1900/01/01 to 2050/12/31.
Press
(Complete).
Your personal data is saved.
To reset to the default settings
From the Function menu in the Own number display, select [Reset all] → [Yes].
To register Number B at the Own number display of the B mode
In the Own number display of the B mode, from the Function menu, select [Check service].
● At [ ] your phone number is displayed and at [ ] and [ ] Additional Nos. set for the Multi Number
Service are displayed. These numbers cannot be edited or deleted.
(i-mode)
● At the time of purchase, your mail address does not appear. Check your mail address by selecting
→ [i Menu] → [English iMenu] → [Options] → [Mail Settings] → [Confirm Mail Address]. When you change
your mail address, edit the Own number display accordingly.
● When you replace the UIM while 2in1 is used, you need to reset all the items of the personal data at the B
mode (P.45).
46
Voice/Videophone Calls
■ Placing Voice/Videophone Calls
What is Videophone? ............................................................................................................ 48
Placing a Voice/Videophone Call .......................................................................................... 49
Switching to/from Voice/Videophone Call ......................  52
Using the Redial/Received Record .........................................  53
Setting the Chaku-moji ......................................................................................  55
Changing the Caller ID Setting ON/OFF for an Individual Call............................... <186/184> 57
Placing a Call by Specifying a Condition .............................................................................. 57
Setting a Prefix ................................................................................................  58
Placing an International Call .........................................................................  59
Placing a Call by Specifying a Sub-address ...................................................  61
Setting the Alarm When Reconnecting a Dropped Call ............................  61
Improving Voice Clarity by Suppressing Background Noise ...........................  62
Talking Hands-free While Driving ..............................................................  62
■ Receiving Voice/Videophone Calls
Receiving a Voice/Videophone Call ...................................................................................... 63
Receiving a Call by Switching to/from Voice/Videophone Call .............................................. 64
Pressing a Key on the Keypad to Receive a Call ........................................  64
Setting the Operation for the FOMA Terminal Being Folded during a Call... 65
Using the Low Voice Feature.........................................................................  65
Putting a Call on Hold during a Call .......................................................................  66
■ When You Are/Were Unable to Answer a Voice/Videophone Call
Putting a Call on Hold ............................................................................................  66
Using the Public Mode (Drive Mode).............................................  66
Using the Public Mode (Power off) ...................................................  68
Checking the Missed Calls ................................................................................. 69
Recording Caller’s Messages When Unable to Answer Calls ....  69
Recording a Caller’s Message When Unable to Answer a Call Just Receiving ... 71
Playing Back/Deleting a Record Message/Videophone Message/Voice Memo ................... 72
Using Chara-den .................................................................................................................. 73
Setting the Videophone Operation ........................................................  74
Setting Notice for Switching between Voice and Videophone Calls ......  76
47
What is Videophone?
Voice/Videophone Calls
You can use the videophone function between DoCoMo videophone compatible
terminals. You can use videophone to talk to the recipient/caller while looking at each
other’s image. You can send a still image, substitute image, or Chara-den character
instead of your own.
DoCoMo’s videophone complies with “3G-324M※1 standardized by 3GPP※2 for global
standard”. The FOMA terminal cannot be connected to a videophone that uses a
different system.
※1 3G-324M
Global standard for third-generation mobile videophones.
※2 3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project)
Local standardization committee set up for development of common technology specifications related to
third-generation mobile wireless communication systems (IMT-2000).
Using the Display during a Videophone Call
ͦ
ͧ
ͩ
ͪ
ͫ
ͨ
ͬ ͭ
ͮ
: Hands-free ON
: During videophone call
ͦ
ͬ
: Photo light ON
ͭ
ͧ Videophone image (Large)
Display an image of a person you
ͮ Mode
are talking to (default setting).
: Mode for operating fullbody actions
ͨ Videophone image (Small)
: Mode for operating parts
Display your image (default
actions
setting).
: Mode for sending touchͩ Call duration
tones (DTMF)
Display the call duration in the
hh:mm:ss format.
ͪ Outgoing image status
: Camera image is being
sent.
: A still image is being sent.
: A Chara-den character is
being sent.
ͫ Zoom magnification
Display the zoom magnification bar.
Operations during a Videophone Call
Operation
Switch between camera image/
substitute image
Switch cameras
Key operation
Press
(MySide/Sub). Every time you press the key, the display is
switched between camera image/substitute image.
Press
(In/Out). Every time you press the key, the camera is switched
between the In-/Out-camera.
Switch ON/OFF of the hands-free operation Press
( ). Every time you press the key, the ON/OFF setting is switched.
48
Zoom-in/-out image
Press
Put a call on hold
From the Function menu, select [Holding]. To cancel this function, press
(Zoom in) /
(Zoom out) when recording with the Out-camera.
Switch the display
Switch the quality of the outgoing
image
Select a substitute image
Switch ON/OFF of the photo light
Display your phone number
Switch to a voice call
From the Function menu, select [Display setting].
From the Function menu, select [Visual preference]. When you finish a call, the
image quality set for the Visual preference of the Videophone setting is restored.
From the Function menu, select [Select sub image].
From the Function menu, select [Photo light] (when using the Out-camera only).
From the Function menu, select [Own number].
From the Function menu, select [Chg. to voice call] (when placing a videophone call only).
Placing a Voice/Videophone Call
Check the radio wave condition and enter a phone number.
Voice/Videophone Calls
Example: Placing a voice call
Enter a phone number in the stand-by display.
ˎ You can enter a phone number of up to 80 digits.
ˎ Make sure to include the area code, even for a local call.
When you press the wrong number
Press
to delete the entered digits one by one from the right.
Press
for over a second to delete all digits.
Press
Ｃａｌｌｉｎｇ
Press
A ringing sound is heard when the call is connected.
To place a videophone call
Press
(V.phone). When the call is answered, your image is sent to
the recipient and the call is switched to the hands-free operation that
allows you to hear the recipient’s voice from the speaker.
When 2in1 is set to the Dual mode
Select [Number A]/[Number B] (P.352).
When a busy tone sounds
The line is busy. Press
to hang up and call again after a while.
When you hear a guidance
Call again according to the guidance.
to hang up.
Continued
49
Voice/Videophone Calls
● See P.56 for sending the Chaku-moji and P.57 for placing a voice or videophone call by specifying the
condition.
and enter a phone number,
● For a voice call, you can also place it in the order of step 2 → step 1. Press
and the call is dialed automatically after about five seconds.
● You are charged for digital communication even if you send a substitute image during a call.
● If the videophone call is not connected, the following messages appear in the display. The displayed
message may not correctly represent the status of the recipient depending on the type of the phone of the
recipient or whether the recipient has subscribed to any network service.
Message
Check number, then redial
Busy
Description
The phone number is no longer in use.
The recipient is talking on the phone.
(This message may appear also during packet communication on
some recipient’s terminals.)
Busy with packet transmission
The recipient is using packet communication.
Outside of service area/power off The recipient is in a place where radio waves do not reach or the
phone is powered off.
Set Caller ID to ON
This message appears when the call was connected without a Caller
ID (when a call is placed to Visual Net or other sites).
Please try voice call
This message appears when the Call Forwarding Service is set on the
recipient’s phone and the terminal to which the call was forwarded is
not equipped with the videophone function.
(As of October 2007, this message may appear also when the Voice
Mail Service is set on the recipient’s phone.)
Connection failed
This message appears when none of the above reasons apply.
Please make your call from the To view V-Live contents, visit and view an official i-mode site once,
i-mode web page
and then place a videophone call.
Upper limit has been exceeded. The upper limit set to the plan with a Limit (Type Limit or Family Wide
Connection failed
Limit) has been exceeded.
● If you use the FOMA terminal to place a videophone call to emergency numbers (110, 119, and 118), it
automatically switches to voice call dialing.
● When you place a videophone call to a terminal that is not equipped with a videophone function, or when
a recipient is outside of the service area or the phone is powered off (even if the FOMA terminal has the
videophone function), your call is not connected. When you place a videophone call to a terminal that is
not equipped with a videophone function and the Auto redial(voice) is set to [ON], the recipient’s terminal
disconnects your videophone call before it is connected, and the FOMA terminal redials the call as a voice
call. If, however, you dial a wrong number such as an ISDN synchronous 64kbps or PIAFS access points, or
ISDN videophone that is not 3G-324M (as of October 2007) compatible, the above operations may not take
place. Note also that you may be charged for the call.
50
Using the Hands-free Function
When you switch to the hands-free operation during a call, you can hear the caller’s
voice from the speaker and talk hands-free.
Voice/Videophone Calls
Example: Switching to the hands-free operation during a voice call
Press
( ) during a call.
The call is switched to the hands-free operation and “
To cancel the hands-free function
Press
( ) again.
Ｔａｌｋｉｎｇ
Ｃａｌｌ ｄｕｒａｔｉｏｎ
０：０３
” appears.
ˎ When you finish the call, the hands-free operation is automatically canceled.
● Talk into the FOMA terminal from a distance of 30 cm or less.
Entering a Pause, Timer, or +
You can include a pause, timer, or + in a phone number (within 80 digits in all) to place a
call.
The phone number and pause, timer, or + can be saved together in the Phonebook.
ˎ Pause and timer are valid only for a voice call.
Entering a pause “P”
If you enter “P (pause)” between the phone number and touch-tones when you book
a ticket or play back your home answering machine, the touch-tones are sent by
separating the numbers at the pause (P).
Press
in the phone number input display.
“P” is entered.
To send touch-tones saved in the Phonebook
When the touch-tones are displayed after you place a call from the Phonebook, press
(Call).
● Some receiver devices may not be able to accept touch-tones.
Entering a timer “T”
To dial an inside line number following an outside line number, enter “T (timer)” between
the outside and inside line numbers. After a preset interval in seconds, the inside line
number is dialed following the outside line number. An interval of about one second is
added for every timer (T) entry. You can enter “T” consecutively to make the interval longer.
Press
for over a second in the phone number input display.
“T” is entered.
Continued
51
Entering a “+”
Voice/Videophone Calls
If you enter “+” at the beginning of a phone number when the Auto conversion of the
Int’l dial assist setting is set to [ON], a call is dialed by automatically adding the set
international access number (set to “009130010” at the time of purchase).
Press
for over a second in the stand-by display.
“+” is entered.
● You may not be able to place the call if you enter other than a phone number after “+” or enter only “+”.
Switching to/from Voice/Videophone Call

A caller can switch to/from voice/videophone call during a call.
ˎ This function can be used only between terminals that can switch between voice and videophone calls. A
recipient must preset the V.ph switch notice to [Indication ON] (P.76).
Example: Switching from voice call to videophone call
Press
(Func) during a voice call, select [Chg. to videophone], and press
Ｃｈａｎｇｅ ｔｏ
ｖｉｄｅｏｐｈｏｎｅ？
Ｙｅｓ
Ｎｏ
[Yes] : Switch the call from voice call to videophone call.
[No] : Return to the voice call without switching the call.
To switch from videophone call to voice call
From the Function menu, select [Chg. to voice call] → [Yes]. When
the call is switched to the voice call, the hands-free operation is
canceled.
Select [Yes] and press
Ｃｈｇ．ｔｏ ｖｉｄｅｏｐｈｏｎｅ
The recipient’s image
A substitute image may
appear according to the
setting on the recipient’s
terminal.
While the call is switched, an animation is displayed and you hear a guidance notifying you
that a call is switched.
When the call is switched to the videophone call, your image is sent to the recipient and the call is
switched to the hands-free operation that allows you to hear the recipient’s voice from the speaker.
● If packet communication is in progress, it is disconnected and the FOMA terminal is switched to
videophone.
● When the call is put on hold on the recipient or while the recipient is performing packet communication, you
cannot switch to videophone.
● The switching operation takes about five seconds. It may take time depending on the radio wave condition.
● Switching to/from voice/videophone call may not be performed in some radio wave condition, and the
phone may be disconnected.
● You are not charged while “Chg. to videophone”/“Chg. to voice call” is displayed.
● Every time you switch, the call duration starts from 0 seconds. When you finish the call, the total call
duration is displayed for each of the voice and videophone calls.
52
Using the Redial/Received Record

Voice/Videophone Calls
Up to 30 previously placed/received calls are saved as call records with their dates/
times, phone numbers, and names. The phone numbers or names appear in descending
order from the most recent call. For a PushTalk call, the group name or the first member’s
name appears.
ˎ When 2in1 is used, up to 30 redial/received records of Number A and Number B can be saved for each
separately. When 2in1 is set to the Dual mode or OFF, up to 30 redial/received records of both numbers appear
in descending order from the most recent call at once.
ˎ The call records of Number A and Number B are defined by different colors for each. The displayed color varies
depending on the Color theme setting of the Kisekae setting (P.116).
Also, you can set the color for Number B from [dark]/[light] at the Disp. call/rcv. No. of 2in1 (P.353).
Redial record
Ｒｅｃｖ
Ｆｒｅｑ
Dial frequency record
Ｒｅｄｉａｌ
Ｒｅｃｖ
１１／１３ １０：３２
ドコモ二郎
１１／１２ １０：３０
０９０ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ
１１／１２ ９：３５
ドコモ一郎
１１／１１ １０：３２
携帯はる子
１１／１０ ２２：１５
○○○同好会
１１／１０ １０：２８
携帯あき子
ͦ
ͧ
ＤｉａｌＦｒｅｑ
Received record
Ｒｅｄｌ
ドコモ一郎
ドコモ二郎
ドコモ二郎
携帯あき子
携帯はる子
○○○同好会
０９０ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ
携帯あき子
△△△クラブ
０３ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ
０８０ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ
携帯なつ子
Ｒｅｃｅｉｖｅｄ
ͦ
ͧ
Ｆｒｅｑ
１１／１３ １０：３２
ドコモ二郎
１１／１２ １０：３０
０９０ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ
１１／１２ ９：３５
ドコモ一郎
１１／１１ １０：３２
携帯はる子
１１／１０ ２２：１５
○○○同好会
１１／１０ １０：２８
携帯あき子
Ｒｅｄｌ
ͦ
ͧ
ͦ Call type
※ Placed/received voice call / Missed voice call (“ ” appears in case of the Dial frequency record)
Placed/received videophone call / Missed videophone call
/ ※
(“ ” appears in case of the Dial frequency record)
Received 64K data communication / Missed 64K data communication
Originated/received PushTalk call / Missed PushTalk call
/ /
PushTalk type (to one person)/(to multiple persons)/(PushTalkPlus)
With Chaku-moji (Displayed only in the Received record)
” appears when the Record message/Videophone message is recorded.
※ “
ͧ Phone type
Mobile1
Videophone
Home FAX
Mobile2
Home phone
Office FAX
Public phone
Office phone
QUICKCAST
ˎ The phone type icons do not appear when the Personal data lock is set.
Example: Displaying the Redial record
Press
) in the stand-by display.
The Redial record display appears.
To display the Received record
Press
( ) in the stand-by display.
To display the Dial frequency record
Press
in the Redial record display.
To display phone numbers
When saved in the Phonebook, the name and phone type of a recipient are displayed instead
of the phone number. Press
to switch the display temporarily between names and phone
numbers. The display is not switched when a group name for a PushTalk call is displayed.
To place a voice call
Move the cursor to a call record and press
Continued
53
Voice/Videophone Calls
To place a videophone call
Move the cursor to a call record and press
(V.phone).
To originate a PushTalk call
Move the cursor to a call record and press
To send mail
You can send mail to a person whose phone number and mail address are saved in the
Phonebook. Move the cursor to a call record and from the Function menu, select [Reply by
mail] → a mail address. Compose mail and send it.
To save in a group of the PushTalk phonebook
When you perform PushTalk communication among several persons saved in the PushTalk
phonebook, move the cursor to a received record of the PushTalk call ( ), press
(Save),
select a group, and press
(Complete).
● If the same phone number has been repeatedly called, only the most recent call is saved in the Redial
record. Note, however, that when you originate a PushTalk call, individual PushTalk communication among
several persons are recorded.
● If you switch the call between voice and videophone during a call, the call you placed/received first is
saved in the Redial/Received record.
● When a caller uses a “Dial-in” phone number, the phone number displayed may be different from the caller’s
dial-in number.
● When you place a voice or videophone call from the Received record, a Chaku-moji recorded in the
Received record is not sent.
● When the date and time are corrected to the local time during international roaming, “ ” appears next to
the name/phone number (P.43).
Displaying the Detailed Information of the Redial/Received Record
From the call record display, select a call record and press
Redial record
Ｒｅｄｉａｌ
Ｒｅｃｅｉｖｅｄ
ＵｓｒＳｅｔ
Call type
１１／１０ Ｓａｔ
１０：０５
ドコモ太郎
０９０ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ
付加番号１
０９０ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ
(Detail).
Received record
Call type
１１／１０ Ｓａｔ
１０：０５
ドコモ太郎
０９０ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ
１２ｓｅｃ
付加番号１
０９０ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ
Ｕｒｇｅｎｔ
Phone type
Multi Number type
Phone type
Ring time for a missed call
Multi Number type
Chaku-moji message
ˎ The following icons show the Multi Number type.
基本契約番号
(Basic Number)
付加番号1
(Additional No.1)
● When you select a call record of a PushTalk call, [
and all members are displayed.
] group name, [
付加番号2
(Additional No.2)
] caller name (Received record only),
Deleting the Redial/Received Record
The call records are retained even if the FOMA terminal is powered off. If you do not wish
others to know the previously dialed records, delete one or all of the call records.
ˎ If you delete either a redial record or a dial frequency record, both records are deleted.
Example: Deleting a call record
From the call record display, select a call record and press
The Function menu appears.
54
(Func).
2
Select [Delete] → [Delete one] → [Yes] and press
Voice/Videophone Calls
To delete several call records
From the Function menu, select [Delete] → [Select&delete], select call records, press
(Complete), and select [Yes].
To delete all call records
From the Function menu, select [Delete] → [Delete all], enter the Security code, and select
[Yes].
The selected call record is deleted.
● If you perform the Delete all when 2in1 is used, all the Call records of Number A and Number B are deleted,
regardless of the 2in1 mode.
Setting the Chaku-moji

When you place a voice or videophone call, you can send a message (Chaku-moji) that
is displayed in the recipient’s Incoming call display in order to notify the purpose of the
call even before this recipient answers.
Ｉｎｃｏｍｉｎｇ ｃａｌｌ
Ｕｒｇｅｎｔ
Chaku-moji
Chaku-moji disappears when you start talking on the phone.
Chaku-moji can be checked in the detailed information display of the Received Record (P.54).
ˎ For more details about the Chaku-moji or compatible models, see the DoCoMo’s website or “Mobile Phone
User’s Guide【Network services】”.
ˎ Charge is required for the Chaku-moji sender, but no charge for a recipient.
ˎ Chaku-moji cannot be used for PushTalk calls.
ˎ When you use the FOMA terminal overseas, you cannot send or receive a Chaku-moji message.
Editing Chaku-moji Messages
You can save up to 10 Chaku-moji messages.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Management] → [NW Services] → [Chaku-moji]
→ [Create message] and press
To delete a Chaku-moji message
Move the cursor to a Chaku-moji message and from the Function menu, select [Delete one]
→ [Yes]. To delete all Chaku-moji messages, from the Function menu, select [Delete all],
enter the Security code, and select [Yes].
Press
(Edit) and enter a Chaku-moji message.
Enter a message within 10 characters regardless of pictographs, symbols, full-width, or half-width.
The Chaku-moji message is saved.
Continued
55
Setting the Display for Chaku-moji Being Received
You can set the display style to be used when you receive a Chaku-moji message.
Voice/Videophone Calls
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Management] → [NW Services] → [Chaku-moji]
→ [Set Message display] and press
Ｓｅｔ Ｍｅｓｓａｇｅ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ
Ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ａｌｌ Ｍｓｇｓ
Ｏｎｌｙ ｎｕｍｂｅｒｓ ｉｎ ＰＢ
Ｏｎｌｙ ｃａｌｌｓ ｗ／ＩＤ
Ｈｉｄｅ ａｌｌ ｍｅｓｓａｇｅｓ
[Display all Msgs]
: Receive and display all Chaku-moji.
[Only numbers in PB] : Receive and display Chaku-moji sent only from callers
who are saved in the Phonebook. You cannot receive
Chaku-moji from a caller who is saved in the Phonebook
as Secret unless the Secret display is set to [ON].
[Only calls w/ID]
: Receive and display Chaku-moji sent only from callers
who notify their caller IDs.
[Hide all messages] : Do not receive or display any Chaku-moji.
Select the Chaku-moji display style and press
The display style for Chaku-moji is set.
Placing a Call with a Chaku-moji Message
You can place a voice or videophone call together with a Chaku-moji message.
Enter a phone number in the stand-by display and press
(Option).
The Call menu appears.
Select [Chaku-moji] and press
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ｔｈｅ ｗａｙ
ｔｏ ｉｎｐｕｔ
ｃｈａｋｕ−ｍｏｊｉ
Ｎｏｎｅ ｓｐｅｃｉｆｉｅｄ
Ｃｒｅａｔｅ ｍｅｓｓａｇｅ
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ｍｅｓｓａｇｅ
[None specified] : Place a call without a Chaku-moji message.
[Create message] : Create a Chaku-moji message and place a call. Enter a
message within 10 characters regardless of pictographs,
symbols, full-width, or half-width.
[Select message] : Select a saved Chaku-moji message and place a call. (This
menu appears only when the Chaku-moji message is saved.)
[Sent messages] : Select a sent Chaku-moji message and place a call. Up to
10 Chaku-moji messages can be saved. (This menu appears
only when there is a sent Chaku-moji message.)
Compose/Select a Chaku-moji message.
The Chaku-moji message is composed/selected.
Select another call condition and press
Ｃａｌｌｉｎｇ
Ｕｒｇｅｎｔ
56
(Call).
The call is dialed according to the selected Chaku-moji message and
call condition.
Changing the Caller ID Setting ON/OFF for an Individual Call
Voice/Videophone Calls
● When a Chaku-moji is received by the recipient, “ ” appears in the sender’s terminal display and charge is
required.
● If the recipient does not receive the Chaku-moji, “ ” appears. In this case, there is no charge. (For
example, when the recipient’s terminal does not have Chaku-moji support or if the Chaku-moji was received
in a condition other than that set using the Set Message display menu.)
● If the recipient’s terminal has the following settings or conditions, Chaku-moji cannot be delivered to this
recipient and the call is not saved in the Received record of the recipient’s terminal. “ ” or “ ” is not
displayed on the sender’s terminal and there is no charge for this transmission.
- When the recipient’s terminal is outside of the service area
- When the recipient’s terminal is powered off
- When the Public mode (Drive mode) is set
- When the To answer the Record message is set to 0 seconds, etc.
● Even if a Chaku-moji was delivered successfully to the recipient, “ ” or “ ” may not be displayed in the
sender’s terminal display depending on the radio wave condition. In this case, charge is required.
● If you place a videophone call with a Chaku-moji while the Auto redial(voice) is set to [ON], the Chaku-moji
is sent even when this call is redialed as a voice call.
<186/184>
You can choose whether to notify a recipient of your phone number (caller ID) every time
you place a call.
ˎ The caller ID is important personal information. Carefully decide whether you want to notify a recipient of your
caller ID.
You can use the following methods to notify or not notify your caller ID.
Presetting for all calls
Setting in the Phonebook
Setting when you place a call
Use the Set Notification to set [Notify]/[Not notify] (P.44).
Add “186/184” to the recipient’s phone number when you save it in the
Phonebook (P.91).
Set [Call with ID]/[Call without ID] at the Caller ID of the Option call display after
dialing a recipient’s phone number (P.57).
Enter “186/184” before dialing a recipient’s phone number (P.49).
To notify the caller ID
Press 186 + Phone number +
Not to notify the caller ID
Press 184 + Phone number +
after dialing a phone number with “186/184”, the phone number is
● When you place a call by pressing
saved in the Redial record with “186/184”.
● You cannot set whether to notify the caller ID when you originate a PushTalk call even when you add
“186/184”.
Placing a Call by Specifying a Condition
When you place a call, you can set a call condition at the Option call display such as
selecting a call type or whether to notify a recipient of your phone number for each call.
Continued
57
1
Enter a phone number in the stand-by display and press
Ｐｈｏｎｅ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ
Ｃａｌｌ ｍｅｔｈｏｄ
Ｖｏｉｃｅ ｃａｌｌ
Ｃａｌｌｅｒ ＩＤ
Ｎｏｎｅ ｓｐｅｃｉｆｉｅｄ
Ｖ．ｐｈｏｎｅ ｏｕｔｇｏｉｎｇ ｉｍｇ
Ｍｙ ｓｉｄｅ
Ｃｈａｋｕ−ｍｏｊｉ
Ｎｏｎｅ ｓｐｅｃｉｆｉｅｄ
Ｐｒｅｆｉｘ
Voice/Videophone Calls
: Select [Voice call]/[Videophone]/[PushTalk]/[SMS].
: Select whether to notify your phone number to the recipient.
When you select [None specified], follow the setting of the Set
Notification.
[V.phone outgoing img] :
Select an image to be sent when placing a videophone call.
[Chaku-moji]
: Compose/select a Chaku-moji message (P.56).
[Prefix]
: Place a voice or videophone call by selecting a saved prefix
(P.58). (This item appears only when a prefix is saved.)
[Int’l prefix]
: Place a voice or videophone call by selecting a saved
international access number (P.60). (This item appears only
when you enter a phone number with a preceding “+”.)
[Country code]
: Place a voice or videophone call by selecting a saved country
code (P.60).
[2in1 call number] : Select a Caller ID when 2in1 is set to the Dual mode.
[Multi Number]
: Select a Caller ID when the Multi Number call is set to [ON].
[Call method]
[Caller ID]
Ｏｐｔｉｏｎ ｃａｌｌ
(Option).
Set each item.
Press
(Call).
The call is dialed according to the set call condition.
● A call condition which cannot be set does not appear.
● You cannot place a call even if you set [Prefix], [Int’l prefix], or [Country code] from the Call condition if a
phone number you dialed exceeds 81 digits when the call condition is added.
Setting a Prefix

You can save up to three specific numbers (prefixes) to be added at the beginning of a
phone number when you place a call.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Call] → [Call assist] → [Prefix setting] and
press
Ｐｒｅｆｉｘ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ｎｕｍｂｅｒ
Ｎｕｍｂｅｒ
Ｎｕｍｂｅｒ
Select a number and press
The number input display appears.
Enter a prefix and press
Enter a prefix within 26 digits.
58
(OK).
Placing an International Call

With WORLD CALL, you can place an international call from a DoCoMo mobile phone.
Voice/Videophone Calls
ˎ The users who subscribe to the FOMA services are automatically signed up for the “WORLD CALL” service
when the agreement is concluded. (Excluding users who choose to refuse the WORLD CALL service.)
■ Placing an international call by entering a phone number
009130
−
010
− Country code −
Area code
− Phone number
(City code)
ˎ You can save the above procedure in the Phonebook of the FOMA terminal.
ˎ If an area code begins with “0”, omit the “0” when dialing (except when calling ordinary phones, etc. in Italy).
■ Placing an international call by using “+”
When you enter “+” at the beginning of a phone number, you can place an international call
without entering an international access number such as “009130010” (P.52).
ˎ The Auto conversion of the Int’l dial assist is set to [ON] at the time of purchase. An international access
number is entered automatically.
(for over a second) − Country code −
ˎ
ˎ
ˎ
ˎ
ˎ
ˎ
ˎ
ˎ
Area code
− Phone number
(City code)
ˎ You can save the above procedure in the Phonebook of the FOMA terminal.
ˎ If an area code begins with “0”, omit the “0” when dialing (except when calling ordinary phones, etc. in Italy).
You can place calls to about 240 countries and regions in the world.
Charges for this service are billed together with the monthly call charges.
No application fees or monthly basic charges are required.
This service is not available in some service charge plans.
Change in the dial procedure for international calls.
Since mobile communication such as mobile phones is beyond the scope of the “MYLINE” service, “MYLINE”
service is not available also for WORLD CALL. With the introduction of “MYLINE” service, however, the dial
procedure for international calls on mobile phones has been changed. Note that the old dial procedure
(excluding “010” from the above mentioned dial procedure) is not available.
For the WORLD CALL details, call the “General Inquiries” on the backcover of this manual.
To use an international call service company other than DoCoMo, contact them directly.
If you have an overseas specific 3G mobile phone, you can connect to an international videophone by selecting
videophone after the above dialing method.
※ See the NTT DoCoMo’s website for information about countries to which a videophone call can be connected
and telecommunication companies.
※ A recipient’s image displayed on the FOMA terminal may be fuzzy or a call may not be connected
successfully depending on the terminal to which the international videophone is connected.
Setting a Number Other Than WORLD CALL
You can save up to three international access numbers and up to 30 country codes to
be added at the beginning of a phone number in order to place an international call from
Japan. You can automatically add the international access number by entering “+” when
you place a call. You can automatically convert the first digit “0” of the phone number to
a country code when you place a call from the Phonebook, etc.
Continued
59
1
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Management] → [NW Services] → [Int’l dial
assist] and press
Ｉｎｔ’ｌ ｄｉａｌ ａｓｓｉｓｔ
Ａｕｔｏ ｃｏｎｖｅｒｓｉｏｎ
Voice/Videophone Calls
ＯＮ
Ｉｎｔ’ｌ ｐｒｅｆｉｘ
Ｗｏｒｌｄ Ｃａｌｌ
Ｃｏｕｎｔｒｙ ｃｏｄｅ
日本
[Auto conversion] : Set whether an international access number is automatically added.
[Int’l prefix]
: Save an international access number and set the Auto assist number.
You can also add an international access number by selecting [Int’l
prefix] at the Option call display when you place a call.
[Country code] : Save a country code. You can add a country code by selecting
[Country code] at the Option call display when you place a call.
Select [ON]/[OFF] at [Auto conversion].
[ON] : Automatically add the additional number you set for the Int’l prefix.
[OFF] : Do not automatically add the additional number.
Select [Int’l prefix] and press
The Int’l prefix setting display appears.
Select an input field and press
Ｉｎｔ’ｌ ｃａｌｌ１
Ｎａｍｅ
Ｗｏｒｌｄ Ｃａｌｌ
Ｉｎｔ’ｌ ａｃｃｅｓｓ Ｎｏ．
００９１３００１０
Enter a name in the name field and an international access number in the
international access number field.
Enter a name within 10 full-width characters or 20 half-width characters and an international
access number within 10 digits.
Press
(Complete) and press
The international access number is saved.
To set the Auto assist number
Move the cursor to the input field and press
assist number.
Select [Country code] and press
(Auto). “
” appears to the left of the Auto
The Set country code display appears.
Select an input field and press
Ｃｏｕｎｔｒｙ ｃｏｄｅ２３
Ｃｏｕｎｔｒｙ Ｎａｍｅ
Ｃｏｕｎｔｒｙ ｃｏｄｅ
Enter a country name in the country name field and a country code in the country code field.
Enter a country name within seven full-width characters or 14 half-width characters and a
country code within five digits.
ˎ “+” is already entered in the country code field.
10
Press
(Complete).
The country code is saved.
To set the Auto assist number
Move the cursor to the input field and press
assist number.
60
(Auto). “
” appears to the left of the Auto
Placing a Call by Specifying a Sub-address

You can set to place a call to a specific phone or communication device by specifying a
sub-address.
Voice/Videophone Calls
ˎ The sub-address is also used when you select a content in V-Live.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Call] → [Call assist] → [Sub-address] and
press
[ON] : Recognize the numbers after “ ” as a sub-address.
[OFF] : Do not recognize the numbers after “ ” as a sub-address.
Select [ON]/[OFF] and press
The Sub-address is set.
To place a call by specifying a sub-address
In the stand-by display, enter a phone number +
or
(V.phone).
+ sub-address and press either
● Even if the Sub-address is set to ON, “ ” is not recognized as the sub-address separator but as part of a
phone number in the following cases: where it is at the beginning of a phone number and immediately after
a number entered using Prefix/Int’l prefix/Country code of the Option call display for placing a call.
Setting the Alarm When Reconnecting a Dropped Call

This function automatically reconnects the call interrupted during a voice, videophone, or
PushTalk call due to the radio wave condition, such as in a tunnel or between buildings,
right after the radio wave condition is recovered. You can set an alarm tone when a call
is reconnected.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Call] → [Call setting] → [Recnct ALM] and
press
[High] : Sound the high alarm tone.
[Low] : Sound the low alarm tone.
[OFF] : Do not sound the alarm tone.
Select the type of the alarm tone and press
The alarm tone during reconnection is set.
● The recipient does not hear any sound while the radio wave is interrupted.
● The time required for reconnection depends on the usage and radio wave condition. The average
reconnection time is about 10 seconds and the caller is charged for the time spent for reconnection.
61
Improving Voice Clarity by Suppressing Background Noise

You can suppress background noise during a voice or videophone call or during playing
back an answering message set for the record message.
Voice/Videophone Calls
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Call] → [Call quality] → [Reduce noise] and
press
[ON] : Suppress background noise.
[OFF] : Do not suppress background noise.
Select [ON]/[OFF] and press
The Reduce noise is set.
Talking Hands-free While Driving

You can place or receive a voice call using a hands-free device by connecting the FOMA
terminal to a device such as the In-Car Hands-Free Kit 01 (optional) or car navigation
system.
For details about the operation of the hands-free device, see the user’s manual of the
device. When you use the In-car Hands-free Kit, you need the FOMA In-Car Hands-Free
Cable 01 (optional).
● The incoming call display and ring tone operation follow the FOMA terminal settings.
● When a setting is made for hearing sound from the hands-free device, a ring tone sounds from the handsfree device even if the FOMA terminal is set to the Manner mode or its Ring volume is set to [OFF].
● Even if you connect the FOMA terminal to a hands-free device, the Public mode (Drive mode) and Record
message function operate normally.
● When a setting is made for hearing sound from the FOMA terminal, the operation when the FOMA terminal
is folded or changed to the TV style during a call follows the Setting when folded. When a setting is made
for hearing sound from the hands-free device, the call continues even if the FOMA terminal is folded or
changed to the TV style regardless of the setting of the Setting when folded.
● When you use the In-Car Hands-Free Kit 01, “ ” appears. If you use any other commercially available car
adapter, “ ” may appear.
62
Receiving a Voice/Videophone Call
Voice/Videophone Calls
When you receive a voice or videophone call, you are notified by flashing indicator, ring
tone, vibrator, etc. The operation for an incoming call varies depending on the settings of
the Incoming set, Manner mode, etc.
Example: Receiving a voice call
When receiving a call, press
Ｉｎｃｏｍｉｎｇ ｃａｌｌ
Ｕｒｇｅｎｔ
Chaku-moji (P.55)
Ｔａｌｋｉｎｇ
Ｃａｌｌ ｄｕｒａｔｉｏｎ
０：０３
A phone number appears in the display when a caller sends it.
When you receive a videophone call
Your image is sent to the caller and the call is switched to the handsfree operation that allows you to hear the caller’s voice from the
speaker.
When the caller notifies you of the phone number
When saved in the Phonebook, the name and phone number of a
caller are displayed. If you saved the same phone number for several
names in the Phonebook, the name stored using the smallest memory
number is displayed. The Des phone tone, Des call display, and
Select phone Illum. saved in the Phonebook are used.
When the caller does not notify you of the phone number
The reason why the phone number is not displayed appears.
Non-display
reason
User Unset
Description
When a call is received from a caller who does not notify the
caller’s phone number intentionally.
PublicPhone When a call is received from a public phone, etc.
Unavailable When a call is received from a caller who cannot notify the
caller’s phone number, such as from overseas and from an
ordinary phone through call forwarding services (however, the
caller’s phone number may be displayed depending on the
intermediary telephone company).
To connect a call to the Voice Mail Service Center
From the Function menu, select [FWD to Voice Mail].
To forward a call to a forwarding number
From the Function menu, select [Call Forwarding].
To reject a call
From the Function menu, select [Call Rejection].
Press
to hang up.
(Call) instead of
. When you set the
● When you receive a voice call, you can answer it by pressing
to
, or
to answer a call (P.64).
Any key answer to [ON], you can also press
(V.phone) instead of
. To answer
● When you receive a videophone call, you can answer it by pressing
(Sub) (P.74).
a call with a substitute image, press
● If you receive a videophone call while the Manner mode is set, the screen for confirming whether the handsfree operation is set to ON appears. If you do not want to use the hands-free operation, select [No].
● You can preset the hands-free function of a videophone call to [OFF] (P.75).
● You may hear beeps (ring tone during a call) while talking on the FOMA terminal.
If [Answer] is set for the Arrival Call Act with the Voice Mail Service, the Call Forwarding Service, or the Call
Waiting Service subscribed, the beeps (the ring tone during a call) sound and the following operations are
available when there is another incoming call during a call:

- The Voice Mail Service............ Forward a call to the Voice Mail Service Center.
- The Call Forwarding Service... Forward a call to a forwarding number.
- The Call Waiting Service ......... Put the active call on hold and answer the incoming call.
63
Receiving a Call by Switching to/from Voice/Videophone Call
Voice/Videophone Calls
A caller can switch between voice and videophone calls during a call. When the caller
switches the voice call to the videophone call, a recipient can select whether to send a
camera image.
ˎ This function can be used only between terminals that can switch between voice and videophone calls. Preset
the V.ph switch notice to [Indication ON] (P.76).
Example: When the voice call is switched to the videophone call
When the screen for confirming whether to send your own image appears during a
voice call, select [Yes] and press
Ｃｈｇ．ｔｏ ｖｉｄｅｏｐｈｏｎｅ
Ｓｅｎｄ
ｃａｍｅｒａ ｉｍａｇｅ
Ｙｅｓ
Ｎｏ
While the call is switched, an animation is displayed and you hear a
guidance notifying you that a call is switched.
[Yes] : Send a camera image to the caller’s phone display.
[No] : Send a preinstalled image to the caller.
When the videophone call is switched to the voice call
The call is automatically switched to the voice call. When the call is
switched to the voice call, the hands-free operation is canceled.
When the call is switched to the videophone call, your image is sent to
the caller and the call is switched to the hands-free operation that allows
you to hear the caller’s voice from the speaker.
Pressing a Key on the Keypad to Receive a Call

You can set to answer a call by pressing a key on the keypad instead of pressing
when you receive a voice or PushTalk call.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Call] → [Call assist] → [Any key ans] and
press
[ON] : Enable to answer a voice or PushTalk call also by pressing
[OFF] : Disable to answer a voice or PushTalk call by pressing
to
To answer a voice call, press
or
(Call) (
, or
Select [ON]/[OFF] and press
The Any key ans is set.
64
to
, or
, or
(Answer) for a PushTalk call).
Setting the Operation for the FOMA Terminal Being Folded during a Call 
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Call] → [Call setting] → [Setting when folded]
and press
Ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ ｗｈｅｎ ｆｏｌｄｅｄ
Ｖｏｉｃｅ ｃａｌｌ／Ｖ．ｐｈｏｎｅ
Ｄｉｓｃｏｎｎｅｃｔ
ＰｕｓｈＴａｌｋ
Ｓｐｅａｋｅｒ ｃａｌｌ
Voice/Videophone Calls
You can end a call or put a call on hold by just folding the FOMA terminal during a voice
or videophone call. You can also end a call or switch a call to the hands-free operation
by folding the FOMA terminal during PushTalk communication.
[Voice call/V.phone] : Set the operation for the FOMA terminal being folded during
a voice/videophone call.
[PushTalk]
: Set the operation for the FOMA terminal being folded during
PushTalk communication (P.88).
Select an operation to be set at [Voice call/V.phone].
: Put the call on hold. Both you and the recipient hear the melody “Hamabe no uta”. During a
videophone call, the preinstalled image is sent to the recipient.
[Mute]
: Put the call on hold with the voice muted. During a videophone call, a substitute image is
sent to the recipient (P.74).
[Disconnect] : Hang up the call.
[Holding]
The operation to be performed when you fold the FOMA terminal during a voice or
videophone call is set.
● The operation when the FOMA terminal is changed to the TV style during a voice/videophone call or
PushTalk communication follows the Setting when folded.
● When the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (optional) is connected, the Setting when folded is
disabled and the call continues even if you fold the FOMA terminal. If it is during a videophone call that you
fold the FOMA terminal, a substitute image is sent.
Using the Low Voice Feature

You can set the FOMA terminal so that the recipient can hear your voice at a normal
volume level even if you speak in low voice during a voice call.
Press
during a call.
Ｔａｌｋｉｎｇ
Ｗｈｉｓｐｅｒ ｍｏｄｅ
１２：３４
The call is switched to the Whisper mode and the message “Whisper
mode” is displayed.
To cancel the Whisper mode
Press
again.
ˎ When you finish a call, the Whisper mode is canceled automatically.
65
Putting a Call on Hold during a Call

The call can be put on hold during a voice or videophone call so that your voice cannot
be heard by the recipient.
Voice/Videophone Calls
ˎ Even if the call is put on hold, the caller is charged for the call.
Press
(Func) during a call, select [Holding], and press
Both you and the recipient hear the melody “Hamabe no uta”. During a videophone call, a
preinstalled image is sent to the recipient.
To cancel the Holding
Press
Putting a Call on Hold

If you cannot answer a voice or videophone call immediately, you can put the call on
hold.
ˎ Even if the answer is put on hold, the caller is charged for the calling charge.
Example: Putting a voice call on hold
When receiving a call, press
Ｏｎ ｈｏｌｄ
Ｃａｌｌ ｄｕｒａｔｉｏｎ
０：０３
The answer is put on hold.
The guidance to inform the caller that you are currently unable to answer
the call is played back. During a videophone call, a preinstalled image
is sent to the recipient.
ˎ If you press
(HLD).
while the call is put on hold, the call on hold is disconnected.
When ready to answer the call, press
The On hold is canceled and you can talk.
● If you have signed up for the Voice Mail or Call Forwarding Service, you can select [FWD to Voice Mail] or [Call
Forwarding] from the Function menu while you are receiving a call, in order to use those services.
Using the Public Mode (Drive Mode)

The Public mode is an automated answering service which takes into account the
manners in highly public places. When the Public mode is set, the guidance is played
back to inform the caller that you are unable to answer the call because you are driving
or in a place where talking on a mobile phone should be avoided (trains, buses, or movie
theaters), and then the call is disconnected.
” is displayed.
ˎ The Public mode can be set or canceled even if “
ˎ The Public mode cannot be used during data communication.
66
1
Press
) for over a second in the stand-by display.
The Public mode is set and “
” appears.
ˎ When the Manner mode and the Public mode are set simultaneously, the Public
mode has priority.
Voice/Videophone Calls
To cancel the Public mode
Press
( ) for over a second in the stand-by display. The Public
mode is canceled and “ ” disappears.
■ When the Public mode (Drive mode) is set
ˎ Even if there is an incoming call, the ring tone does not sound and you cannot answer it. The notification icon
of missed call appears and the call is saved in the Received record. The guidance for the Public mode is
played back to inform the caller that you are unable to answer the call because you are driving or in a place
where talking on a mobile phone should be avoided (trains, buses, or movie theaters), and then the call is
disconnected.
ˎ Even if there is an incoming PushTalk call, you cannot answer it. The notification icon of missed call appears
and the call is saved in the Received record. If the received call is for the PushTalk communication among
several persons, the message “Driving” appears in the On PushTalk display of the members.
ˎ The call can be placed normally.
ˎ The following tones do not sound and the vibrator, etc. does not operate.
- Ring tone
- Alarm tone
- Schedule alarm
- Battery alarm
- Alarm for the Call cost limit
- i-αppli software sound
- Charge sound
- ToruCa receive completion tone
- Booking alarm
- Position location sound
- Location notice sound
- Loc. provide/accept tone
- Loc. provide/check tone
■ Operation for an incoming call when network services and the Public mode (Drive mode) are set
FOMA terminal’s operations for an incoming call while the Public mode is set depend on what
network services are used, as follows.
Service
When a voice call is received
The Voice Mail After the guidance for the Public mode is
Service※1
played back, the call is connected to the
Voice Mail Service Center.
The Call
After the guidance for the Public mode
Forwarding
is played back, the call is forwarded to a
Service※1※2 forwarding number.
The Call
Waiting
Service
The Nuisance
Call Blocking
Service
The Caller
ID Display
Request
Service
When a videophone call is received
The video guidance for the Public mode is not
played back and the call is connected to the
Voice Mail Service Center.
The video guidance for the Public mode is
not played back and the call is forwarded to a
forwarding number. If the forwarding number of
the phone does not support a videophone call,
the call is disconnected.
After the guidance for the Public mode is After the video guidance for the Public mode is
played back, the call is disconnected.
played back, the call is disconnected.
After the guidance is played back to
inform the caller that the call is not able to
be connected, the call is disconnected if
the caller is saved as a nuisance caller.
ˎ After the caller ID request guidance is
played back, the call is disconnected
if the caller does not notify the phone
number.
ˎ After the guidance for the Public
mode is played back, the call is
disconnected if the caller notifies the
phone number.
After the video guidance is played back to inform
the caller that the call is not able to be connected,
the call is disconnected if the caller is saved as a
nuisance caller.
ˎ After the video guidance for the caller ID
request is played back to the caller, the call is
disconnected if the caller does not notify the
phone number.
ˎ After the video guidance for the Public
mode is played back to the caller, the call is
disconnected if the caller notifies the phone
number.
※1 If you set the ring time of the Voice Mail or Call Forwarding Service to 0 seconds, the guidance for the
Public mode is not played back and a call is not saved in the Received record, either.
※2 You can set whether the guidance is played back to a caller with the “1429” setting of the Call Forwarding
Service.
67
Using the Public Mode (Power off)

Voice/Videophone Calls
The Public mode (Power off) is an automated answering service which takes into
account the manners in highly public places. When the Public mode (Power off) is set,
the guidance is played back to inform the caller that you are unable to answer the call
because you are in a place where it is required to power off a mobile phone (such as in
hospitals, airplanes, and near priority seats in trains), provided that there is an incoming
call when the FOMA terminal is powered off, and then the call is disconnected.
Press
The Public mode (Power off) is set. (No change appears on the stand-by display.)
To cancel the Public mode (Power off)
Press
To check the setting
Press
■ When the Public mode (Power off) is set
ˎ If there is an incoming call when the FOMA terminal is powered off or you are outside of the service area or
in a location without the radio wave, the guidance for the Public mode (Power off) is played back to inform
the caller that you are unable to answer the call because you are in a place where it is required to power off
a mobile phone, and then the call is disconnected.
ˎ You cannot answer an incoming PushTalk call. If the received call is for the PushTalk communication among
several persons, the message “ Disconnect” appears in the On PushTalk display of the members.
■ Operation for an incoming call when network services and the Public mode (Power off) are set
FOMA terminal’s operations for an incoming call while the Public mode (Power off) is set depend
on what network services are used, as follows.
Service
When a voice call is received
The Voice Mail After the guidance for the Public mode
Service
(Power off) is played back, the call is
connected to the Voice Mail Service
Center.
The Call
After the guidance for the Public mode
Forwarding
(Power off) is played back, the call is
forwarded to a forwarding number.
Service※
The Nuisance
Call Blocking
Service
The Caller
ID Display
Request
Service
After the guidance is played back to
inform the caller that the call is not able to
be connected, the call is disconnected if
the caller is saved as a nuisance caller.
ˎ After the caller ID request guidance is
played back, the call is disconnected
if the caller does not notify the phone
number.
ˎ After the guidance for the Public mode
(Power off) is played back, the call is
disconnected if the caller notifies the
phone number.
When a videophone call is received
The video guidance for the Public mode (Power
off) is not played back and the call is connected
to the Voice Mail Service Center.
The video guidance for the Public mode (Power
off) is not played back and the call is forwarded
to a forwarding number. If the forwarding number
of the phone does not support a videophone call,
the call is disconnected.
After the video guidance is played back to inform
the caller that the call is not able to be connected,
the call is disconnected if the caller is saved as a
nuisance caller.
ˎ After the video guidance for the caller ID
request is played back to the caller, the call is
disconnected if the caller does not notify the
phone number.
ˎ After the video guidance for the Public mode
(Power off) is played back to the caller, the call
is disconnected if the caller notifies the phone
number.
※ You can set whether the guidance is played back to a caller with the “1429” setting of the Call Forwarding
Service.
68
Checking the Missed Calls

Press
Voice/Videophone Calls
When you are unable to answer an incoming call or receive new mail, the notification
icon (P.32) appears in the stand-by display.
If a voice, videophone, or PushTalk call or 64K data communication is not answered,
“ ” appears in the stand-by display. The received record shows the date/time and the
person who called (P.53).
(Link) in the stand-by display and select the notification icon.
The text information for the notification icon appears.
To check the Received record
Select “ ” (Missed call).
To delete the notification icon
Press
for over a second. “ ” also disappears when the
Received record is displayed.
Ｍｉｓｓｅｄ ｃａｌｌ
１
Text information
Notification icon
Recording Caller’s Messages When Unable to Answer Calls 
When the Record message/Videophone message is set, the FOMA terminal can record a
caller’s message when you are unable to answer a call.
ˎ The FOMA terminal can record up to three record messages and videophone messages, each for up to about
15 seconds. If three record messages have been recorded, the Record message does not function. Similarly,
when three videophone messages have been recorded, the Videophone message does not function. Delete
unnecessary record messages or videophone messages.
ˎ When the Public mode (Drive mode) is set, the Record message/Videophone message dose not operate.
Press
for over a second in the stand-by display.
The Record message/Videophone message is set and “ ”/“ ”
appears.
To cancel the Record message/Videophone message
Press
for over a second in the stand-by display. The Record
message/Videophone message is canceled.
● When you are outside of the service area, the Record message does not function. Use the Voice Mail
Service (Paid).
Continued
69
When Receiving a Call
Ｐｌａｙ ａｎｓｗｅｒ ｍｅｓｓａｇｅ
ドコモ一郎
Voice/Videophone Calls
Ｎｅｗ Ｒｅｃｏｒｄ ｍｓｇ
Notification
icon
Text
information
The answering message is played back to the caller after the ring tone
sounds for the set duration.
To talk to the caller
Press
When you receive a videophone call
The answering message is played back and the answering image is
displayed to the caller. Press
(V.phone) to talk to the caller. If you
press
(Sub), you can answer the call with a substitute image.
The notification icon “ ” (New Record msg) or “ ” (New V.phone msg)
appears in the stand-by display.
To display the text information
Press
(Link) in the stand-by display and move the cursor to “ ”
or “ ”.
To play back a record message/videophone message
Press
(Link) in the stand-by display and select “ ” or “ ”.
To delete the notification icon
Press
for over a second. “ ” or “ ” also disappears when the
record message/videophone message is played back.
Setting the Operation of the Record Message
Press
in the stand-by display, select [Set rec msg], and press
Ｓｅｔ ｒｅｃｏｒｄ ｍｅｓｓａｇｅ
Ｓｅｔ
Ｔｏ ａｎｓｗｅｒ
ＯＦＦ
０１３ ｓｅｃ
（０００−１２０）
Ａｎｓｗｅｒ ｉｍｇ（Ｖ．ｐｈｏｎｅ）
テレヒ゛電話動作中
Ｒｅｃｏｒｄ ｉｍｇ（Ｖ．ｐｈｏｎｅ）
テレヒ゛電話動作中
Enter the time before starting the answering message at [To answer].
Enter from 000 to 120 seconds.
Select an image to be sent when answering a call from My picture of the Data Box
at [Answer img(V.phone)].
ˎ You can set the following files.
Category
File format
My picture
GIF/JPEG
File size
Max. 50K bytes
Image size
Max. [QCIF(W176×H144)]
※ You cannot set an image with file restrictions or a frame image.
70
4
Select an image to be sent when recording the caller’s image from My picture of the
Data Box at [Record img(V.phone)].
ˎ You can set the following files.
File format
GIF/JPEG
File size
Max. 50K bytes
Image size
Max. [QCIF(W176×H144)]
Voice/Videophone Calls
Category
My picture
※ You cannot set an image with file restrictions or a frame image.
Press
(Complete).
The operation of the Record message is set.
● When the Voice Mail or Call Forwarding Service and the Record message are set simultaneously, and if you
want to give priority to the Record message, set the time before starting the answering message for the
Record message shorter than the ring time for the Voice Mail or Call Forwarding Service.
Recording a Caller’s Message When Unable to Answer a Call Just Receiving 
You can start the Record message for temporary use when you receive a voice or
videophone call even if the Record message is [OFF].
ˎ If three record messages are recorded when the FOMA terminal receives a voice call, the Quick record
message function cannot be operated. Similarly, if three videophone messages are recorded when it receives a
videophone call, the Quick record message function cannot be operated.
Press
while receiving a call.
Ｐｌａｙ ａｎｓｗｅｒ ｍｅｓｓａｇｅ
ドコモ一郎
The answering message is played back to the caller.
To talk to a caller
Press
When you receive a videophone call
The answering message is played back and the answering image is
displayed to the caller. Press
(V.phone) to talk to the caller. If you
press
(Sub), you can answer the call with a substitute image.
71
Playing Back/Deleting a Record Message/Videophone Message/Voice Memo
You can play back or delete a recorded record message/videophone message and
voice memo (P.328).
Voice/Videophone Calls
Playing Back a Record Message/Videophone Message/Voice Memo
Example: Playing back a record message
Press
in the stand-by display, select [Play rec msg], and press
Ｐｌａｙ ｒｅｃｏｒｄ ｍｅｓｓａｇｅ
１１／１２ ９：３５
ドコモ一郎
１１／ ５ ２２：００
Ｕｓｅｒ Ｕｎｓｅｔ
１１／ ５ ７：５０
携帯あき子
Select a record message and press
Ｐｌａｙ ｒｅｃｏｒｄ ｍｅｓｓａｇｅ
１１／１２ ９：３５
ドコモ一郎
To play back a videophone message
Press
in the stand-by display and select [Play Vphone msg].
To play back a voice memo
Press
in the stand-by display and select [Play voice memo].
To display phone numbers
When saved in the Phonebook, the name and phone type of a caller
are displayed instead of the phone number. Press
to switch the
display temporarily between names and phone numbers. The display
is not switched when a voice memo is displayed.
(Play).
The record message is played back.
To stop the playback
Press
(Stop).
To play back the previous/next record message
Use
during playback to play back the previous record message
and
during playback to play back the next record message.
Deleting a Record Message/Videophone Message/Voice Memo
You can record up to three record messages, three videophone messages, and three
voice memos. Delete unnecessary record/videophone messages or voice memos.
Example: Deleting a record message
Press
in the stand-by display, select [Play rec msg], and press
To delete a videophone message
Press
in the stand-by display and select [Play Vphone msg].
To delete a voice memo
Press
in the stand-by display and select [Play voice memo].
To delete all record messages
From the Function menu, select [Delete all], enter the Security code, and select [Yes].
Select a record message and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Delete one] → [Yes] and press
The selected record message is deleted.
72
Using Chara-den
Voice/Videophone Calls
When you place a videophone call, you can send a character instead of a camera
image. You can press keys on the keypad to move a character or some character’s
mouth to correspond to the voice on the microphone.
ˎ For details about the action lists of the preinstalled Chara-den characters, see P.274.
Press
) in the stand-by display, select [Chara-den], and press
The Chara-den list appears.
Select a Chara-den file, press
(Func), select [Call Chara-den], and press
The screen for selecting the method of entering the phone number appears.
Select the method, press
Press
, and enter the phone number.
(V.phone).
©SEGA
The videophone call is dialed with a Chara-den character set as the
substitute image.
To switch between the full-body action and parts action modes
Press
(Change).
To display the action list
Press
(List).
To switch to the mode for sending touch-tones (DTMF)
From the Function menu, select [DTMF send mode].
To switch to the Chara-den action operating mode
From the Function menu, select [Action input mode].
● When the mode for sending touch-tones (DTMF) is set, the Chara-den action cannot be operated.
73
Setting the Videophone Operation

Setting the Display to Be Used in a Videophone Call
Voice/Videophone Calls
You can set the image to be displayed on the videophone images (Large) and (Small)
during a videophone call.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Call] → [Videophone] → [Display setting] and
press
[Main-Other side] : Display the recipient’s/caller’s image on the videophone image (Large) and your image
on the videophone image (Small).
[Main-My side] : Display your image on the videophone image (Large) and the recipient’s/caller’s image
on the videophone image (Small).
[Other side only] : Display the recipient’s/caller’s image only on the videophone image (Large).
[My side only]
: Display your image only on the videophone image (Large).
Select a display method and press
The Display setting is set.
Setting a Video to Be Sent to the Recipient/Caller
You can set whether to send a camera image to the recipient when you place a
videophone call. You can also set an image from either My picture or Chara-den as a
substitute image if you do not want to send a camera image.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Call] → [Videophone] → [Set outgoing image]
and press
Ｓｅｔ ｏｕｔｇｏｉｎｇ ｉｍａｇｅ
Ｃａｍｅｒａ ｉｍａｇｅ
ＯＮ
Ｓｕｂｓｔｉｔｕｔｅ ｉｍａｇｅ
アイアイ
Select [ON]/[OFF] at [Camera image].
[ON] : Send a camera image to the recipient when you place a videophone call.
[OFF] : Send a substitute image to the recipient when you place a videophone call.
Select a substitute image from My picture/Chara-den of the Data Box at [Substitute
image].
ˎ You can set the following files.
Category
File format
My picture
GIF/JPEG
Chara-den
−
File size
Max. 50K bytes
Max. 100K bytes
Image size
Max. [QCIF(W176×H144)]
−
※ You cannot set an image with file restrictions or a frame image.
The Set outgoing image is set.
74
Setting the Videophone Image Quality
You can set the quality of an image to be sent to the recipient.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Call] → [Videophone] → [Visual preference]
and press
Voice/Videophone Calls
[Prefer img qual] : Send an image with priority on image quality.
[Normal]
: Send an image by keeping a balance between image quality and movement.
[Prefer motion] : Send an image with priority on movement.
Select the quality of an image to be sent and press
The Visual preference is set.
Redialing by Voice Call When the Videophone Is Not Connected
When the videophone call is not connected, the FOMA terminal automatically redials by
voice call. When the videophone call is connected successfully, the FOMA terminal does
not redial by voice call.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Call] → [Videophone] → [Auto redial(voice)]
and press
[ON] : Redial by voice call.
[OFF] : Do not redial by voice call.
Select [ON]/[OFF] and press
The Auto redial(voice) is set.
● You are charged for a call instead of digital communication when you redial by voice call.
Using the Hands-free Function
You can set whether to use the hands-free function during a videophone call.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Call] → [Videophone] → [Hands-free] and
press
[ON] : You hear the recipient’s/caller’s voice from the speaker during a videophone call.
[OFF] : You hear the recipient’s/caller’s voice from the earpiece during a videophone call.
Select [ON]/[OFF] and press
The Hands-free is set.
● When the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (optional) is connected to the FOMA terminal, you
hear a recipient’s voice from the Earphone/Microphone, regardless of the Hands-free setting.
Continued
75
Setting How to Answer a Videophone Call during i-mode
You can set how to answer a videophone call received during i-mode or packet
communication, for example, sending or receiving mail.
Voice/Videophone Calls
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Call] → [Videophone] → [V.ph while packet]
and press
[Prefer V.phone] : Receive a videophone call. When you answer the videophone call, the packet
communication in progress is disconnected.
[Prefer packet] : Continue the packet communication without receiving a videophone call. The received
call is saved in the Received record.
[V.ph voicemail] : Connect a received videophone call to the Voice Mail Service Center.
[Call forwarding] : Connect a received videophone call to a forwarding phone number.
Select the operation to be performed when you receive a videophone call during
i-mode communication and press
The V.ph while packet is set.
Setting Notice for Switching between Voice and Videophone Calls

You can set whether to notify the recipient/caller that the FOMA terminal is capable of
switching between voice and videophone calls.
ˎ You cannot perform this setting when you are outside of the service area or in a place where radio waves do not
reach, or during a voice or videophone call.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Management] → [NW Services] → [V.ph switch
notice] and press
Ｖ．ｐｈ ｓｗｉｔｃｈ ｎｏｔｉｃｅ
Ｉｎｄｉｃａｔｉｏｎ ＯＮ
Ｉｎｄｉｃａｔｉｏｎ ＯＦＦ
Ｃｈｅｃｋ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Select [Indication ON] → [Yes] and press
When you do not want to notify
Select [Indication OFF] → [Yes].
To check the setting
Select [Check setting].
76
PushTalk
What is PushTalk? ................................................................................................................ 78
Originating a PushTalk Call .................................................................................................. 80
Adding a Member during PushTalk Communication ............................................................ 81
Receiving a PushTalk Call .................................................................................................... 82
Saving Data in the PushTalk Phonebook ............................................................................. 82
Originating a PushTalk Call Using the PushTalk Phonebook ............................................... 84
Deleting a PushTalk Phonebook Entry ................................................................................. 86
Using the PushTalk Phonebook ....................................................................  86
Setting the PushTalk Operation .................................................................  87
77
What is PushTalk?
PushTalk
You can communicate among several persons (up to five persons including yourself)
to display the PushTalk phonebook, selecting
with a simple operation of pressing
. Every time you press
(speak), you are charged for
recipients, and pressing
PushTalk communication.
ˎ For more details on PushTalk or compatible models, see the DoCoMo’s website or “Mobile Phone User’s Guide
【Network services】”.
PushTalkPlus
The PushTalkPlus is a service that allows you to communicate simultaneously with up to 20 persons (including
yourself). It also allows you to use PushTalk more conveniently by using the shared phonebook on the network
or checking the status of members.
※ For details about operations, see the general information which you are handed when you subscribe to the
service.
※ You need to subscribe to PushTalkPlus separately.
Using the Display during PushTalk Communication
Main display
ͦ
ͧ
Ｏｎ ＰｕｓｈＴａｌｋ
ドコモ一郎
○○○同好会
ͪ
ドコモ一郎
ドコモ三郎
ドコモ二郎
０９０ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ
ͨ
ͩ
Ｃｏｎｎｅｃｔｅｄ
Ｃｏｎｎｅｃｔｅｄ
Ｄｉｓｃｏｎｎｅｃｔ
Ｃａｌｌｉｎｇ
ͫ
Sub-display
ͨ
78
Ｏｎ ＰｕｓｈＴａｌｋ
ドコモ一郎
ͦ
: During PushTalk communication
ͦ
: Hands-free ON
ͧ
ͨ Active speaker
The phone number (or the member name when the speaker is saved in
the Phonebook) appears
[Myself]
: You are currently the active speaker (you can speak)
[User Unset]
: The Caller ID of the caller is set to [OFF]
[?]
: The active speaker is not identified
(No indication) : There is no active speaker (open status)※
※ When there is no active speaker, the group name appears in the
sub-display.
ͩ Group name
Displayed only in the display of the caller who originated a call using a
group
ͪ Members
The phone number (or the member name when the member is saved in
the Phonebook) appears
[User Unset]
: The Caller ID of the caller is set to [OFF]
ͫ Communication status
Connected : The caller who originated a PushTalk call
Connected : Currently participating in the PushTalk communication
Calling※
: The recipient’s terminal is ringing
Disconnect※ : The recipient ended the PushTalk session, does not
answer the call, or is outside of the service area.
Otherwise the recipient’s terminal is powered off
Driving※
: Public mode (Drive mode) is set
※ These icons appear only when PushTalk communication is performed
among several persons.
Operations during PushTalk Communication
Operation
Speak
Key operation
When the floor is open, you can speak only while you press and hold
While another member has the floor, you cannot get it even if you press
Add a member
(Add). This operation is enabled only when you originate a PushTalk
PushTalk
Press
call.
Switch ON/OFF of the hands-free operation Press
( ). Every time you press the key, the ON/OFF setting is switched.
Adjust the volume of the caller’s voice Press
Terminate a PushTalk call
Press
Receive a voice call
Press
(P.63).
If you receive a voice call, the PushTalk communication is terminated.
The operation for an incoming voice call while using PushTalk can be customized (P.87).
● Each speech session granted by obtaining the floor is time limited. The obtained floor is released after
the time limit. The PushTalk communication is terminated if no member takes over the floor within a certain
interval.
● When there is any change in PushTalk communication status or a member takes over the floor, the signal
tone sounds.
● You cannot use i-mode during PushTalk communication.
● When other functions are activated, you cannot obtain the floor. However, when you activate a function while
you have the floor, you can speak while you press and hold
● When you receive a videophone call, data communication, or a PushTalk call during PushTalk
communication, a new call is saved in the Received record and the current PushTalk call is continued.
79
Originating a PushTalk Call
PushTalk
ˎ You cannot originate a PushTalk call during a voice call, a videophone call, or data communication, or while the
B mode is set in 2in1.
ˎ If you originate a PushTalk call during i-mode communication, the i-mode communication is terminated.
Originating a PushTalk call while running i-αppli also stops the i-αppli.
ˎ Number B of 2in1 cannot be used for PushTalk and PushTalkPlus services.
Enter a phone number in the stand-by display.
Press
When you originate a PushTalk call, it is switched to the hands-free
operation that allows you to hear the signal tone from the speaker.
Ｄｉａｌｉｎｇ ＰｕｓｈＴａｌｋ
０９０ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ
To speak
Press
while the floor is open. You can speak while you press and
hold
Ｏｎ ＰｕｓｈＴａｌｋ
Ｍｙｓｅｌｆ
０９０ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ
Ｃｏｎｎｅｃｔｅｄ
Press
to end the communication.
● You cannot use PushTalk to place a call to emergency numbers (110, 119, and 118).
● You cannot set whether to notify the caller ID when you originate a PushTalk call even if you add “186/184”.
● The setting whether to originate a PushTalk call with/without the caller ID follows the setting of the Set
Notification (P.44).
● When you set the Set Notification to [Notify], all members including added members are notified the phone
numbers of the person who originates and all members. When you set it to [Not notify], [User Unset] is
displayed in the fields of the speaker and all members including added members.
● If you set [Call with ID]/[Call without ID] of the caller ID at the Option call display when you originate a
PushTalk call, the phone numbers of yours and all members are/are not notified to all members based on
the selected call condition.
● When you originate a PushTalk call, if the Set Notification is set as well as the Call condition is set at the
Option call display, the following priority is applied.
1. Call condition selected at the Option call display when originating a PushTalk call
2. Set Notification
Originating a PushTalk Call from the Call Record
You can originate a PushTalk call using the Redial and Received records.
ˎ You cannot originate a PushTalk call using the call records of Number B when 2in1 is used.
Example: Originating a PushTalk call from the Received record
Press
) in the stand-by display.
The Received record display appears.
80
2
Select a received record and press
When a PushTalk call is originated, the signal tone sounds.
● If a member is disconnected during PushTalk communication among several persons, the disconnected
member can come back to the session using the Redial/Received record as long as the other members
continue it. When the PushTalk communication is already ended, the call is going to be a new one.
PushTalk
Adding a Member during PushTalk Communication
If you originate a PushTalk call, you can add a member during PushTalk communication.
You can add members up to the maximum number allowed for communication (up to five
persons including yourself) and also place a second call to a non-participating member.
Example: Selecting a member from the PushTalk phonebook
Press
(Add) during PushTalk communication.
The screen for selecting the method of adding a member appears.
[View PushTalk PB] : Select a member from the PushTalk phonebook.
[View phonebook] : Select a member from the FOMA terminal phonebook.
[Direct input]
: Enter a phone number directly.
Select [View PushTalk PB] and press
携帯あき子
携帯なつ子
携帯はる子
ドコモ一郎
ドコモ二郎
Select a member and press
“
To select a member from a group
Press
(Group) and select a group.
Ｍｅｍｂｅｒ
” appears for the selected member.
Press
(Complete).
The Members to add display appears.
Press
(Call).
The FOMA terminal starts calling the selected member.
Ｏｎ ＰｕｓｈＴａｌｋ
Ｍｙｓｅｌｆ
携帯あき子
ドコモ一郎
ドコモ二郎
携帯はる子
Ｃｏｎｎｅｃｔｅｄ
Ｃｏｎｎｅｃｔｅｄ
Ｃｏｎｎｅｃｔｅｄ
Ｃａｌｌｉｎｇ
● Members added during PushTalk communication are not displayed in the detailed information of the Redial/
Received record.
● You can add a party who uses a PushTalk-compatible model, as a PushTalk group member. However, this
added member is not displayed on the displays of non-compatible models and the signal tone does not
sound either.
81
Receiving a PushTalk Call
When you receive a PushTalk call, you are notified by flashing indicator, ring tone,
vibrator, etc. The operation for an incoming PushTalk call varies depending on the
settings of the Incoming set, Manner mode, etc.
PushTalk
ˎ If you receive a PushTalk call during a voice call, the PushTalk call is not connected. The notification icon of
missed call appears and the call is saved in the Received record. A PushTalk call received during a videophone
call or data communication is not connected, either. The call is not saved in the Received record.
ˎ When receiving a PushTalk call during i-mode communication, the setting for the i-mode arrival act is applied.
When you receive a PushTalk call, press
When the call is answered, it is switched to the hands-free operation
that allows you to hear the recipient’s voice from the speaker.
When you do not want to answer the call
Press
ＰｕｓｈＴａｌｋ Ｇｒ ｃａｌｌ
ドコモ一郎
ドコモ三郎
ドコモ二郎
０９０ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ
The names of the members appear. If the member is not saved in the
Phonebook, this member’s phone number appears instead.
Ｏｎ ＰｕｓｈＴａｌｋ
ドコモ二郎
ドコモ一郎
ドコモ三郎
ドコモ二郎
０９０ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ
or
Ｃｏｎｎｅｃｔｅｄ
Ｃｏｎｎｅｃｔｅｄ
Ｃｏｎｎｅｃｔｅｄ
Ｃａｌｌｉｎｇ
ˎ When the person who originates a PushTalk call sets the Set Notification to
[Notify], all members including added members are notified the phone numbers
of the person who originates and all members. When the person sets it to [Not
notify], all members are displayed as [User Unset].
To speak
Press
while the floor is open. You can speak while you press and
hold
Press
to end the communication.
(Answer) instead of
or
. When you set the Any key
● You can answer a PushTalk call by pressing
answer to [ON], you can also press
to
, or
to answer a PushTalk call (P.64).
● A PushTalk call cannot be put on hold.
● When you receive a PushTalk call originated from a caller who is saved as a nuisance caller, the call is
rejected. The notification icon of missed call appears and the call is saved in the Received record.
Saving Data in the PushTalk Phonebook
You can save up to 1,000 members in the PushTalk phonebook.
Members you want to save in the PushTalk phonebook must be also saved in the FOMA
terminal phonebook. You can save only one phone number in the PushTalk phonebook
for each FOMA terminal phonebook entry. The name of a member displayed in the
PushTalk phonebook is diverted from that saved in the FOMA terminal phonebook.
ˎ When 2in1 is set to the B mode, you cannot save data in the PushTalk phonebook.
ˎ When 2in1 is set to the Dual mode, you cannot save the phonebook data for which the Phonebook 2in1 setting
is set to [B] in the PushTalk phonebook.
ˎ When 2in1 is set to the A mode, the member for which the Phonebook 2in1 setting is set to [B] is not displayed.
82
1
Press
in the stand-by display and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Create] and press
The screen for selecting the saving method appears.
Select [View phonebook] and press
PushTalk
[View phonebook] : Select from the FOMA terminal phonebook.
[Direct input]
: Save new data in the FOMA terminal phonebook and then save it in the PushTalk
phonebook.
ˎ Follow the same steps as in “Add to FOMA terminal phonebook” (P.91, step 3 to 6).
The FOMA terminal phonebook appears.
Select an entry → a phone number and press
Ｂａｓｉｃ
Ｄｅｔａｉｌ Ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
ドコモ太郎
０１５
０９０ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ
The phone number is saved in the PushTalk phonebook and “
appears in the entry in the FOMA terminal phonebook.
”
● When you save a person saved as Secret in the FOMA terminal phonebook in the PushTalk phonebook, the
entry is not displayed in the PushTalk phonebook. To display the name, set the Secret display to [ON] (P.131).
Setting a Group
You can originate a PushTalk call to several recipients by saving them in a group as
members beforehand.
You can save up to 20 groups in the PushTalk phonebook, 19 members for each group.
Saving a Group
Press
in the stand-by display and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Group setting] and press
The Group setting display appears.
To display group numbers
When saved, group icons are displayed instead of group numbers. Press
display temporarily between group icons and group numbers.
Select a group and press
to switch the
Ｅｄｉｔ ｇｒｏｕｐ ３
Ｇｒｏｕｐ ｎａｍｅ
グループ３
Ｉｃｏｎ
Enter a group name at [Group name].
Enter a group name within 10 full-width or 21 half-width characters.
Continued
83
5
Select a group icon at [Icon].
Press
(Complete).
The group is saved in the PushTalk phonebook.
PushTalk
Saving a Member to a Group
Press
in the stand-by display and press
(Group).
The Group list display appears.
Select a group and press
The Member list display of the selected group appears.
Press
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ｍｅｍｂｅｒ
(Edit).
４／１９
携帯あき子
携帯なつ子
携帯はる子
ドコモ一郎
ドコモ二郎
Select a member and press
“ ” appears on the selected member.
To cancel all selections
Press
(Rel all).
Press
(Complete).
The selected member is saved in the group.
Originating a PushTalk Call Using the PushTalk Phonebook
If you save persons as members in the PushTalk phonebook, you can originate a
PushTalk call to several persons.
ˎ When 2in1 is set to the B mode, you cannot use the PushTalk phonebook.
ˎ When 2in1 is set to the Dual mode, you cannot use members for which the Phonebook 2in1 setting is set to [B].
Press
Ｍｅｍｂｅｒ
携帯あき子
携帯なつ子
携帯はる子
ドコモ一郎
ドコモ二郎
84
in the stand-by display, select a member, and press
“ ” appears for the selected member.
To display phone numbers
Press
to switch the display temporarily between names and
phone numbers.
2
Press
When a PushTalk call is originated, the signal tone sounds.
Ｄｉａｌｉｎｇ ＰＴ ｇｒｏｕｐ
携帯あき子
携帯はる子
ドコモ一郎
ドコモ二郎
PushTalk
To speak
Press
while the floor is open. You can speak while you press and
hold
Ｏｎ ＰｕｓｈＴａｌｋ
Ｍｙｓｅｌｆ
携帯あき子
携帯はる子
ドコモ一郎
ドコモ二郎
Ｃａｌｌｉｎｇ
Ｃｏｎｎｅｃｔｅｄ
Ｃｏｎｎｅｃｔｅｄ
Ｃｏｎｎｅｃｔｅｄ
Press
to end the communication.
Originating a PushTalk Call from the Group
Press
in the stand-by display and press
Ｇｒｏｕｐ
○○○同好会
△△△クラブ
○△○愛好会
グループ４
グループ５
グループ６
グループ７
グループ８
グループ９
グループ１０
グループ１１
グループ１２
Select a group and press
Ｄｉａｌｉｎｇ ＰＴ ｇｒｏｕｐ
○○○同好会
携帯あき子
携帯はる子
ドコモ一郎
ドコモ二郎
Ｏｎ ＰｕｓｈＴａｌｋ
When a PushTalk call is originated, the signal tone sounds.
To originate a call to specific members by selecting them from a group
Select a group → members and press
To speak
Press
while the floor is open. You can speak while you press and
hold
Ｍｙｓｅｌｆ
○○○同好会
携帯あき子
携帯はる子
ドコモ一郎
ドコモ二郎
(Group).
To display group numbers
When saved, group icons are displayed instead of group numbers.
Press
to switch the display temporarily between group icons and
group numbers.
Ｃａｌｌｉｎｇ
Ｃｏｎｎｅｃｔｅｄ
Ｃｏｎｎｅｃｔｅｄ
Ｃｏｎｎｅｃｔｅｄ
Continued
85
3
Press
to end the communication.
● When originating a PushTalk call to a group, you can originate a call to up to four members even if more
than five members are saved in the group.
PushTalk
Deleting a PushTalk Phonebook Entry
You can delete members saved in the PushTalk phonebook using three methods.
Example: Deleting a member
Press
in the stand-by display.
To delete several members
From the Function menu, select [Delete] → [Select&delete], select members, press
(Delete), and select [Yes]/[Delete from main].
To delete all members
From the Function menu, select [Delete] → [Delete all], enter the Security code, and select
[Yes]/[Delete from main].
ˎ When 2in1 is used, the screen informing to delete members of all modes of the Phonebook 2in1
setting appears. If you select [Yes], the members of all modes of the Phonebook 2in1 setting are
deleted.
To reset a group to the default setting
Press
(Group), move the cursor to a group and from the Function menu, select [Reset
group] → [Yes].
Select a member and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Delete] → [Delete one] → [Yes] and press
The selected member is deleted.
To delete the selected member from the FOMA terminal phonebook
Select [Delete] → [Delete one] → [Delete from main].
Using the PushTalk Phonebook

You can connect to the network and use the PushTalkPlus service (P.78).
ˎ To use the PushTalkPlus service, you must subscribe to this service.
Press
in the stand-by display and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [NW connection] → [Yes] and press
The call is connected to the network.
86
Setting the PushTalk Operation

Setting Whether to Answer a Call Automatically
PushTalk
You can set whether to answer an incoming PushTalk call automatically using the handsfree function.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Application] → [PushTalk] → [Auto answer setting]
and press
[ON] : A PushTalk call you receive is answered automatically using the hands-free function. When the
Manner mode is set, the call is not answered automatically.
[OFF] : A PushTalk call you receive is answered by pressing
, etc.
Select [ON]/[OFF] and press
The Auto answer setting is set.
Setting the Ring Time
If you select [OFF] for the Auto answer setting, set the ring time of the PushTalk call.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Application] → [PushTalk] → [Set ring time] and
press
Enter the ring time within 01 to 60 seconds.
Enter the Push Talk ring time.
The Set ring time is set.
Setting How to Answer a Voice Call during PushTalk Communication
You can set how to answer a voice call when you receive it during PushTalk
communication.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Application] → [PushTalk] → [P-Talk arrival act]
and press
: Receive a voice call and you can answer it.
: Reject an incoming voice call. The missed call notification icon appears and the call is
saved in the Received record.
[Voice Mail]
: Connect an incoming voice call to the Voice Mail Service Center.
[Call Forwarding] : Connect an incoming voice call to a forwarding number.
[Answer]
[Call Rejection]
Select the operation to be performed when you receive a voice call during PushTalk
communication and press
The P-Talk arrival act is set.
Continued
87
Setting Whether to Receive a PushTalk Call during i-mode
You can set whether to receive a PushTalk call by disconnecting i-mode if there is any
incoming PushTalk call during i-mode or i-mode communication.
PushTalk
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Application] → [PushTalk] → [i-mode arrival act]
and press
[Prefer PushTalk] : Receive the PushTalk call and disconnect i-mode. After the PushTalk call is finished,
the previous display reappears.
[Prefer i-mode]
: Continue i-mode without receiving a PushTalk call. The missed PushTalk call is not
saved in the Received record.
Select the preferred function and press
The i-mode arrival act is set.
Using the Hands-free Function
You can set whether to use the hands-free function during PushTalk communication.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Application] → [PushTalk] → [Hands-free] and
press
[ON] : You hear a member’s voice from the speaker during PushTalk communication.
[OFF] : You hear a member’s voice from the earpiece during PushTalk communication.
Select [ON]/[OFF] and press
The Hands-free is set.
● When the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (optional) is connected to the FOMA terminal, you
hear a member’s voice from the Earphone/Microphone, regardless of the Hands-free setting.
● When the FOMA terminal is folded or used in the TV style, the hands-free call is performed regardless of the
Hands-free setting.
● When the FOMA terminal is opened while the Manner mode is set, you cannot answer a call using the
hands-free function regardless of the Hands-free setting.
Setting the Operation for the FOMA Terminal Being Folded during PushTalk Communication
You can end a call or switch a call to the hands-free operation by folding the FOMA
terminal during PushTalk communication.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Application] → [PushTalk] → [Setting when folded]
and press
[Speaker call] : You hear a member’s voice from the speaker during PushTalk communication.
[Finish]
: Hang up the PushTalk call.
Select [Speaker call]/[Finish] and press
The Setting when folded is set.
● The operation when the FOMA terminal is changed to the TV style during PushTalk communication follows
the Setting when folded.
● The Setting when folded is disabled when the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (optional) is
connected to the FOMA terminal and the call remains connected through the Earphone/Microphone even if
you fold the FOMA terminal.
88
Phonebook
Phonebooks the FOMA Terminal Can Use .......................................................................... 90
Saving an Entry in the FOMA Terminal Phonebook .........  91
Saving an Entry in the UIM Phonebook ...........................................  93
Saving the Redial/Received Record in the Phonebook ........................................................ 94
Saving a Group .............................................................................................  95
Displaying the Phonebook ................................................................................................... 96
Searching the Phonebook ......................................................................  97
Setting the Display of the Phonebook ....................................................  97
Editing a Phonebook Entry ........................................................................  98
Deleting a Phonebook Entry ................................................................... 98
Checking the Number of Entries Saved ......................................................  99
Dialing Quickly to Frequently Called Numbers ................................................. <2-touch dial> 99
Storing (Restoring/Updating) the Phonebook at the Data Security Service Center ...  100
89
Phonebooks the FOMA Terminal Can Use
The FOMA terminal is equipped with two types of phonebooks, the FOMA terminal phonebook,
which you can set up with various functions, and the UIM (FOMA card) phonebook, which can
be used with other FOMA terminals. Use either phonebook to your convenience.
ˎ You can also use the PushTalk phonebook dedicated for PushTalk that can be created using data saved in the
FOMA terminal phonebook (P.82).
Phonebook
The table below shows the data you can save in each phonebook.
Data to be saved
Number of data
entries
Group
Phone number to
be saved
Mail address to
be saved
Image to be
saved
Other data to be
saved
Group to be
saved
FOMA terminal phonebook
You can save up to 1,000 entries.
UIM phonebook
You can save up to 50 entries.
You can sort entries in groups from Group 0 to 19.
You can sort entries in groups
from Group 0 to 10.
You can save up to three numbers for each phonebook You can save one number for
entry and a total of up to 3,000 numbers in the Phonebook. each phonebook entry.
You can save one number for each phonebook entry in
the PushTalk phonebook.
You can select from nine types of icons, such as You cannot select icons. “ ” is
saved automatically.
[ Public] and [ Mobile1].
You can save up to three addresses for each phonebook You can save one address for
entry and a total of up to 3,000 addresses in the each phonebook entry.
Phonebook.
You can also save one Secret code for each address.
You can select from five types of icons, such as You cannot select icons. “ ” is
[ Mobile1] and [ Home].
saved automatically.
You can save one Des call display and one Des substitute You cannot save images.
image for each phonebook entry. You can save up to 1,000
each of still image and Chara-den files in the Phonebook.
You can save one name, reading, memory number, You can save one name and
location information, postal code, postal address, and reading for each phonebook
birthday for each phonebook entry.
entry.
You can also set one type of Des phone tone, Des mail
tone, Select phone Illum., Select mail Illum., and Secret
for each phonebook entry.
You can save one group name and group icon for each You can save one group name for
group.
each group. You cannot change
a group name with [ グループな
し]. You cannot select icons.
You can also set one type of Des call display, Des phone Unavailable
tone, Des mail tone, Select phone Illum., and Select mail
Illum. for each group.
ˎ You can use phonebook data saved in your UIM when this UIM is used on another FOMA terminal.
● For the order of priority between call image, ring tone, and incoming indicator color, see P.104.
● When you receive a call or mail from a person saved as Secret, the regular ring tone, incoming image and
incoming indicator color are used, and a name of the caller/sender is not displayed. To enable the settings
of a person saved as Secret or a group that includes a person saved as Secret, set the Secret display to [ON].
● When 2in1 is used, the phonebook is automatically switched to the available one according to the 2in1
modes. When you save data in the phonebook, the Phonebook 2in1 setting is automatically set according to
a compatible 2in1 mode. You can also change the Phonebook 2in1 setting by each data or group (P.352).
● Please note that when you change models and attempt to transfer the saved data to a new mobile phone at
our service counter (DoCoMo shop, etc.), you may not be able to copy it to the FOMA terminal depending
on the specifications of your new phone.
90
Saving an Entry in the FOMA Terminal Phonebook

Up to 1,000 entries can be saved in the FOMA terminal phonebook.
Press
) in the stand-by display and press
Select [Main memory] and press
Ｂａｓｉｃ
Ｄｅｔａｉｌ Ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
(Create).
Phonebook
To save an entry in the UIM phonebook
Select [UIM] (P.93).
０００
グループなし
Ｐｕｂｌｉｃ
Ｍｏｂｉｌｅ１
ＯＦＦ
Save each item at the Basic display.
Icon
Settings
Enter a name within 16 full-width or 32 half-width characters.
When entering a name, the reading is automatically entered.
ˎ To edit the reading, enter the reading within 32 half-width characters.
Enter a memory number from 000 to 999. The smallest available memory number is
automatically entered. Enter a name/phone number/mail address to change it.
Select a group. [ グループなし] is automatically entered. Enter a name/phone number/
mail address to change it.
Enter within 26 digits per phone number. You can save the pause (P), timer (T), “+”, “#”,
and sub-address separator ( ).
ˎ If a phone number is saved with the “184” or “186”, SMS cannot be sent to this phone
number even if you select it.
Select a phone number type icon. [ Public] is automatically entered. Enter a phone
number to change it.
Enter within 50 half-width alphanumeric characters and symbols per mail address.
ˎ When sending mail to an i-mode terminal (including a Mova terminal), you need to
specify only the mail address portion before the @ mark.
Select a mail address type icon. [ Mobile1] is automatically entered. Enter a mail address
to change it.
When the recipient saves a Secret code in a mail address (phone number@docomo.ne.jp),
enter the Secret code. When sending mail, the Secret code is automatically added.
ˎ When you save a mail address as “phone number + Secret code@docomo.ne.jp” in
the Phonebook, if you save a Secret code, you cannot send mail or reply mail to this
address. To avoid this problem, change the mail address to “phone number@docomo.
ne.jp” and save a Secret code.
ˎ The Secret code is masked by “＊＊＊＊”. Only when the Secret display is set to [ON], it is
displayed in numbers.
ˎ To save your Secret code, see the “Mobile Phone User’s Guide【i-mode】”.
Select [ON]/[OFF] of the Secret.
ˎ To display the entry saved as Secret, set the Secret display to [ON].
Continued
91
4
Press
Icon
and save each item at the Detail display.
Settings
Select an image from My Picture/i-motion of the Data Box or record a new one to be used
as the Des call display that is displayed when placing/receiving a voice or videophone call,
right after receiving mail, or when displaying the individual Phonebook entry.
ˎ You can set the following files.
Category
My picture
i-motion※
File format
GIF/JPEG
MP4
File size
Max. 100K bytes
Max. 10M bytes
Image size
Max. [QVGA(240×320)]
Max. [VGA(640×480)]
Phonebook
※ Some i-motion may not be set.
ˎ It may take time to display a large-sized image.
ˎ To use an image after recording it by the camera, select [Camera]/[Movie] (P.142, 146).
You can record an image in the following sizes.
Still image
Out-camera
In-camera
Movie
Max. [QVGA(240×320)]
[sQCIF(128×96)]/[QCIF(176×144)]
Max. [VGA(640×480)]
ˎ To specify no image, select [None].
(Play).
ˎ To check the image, move the cursor to an image and press
Add the location information from the Position location, Location history, or image (P.237).
When the location information is saved, the message “Has Loc. info” appears.
Enter a postal code within seven half-width digits.
Enter a postal address within 64 full-width or 128 half-width characters.
Enter a birthday within the range from 1900/01/01 to 2050/12/31.
Press
Icon
and save each item at the Setting display.
Settings
Select the Des substitute image to be sent during a videophone call from My picture/Charaden of the Data Box.
ˎ You can set the following files.
Category
My picture
Chara-den
File format
GIF/JPEG
−
File size
Max. 50K bytes
Max. 100K bytes
Image size
Max. [QCIF(176×144)]
−
ˎ To specify no substitute image, select [None]. A substitute image or your own image set
in the Set outgoing image (P.74) is sent.
Select a ring tone from MUSIC/i-motion/Melody of the Data Box to be used as the Des
phone tone/Des mail tone that sounds when receiving a voice or videophone call and right
after receiving mail.
®
ˎ You can set the following files. You can select a Chaku-Uta from [i-motion].
Category
MUSIC※
i-motion※
Melody
File format
AAC-LC/HE-AAC
MP4
SMF/MFi
File size
Max. 5M bytes
Max. 10M bytes
Max. 350K bytes
Image size
−
Max. [VGA(640×480)]
−
※ Some files may not be set.
When you select a Chaku-Uta Full® that has a choice of specified playback ranges from
[MUSIC], the screen for selecting a type of setting appears. If you select [Full song], the
entire track of Chaku-Uta Full® is set for the ring tone. If you select [Point], the specified
playback range of Chaku-Uta Full® is set for the ring tone.
ˎ To specify no ring tone, select [None].
ˎ To mute the ring tone, select [Silent].
(Play).
ˎ To check the ring tone, move the cursor to the ring tone and press
Select a color for the Select phone/mail Illum. that flashes when receiving a voice or
videophone call and right after receiving mail. When you move the cursor to a color, the
incoming indicator flashes accordingly.
ˎ To specify no color, select [None].
92
6
Press
(Complete).
The entered data is saved in the FOMA terminal phonebook.
Saving an Entry in the UIM Phonebook
Phonebook
● If you set [None] for the Des call display, Des phone/mail tone, or Select phone/mail Illum., then the call
image, ring tone, and indicator color saved for the Group setting are automatically used for the respective
function. If these settings are not saved in the Group setting, the Incoming set (P.102) or Animation (P.112)
is used.
● If you set an i-motion with video and sound tracks for the Des mail tone, the i-motion image appears when
mail reception is completed.
● If you set an i-motion for the Des call display, the image set for the Animation is displayed when you place a
voice or videophone call.
● If you set an i-motion or Chaku-Uta Full® for the Des phone/mail tone or set an i-motion for the Des call
display, the settings may be changed in some cases.

Up to 50 entries can be saved in the UIM (FOMA card) phonebook.
Press
) in the stand-by display and press
Select [UIM] and press
(Create).
To save an entry in the FOMA terminal phonebook
Select [Main memory] (P.91).
Ｂａｓｉｃ
グループなし
Save each item.
Icon
Settings
Enter a name within 10 full-width or 21 half-width characters. If you use a mixture of fullwidth and half-width characters or half-width katakana characters for the name, the number
of characters that you can save is limited to 10 characters.
When entering a name, the reading is automatically entered.
ˎ To edit the reading, enter the reading within 12 full-width katakana characters or 25
half-width alphanumeric characters. If you use a mixture of full-width and half-width
characters for the reading, the number of characters that you can save is limited to 12
characters.
Select a group. When entering a name/phone number/mail address, group [ グループなし]
is automatically entered.
Enter a phone number within 26 digits (20 digits for some types of UIM).
Enter a mail address within 50 half-width alphanumeric characters and symbols. If you use
symbols for the mail address, you may not be able to save up to the maximum allowable
number of characters.
ˎ When sending mail to an i-mode terminal (including a Mova terminal), you need to
specify only the mail address portion before the @ mark.
Press
(Complete).
The entered data is saved in the UIM phonebook.
● Data copied from the FOMA terminal phonebook or received using a function such as the infrared or iC
communication may not be saved correctly.
93
Saving the Redial/Received Record in the Phonebook
A phone number saved in the record can be directly added to the Phonebook.
Example: Saving a received record in the FOMA terminal phonebook as a new entry
Press
) in the stand-by display.
Phonebook
To save a number from the redial record
Press
( ) in the stand-by display.
Select a received record and press
(Save).
The screen for selecting where to save appears.
Select [Ordinary PB] and press
The screen for selecting how to save to the Phonebook appears.
To save data in the PushTalk phonebook
Select [PushTalk PB] → a PushTalk phone number.
Select [New] and press
The screen for selecting where to save appears.
When you select [Add]
Select an entry to which you want to add from the Phonebook.
Select [Main memory] and press
The Edit phonebook display appears.
To save to the UIM phonebook
Select [UIM].
Save other items.
ˎ Follow the same steps as in “Add to FOMA terminal phonebook” (P.91, step 3 to 5) or in “Add to UIM
phonebook” (P.93, step 3).
Press
(Complete).
The entry is saved in the FOMA terminal phonebook.
94
Saving a Group

Up to 20 groups can be saved in the FOMA terminal phonebook, and up to 10 groups
can be saved in the UIM (FOMA card) phonebook.
ˎ You cannot change [
グループなし] in the UIM phonebook.
Example: Saving a group in the FOMA terminal phonebook
Press
(Func) in the Phonebook.
Phonebook
The Function menu appears.
Select [Group setting] and press
Ｎｏ Ｇｒｏｕｐ
Ｆｒｉｅｎｄｓ
Ｏｆｆｉｃｅ
Ｇｒｏｕｐ3
Ｇｒｏｕｐ４
Ｇｒｏｕｐ５
Ｇｒｏｕｐ６
Ｇｒｏｕｐ７
Ｇｒｏｕｐ８
Ｇｒｏｕｐ９
Ｇｒｏｕｐ１０
Ｇｒｏｕｐ１１
Select a group and press
Ｂａｓｉｃ
To display group numbers
When saved, group icons are displayed instead of group numbers.
to switch the display temporarily between group icons and
Press
group numbers.
To reorder a group
Press
(Reorder), select a group, move the cursor to the place to
move to, press
(Move), and press
(Complete).
Ｇｒｏｕｐ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
グループなし
Enter a group name at [
].
Enter a group name within 10 full-width or 21 half-width characters. For data in the UIM
phonebook, if you use a mixture of full-width and half-width characters or half-width katakana
characters for the group name, the number of characters that you can save is limited to 10
characters.
ˎ For data in the UIM phonebook, go to step 7.
Select a group icon at [
Press
].
and save the Des call display, Des phone tone, and Select phone Illum.
ˎ Follow the same steps as those for the Des call display, Des phone/mail tone, and Select phone/mail
Illum. described in the Add to FOMA terminal phonebook (P.91, step 3 to 5).
Press
(Complete).
The group is set.
● When the Des call display, Des phone/mail tone, or Select phone/mail Illum. is set for both the Phonebook
and Group setting, the setting for the Phonebook has higher priority.
95
Displaying the Phonebook
You can use the Phonebook to perform various operations.
Example: Displaying the FOMA terminal phonebook
Press
か さ
た
) in the stand-by display.
な は ま や ら
Phonebook
ドコモ一郎
ドコモ三郎
ドコモ二郎
ドコモ太郎
ˎ When 2in1 is set to the Dual mode, the Phonebook 2in1 setting is confirmed by
the following icons.
A mode
Select an entry and press
Ｂａｓｉｃ
Ｄｅｔａｉｌ Ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
ドコモ太郎
ト゛コモタロウ
０１５
Ｆｒｉｅｎｄｓ
０９０ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ
ｄｏｃｏｍｏ．ｔａｒｏ． △△ ＠ｄｏｃｏ
ｍｏ．ｎｅ．ｊｐ
ＯＦＦ
B mode
Common
To change the phonebook being displayed
From the Function menu, select [Change to UIM]/[Change to Main].
“ ” appears in the UIM phonebook.
To switch the display style
Press
(Display), select [Alphabet]/[Group]/[Number]/[Phone
number].
To attach a Phonebook entry to mail
Move the cursor to data and from the Function menu, select [Attach
to mail].
To place a voice call
Move the cursor to data and press
To place a videophone call
Move the cursor to a phone number and press
(V.phone).
To originate a PushTalk call
Move the cursor to a phone number and press
To send mail
Move the cursor to a mail address and press
(Mail).
To check the call image
Press , move the cursor to a call image and press
(Play).
To use the location information
Press , move the cursor to [ Has loc. Info], and press
To display the detailed location information
Press , move the cursor to [ Has loc. Info], and press
(Detail).
To check the Des substitute image
Press
and move the cursor to the Des substitute image and press
(Play).
To check a ring tone
Press
and move the cursor to a ring tone and press
(Play).
To check an incoming indicator
Press
and move the cursor to an incoming indicator and press
(Check).
To turn on/off the image display
Press
to temporarily turn on/off an image.
● When 2in1 is set to the Dual mode, you can select a caller ID at the Option call display before placing a call
(P.57).
96
Searching the Phonebook

You can search the desired data of the Phonebook by entering a reading, memory
number, and phone number.
Example: Phonebook is ordered alphabetically
Press
) in the stand-by display.
Phonebook
Enter a reading.
か さ
た
な は ま や ら
ドコモ一郎
ドコモ三郎
ドコモ二郎
ドコモ太郎
タ
カナＡａ１２
Every time you enter a letter, the cursor moves to the data which is the
closest one to the entered reading.
When the Phonebook is ordered by the group
Enter a reading. Every time you enter a letter, the cursor moves to the
data which is the closest one to the entered reading within the group.
When the Phonebook is ordered by the memory number
Enter a memory number. Every time you enter a digit, the cursor
moves to the data which is the closest one to the entered memory
number.
When the Phonebook is ordered by the phone number
Enter a phone number. Every time you enter a digit, the cursor moves
to the data which is the closest one to the entered phone number.
Setting the Display of the Phonebook

You can set the type of a phonebook to be displayed and font size to be used for the
Phonebook when you display it and whether to display an image when you display a
single entry of the Phonebook.
Press
(Func) in the Phonebook.
The Function menu appears.
Select [PB setting] and press
Ｐｈｏｎｅｂｏｏｋ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ｗｈｉｃｈ ＰＢ ｔｏ ｕｓｅ
Ｐｈｏｎｅｂｏｏｋ
Ｆｏｎｔ ｓｉｚｅ
Ｌ
Ｓｅｔ ｉｍａｇｅ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ
ＯＮ
Ｓａｖｅ／ａｔｔａｃｈ ｉｍａｇｅ
Ｖａｌｉｄ
: Select a phonebook to be displayed when you display the
Phonebook.
[Font size]
: Select the font size of the Phonebook from [Extra extra
large], [Extra large], [Large], or [Medium].
[Set image display] : Select whether to display the Des call display that was
saved when a single entry of the Phonebook is displayed.
[Save/attach image] : Select whether to save an image that is set for the Des
call display to the microSD memory card when you save
Phonebook data or attach to mail.
[Which PB to use]
Select [Phonebook]/[UIM phonebook] at [Which PB to use].
Select [ON]/[OFF] at [Set image display].
Select [Valid]/[Invalid] at [Save/attach image].
[Valid] : Save an image.
[Invalid] : Do not save an image.
The Phonebook setting is set.
97
Editing a Phonebook Entry
From the Phonebook, select an entry and press
Press

(Edit).
The Edit phonebook display appears.
Phonebook
Edit each item.
ˎ Follow the same steps as in “Add to FOMA terminal phonebook” (P.91, step 3 to 5) or in “Add to UIM
phonebook” (P.93, step 3).
Press
(Complete).
The edited data is saved in the Phonebook.
Deleting a Phonebook Entry

You can delete Phonebook entries using three methods.
ˎ When the Phonebook is ordered by the phone number, [Delete one] and [Select&delete] cannot be selected.
Example: Deleting an entry
Press
か さ
た
) in the stand-by display.
な は ま や ら
ドコモ一郎
ドコモ三郎
ドコモ二郎
ドコモ太郎
To delete several entries
From the Function menu, select [Delete] → [Select&delete], select
entries, press
(Complete), and select [Yes].
ˎ Every time you enter a letter or digit in the Data selection display, the cursor
moves to the data which is the closest one to the entered reading or memory
number.
To delete all Phonebook entries
From the Function menu, select [Delete] → [Delete all], enter the
Security code, and select [Yes].
Select an entry and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Delete] → [Delete one] → [Yes] and press
The selected entry is deleted.
● When an entry to be deleted is also saved in the PushTalk phonebook, it is automatically deleted from the
PushTalk phonebook. When you delete all data of the FOMA terminal phonebook, the Group setting of the
PushTalk phonebook is reset to the default setting.
98
Checking the Number of Entries Saved

You can check the number of entries saved in the FOMA terminal phonebook and UIM
(FOMA card) phonebook and entries saved as Secret.
Press
(Func) in the Phonebook.
The Function menu appears.
Select [Memory status] and press
Phonebook
: Display the number of entries saved in the FOMA terminal
phonebook (including entries saved as Secret).
[Secret]
: Display the number of entries saved as Secret in the FOMA terminal
phonebook (this data is displayed only when the Secret display is
set to [ON]).
[Used(UIM)] : Display the number of entries saved in the UIM phonebook.
[Used]
Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ ｓｔａｔｕｓ
Ｕｓｅｄ
Ｓｅｃｒｅｔ
Ｕｓｅｄ（ＵＩＭ）
４５０
５
２０
Dialing Quickly to Frequently Called Numbers
<2-touch dial>
A call can be placed easily to the recipients saved in memory numbers from 000 to 009
by using a shortcut.
It is useful to save frequently used phone numbers in memory numbers from 000 to 009.
ˎ When the Secret display is set to [OFF], the 2-touch dial cannot be used to place a call to a phone number
saved as Secret.
Example: Placing a call to the recipient saved in the memory number 001
Enter the last one digit of the memory number (0 to 9) in the stand-by display.
To check a recipient’s data saved in a memory number
Enter the memory number (one or two digits) and press
or
.A
list of used memory numbers and their associated entries appears
with the entered memory number highlighted.
Press
After about five seconds, the call is connected to the first phone number of the recipient
saved in memory number 001.
To place a videophone call
Press
(V.phone).
To send mail
Press
(Mail).
To send SMS
Press
(Mail) for over a second.
● The call can be placed or SMS can be sent to the recipients saved in memory numbers from 010 to 099 by
entering the last two digits (10 to 99) of the memory numbers.
99
Storing (Restoring/Updating) the Phonebook at the Data Security Service Center

You can use the Data Security Service to store the FOMA terminal phonebook at the Data
Security Service Center. You can update or restore the stored Phonebook by connecting
to the Data Security Service Center.
Phonebook
ˎ Data Security Service is a paid service that requires a subscription. For details on this service, see the “Mobile
Phone User’s Guide【i-mode】”.
ˎ You cannot save the UIM phonebook at the Center.
Storing/Updating/Restoring the Phonebook
From the Menu, select [LifeKit] → [Data Security Service] → [Connect to Center]
and press
The Security code screen appears.
To connect to the Data Security Service Center from the Phonebook
From the Function menu in the Phonebook, select [Cnct to Center].
Enter the Security code and press
(OK).
The screen for confirming whether to connect to the Data Security Service Center appears.
Select [Yes] and press
The call is connected to the Data Security Service Center and the data is updated. When the
update is completed, the update result screen appears.
● The automatic update of the Phonebook may fail when another function is executed. In this case, “
update failed) appears in the stand-by display.
” (PB
Setting Whether to Send Images of the Phonebook
You can set whether to send a Des call display (JPEG/GIF image) saved in the Phonebook
to the Data Security Service Center.
From the Menu, select [LifeKit] → [Data Security Service] → [Service setting] and
press
The Service setting display appears.
Select [Send]/[Unsend] at [Send phonebook img].
The Send phonebook img is set.
Displaying the Communication History
You can save up to 30 history records of communication with the Data Security Service Center.
ˎ When the number of communication history records exceeds 30, the records with the oldest date/time are
overwritten, in that order.
From the Menu, select [LifeKit] → [Data Security Service] → [Exchanging history]
and press
The Exchanging history display appears.
Select a record and press
The update result screen appears.
100
Sound/Display/
Light Settings
Setting the Ring Tone/Image/Indicator Color for Incoming Call and Mail ......  102
■ Setting the Ringer
Setting the Sounds of the FOMA Terminal .................................................  104
Adjusting the Volume of Caller’s Voice .................................................................  105
Adjusting the Volume While Playing Flash Movie .......................................... 105
Adjusting the Volume While Running i-αppli Software .............................. 105
Setting Whether to Prioritize the i-αppli Sound ...................................  106
Setting the Sound/Indicator While Using the GPS Function ................................................106
Setting the Poor Signal Quality Alert ...........................................................  107
Setting Earphone Only for the Ring Tone ........................................  107
Changing the Ringing Sound .......................................................................... 107
Muting the Ring Tone ..................................................................................  108
Changing the Manner Mode Settings ................................................ 109
■ Setting the Display/Display Light
Setting the Stand-by Display ...................................................................  110
Setting Images for Placing a Call/Sending Mail ...............................................  112
Setting the Display for Incoming and Outgoing Calls .....................................  112
Setting the Display for the Sub-display............................................................  113
Setting the Display and Keypad Illumination .....................................................  113
Saving Power for the Display .........................................................................  114
Changing the Appearance of the Menu .......................................................  115
Using the Kisekae Tool ...............................................................................  115
Customizing the Kisekae Menu...................................................................  117
Informing Missed Call/New Mail with Indicator ................................................ 118
Setting the Font Size .........................................................................................  119
Changing the Screen Display to English .................................................. 120
Reducing Noise in the Display ......................................................................  120
101
Setting the Ring Tone/Image/Indicator Color for Incoming Call and Mail

You can set a ring tone, ring volume, incoming image, vibration pattern, and incoming
indicator color for each type of incoming transmission (voice, videophone, or PushTalk
call, or mail, etc.).
Example: Performing incoming mail settings
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Call] → [Incoming set] and press
Ｉｎｃｏｍｉｎｇ ｓｅｔ
Sound/Display/Light Settings
Ｉｎｃｏｍｉｎｇ ｃａｌｌ
Ｉｎｃｏｍｉｎｇ Ｖ．ｐｈｏｎｅ
ＰｕｓｈＴａｌｋ
Ｍａｉｌ
ＭｅｓｓａｇｅＲ
ＭｅｓｓａｇｅＦ
Select [Mail] and press
Ｍａｉｌ
＜Ｒｅｃｅｉｖｉｎｇ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ＞
Ｒｅｃｅｉｖｉｎｇ ｉｍｇ
Ｃｏｌｏｒｆｕｌ Ｗｈｉｔｅ
＜Ｃｏｍｐｌｅｔｅ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ＞
Ｒｅｃｅｉｖｅｄ ｉｍａｇｅ
Ｃｏｌｏｒｆｕｌ Ｗｈｉｔｅ
Ｒｉｎｇ ｔｏｎｅ
着信音１
４
Ｒｉｎｇ ｖｏｌｕｍｅ
ＯＦＦ
Ｖｉｂｒａｔｏｒ
Ｃ９
Ｃｏｌｏｒ
０４ｓ
Ｒｉｎｇ ｔｉｍｅ
To perform the settings for an incoming videophone call
If you set [Link incoming call] to [ON], the settings for the incoming
call are applied.
To perform the settings for an incoming Message R/Message F
If you set [Link receive mail] to [ON], the settings for the incoming
mail are applied.
Select an image from the Data Box at [Receiving img].
ˎ You can set the following files.
Incoming call/Incoming V.phone
Category
My picture
File format
GIF/JPEG
File size
Max. 250K bytes
i-motion※
SWF
MP4
Max. 100K bytes
Max. 10M bytes
Image size
Max. [Stand-by(480×864)],
Max. W480×H288 for GIF animation
−
Max. [VGA(640×480)]
Mail/MessageR/MessageF
Category
My picture
File format
GIF/JPEG
File size
Max. 250K bytes
SWF
Max. 100K bytes
Image size
Max. [Stand-by(480×864)],
Max. W480×H288 for GIF animation
−
※ Some i-motion may not be set.
To check the incoming image
Move the cursor to the incoming image and press
Select an image from the Data Box at [Received image].
ˎ You can set the following files.
Category
File format
My picture
GIF/JPEG
SWF
File size
Max. 250K bytes
Max. 100K bytes
To check the Received image
Move the cursor to the Received image and press
102
(Play).
Image size
Max. [Stand-by(480×864)],
Max. W480×H288 for GIF animation
−
(Play).
5
Select a ring tone from MUSIC/i-motion/Melody of the Data Box at [Ring tone].
®
ˎ You can set the following files. You can select a Chaku-Uta from [i-motion].
Category
File format
File size
Image size
MUSIC※
AAC-LC/HE-AAC
Max. 5M bytes
−
i-motion※
MP4
Max. 10M bytes
Max. [VGA(640×480)]
Melody
SMF/MFi
Max. 350K bytes
−
※ Some files may not be set. You cannot set an i-motion with video track only. You can set only an
i-motion with sound track only (i-motion without video track, such as singer’s voice) for incoming
PushTalk calls.
Sound/Display/Light Settings
When you select a Chaku-Uta Full® that has a choice of specified playback ranges from [MUSIC]
The screen for selecting a type of setting appears. If you select [Full song], the entire track
of Chaku-Uta Full® is set for the ring tone. If you select [Point], the specified playback range
of Chaku-Uta Full® is set for the ring tone.
To mute the ring tone
Select [Silent].
To check the ring tone
Move the cursor to the ring tone and press
(Play).
Set the volume of the ring tone at [Ring volume].
Select from [OFF] and [1 to 6].
ˎ For an incoming voice, videophone, or PushTalk call, you can set [STEP DOWN] and [STEP UP]. [STEP
DOWN] turns down the volume every six seconds and [STEP UP] turns up the volume every six seconds.
To set the ring tone volume to [OFF]
Press
at level 1. When you set the ring tone volume for incoming calls, incoming mail, or both
incoming calls and mail to [OFF], “ ”, “ ”, or “ ” appears in the stand-by display respectively.
Set a vibration pattern at [Vibrator].
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ｖｉｂｒａｔｏｒ
Ｐａｔｔｅｒｎ１
Ｐａｔｔｅｒｎ２
Ｌｉｎｋ ｍｅｌｏｄｙ
ＯＦＦ
[Pattern1]
: Set a short intermittent vibration.
[Pattern2]
: Set a long intermittent vibration.
[Link melody] : Set vibration to be synchronized with the vibration pattern of the
melody. When you set the ring tone to [Silent] or the melody is not
specified with a vibration pattern, [Pattern1] is used.
[OFF]
: Do not set the vibrator.
When you set the vibrator for incoming calls, incoming mail, or both
incoming calls and mail, “ ”, “ ”, or “ ” appears in the stand-by
display respectively.
To check the vibration
Move the cursor to the vibration pattern and press
(Confirm).
Select an indicator color at [Color].
Select from 12 colors plus [C13:ALL] (in which the 12 colors flash in turn).
When you move the cursor through the colors, the incoming indicator flashes accordingly.
Select [Ring time] and press
ˎ You can set the ring time for incoming mail, Message R, and Message F.
10
11
Select [ON]/[OFF] of the ring tone at [Set].
Enter the duration for sounding the ring tone at [Ring time].
Enter the duration within the range from 01 to 30 seconds.
12
Press
(Complete).
The Ring time is set.
Continued
103
■ Preinstalled melodies
Title
着信音1∼5
Symphony
Mandolin Concerto
Mordau
Kanon
Forest
※
※
※
※
■ Preinstalled music
Title
Cuckoo Clock
School Chime
Grand Clock
Elevator
Whistle
Piano Man
※
※
※
Title
Hand Bell
※
Brilliance
※
Typewriter
※
Vibe x Vibe
Get Many Bananas!
Title
What Can U Do
(Mashup Style)
※ 3D sound support (P.104)
Sound/Display/Light Settings
● If several ring tones, call images, and incoming indicator colors are set for voice/videophone call/mail, the
following priority is applied.
1. Ring tone of Number Setting (When you receive a call to an Additional No. for the Multi Number)
2. Des phone tone, Des call display, and Select phone/mail Illum. of an entry saved in the Phonebook
3. Des phone tone, Des call display, and Select phone/mail Illum. of the Group setting
4. Ring tone of the Ringtone for Number B of 2in1
5. Ring tone, incoming image, and indicator color of the Incoming set
However, when you set an i-motion or Chaku-Uta Full® for the ring tone or an i-motion for the incoming
image, the order of priority may vary.
● You can adjust the ring volume while receiving a call. The volume last set is applied regardless of whether
you adjust the volume in advance or while receiving a call.
● When you set an i-motion or Chaku-Uta Full® for the ring tone or set an i-motion for the incoming image, the
settings may be changed in some cases.
Setting the Sounds of the FOMA Terminal

You can set to turn on/off the sound effect that can be used when charging starts and
is completed. You can also set whether the 3D sound is played back through the stereo
speaker and set the keypad sound volume.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Management] → [Set basic tone] and press
Ｓｅｔ ｂａｓｉｃ ｔｏｎｅ
Ｋｅｙｐａｄ ｓｏｕｎｄ
Ｓｔｅｒｅｏ＆３Ｄ
Ｃｈａｒｇｅ ｓｏｕｎｄ
１
ＯＮ
ＯＮ
Set the volume of the keypad sound at [Keypad sound].
Select from [OFF] and [1 to 2].
Select [ON]/[OFF] at [Stereo&3D].
Select [ON]/[OFF] at [Charge sound].
The sounds of the FOMA terminal are set.
● The keypad and Charge sounds may not be heard under some conditions, such as when another sound is active.
● The 3D sound function reproduces a 3-dimensional stereophonic sound or space-wise moving sound, over
the stereo speaker (or the Flat-Plug Stereo Earphone Set (optional)). This function lets you enjoy 3D sound
i-αppli games and ring tones with realistic sound. You can feel the effect of this function when you hold the
FOMA terminal about 40 cm (this distance depends on the sense of an individual) away and facing toward
you. Note that if the FOMA terminal is moved left or right or the distance between the terminal and you is not
suitable, you cannot enjoy the effect. The perception of this 3D effect varies depending on the senses of an
individual. If you feel uncomfortable in any way, set the Stereo&3D to [OFF].
104
[Keypad sound] : Set the volume of the keypad sound to be heard when you
press a key.
[Stereo&3D]
: Set whether to play back 3D sound with 3-dimensional
stereophonic reproduction through the stereo speaker.
[Charge sound] : Set whether the sound effect is heard when charging starts and
is completed.
Adjusting the Volume of Caller’s Voice

The volume of caller’s voice during a voice, videophone, or PushTalk call can be
adjusted in six levels from level 1 (smallest) to level 6 (largest).
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Call] → [Call setting] → [Volume] and press
The Volume display appears.
Use
to adjust the volume and press
(OK).
Sound/Display/Light Settings
Select from [1 to 6].
The volume of caller’s voice is set.
during a call. Whichever way you may take, the most
● The volume can be adjusted by pressing
recently adjusted volume is used until it is adjusted next time.
Adjusting the Volume While Playing Flash Movie

The sound volume while playing Flash movie can be adjusted in seven levels: OFF (silent),
level 1 (smallest) to level 6 (largest).
From the i-mode menu, select [i-mode setting] → [Sound effect] and press
Set the sound effect volume.
Select from [OFF] and [1 to 6].
The sound volume while playing Flash movie is set.
● You can also adjust the volume by selecting [Sound effect] from the Function menu while playing Flash
movie (P.163).
● The sound effect may not be heard depending on Flash movie.
Adjusting the Volume While Running i-αppli Software

The sound volume while running i-αppli software can be adjusted in seven levels: OFF
(silent), level 1 (lowest) to level 6 (highest).
From the Menu, select [i-appli] → [i αppli setting] → [Volume setting] and press
The Volume setting display appears.
Set the software volume.
Select from [OFF] and [1 to 6].
The sound volume while running i-αppli software is set.
105
Setting Whether to Prioritize the i-αppli Sound

You can set whether to prioritize the i-αppli sound when One Seg, MUSIC Player, and
i-αppli are activated simultaneously.
From the Menu, select [i-appli] → [i αppli setting] → [Pref. i αppli sound] and press
Select [preference]/[unpreference] and press
[preference]
: You hear the i-αppli sound.
[unpreference] : You hear the sound of One Seg, MUSIC Player, or Music&Video Channel.
Sound/Display/Light Settings
● Even if you select [unpreference], you hear the i-αppli sound when the sound of One Seg, MUSIC Player,
or Music&Video Channel is muted.
Setting the Sound/Indicator While Using the GPS Function
You can set the sound volume to be used and the vibrator and incoming indicator
operations to be performed when you position and notify your current location and when
you are requested to provide your location information.
Example: Setting the sound/indicator of the Position location
From the Menu, select [LifeKit] → [GPS] → [GPS settings] → [Sound/Color setting]
and press
Ｓｏｕｎｄ／ｃｏｌｏｒ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ
Ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ ｎｏｔｉｃｅ
Ｌｏｃ． ｐｒｏｖｉｄｅ／ａｃｃｅｐｔ
Ｌｏｃ． ｐｒｏｖｉｄｅ／ｃｈｅｃｋ
: Set the operation to be performed when the current
location is determined.
[Location notice]
: Set the operation to be performed when the current
location is notified.
[Loc. provide/accept] : Set the operation to be performed when you are requested
to provide location information when the settings for using
each service is set to “許可” (accept).
[Loc. provide/check] : Set the operation to be performed when you are requested
to provide location information when the settings for using
each service is set to “毎回確認” (Check every time).
[Position location]
Select [Position location] and press
Ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ
Ｖｏｌｕｍｅ
Ｖｉｂｒａｔｏｒ
Ｃｏｌｏｒ
ＯＦＦ
ＯＦＦ
ＯＮ
Select the sound volume at [Volume].
Select from [OFF] and [1 to 6].
To set the volume to [OFF]
Press
at level 1.
Select [ON]/[OFF] of the vibrator at [Vibrator].
Select [ON]/[OFF] of the incoming indicator at [Color].
ˎ You can set the incoming indicator to the Position location and Location notice functions.
Press
(Complete).
The sound volume level and incoming indicator ON/OFF settings to be applied when you use
the GPS function are set.
106
Setting the Poor Signal Quality Alert

You can set to inform you with alarm of the possibility of the call being disconnected
during a voice call due to the radio wave condition.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Call] → [Call quality] → [Quality alarm] and
press
[High] : Sound a high alarm tone.
[Low] : Sound a low alarm tone.
[OFF] : Do not sound an alarm tone.
Select the type of alarm tones and press
Sound/Display/Light Settings
The Quality alarm is set.
● If the radio wave condition becomes weak suddenly, the call may be disconnected with no alarm.
Setting Earphone Only for the Ring Tone

You can set the position where the ring tone sounds when the Flat-plug Earphone/
Microphone with Switch (optional) is connected to the FOMA terminal. The other tones,
such as the Alarm, Schedule alarm, and Booking alarm tone also sound from the position
you set for the ring tone.
ˎ Even if [Headset only] is set, the ring tone of a voice, videophone, PushTalk call sounds from both the earphone
and speaker about 20 seconds later after it starts sounding.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Call] → [Headset setting] → [Headset usage
setting] and press
[Headset only]
: The tone sounds only from the earphone.
[Headset+speaker] : The tone sounds from both the earphone and the speaker.
Select [Headset only] and press
The tone sounds only from the earphone.
Changing the Ringing Sound

You can change the ringing sound which a caller hears to a melody with sense of the
season or popular music, etc.
ˎ This service is a paid service that requires a subscription. For more details about this service, see the “Mobile
Phone User’s Guide【Network services】”.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Call] → [Melody Call] and press
The screen for confirming whether to connect a site appears.
Select [Yes] and press
The Melody Call site is connected.
Set each item.
ˎ For details how to set, see the “Mobile Phone User’s Guide【Network services】”.
● When a call is a videophone or PushTalk call, the Melody call does not sound.
● When you select the Melody Call, the FOMA terminal is connected to the i-mode site and packet
communication charge is required. However, the packet communication of the setting site is free of charge.
107
Muting the Ring Tone

All sounds from the FOMA terminal can be disabled to avoid disturbing others by using
the Manner mode.
There are three types of the Manner mode. Set the mode by using the Manner mode
setting (P.109).
ˎ Even if the Manner mode is set, the shutter sound of the camera can be heard.
Press
for over a second in the stand-by display.
Sound/Display/Light Settings
The Manner mode is set and the icon for the current type appears.
Manner ( is pink)
Silent
Original manner ( is blue)
To cancel the Manner mode
Press
for over a second in the stand-by display. The Manner
mode is canceled and “ / / ” disappears.
■ Functions of each mode
Phone volume (P.103)※2
Manner
Follow each setting OFF
(Vibrates in
Pattern1 when
[OFF] is set.)
OFF
OFF
Mail volume (P.103)※3
Alarm volume (P.321, 324)
Keypad sound (P.104)※4
Charge sound (P.104)
Battery ALM (P.41)※5
Whisper mode (P.65)
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF + Vibrator
ON
Vibrator (P.103)※1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Silent
Original manner
Initial setting
Setting range
OFF
Pattern1/Pattern2/
Link melody/Follow
each setting/OFF
SD (STEP DOWN)
ON
ON※6
OFF
SU (STEP UP)/
SD (STEP DOWN)/
6 to 1/OFF
6 to 1/OFF
6 to 1/OFF
2 to 1/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF※6
ON/OFF
※1 Vibrator setting common to voice, videophone, and PushTalk calls, mail, Message R/F, Alarm, Schedule
alarm, and Booking alarm.
※2 Setting common to the ring volume for voice, videophone, and PushTalk calls and the alarm for the Call
cost limit.
※3 Setting common to the ring volume for mail and Message R/F.
※4 Setting common to the battery level confirmation beep.
※5 During a call, the battery alarm is heared from the earpiece regardless of the setting. When a call is put on
hold, however, only the display is provided and the battery alarm does not sound.
※6 When the Battery ALM is set to [ON], the vibrator operates regardless of the Vibrator setting.
● Press
108
during a voice call to set the Whisper mode and press it again to cancel the Whisper mode.
Changing the Manner Mode Settings

The Manner mode can be selected from three types: “Manner”, “Silent”, and “Original
manner”.
Press
in the stand-by display.
Ｍａｎｎｅｒ ｍｏｄｅ
Ｓｅｔ
Ｍｏｄｅ
ＯＦＦ
Ｍａｎｎｅｒ
Ｏｒｉｇｉｎａｌ ｍａｎｎｅｒ
Sound/Display/Light Settings
Select the type of the Manner mode at [Mode].
Press
(Complete).
The type of the Manner mode is changed.
Changing the Original Manner
The operations of the Original manner can be customized. For the items you can set, see
“Functions of each mode” (P.108).
Example: Setting the battery alarm
Press
in the stand-by display, select [Original manner], and press
Ｏｒｉｇｉｎａｌ ｍａｎｎｅｒ
Ｖｉｂｒａｔｏｒ
Ｐｈｏｎｅ ｖｏｌｕｍｅ
Ｍａｉｌ ｖｏｌｕｍｅ
Ａｌａｒｍ ｖｏｌｕｍｅ
Ｋｅｙｐａｄ ｓｏｕｎｄ
Ｃｈａｒｇｅ ｓｏｕｎｄ
Ｂａｔｔｅｒｙ ＡＬＭ
Ｗｈｉｓｐｅｒ ｍｏｄｅ
ＯＦＦ
ＳＤ
４
４
１
ＯＮ
ＯＮ
ＯＦＦ
Select [ON]/[OFF] at [Battery ALM].
The battery alarm setting is changed.
109
Setting the Stand-by Display

You can set the image for the stand-by display, image quality, Calendar/Clock display,
whether to show or hide the guide display, and functions to be activated when switching
to the TV style in stand-by status.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Display] → [Stand-by display] and press
Ｓｔａｎｄ−ｂｙ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ
Sound/Display/Light Settings
Ｓｔａｎｄ−ｂｙ
Ｃｏｌｏｒｆｕｌ Ｗｈｉｔｅ
Ｉｍａｇｅ ｑｕａｌｉｔｙ
Ｓｈａｒｐ
Ｃａｌｅｎｄａｒ／Ｃｌｏｃｋ
ＯＮ
Ｓｏｆｔ ｋｅｙ
Ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｒｏｔａｔｅｄ ａｐｐｌｉ
Ａｃｔｉｖａｔｅ １Ｓｅｇ
: Set an image or i-αppli software to be displayed in the
stand-by display.
[Image quality]
: Set an image quality of an image to be displayed in the
stand-by display.
[Calendar/Clock]
: Set the type of calendar and clock to be displayed in the
stand-by display and also set the font color, display style,
and position of the clock.
[Soft key]
: Set whether to display the guide display in the stand-by
display.
[Display rotated appli] : Set the functions to be activated when switching to the TV
style in stand-by status (P.328).
[Stand-by]
Select an image from My picture/i-motion of the Data Box at [Stand-by].
ˎ You can set the following files.
Category
File format
My picture
GIF/JPEG
SWF
i-motion※
MP4
File size
Max. 500K bytes
Max. 100K bytes
Max. 10M bytes
Image size
Max. [1M(1280×960)]
−
Max. [VGA(640×480)]
※ Some i-motion may not be set.
When you select a JPEG image
The screen for selecting a display pattern appears. Select [V]/[H] at [Direction] and [True
img]/[Screen size]/[Twice the size] at [Size] and press
(Complete).
To set the i-αppli stand-by display
Select [i αppli list] and a software supporting i-αppli stand-by display from the list of
i-αppli software.
To set Stand-by books
Select [Preinstall] and select from [世界遺産1], [世界遺産2], [四字熟語], [花言葉], or [競技種目].
To display no image
Select [None specified].
To check the image
Move the cursor to the image and press
(Play).
Select an image quality at [Image quality].
[Sharp]
: Sharply edged image quality.
[Normal] : The standard image quality emphasized naturalness.
[Dynamic] : The clear image quality in which an edge and contrast of an image is emphasized.
Select [Calendar/Clock] and press
Ｃａｌｅｎｄａｒ／Ｃｌｏｃｋ
Ｃａｌｅｎｄａｒ
ＯＦＦ
Ｃａｌ． ｆｏｎｔ ｃｏｌｏｒ Ｂｌｋ
Ｃｌｏｃｋ
Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ ｃｌｏｃｋ１
１２ｈ
Ｃｌｏｃｋ ｓｔｙｌｅ
Ａｒｒａｎｇｅｍｅｎｔ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
110
5
Select the type of calendar at [Calendar].
[LTC 1Week]
[LTC 1Month]
[Cal. 1Month(S)]
[Cal. 1Month(L)]
[Cal. 2Months]
[OFF]
Display the one-week Lifetime Calendar.
Display the one-month Lifetime Calendar.
Display the one-month calendar (small).
Display the one-month calendar (large).
Display the two-month calendar.
Do not display the calendar.
Select the font color of the calendar at [Cal. font color].
ˎ You cannot change the font color of Saturdays and holidays.
Sound/Display/Light Settings
Select a clock type at [Clock].
Select from [Digital clock1 to 5], [Analog clock], [Pict clock], or [OFF].
Select the format to display the clock in the main display at [Clock style].
[12h] : Display in 12-hour format.
[24h] : Display in 24-hour format.
Select [Arrangement setting] and press
The screen for selecting a position appears.
Press
(Change) to switch between calendar and clock, and then press
select a position to be displayed.
10
Press
to
(Complete).
The position of calendar/clock is set.
11
Press
and select [ON]/[OFF] at [Soft key].
The Soft key is set.
● If you change the setting so that the i-Channel Telop text is displayed when an i-motion or i-αppli is set
for the stand-by display, the screen for confirming whether to cancel the setting for the stand-by display
appears. If you select [Yes], the i-motion or i-αppli set for the stand-by display is canceled and the image
for the stand-by display is changed to that of the Kisekae menu.
● If you set an i-motion or i-αppli for the stand-by display when the i-Channel Telop text is displayed, the
screen for confirming whether to cancel the display of the Telop text appears. If you select [Yes], the Telop
text is turned off. When you change the setting for the stand-by display to other than an i-motion or i-αppli,
the display of the Telop text is automatically restored.
● Even if the Soft key is set to [OFF], you can operate the FOMA terminal normally.
● If you set an i-motion for the stand-by display, the playback starts in the case, such as when you open the
FOMA terminal, return to the stand-by display, or press
in the stand-by display, and the first frame of it
is displayed as the stand-by display image. While the i-motion is played back, the setting of the Calendar is
not displayed.
● If you set a Flash movie or GIF animation for the stand-by display, the playback starts in the case, such as
when you open the FOMA terminal, return to the stand-by display, or press
in the stand-by display. The
playback stops after a certain period of time. A frame displayed at the time of the playback being stopped
is used as the stand-by display image. To restart the playback, press
(however, while displaying the
i-Channel Telop text, the playback does not start even if you press
). The sound effect of the Flash
movie set for the stand-by display is not heard.
● The displayed contents of Stand-by books are employed using part of examples/explanations.
111
Setting Images for Placing a Call/Sending Mail

You can set an image that appears when you place a voice or videophone call, send
mail, and perform other events.
Example: Setting an image to be used when you place a call
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Display] → [Animation] and press
Ａｎｉｍａｔｉｏｎ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Sound/Display/Light Settings
Ｃａｌｌｉｎｇ
Ｃｏｌｏｒｆｕｌ Ｗｈｉｔｅ
Ｖ．ｐｈｏｎｅ ｃａｌｌｉｎｇ ｉｍｇ
Ｃｏｌｏｒｆｕｌ Ｗｈｉｔｅ
Ｍａｉｌ ｓｅｎｄｉｎｇ ｉｍｇ
Ｃｏｌｏｒｆｕｌ Ｗｈｉｔｅ
Ｃｈｅｃｋ ｎｅｗ ｍｅｓｓａｇｅ
Ｃｏｌｏｒｆｕｌ Ｗｈｉｔｅ
: Set an image that appears when you place a voice call.
: Set an image that appears when you place a videophone
call.
[Mail sending img]
: Set an image that appears when you send i-mode mail or
SMS.
[Check new message] : Set an image that appears when you check new
messages or SMS.
[Calling]
[V.phone calling img]
Select an image from My picture of the Data Box at [Calling].
ˎ You can set the following files.
Category
File format
My picture
GIF/JPEG
SWF
File size
Max. 250K bytes
Max. 100K bytes
To check the image
Move the cursor to the image and press
Image size
Max. [Stand-by(480×864)],
Max. W480×H288 for GIF animation
−
(Play).
● If you set the Phonebook image of the Set call display to [ON], the Des call display set in the Phonebook is
displayed when you place a voice or videophone call regardless of the above setting.
Setting the Display for Incoming and Outgoing Calls

You can set whether the Des call display or the name saved in the Phonebook is displayed.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Call] → [Call display] and press
Ｓｅｔ ｃａｌｌ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ
Ｐｈｏｎｅｂｏｏｋ ｉｍａｇｅ
ＯＮ
ＯＮ
Ｎａｍｅ
Ｄｉｓｐ． ｃａｌｌ／ｒｃｖ． Ｎｏ．
Ｎｏｎｅ ｓｐｅｃｉｆｉｅｄ
[Phonebook image] : Set whether to display the Des call display set for a specific
individual/group saved in the Phonebook.
[Name]
: Set whether to display the name of a caller/recipient saved
in the Phonebook.
[Disp. call/rcv. No.] : Set the display or call record display when placing/receiving
a call or the color of the font for the received/sent mail lists.
Select [ON]/[OFF] at [Phonebook image].
: Display the image set for the Des call display in the Phonebook when placing/receiving a voice or
videophone call.
[OFF] : Display the image set in the Animation or Incoming set when placing/receiving a voice or
videophone call.
[ON]
Select [ON]/[OFF] at [Name].
: Display the name saved in the Phonebook when placing/receiving a voice or videophone call, or
originating/receiving a PushTalk call, or right after receiving mail or SMS.
[OFF] : Do not display the name saved in the Phonebook when placing/receiving a voice or videophone
call, or originating/receiving a PushTalk call, or right after receiving mail or SMS.
[ON]
112
4
Select a color of the font to be displayed at [Disp. call/rcv. No.].
: Set the darker color for the display or call record display when placing/receiving a call
by/for Number A, or the font for the received/sent mail lists of Address A.
[light]
: Set the lighter color for the display or call record display when placing/receiving a call
by/for Number A, or the font for the received/sent mail lists of Address A.
[None specified] : Do not specify the color of the font.
ˎ When 2in1 is set to ON, the information of Number A/Address A is displayed in the font color which is
set at the Disp. call/rcv. No. To display the information of Number B/Address B in the different color, you
can set at the Set call/receive No. of the 2in1 setting (P.353).
[dark]
Sound/Display/Light Settings
Setting the Display for the Sub-display

You can set the clock type or format, or display when receiving mail to display in the subdisplay and the time before starting the Power saver for the sub-display.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Display] → [Sub display] and press
Ｓｕｂ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ｍａｉｌ ｒｅｃｅｉｖｅ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ
Ｆｒｏｍ／Ｓｕｂｊｅｃｔ
Ｃｌｏｃｋ
Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ ｃｌｏｃｋ１
１２ｈ
Ｃｌｏｃｋ ｓｔｙｌｅ
１５ｓｅｃ
Ｐｏｗｅｒ ｓａｖｅｒ
[Mail receive display] : Set whether to display the sender or subject in the subdisplay when receiving mail.
[Clock]
: Set the clock type to be displayed in the sub-display.
[Clock style]
: Set the format to display the clock in the sub-display.
[Power saver]
: Automatically turn off the sub-display if no operation is
performed for a specific period.
Select a display of receiving mail at [Mail receive display].
[From/Subject] : Display the sender and subject.
[Only notice] : Display the message “Completed”.
Select a clock type at [Clock].
Select from [Digital clock1 to 5].
Select the format to display the clock in the sub-display at [Clock style].
[12h] : Display in 12-hour format.
[24h] : Display in 24-hour format.
Set a time before starting the Power saver mode at [Power saver].
Select from [15sec], [30sec], [1min], and [2min].
Setting the Display and Keypad Illumination

You can set the main display light brightness, ON/OFF of the keypad light, and whether
to turn on the light of the main display and sub-display.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Display] → [Backlight] and press
Ｂａｃｋｌｉｇｈｔ
Ａｕｔｏ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
ＯＮ
３
Ａｄｊｕｓｔ ｌｉｇｈｔ
ＯＮ
Ｋｅｙｐａｄ ｌｉｇｈｔ
Ｂａｃｋｌｉｇｈｔ ａｌｗａｙｓ ｏｎ
ＬＥＤ ｓｅｔ ｗｈｅｎ ｆｏｌｄｅｄ
ＯＮ
: Set whether to adjust the main display light brightness
and set ON/OFF of the keypad light automatically by the
Brightness Sensor to adapt for the surrounding brightness.
[Adjust light]
: Set the main display light brightness.
[Keypad light]
: Set whether to turn on the keypad light.
[Backlight always on] : Set whether to keep the main display light on all the time
including at the time of charging or recording.
[LED set when folded] : Set whether to turn on the indicator when the FOMA
terminal is folded. The indicator color follows that set in
the Incoming set of the Incoming call.
[Auto setting]
Continued
113
2
Select [ON]/[OFF] of adjusting automatically at [Auto setting].
Set the main display light brightness at [Adjust light].
Select from [1 to 5].
To reset to the default brightness
Press
(Reset).
Select [ON]/[OFF] of the Keypad light at [Keypad light].
Select [Backlight always on] and press
Sound/Display/Light Settings
Ｂａｃｋｌｉｇｈｔ ａｌｗａｙｓ ｏｎ
Ｃｈａｒｇｉｎｇ
Ｖｉｄｅｏｐｈｏｎｅ
Ｉｎｔｅｒｎｅｔ
Ｐｉｃｔ． ｓｈｏｏｔ
Ｍｏｖｉｅ ｓｈｏｏｔ
Ｍｏｖｉｅ ｐｌａｙ
ＯＦＦ
ＯＮ
ＯＦＦ
ＯＮ
ＯＮ
ＯＮ
[Charging]
: Set whether to keep the light on during charging.
[Videophone] : Set whether to keep the light on during a videophone call.
[Internet]
: Set whether to keep the light on while displaying sites or Internet
home pages.
[Pict. shoot] : Set whether to keep the light on while recording a still image.
[Movie shoot] : Set whether to keep the light on while recording a movie.
[Movie play] : Set whether to keep the light on while playing back a movie.
Select [ON]/[OFF] of the Backlight always on for each item and press
Select [ON]/[OFF] of whether to turn on the indicator when the FOMA terminal is
folded at [LED set when folded].
● It may take time to complete charging when [Charging] of the Backlight always on is [ON].
● The brightness of the main display while watching One Seg is set at the Display light (P.246).
● When the Auto setting is set to [ON], the brightness is automatically adjusted based on the value set at the
Adjust light.
Saving Power for the Display

The display is automatically turned off to save battery power when no operations are
made for a specific period. You can set the time before turning off the display.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Display] → [Power saver] and press
Select a time before starting the Power saver mode and press
Select from [1min], [3min], [5min], [10min], [15min], and [30min].
● While a function for which the Backlight always on is set to [ON] is in use, a slideshow is running, the
software update (rewrite) is in progress, the Camera mode is active, and One Seg is activated, the Power
saver mode does not work.
● The Power saver mode may be canceled if there is an incoming call, an activation of the Alarm or Schedule
alarm, etc.
114
Changing the Appearance of the Menu

You can switch the menu to be displayed when you press
(MENU) in the stand-by
display, and also set images to customize 12 icons displayed in the Standard menu.
Example: Setting an image as the icon for i-mode
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Display] → [Menu setting] and press
Ｍｅｎｕ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Sound/Display/Light Settings
Ｓｔａｒｔ ｍｅｎｕ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ｋｉｓｅｋａｅ ｍｅｎｕ
Ｉｃｏｎ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
[Start menu setting] : Set the menu to be displayed when you press
(MENU)
in the stand-by display.
[Icon setting]
: Set the icons to be displayed in the Standard menu display
(P.34).
Select a display menu at [Start menu setting].
[Standard menu] : Display the Standard menu.
[Kisekae menu] : Display the Kisekae menu.
[My Selection]
: Display the menu of My Selection.
Select [Icon setting] and press
The Icon setting display appears.
ˎ You can only set it when [Standard menu] is set at the Start menu setting.
Select an image from My picture of the Data Box at [i-mode].
ˎ You can set the following files.
Category
File format
My picture
GIF/JPEG
File size
Max. 250K bytes
Image size
Max. [Stand-by(480×864)],
Max. W480×H288 for GIF animation
ˎ An image exceeding 60×80 dots in image size is displayed in reduced size.
To check the image
Move the cursor to the image and press
(Play).
● If you set a GIF animation as an icon, the image in the first frame is displayed.
Using the Kisekae Tool

Using the Kisekae Tool allows you to change settings such as the Kisekae menu, ring
tone, stand-by display, icon, and coloration pattern at once. You can also use the
Kisekae tools downloaded from i-mode sites, “SO@Planet”, etc. (P.276).
ˎ The following items can be set by the Kisekae Tool.
Display
- Stand-by display
- Voice call Calling image
- Mail Sending image
- Check new message
- V.phone Incoming image
- Mail Receiving image
- MessageR Receiving image
- MessageR Complete image
- MessageF Complete image
- Battery level icon
- Menu icon
- Color theme
Sound
- Voice call Ring tone
- V.phone Ring tone
- Mail Ring tone
- MessageR Ring tone
- Alarm tone
- Schedule alarm tone
ˎ Some displays or sounds of Kisekae Tool may not be set.
V.phone Calling image
Voice call Incoming image
Mail Complete image
MessageF Receiving image
Radio wave level icon
Kisekae menu
- PushTalk Ring tone
- MessageF Ring tone
- Booking alarm tone
Continued
115
Example: Setting a Kisekae tool
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Display] → [Kisekae setting] and press
Ｋｉｓｅｋａｅ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ｋｉｓｅｋａｅ Ｔｏｏｌ
Ｃｏｌｏｒｆｕｌ Ｗｈｉｔｅ
Ｃｏｌｏｒ ｔｈｅｍｅ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ｗｈｉｔｅ２
[Kisekae Tool]
: Set the Kisekae tool.
[Color theme setting] : Set the colors such as background color or coloration
pattern at once.
Select data from Kisekae Tool of the Data Box at [Kisekae Tool].
Sound/Display/Light Settings
To check an image
Move the cursor to the image and press
(Play).
To set the Color theme setting
Select a color theme at [Color theme setting].
● When 2in1 is used, the following items are not changed even if the Kisekae Tool is set.
- Stand-by display of the Dual and B modes
- Voice call Ring tone, Voice call Calling image, Voice call Incoming image, V.phone Ring tone, V.phone
Incoming image, and V.phone Calling image for Number B
- Mail Ring tone, Mail Receiving image, Mail Complete image, and Mail Sending image for Address B
● If you have deleted the preinstalled Kisekae tool, you can download it from “SO@Planet”.
[i Menu] → [メニュー/検索] (Menu/Search) → [ケータイ電話メーカー] (Mobile Phone Manufacturers) →
[SO@Planet] (Japanese only)
● When you use the Kisekae tool to change the design of the menu display, some menu types may change
the menu structure depending on the frequency in use. The digits assigned to menu items may not be
applied.
In this case, you cannot operate the FOMA terminal as explained in this manual, so please change the
menu to the Standard menu or reset the menu settings (P.35, 116).
● When the Kisekae Tool is set to [ドコモダケ], if you select [基本メニュー呼び出し] (loading the basic
menu), the menu structure can be changed to normal temporarily.
● Some Kisekae menus are displayed in Japanese even if the Select language is set to [English] depending
on the Kisekae Tool.
Resetting the Menu Display
You can reset the display of the Kisekae menu to the default setting.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Management] → [Reset] → [Reset menu
screen] and press
The Security code screen appears.
ˎ The Reset display also appears by pressing
menu screen] and press
Enter the Security code and press
for over a second in the stand-by display. Select [Reset
(OK).
The screen for confirming whether to perform the Reset menu screen appears.
Select [Yes] and press
The default setting is restored.
116
Resetting the Settings of the Display and Sound
You can reset the settings of the display and sound set by the Kisekae Tool to the default
settings.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Management] → [Reset] → [Reset display/
sound] and press
The Security code screen appears.
ˎ The Reset display also appears by pressing
display/sound] and press
Enter the Security code and press
Sound/Display/Light Settings
for over a second in the stand-by display. Select [Reset
(OK).
The screen for confirming whether to perform the Reset display/sound appears.
Select [Yes] and press
The default settings are restored.
Customizing the Kisekae Menu

Changing the Menu Items
You can change the items of the saved Kisekae menu with other menu items.
ˎ You may not able to change menu items depending on the Kisekae menus.
ˎ Menu items which can be changed vary depending on a Kisekae menu you use. You may not be able to
change some menu items.
ˎ Some Kisekae menus change the menu items automatically based on the operation history.
ˎ You need to set the Start menu setting to [Kisekae menu] in advance (P.115).
Select a menu item in the Kisekae menu display and press
(Exchange).
Ｒｅｐｌａｃｅｍｅｎｔ
Ｍｙ Ｓｅｌｅｃｔｉｏｎ
ｉ−ｍｏｄｅ
Ｍａｉｌ
ｐｐｌｉ
Ｐｈｏｎｅ
Ｄａｔａ Ｂｏｘ
ＭＵＳＩＣ
Ｏｓａｉｆｕ−Ｋｅｉｔａｉ
ＬｉｆｅＫｉｔ
Ｏｗｎ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ
Ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇｓ
１Ｓｅｇ
※ The display shown is when the Kisekae Tool is set to [Manual Custom].
Select a menu item to be saved newly and press
(Save).
The screen for confirming whether to change a menu item with the selected item appears.
Select [Yes] and press
The selected menu item is saved.
Continued
117
Resetting the Operation History of the Kisekae Menu
Some Kisekae menus save the frequencies in use of menu items as an operation history
and change the menu items automatically. The Operation history can be deleted.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Management] → [Reset] → [Reset menu log]
and press
The Security code screen appears.
ˎ The Reset display also appears by pressing
menu log] and press
Sound/Display/Light Settings
Enter the Security code and press
for over a second in the stand-by display. Select [Reset
(OK).
The screen for confirming whether to reset the operation history appears.
Select [Yes] and press
The operation history of the menu is reset.
● To restore the default settings for the Kisekae menu display, see P.116.
Informing Missed Call/New Mail with Indicator

The incoming indicator can be set to flash about every five seconds to notify you that
there is a missed call or unread mail/SMS/message. The indicator is turned off by
checking the missed call or displaying mail/SMS/message.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Call] → [Missed call] and press
Select [ON]/[OFF] and press
The Missed call is set.
● The indicator color for a missed call follows that set in the Incoming set.
● The indicator flashes in the following order of priority when there are mix of missed calls and unread mail/
messages.
1. Voice call indicator color
2. Videophone call indicator color
3. PushTalk call indicator color
4. Mail indicator color
5. Message R indicator color
6. Message F indicator color
7. Location provision indicator color
If there are several calls, mails, messages, etc. of the same priority, the indicator color of the latest one has
priority.
118
Setting the Font Size

Setting the Font Size At Once
You can set the size of fonts to be used for displaying the Kisekae menu, Phonebook,
Call record, mail/SMS, and sites or for entering a word at once.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Display] → [Font size] → [All font size setting]
and press
Select a font size to be set at once and press
Sound/Display/Light Settings
[Standard disp.]
: Set the standard font size (40 dots) at once.
[Large disp.(XL)] : Set the extra large font size (60 dots) at once.
[Large disp.(XXL)] : Set the extra-extra large font size (80 dots) at once.
ˎ When the font size of the Kisekae menu is changed between [Standard disp.] and [Large disp.(XL)]/[Large
disp.(XXL)], the menu display is changed from the one which is used before the setting is changed.
The All font size setting is set.
● Even if the Select language is set to [English], when you set the All font size setting to [Large disp.(XL)]/
[Large disp.(XXL)], the Japanese menu display appears.
Setting the Font Size Individually
You can set the size of fonts to be used individually for displaying the Phonebook, Own
number Call record, mail/SMS, and sites or for entering a word.
Example: Setting the font size of the Phonebook
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Display] → [Font size] → [Individual font size]
and press
Ｉｎｄｉｖｉｄｕａｌ ｆｏｎｔ ｓｉｚｅ
Ｐｈｏｎｅｂｏｏｋ
Ｃａｌｌ ｒｅｃｏｒｄ
Ｍａｉｌ
Ｉｎｔｅｒｎｅｔ
Ｉｎｐｕｔ ｔｅｘｔ
Ｍ
Ｍ
Ｍ
Ｍ
Ｍ
[Phonebook] : Select a font size for the Phonebook and Own number from [Extra
extra large], [Extra large], [Large], and [Medium].
[Call record] : Select a font size for the Call record from [Extra extra large], [Extra
large], [Large], and [Medium].
[Mail]
: Select a font size for the contents display of an i-mode mail, SMS,
or Message R/F from [Extra extra large], [Extra large], [Large],
[Medium], and [Small].
[Internet]
: Select a font size for the contents display of a site, Full Browser,
or screen memo from [Extra extra large], [Extra large], [Large],
[Medium], and [Small].
[Input text]
: Select a font size when entering a word from [Extra extra large],
[Extra large], [Large], [Medium], and [Small].
Select a font size at [Phonebook].
The Phonebook font size is set.
● Even if you change the mail font size, the size of Deco mail pict. does not change.
● The font size of the Mail list is displayed in [Extra large] when [Extra extra large] or [Extra large] is selected
at [Mail] of the Individual font size, or in [Medium] when [Large], [Medium], or [Small] is selected.
● The font size in the Input text display (address, subject, and main body) of mail/SMS is displayed in [Extra
large] when [Extra extra large] or [Extra large] is selected at [Input text] of the Individual font size, in
[Large] when [Large] is selected, or in [Medium] when [Medium] or [Small] is selected. When the [Small] is
selected, only the font size in the matching word list is displayed in [Small].
119
Changing the Screen Display to English

Menus, messages, and other displays can be displayed in either Japanese or English.
From the Menu, select [設定] → [管理] → [バイリンガル] and press
バイリンガル
Ｊａｐａｎｅｓｅ
Ｅｎｇｌｉｓｈ
Sound/Display/Light Settings
[Japanese] : Set the display language to Japanese.
[English]
: Set the display language to English.
When the display language is set to English
Select [Settings] → [Management] → [Select language].
Select [English] and press
The display language is set to English.
● When you set the display language with the UIM inserted, the setting is recorded to the UIM.
Reducing Noise in the Display

The noise in the display can be reduced while playing back a movie.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Management] → [BN reduction] and press
[ON] : The noise reduction is set.
[OFF] : Do not set the noise reduction.
Select [ON] and press
The BN reduction is set.
120
Security Settings
■ About Security Codes
Security Codes Used on the FOMA Terminal .................................................................... 122
Changing the Security Code .......................................................................  124
Setting the PIN Code ......................................................................................  124
Canceling the PIN Lock ....................................................................................................... 125
■ Restricting Operations and Functions Available on the Mobile Phone
Various Locking Functions ................................................................................................. 126
Locking the Keypad to Prevent Unauthorized Use ..............................................  126
Restricting Placing/Receiving Calls ..................................................................  128
Protecting Your Personal Data in the Phonebook, Schedule, etc. .........  129
Restricting Dialing from the Keypad ..............................................................  130
Locking the Music Touch Key to Prevent an Accidental Use ....................130
■ Restricting Callers and Senders
Setting the Display of the Redial/Received Record ...................................  131
Displaying the Data Saved as Secret .........................................................  131
Protecting Mail from Unauthorized Access ................................................... 132
Protecting Data from Unauthorized Access ..................................................  132
Specifying Phone Numbers to Accept/Reject Calls ..............................  133
Rejecting Calls with No Caller ID .................................................................  134
Muting the Ring Tone for Calls with No Phonebook Entry .....................  134
Rejecting Calls from Callers with No Phonebook Entry ...........................  135
■ Other Measures “For Safety Operation”
Using the Data Security Service .......................................................  135
Other Measures “For Safety Operation” ............................................................................. 136
121
Security Codes Used on the FOMA Terminal
Some functions provided for convenient use of the FOMA terminal require the security
code to use them. Besides the Security code for operating the mobile phone, the
network security code necessary for the network services, i-mode password, etc. are
available. Make use of the FOMA terminal using an appropriate security code according
to the purpose.
Notes on the security codes
Security Settings
● Avoid using a number that is easy to guess, such as “birth date”, “part of your phone number”, “street
address number or room number”, “1111”, and “1234”. Make sure to make a note of the security code you
set lest you should forget it.
● Be very careful not to let others know your security code. If your security code is known by anyone else,
DoCoMo shall have no liability for any loss due to any unauthorized use of it.
● DoCoMo by no means inquires your security code.
● If you forget any of your security codes, you must bring your official identification (such as driver’s license),
the FOMA terminal, and UIM with you to the nearest DoCoMo shop.
For details, call the “General Inquiries” on the backcover of this manual.
Security Code
The Security code is set to “0000” at the time of purchase. It can be changed by yourself
(P.124).
Ｉｎｐｕｔ
ｓｅｃｕｒｉｔｙ ｃｏｄｅ
When the Security code screen appears, enter the 4- to 8-digit Security
code and press
(OK).
ˎ The entered Security code is displayed as asterisks (＊).
When you enter the wrong Security code
The message “Invalid security code” appears. Enter the correct
Security code.
Network Security Code
The network security code, a 4-digit number necessary for performing procedures on ド
コモeサイト (DoCoMo e-site) and using the DoCoMo Network Services, can be set to
any number at the time of subscription. It can be also changed later by yourself.
You can change your network security code to the new one using the PC if you have the
“DoCoMo ID”/“Password” for the “My DoCoMo” General support site for PC. You can also
change it by yourself using i-mode, from “各種手続き” (Applications and Procedures)
available on ドコモeサイト (DoCoMo e-site).
※ For information on “My DoCoMo” or “DoCoMo e-site”, see the backcover of this manual.
122
i-mode Password
The 4-digit “i-mode password” is required when saving/deleting My Menu or subscribing/
canceling message service or i-mode charged service, etc.
(There may be other passwords for the i-mode used by IP (information service
providers).)
The i-mode password is set to “0000” at the time of subscription. It can be changed by
yourself.
You can change the i-mode password using i-mode, by selecting [i Menu] → [English
iMenu] → [Options] → [Change i-mode Password].
Security Settings
PIN1 Code and PIN2 Code
You can set two Security codes, namely PIN1 and PIN2, for the UIM (FOMA card). These
codes are set to “0000” at the time of subscription. They can be changed by yourself
(P.125).
PIN1 is a 4- to 8-digit number (code) that must be entered for user confirmation to
prevent unauthorized use by a third party every time you insert the UIM into the FOMA
terminal or when the FOMA terminal is powered on. Only after you enter the PIN1 code,
you can use the FOMA terminal for placing/receiving a call and other operation.
PIN2 is a 4- to 8-digit number (code) that must be entered in order to reset the total call
cost, use a user certificate, or request the issue of a user certificate.
ˎ If you continue to use the current UIM with a newly purchased FOMA terminal, use the previous PIN1 and PIN2
codes you set for the UIM.
Ｉｎｐｕｔ ＰＩＮ１ ｃｏｄｅ．
３ｔｉｍｅｓ ｌｅｆｔ
When the PIN1 or PIN2 code input screen appears, enter the 4- to
8-digit PIN1/PIN2 code and press
(OK).
ˎ The entered PIN1/PIN2 code is displayed as asterisks (＊).
ˎ If you enter a wrong PIN1/PIN2 code three times consecutively, the PIN1/PIN2
code is locked and cannot be used anymore. (“X times left” appears on the
screen, indicating the remaining number of times for retry operation.)
When you enter the correct PIN1/PIN2 code, the number of times left is reset to 3.
PUK Code
The PUK code is a 8-digit number for canceling the locked PIN1/PIN2 code. The PUK
code cannot be changed by yourself.
ˎ If you enter a wrong PUK code 10 times consecutively, the UIM is locked.
Security provided when you
power on the FOMA terminal
Correct
input
Enter the PIN1
code
Enter a new
PIN1/PIN2 code
Enter the PUK
code
User certificate operation
Connection to a
FirstPass-compatible site
Enter the PIN2
Consecutive
code
three times
incorrect
input
Consecutive
10 times
incorrect
input
Contact the nearest
DoCoMo shop
123
Changing the Security Code

From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Management] → [Change code] and press
Ｉｎｐｕｔ
ｓｅｃｕｒｉｔｙ ｃｏｄｅ
Enter the current Security code and press
(OK).
The entered Security code is displayed as asterisks (＊).
Security Settings
Enter the new Security code and press
(OK).
Enter a 4- to 8-digit code.
Select [Yes] and press
The Security code is changed.
Setting the PIN Code

You can set the FOMA terminal to require the PIN1 code input when powered on. You
can change the PIN1 and PIN2 codes.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Management] → [UIM setting] and press
The Security code screen appears.
Enter the Security code and press
(OK).
ＵＩＭ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
ＰＩＮ１ ｃｏｄｅ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
ＯＦＦ
Ｃｈａｎｇｅ ＰＩＮ１ ｃｏｄｅ
Ｃｈａｎｇｅ ＰＩＮ２ ｃｏｄｅ
Select [ON]/[OFF] at [PIN1 code setting].
[ON] : You need to enter the PIN1 code when the FOMA terminal is powered on.
[OFF] : Do not need to enter the PIN1 code when the FOMA terminal is powered on.
Enter a PIN1 code and press
(OK).
The entered PIN1 code is displayed as asterisks (＊).
ˎ The PIN1 code is set to “0000” at the time of subscription.
The PIN1 code setting is set.
124
Changing the PIN1 Code/PIN2 Code
ˎ To change the PIN1 code, set the PIN1 code setting to [ON].
Example: Changing the PIN1 code
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Management] → [UIM setting] and press
The Security code screen appears.
Enter the Security code and press
(OK).
The UIM setting display appears.
Select [Change PIN1 code] and press
Security Settings
Ｉｎｐｕｔ ＰＩＮ１ ｃｏｄｅ．
３ｔｉｍｅｓ ｌｅｆｔ
To change the PIN2 code
Select [Change PIN2 code].
Enter the current PIN1 code and press
(OK).
The entered PIN1/PIN2 code is displayed as asterisks (＊).
Enter a new PIN1 code and press
(OK).
Enter a 4- to 8-digit code.
Enter the new PIN1 code again and press
(OK).
The new PIN1 code is set.
Canceling the PIN Lock
Example: Canceling the PIN1 code lock
Enter the 8-digit PUK code and press
(OK).
The entered PUK code is displayed as asterisks (＊).
Ｉｎｐｕｔ ＰＵＫ ｃｏｄｅ．
１０ｔｉｍｅｓ ｌｅｆｔ
Enter a new PIN1 code and press
(OK).
Enter a 4- to 8-digit code.
The entered PIN1 code is displayed as asterisks (＊).
Enter the new PIN1 code again and press
(OK).
The PIN lock is canceled and the PIN1 code is changed to the new one.
125
Various Locking Functions
The FOMA terminal offers many lock functions to assure safety operation, such as
preventing unauthorized use of the FOMA terminal, protecting the Phonebook from being
seen by others. You can use any mix of these functions depending on the purpose.
Security Settings
Functions
Description
Lock all
Prevent others from using the FOMA terminal (P.126).
Omakase Lock Lock the FOMA terminal to prevent others from using it. For example, this service is useful
when you lose or misplace the FOMA terminal (P.127).
Self mode
Disable all functions that involve calls and communication, such as placing/receiving a voice
or videophone call, originating/receiving a PushTalk call, sending/receiving mail, infrared
communication, or the infrared remote control (P.128).
Personal data
Disable some functions to prevent others from viewing/editing your personal information such
lock
as the Phonebook and Schedule data (P.129).
Key dial lock
Disable the dial keys to prevent placing a voice/videophone call or originating a PushTalk call
(P.130).
Auto lock
Prevent the Music Touch Key on the back from being accidentally patted while carrying around
SubKey
the folded FOMA terminal with the power on (P.130).
Record display Set the Redial, Dial frequency, and Received records not to be displayed (P.131).
Secret display Display/not display phonebook entries (PushTalk phonebook)/Own number/schedules saved
as Secret (P.131).
Mail security
Set the FOMA terminal not to display the saved mail, Receive ranking, etc. (P.132).
Data security
Set the FOMA terminal not to display data in My picture or i-motion of the Data Box (P.132).
Accept/Reject Accept/reject a voice, videophone, or PushTalk call from a specific phone number/group when
call
it is received (P.133).
Denied no ID
Set not to accept a voice, videophone, or PushTalk call without the caller’s phone number (P.134).
Set ring start
Set a time interval before performing the receiving operation for a voice, videophone, or
time
PushTalk call from a caller who is not saved in the Phonebook (P.134).
Reject
Reject a voice, videophone, or PushTalk call from a caller who is not saved in the Phonebook
unknown
(P.135).
IC card lock
Lock the IC card to prevent others from using the IC card function (P.226).
Locking the Keypad to Prevent Unauthorized Use

You can set the Lock all to prevent others from using the FOMA terminal. When the
Lock all is set, you cannot perform any operation other than powering on/off the FOMA
terminal and answering a voice or videophone call.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Lock/Security] → [Lock all] and press
The Security code screen appears.
Enter the Security code and press
(OK).
The screen for confirming whether to set the Lock all appears.
Select [Yes] and press
The Lock all is set and the message “Lock all” appears in the stand-by display.
To cancel the Lock all
Enter the Security code and press
(OK).
126
Security Settings
● To call emergency numbers (110, 119, and 118) when the Lock all is set, enter the emergency number
. The emergency number is displayed as asterisks (＊) in the security code input field of the
and press
Security code screen.
● The FOMA terminal is powered off after five unsuccessful attempts to cancel the Lock all.
● When the Lock all is set, the default ring tone and incoming image are used for an incoming voice or
videophone call. In this case, not the caller’s name but the caller’s phone number is displayed. Chaku-moji,
if received, is not displayed, but when you cancel the Lock all, Chaku-moji can be checked in the Received
record (P.54).
● When the Lock all is set, you cannot send a substitute image to answer a videophone call. You can only
adjust the volume of the caller’s voice or switch the camera during a call.
● If there is an incoming PushTalk call when the Lock all is set, the FOMA terminal does not receive the call
and the caller hears a busy tone. The call is saved in the Received record. When you cancel the Lock all,
the notification icon “ ” (Missed call) appears.
● If you receive a request for your location information while the Lock all is set, the FOMA terminal answers
the request. In this case, not the caller’s name but the caller’s phone number is displayed.
● When the Lock all is set, i-mode mail, Message R/F, and SMS are still received automatically, however,
the receiving operations, such as displaying the incoming mail display or the received mail display or the
sounding of the ring tone, are not performed and you are not notified of the reception.
● When you set the Lock all, the Alarm, Schedule alarm, and Booking alarm do not operate.
● If you set the Lock all, the default Kisekae Tool is restored. The i-Channel Telop text is not displayed.
● When you set the Lock all, the notification icons are not displayed. When you cancel the Lock all, the icons
are displayed again.
Using the Omakase Lock
Omakase Lock is a service that allows you to lock the FOMA terminal remotely if you lose the
FOMA terminal by requesting DoCoMo or using a procedure available on the My DoCoMo
website. Use this service to protect your important private information and Osaifu-Keitai.
You can also request DoCoMo by a call, etc. to unlock the FOMA terminal.
※ Omakase Lock is a paid service. However, when you subscribe to this service together with your request to
suspend the FOMA terminal or while the FOMA terminal is suspended, the service charge is not required.
※ If the Location request is set to ON while the Omakase Lock is set, the FOMA terminal answers a request of
location information of the GPS function.
Setting/Canceling the Omakase Lock
0120-524-360
Service hours: 24 hours
※ You can also use your PC to set/cancel the lock from the My DoCoMo website.
ˎ For details on how to use/charges, etc. of the Omakase Lock, see the “Mobile Phone User’s Guide【Procedures
and After-Sales Services】”.
Ｏｍａｋａｓｅ Ｌｏｃｋ
ａｃｔｉｖａｔｅｄ
The message “Omakase Lock activated” appears and the Omakase Lock
is set.
ˎ The Omakase Lock service locks a FOMA terminal if it has an installed UIM
card you are currently subscribing to.
ˎ When the Omakase Lock is set, the user can answer a voice or videophone call
and power on/off the FOMA terminal, but all keypad operation is locked and all
functions (including the IC card function) are disabled.
ˎ When the Omakase Lock is set, the received mail is stored at the Mail Center.
ˎ Although the user can power on/off the FOMA terminal, powering off does not
cancel the lock.
ˎ Note, however, that the UIM and microSD memory card are not locked.
Continued
127
Security Settings
● Any other active function is terminated when the Omakase Lock is set.
● The Omakase Lock can be used even when another lock function is set. If you set the Omakase Lock while
the Public mode (Drive mode) is set, you cannot receive a voice or videophone call.
● The Omakase Lock cannot be set if the FOMA terminal is outside of the service area, in the Self mode, or
powered off.
● The Omakase Lock cannot be set if you subscribe to the Dual Network Service and use the Mova service.
● The Omakase Lock service locks the FOMA terminal upon request from a subscriber of the UIM inserted
in the FOMA terminal. Even if this UIM subscriber and user of the FOMA terminal are different, the FOMA
terminal is locked if requested by the subscriber.
● You can cancel the Omakase Lock only when the UIM the phone number of which is the same as of the
one inserted when you set the lock is inserted in the FOMA terminal. If the lock cannot be canceled, call the
“General Inquiries” on the backcover of this manual.
● When the Omakase Lock is set, the default ring tone and incoming image are used for an incoming voice or
videophone call. In this case, not the caller’s name but the caller’s phone number is displayed. Chaku-moji,
if received, is not displayed, but when you cancel the Omakase Lock, Chaku-moji can be checked in the
Received record (P.54).
● When the Omakase Lock is set, you cannot send a substitute image to answer a videophone call. You can
only adjust the volume of the caller’s voice and switch the camera during a call.
Restricting Placing/Receiving Calls

You can disable all functions that involve calls or communication, such as placing/
receiving a voice or videophone call, originating/receiving a PushTalk call, and sending/
receiving mail. You cannot use infrared communication, infrared remote control, and iC
communication, either.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Call] → [Self mode] and press
The screen for confirming whether to set the Self mode appears.
To cancel the Self mode
Select [Yes] on the screen for confirming whether to cancel the Self mode.
Select [Yes] and press
The Self mode is set and “
” appears.
● Even if the Self mode is set, you can call emergency numbers (110, 119, and 118). The Self mode is
canceled after you call an emergency number.
● If there is an incoming voice call when the Self mode is set, the caller hears a guidance informing that the
FOMA terminal is outside of the service area or the FOMA terminal is powered off. When using the DoCoMo
Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service, these services can be used in the same manner as when the
FOMA terminal is powered off.
● If you receive a PushTalk call when the Self mode is set, the call is disconnected. If the received call is
for the PushTalk communication among several persons, the message “ Disconnect” appears in the On
PushTalk display of the members.
128
Protecting Your Personal Data in the Phonebook, Schedule, etc.

You can disable the following functions to prevent others from viewing/editing your
personal information such as the Phonebook and Schedule data.
Lifetime Calendar
Mail
DCMX
Data Security Service
Infrared communication
Alarm
Stand-by display
Animation
Reset
Security Settings
1Seg
- MUSIC Player
- Music&Video Channel
Camera
- Full Browser
- microSD
i-mode
- i-Channel
- i-αppli
Own number
- Phonebook
- PushTalk phonebook
Record message
- Voice memo
- Bar code reader
ToruCa
- IC card content
- GPS
Schedule
- Text memo
- Data Box
Kisekae tool
- Sub display
- Icon settings
Ring tone
- Incoming image
- Substitute image
Chaku-moji
- Melody Call
ˎ When the Reject unknown is set, you cannot set the Personal data lock.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Lock/Security] → [Pers. data lock] and press
The Security code screen appears.
Enter the Security code and press
Select [ON] and press
(OK).
The Personal data lock is set and “ ” appears.
To cancel the Personal data lock
Select [OFF]. The Personal data lock is canceled and “
disappears.
”
● When the Personal data lock and Key dial lock are set simultaneously, “ ” is displayed instead of “ ”.
● If you set the Personal data lock when data other than that of the Kisekae menu or that preinstalled in the
[Preinstall] folder of the Data Box is set for the image, substitute image, or ring tone in the stand-by or other
display, the setting is reset to the default setting. If you cancel the Personal data lock, the image or ring tone
you set is restored.
● When the Personal data lock is set, the regular ring tone, incoming image (excluding PushTalk), and
indicator color are used for an incoming voice, videophone, or PushTalk call. In this case, not the caller’s
name but the caller’s phone number is displayed. Chaku-moji, if received, is not displayed, but when you
cancel the Personal data lock, Chaku-moji can be checked in the Received record (P.54).
● If you receive a request for your location information while the Personal data lock is set, the FOMA terminal
answers the request. In this case, not the caller’s name but the caller’s phone number is displayed.
● When the Personal data lock is set, i-mode mail, Message R/F, and SMS are still received automatically,
however, the receiving operations, such as displaying the incoming mail display or the received mail display
or the sounding of the ring tone, are not performed and you are not notified of the reception.
● When you set the Personal data lock, the name, phone type icon, and Chaku-moji are not displayed in the
Redial/Received record.
● When you set the Personal data lock, the Alarm, Schedule alarm, and Booking alarm do not operate.
● When you set the Personal data lock, all incoming call is accepted regardless of the Accept/Reject call
setting.
● When you set the Personal data lock, the i-Channel Telop text is not displayed.
● When you set the Personal data lock, the FOMA terminal does not display the following icons. If you cancel
the lock, they appear.
- “ ” (New mail)
- “ ” (Mail at center)
- “ ” (New MessageR)
- “ ” (New MessageF)
- “ ” (New ToruCa)
- “ ” (New Record msg)
- “ ” (New V.phone msg)
- “ ” (Voice Mail)
- “ ” (Timer Rec result)
- “ ” (Download completed)
- “ ” (Download failed)
- “ ” (PB update failed)
- “ ” (Stand-by SW error)
- “ ” (Update completed)
- “ ” (Update definitions)
129
Restricting Dialing from the Keypad

The keypad is locked to restrict placing a voice or videophone call or originating a
PushTalk call. To cancel the Key dial lock temporarily, enter the Security code.
Security Settings
ˎ When you set the Key dial lock, you cannot perform the following functions.
- Place a call using the keys on the keypad (excluding calls made by the 2-touch dial or using the Flat-plug
Earphone/Microphone with Switch), place a call using the Received record, or [Call back] from i-mode mail
- Add a member during PushTalk communication using the keys on the keypad
- Place a call to a recipient who is not saved in the Phonebook using the Redial/Dial frequency record
- Send i-mode mail or SMS to a recipient who is not saved in the Phonebook
- Phone To (AV Phone To) or Mail To
- Save new data or edit/delete data in the Phonebook
- Operate the Phonebook stored in the microSD memory card
- Select the Phonebook attached to i-mode mail
- Save/edit/delete the Location notice or information of a party
- Send the Phonebook data using the infrared communication
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Lock/Security] → [Key dial lock] and press
The Security code screen appears.
Enter the Security code and press
Select [ON] and press
(OK).
The Key dial lock is set and “ ” appears.
To cancel the Key dial lock
Select [OFF]. The Key dial lock is canceled and “
” disappears.
● When the Key dial lock and Personal data lock are set simultaneously, “ ” is displayed instead of “
● Even if the Key dial lock is set, you can call emergency numbers (110, 119, and 118).
Locking the Music Touch Key to Prevent an Accidental Use
”.

You can set whether to lock the Music Touch Key when the Power saver mode is started
while the FOMA terminal is folded.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Lock/Security] → [Auto lock SubKey] and press
Select [ON]/[OFF] and press
The Auto lock SubKey is set.
Locking the Music Touch Key Manually
You can lock the Music Touch Key manually while the FOMA terminal is folded only when
the MUSIC Player or Music&Video Channel is activated.
Press
The Music Touch Key is locked.
To cancel the lock
Press
while the sub-display lights. While the sub-display is turned off, the
sub-display lights when pressing
. Press
again to cancel the lock.
130
Setting the Display of the Redial/Received Record

The Redial, Dial frequency, and Received record can be set not to be displayed.
Playback of the Record message is also disabled. To cancel the Record display
temporarily, enter the Security code.
Press
) in the stand-by display and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Set call record] → [Record display] and press
The Security code screen appears.
Enter the Security code and press
Security Settings
(OK).
The Record display appears.
Select [ON]/[OFF] and press
The Record display is set.
● The call is saved in the Redial/Received record even if the Record display is [OFF].
Displaying the Data Saved as Secret

The Phonebook (PushTalk phonebook), Own number, and Schedule saved as Secret are
not displayed unless the Secret display is set to [ON]. Make sure to save the Phonebook,
Own number, and Schedule as Secret if you do not want others to see them.
ˎ Even if the Secret display is set to [ON], it is changed to [OFF] when you power off the FOMA terminal.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Lock/Security] → [Secret display] and press
The Security code screen appears.
Enter the Security code and press
Select [ON]/[OFF] and press
(OK).
The Secret display is set.
When set to [ON], “ ” appears.
● When a caller or recipient is saved as Secret in the Phonebook, the name and phone type are not displayed
in the Redial/Received record. Once you cancel the Secret, they are displayed.
131
Protecting Mail from Unauthorized Access

You can set the FOMA terminal not to display the received/sent/saved mail by folder. You
can also use this function not to display the Receive/Send ranking and Sort inbox/outbox.
To cancel this function temporarily, enter the Security code.
From the Mail menu, select [Inbox]/[Outbox]/[Draft] and press
Press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Mail security] and press
Security Settings
The Security code screen appears.
Enter the Security code and press
(OK).
The Mail security set display appears.
Select a folder to be locked and press
“ ” appears.
To lock all folders
Press
(Sel. all).
To unlock the selected folder
Press
(Rel.).
Press
(Complete).
The Mail security is set and “
” (yellow)/“
” (blue)/“
” appears (P.189).
Protecting Data from Unauthorized Access

You can set the FOMA terminal not to display data in My picture or i-motion of the Data
Box. You can select data not to display by folder. To cancel this function temporarily,
enter the Security code.
The Data security can be set for the following folders.
Category
My picture
i-motion
Folder
i-mode, Camera, Data exchange, and User-created folder
i-mode, Camera, Data exchange, and User-created folder
From the Data Box, select a category and press
The folder list appears.
Press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Data security] and press
The Security code screen appears.
Enter the Security code and press
(OK).
The screen for selecting a security folder appears.
Select a folder to be locked and press
To lock all folders
Press
(Sel. all).
To unlock the selected folder
Press
(Rel.).
132
6
Press
(Complete).
The screen for confirming the change of the security setting appears.
Select [Yes] and press
The Data security is set.
Specifying Phone Numbers to Accept/Reject Calls

Security Settings
You can set to accept/reject voice, videophone, or PushTalk calls only from specific phone
numbers. For the Accept/Reject calls, up to 20 phone numbers can be saved (Phone No.).
You can also set to accept/reject calls only from specific groups in the FOMA terminal
phonebook. For the Accept/Reject calls, up to three groups can be saved (Group list).
This function is valid only when a caller sends the phone number. It is recommended to
set the Caller ID Display Request Service and the Denied no ID together with this function.
ˎ SMS and i-mode mail can be received regardless of this function.
ˎ For an incoming PushTalk call, it is only to the caller’s phone number that the Accept/Reject call setting is valid.
The Accept/Reject setting does not work even if you set it to a member other than the caller. When you make
the Accept/Reject setting through the Group list, a call is accepted/rejected if the caller of it belongs to the
specified group in the FOMA terminal phonebook.
ˎ When the Personal data lock is set, you cannot set the Accept/Reject calls.
Example: Setting [Accept]/[Reject] for calls from specified phone numbers
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Lock/Security] → [Acpt/Rjct call] and press
The Security code screen appears.
Enter the Security code and press
(OK).
Ａｃｃｅｐｔ／Ｒｅｊｅｃｔ ｃａｌｌ
Ｓｅｔ
Ｐｈｏｎｅ Ｎｏ．
Ｇｒｏｕｐ ｌｉｓｔ
ＯＦＦ
０／２０
０／３
Select [Accept]/[Reject] at [Set].
[Accept] : Set to accept a call. When you receive a call from a phone number/group other than specified,
the call is not connected. The missed call notification icon appears and the call is saved in the
Received record.
[Reject] : Set to reject a call. When you receive a call from a specified phone number/group, the call is
not connected. The missed call notification icon appears and the call is saved in the Received
record.
[OFF]
: Cancel the Accept/Reject call setting.
Select [Phone No.] and press
Ｐｈｏｎｅ Ｎｏ． ｌｉｓｔ
To specify a group
Select [Group list] and select a group at the group field.
To delete a phone number or group
Move the cursor to the number or group field and from the Function
menu, select [Delete] → [Delete one] → [Yes]. To delete all numbers or
groups, from the Function menu, select [Delete] → [Delete all] → [Yes].
Number field
Continued
133
5
Enter a phone number at the number field.
Press
The list is saved and the Accept/Reject call display is restored.
Press
(Complete).
The Accept/Reject call from specified phone numbers is set.
Rejecting Calls with No Caller ID

Security Settings
When receiving a voice, videophone, or PushTalk call without the caller’s phone number
displayed, the reason for not displaying it is shown. You can decide whether to accept a
call based on the reason.
ˎ SMS and i-mode mail can be received regardless of this function.
ˎ If you receive a call with no caller ID when the Denied no ID is [ON], the call is not connected. The missed call
notification icon appears and the call is saved in the Received record.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Lock/Security] → [Denied no ID] and press
The Security code screen appears.
Enter the Security code and press
(OK).
Ｄｅｎｉｅｄ ｎｏ ＩＤ
Ｕｓｅｒ Ｕｎｓｅｔ
ＰｕｂｌｉｃＰｈｏｎｅ
Ｎｏｔ ｓｕｐｐｏｒｔｅｄ
ＯＦＦ
ＯＦＦ
ＯＦＦ
Select [ON]/[OFF] of the Denied no ID for each non-display reason.
The Denied no ID is set.
Muting the Ring Tone for Calls with No Phonebook Entry

You can set a time interval before starting operation of the ring tone, incoming indicator,
and vibrator when you receive a voice, videophone, or PushTalk call from a person/group
who is not saved in the Phonebook. This function is also useful for blocking a nuisance
call such as from a malicious caller.
ˎ When the Reject unknown is set, you cannot set the Set ring start time.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Call] → [Call assist] → [Set ring start time] and
press
Ｓｅｔ ｒｉｎｇ ｓｔａｒｔ ｔｉｍｅ
Ｓｅｔ
Ｓｔａｒｔ ｔｉｍｅ
ＯＦＦ
０４ ｓｅｃ
（０１−９９）
Ｍｉｓｓｅｄ ｃａｌｌ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ
ＯＦＦ
Select [ON]/[OFF] for the Set ring start time at [Set].
Enter the time before starting the ring tone for an incoming call at [Start time].
Enter from 01 to 99 seconds.
134
4
Select [ON]/[OFF] at [Missed call display].
[ON] : Display all calls in the Received record.
[OFF] : For a call the start time of which is shorter than the set time, neither the missed call notification
icon nor the received record is displayed. The call is saved in the Received record. When the
operation of the record message or videophone message is started, the notification icon of
missed call appears and the received record is displayed.
Press
(Complete).
The Set ring start time is set.
Rejecting Calls from Callers with No Phonebook Entry
Security Settings
● In the following cases, the Set ring start time setting works to a call even if you receive it from a person
saved in the Phonebook.
- A call from a person saved as Secret in the Phonebook (when the Secret display is set to [OFF])
- A call with no caller ID
- When the Personal data lock is set
● To display all received records when the Missed call display is [OFF], from the Function menu in the
Received record display, select [Display all].
● If the time set for the Start time is same as that for the answer or ring times for the Record message, Auto
answer setting, Voice Mail Service, and Call Forwarding Service, the ring tone may sound.

You can set to reject voice, videophone, or PushTalk calls from callers not saved in
the Phonebook. It is recommended that you set the Caller ID Display Request Service
together with this function.
ˎ SMS and i-mode mail can be received regardless of this function.
ˎ If you receive a call from a caller who is not saved in the Phonebook when the Reject unknown is [ON], the call
is not connected. The missed call notification icon appears and the call is saved in the Received record.
ˎ When the Set ring start time or Personal data lock is set, you cannot set the Reject unknown.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Lock/Security] → [Reject unknown] and
press
The Security code screen appears.
Enter the Security code and press
Select [ON]/[OFF] and press
(OK).
The Reject unknown is set.
● In the following cases, the Reject unknown setting works to a call even if you receive it from a person saved
in the Phonebook.
- A call from a person saved as Secret in the Phonebook (when the Secret display is set to [OFF])
- A call with no caller ID
Using the Data Security Service

The Data Security Service is a service that allows you to store the Phonebook, images,
and mail (hereinafter referred to as “stored data”) saved in your FOMA terminal at the
Data Security Service Center.
Continued
135
Even if you lose the stored data, for example, if you accidentally lost the FOMA terminal
or it had a water-related trouble, you can restore the stored data at the Center into a
new FOMA terminal. Also, the phonebook data saved in both the FOMA terminal and
Data Security Service Center can be kept it latest automatically on a regular basis.
Furthermore, you can easily edit the stored data at the Data Security Service Center by
accessing the My DoCoMo website on your PC, and save the edited stored data in the
FOMA terminal.
※ For details on the Data Security Service, see the “Mobile Phone User’s Guide【i-mode】”.
FOMA terminal
Data Security Service Center
PC, etc.
Store the Phonebook, images, and mail.
Security Settings
Easily restore data when the FOMA terminal
is lost or has a water-related trouble.
Internet
Update the FOMA terminal after
editing the data on a PC.
View and edit the stored data.
※ Data Security Service is a paid service that requires a subscription. (To apply for this service, you need an
i-mode subscription.)
ˎ Saving the Phonebook (P.100)
ˎ Saving the mail (P.191)
ˎ Saving the images (P.269)
Other Measures “For Safety Operation”
The following functions and services are also available for safety operation besides those
described in this chapter.
Purpose
Prevent others from using the IC card function without consent.
Do not receive a “nuisance call” such as a prank call and
malicious sales call.
Do not receive a call without a caller ID.
Use the electronic authentication service to perform secure
and reliable data communication (available only when
accessing FirstPass-compatible sites).
Update of the FOMA terminal software when it is necessary.
Protect the FOMA terminal from data that could cause trouble.
Choose to receive only necessary mail when receiving i-mode mail.
Register or check information about your or someone’s
condition using i-mode in the event of a disaster.
Change or confirm the mail address.
Reject mail that contains URLs.
Receive/reject mail from specific domains.
Receive/reject mail only from i-mode users.
Receive/reject mail from specific addresses.
Do not receive SMS messages.
Function name/Service name
IC card lock
Nuisance Call Blocking Service
Page
P.226
P.348
Caller ID Display Request Service
FirstPass
P.348
P.171
SW Update
P.402
Scan function
P.407
Recv option setting
P.186, 196
i-mode Disaster Message Board See the “Mobile
Service
P h o n e U s e r ’s
Guide【i-mode】
”.
Change/Confirm Mail Address
Spam Mail Prevention (Reject
Mail with URL)
Spam Mail Prevention (Receive/
Reject Mail Settings)
Spam Mail Prevention (SMS
Rejection Settings)
Do not receive mail from an i-mode compatible mobile Reject Mass i-mode Mail Senders
phone if the number of mail sent from it reaches 200 a day.
Do not receive advertising mail sent without prior agreement. Reject Unsolicited Ad Mail
Limit the size of received mail.
Limiting mail size
Confirm the current settings of the mail function.
Confirm Settings
Disable the mail function temporarily.
Suspend Mail
Check the rough present location of the lost FOMA terminal. Keitai-Osagashi Service
136
Camera
About the Copyright
Objects, such as movies, still images, and sounds, recorded using the FOMA terminal and
productions on a site (program) or Internet site are prohibited by the copyright law from reproduction,
transformation, and compilation without consent of the copyright holders, unless intended for
personal use or any other purpose permitted by law. Also, using or transformation of other person’
s portrait or name without his or her permission may violate the right of portrait. When you present
recorded images or sounds over the internet, make sure to be aware of the copyright law and right
of portrait. Note that some performances, shows, and exhibitions may not allow photography, movie
shooting, or sound recording even for personal use.
Please be considerate of the privacy of individuals around you when taking and sending photos
using camera-equipped mobile phones.
Before Using the Camera ................................................................................................... 138
Recording Still Images ..............................................................................  142
Recording Movies .........................................................................................  146
Changing the Camera Settings .......................................................................................... 147
Adjusting the Camera during Recording ............................................................................ 150
Setting the Camera Operation ........................................................................................... 153
Using the Bar Code Reader ..................................................................... 157
137
Before Using the Camera
You can record images by the FOMA terminal’s built-in camera, which you can send by
attaching to i-mode mail and set for the stand-by display, etc.
To use the microSD memory card, you need to obtain a microSD memory card
separately. If you do not have a microSD memory card, you can purchase one at a home
electric appliance store or other similar store (P.278).
ˎ The image recorded by the camera may differ from actual color or brightness of object.
About Using the Camera
Notes Before Using the Camera
Camera
ˎ Clear images cannot be obtained if the camera lens is stained with fingerprints or grease. Wipe the camera with
a soft clean cloth before recording an image.
ˎ Leaving the FOMA terminal in a place exposed to direct sunlight or high temperature for a long period of time
may deteriorate the image quality.
ˎ You cannot start the Camera mode when the battery level is very low. To use the camera, charge the battery
sufficiently.
ˎ The Camera mode may not be activated when the FOMA terminal is charged electrostatically.
Notes on Using the Camera
ˎ To prevent shaking, hold the FOMA terminal firmly or place it on a stable place and use the Auto timer when
recording.
ˎ When you try to record a strong light source directly, such as the sun or a lamp, the screen may black out or the
image on the screen may be distorted.
ˎ The camera is manufactured based on the leading edge technologies, and black and bright points or lines may
appear constantly in the display. Additionally, increased noise may appear as white lines when recording in a
low-light environment. These are not malfunctions.
ˎ When the battery level becomes very low in the Camera mode, the Camera mode is terminated.
About the Camera Mode
To use the camera, press the shutter
for over a second in the stand-by display. The
Camera mode is activated, an image through the camera lens appears in the display,
and the photo light is turned on (low light).
To terminate the Camera mode, press
ˎ The camera mode is also activated by pressing
for over a second.
● The Camera mode is terminated automatically if the keypad is not pressed for about two minutes.
138
About Still Image/Movie
Item
File format
File name
Still image
JPEG (Exif format)
When saved to [Data Box]
YYYYMMDDhhmmss
Movie
MP4 (MobileMP4)
When saved to [Data Box]
YYYYMMDDhhmmss
ˎ The recorded year, month, date, hour, minute, ˎ The recorded year, month, date, hour, minute,
second is displayed. For example, when a
second is displayed. For example, when
still image is recorded at November 1, 2007,
a movie is recorded at November 1, 2007,
18:02:10, it appears as “20071101180210”.
18:02:10, it appears as “20071101180210”.
ˎ When using the Continuous mode, 00 to 03 When saved to [microSD]
is added after the year, month, date, hour,
MOLnnn
minute, second, resulting in a format like
“20071101180210_00”.
File number
When saved to [microSD]
DSC0nnnn
NNN-nnnn
Camera
−
ˎ The file number is displayed when saved to
[microSD]. You can reset the file number (P.156).
ˎ A number “100 to 999” is assigned to “NNN”, “001 to FFF” is assigned to “nnn”, and “0001 to 9999” is assigned to
“nnnn” in the order of recorded time.
ˎ If you have not set the date/time, the file name is displayed as “--------------”.
Number of Still Images You Can Save
The number of still images that can be saved in the Data Box or microSD memory card varies
depending on the image quality and size, recording conditions, and object of shooting.
■ Estimated number of still images you can record and save in the Data Box
Image size
Image quality
Fine
Standard
Economy
sQCIF
(128×96)
About 1,500
About 1,500
About 1,500
QCIF
(176×144)
About 1,500
About 1,500
About 1,500
QVGA
(240×320)
About 1,500
About 1,500
About 1,500
CIF
(352×288)
About 1,500
About 1,500
About 1,500
VGA
(640×480)
About 1,500
About 1,500
About 1,500
Stby
(480×864)
About 1,310
About 1,500
About 1,500
1M
(1280×960)
About 472
About 737
About 1,123
2M
(1632×1224)
About 307
About 472
About 737
3M※
(2048×1536)
About 188
About 292
About 454
■ Estimated number of still images you can record and save in the microSD memory card (64MB)
Image size
Image quality
Fine
Standard
Economy
sQCIF
(128×96)
About 3,738
About 3,738
About 3,738
QCIF
(176×144)
About 1,883
About 1,883
About 3,738
QVGA
(240×320)
About 1,259
About 1,883
About 1,883
CIF
(352×288)
About 945
About 1,259
About 1,883
VGA
(640×480)
About 541
About 757
About 1,259
Stby
(480×864)
About 426
About 636
About 948
1M
(1280×960)
About 151
About 237
About 344
2M
(1632×1224)
About 97
About 151
About 237
3M※
(2048×1536)
About 60
About 92
About 145
※ When the Image stabilize is set to [AUTO], the image size is set to [3M(2000×1500)].
Continued
139
About Recording Time of Movie
The recording time of movie that can be saved in the Data Box or microSD memory
card varies depending on the recorded image quality, Shoot mode, image size, file size
restriction settings as well as the recording conditions and object of shooting.
■ Estimated recording time of movie you can record and save in the Data Box
File size
restriction
Attach(S)
Image size
−
VGA
(640×480)
QVGA
(320×240)
Camera
QCIF
(176×144)
sQCIF
(128×96)
Attach(L)
−
VGA
(640×480)
QVGA
(320×240)
QCIF
(176×144)
sQCIF
(128×96)
Shoot
mode
Sound only
Image only
Image+Sound
Image only
Image+Sound
Image only
Image+Sound
Image only
Image+Sound
Sound only
Image only
Image+Sound
Image only
Image+Sound
Image only
Image+Sound
Image only
Image+Sound
Recording time available for each movie
Image quality
Super fine
Fine
Standard Economy
About 300s
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
About 10s
−
−
−
About 10s
−
−
−
About 20s About 31s About 77s About 168s
About 19s About 28s About 68s About 130s
About 61s About 130s About 214s
−
About 51s About 105s About 155s
−
About 20m
About 10s
−
−
−
About 10s
−
−
−
About 42s
−
−
−
About 41s
−
−
−
About 85s About 127s About 317s About 11m
About 79s About 116s About 279s About 534s
About 253s About 534s About 14m
−
About 212s About 434s About 10m
−
(m: minute, s: second)
Total recording time available
Image quality
Super fine
Fine
Standard Economy
About 724m
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
About 23m
−
−
−
About 23m
−
−
−
About 47m About 73m About 183m About 400m
About 45m About 66m About 162m About 309m
About 145m About 309m About 510m
−
About 121m About 250m About 369m
−
About 682m
About 340s
−
−
−
About 340s
−
−
−
About 23m
−
−
−
About 23m
−
−
−
About 48m About 71m About 179m About 392m
About 44m About 65m About 158m About 302m
About 143m About 302m About 498m
−
About 120m About 240m About 361m
−
■ Estimated recording time of movie you can record and save in the microSD memory card (64MB)
(m: minute, s: second)
File size
restriction
Attach(S)
Image size
−
VGA
(640×480)
QVGA
(320×240)
QCIF
(176×144)
sQCIF
(128×96)
Attach(L)
−
VGA
(640×480)
QVGA
(320×240)
QCIF
(176×144)
sQCIF
(128×96)
No limit
−
VGA
(640×480)
QVGA
(320×240)
QCIF
(176×144)
sQCIF
(128×96)
140
Shoot
mode
Sound only
Image only
Image+Sound
Image only
Image+Sound
Image only
Image+Sound
Image only
Image+Sound
Sound only
Image only
Image+Sound
Image only
Image+Sound
Image only
Image+Sound
Image only
Image+Sound
Sound only
Image only
Image+Sound
Image only
Image+Sound
Image only
Image+Sound
Image only
Image+Sound
Recording time available for each movie
Image quality
Super fine
Fine
Standard Economy
About 300s
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
About 10s
−
−
−
About 10s
−
−
−
About 20s About 31s About 77s About 168s
About 19s About 28s About 68s About 130s
About 61s About 130s About 214s
−
About 51s About 105s About 155s
−
About 20m
About 14s
−
−
−
About 14s
−
−
−
About 42s
−
−
−
About 41s
−
−
−
About 85s About 127s About 317s About 11m
About 79s About 116s About 279s About 534s
About 253s About 534s About 14m
−
About 212s About 434s About 10m
−
About 60m
About 465s
−
−
−
About 460s
−
−
−
About 22m
−
−
−
About 22m
−
−
−
About 45m About 60m About 60m About 60m
About 42m About 60m About 60m About 60m
About 60m About 60m About 60m
−
About 60m About 60m About 60m
−
Total recording time available
Image quality
Super fine
Fine
Standard Economy
About 658m
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
About 21m
−
−
−
About 21m
−
−
−
About 43m About 67m About 166m About 364m
About 41m About 60m About 147m About 281m
About 132m About 281m About 463m
−
About 110m About 227m About 335m
−
About 602m
About 420s
−
−
−
About 420s
−
−
−
About 21m
−
−
−
About 20m
−
−
−
About 42m About 63m About 158m About 346m
About 39m About 58m About 139m About 267m
About 126m About 267m About 439m
−
About 106m About 217m About 319m
−
About 665m
About 465s
−
−
−
About 460s
−
−
−
About 22m
−
−
−
About 22m
−
−
−
About 45m About 67m About 169m About 369m
About 42m About 61m About 148m About 285m
About 135m About 285m About 469m
−
About 113m About 232m About 340m
−
Icons in the Camera Mode
In the Camera mode display, the following icons appear depending on the settings and
functions selected.
(Display) to switch the display of the icons and guide display (Standard, Simple, or Display off).
ˎ You can use
Even if you select “Display off”, related icons are displayed when you perform any operations.
When recording a still image
ͦ ͧ
ͨ ͩ ͪ ͫ
When recording a movie
ͦ
ͬ
ͭ ͮ ͯ Ͱ ͱͲ ͳ ʹ͵ Ͷ
ͨ
ͭ ͮ ͯ Ͱ ͱͲ ͳ
ͩ ͫ
ͺ ͻ
Camera
ͷ͸
͹
͹
ͷͼ
ͽ
ͦ Shoot mode (P.156)
ˎ “ ” appears when recording a still image.
ͧ Shoot mode (P.143, 144)
ͨ Image size (P.147)
ͩ Image quality (P.154)
The number of a folder to save to
ͪ
ˎ Appears when saving data to/playing data from
the microSD memory card (does not appear
when no microSD memory card is inserted).
ͫ Save to (P.153)
ͬ Estimated number of images that can be recorded
ˎ If the number of images that can be recorded is
higher than 9,999, “
” appears.
ͭ EV (P.152)
ͮ Zoom (P.150)
ͯ Photometry (P.151)
Ͱ Select scene (P.150)
ͱ White balance (P.151)
Ͳ Auto timer ON (P.148)
;
Ϳ
ͳ
ʹ
͵
Ͷ
ͷ
͸
͹
ͺ
ͻ
ͼ
ͽ
Photo light ON (P.148)
Auto focus ON (P.155)
During the Auto focus operation
Image stabilize ON (P.155)
Spot photometry (P.151)
Auto focus frame
Recording direction indication (P.147, 149)
Common replay mode (P.149)
File size restriction (P.156)
Recording sound only
Recording status
Stopped
During image recording
During image playing
During pausing
During image fast-forwarding
During image reversing
; Progress bar
Ϳ Estimated recordable time
141
Recording Still Images

When recording with the Out-camera, you can use the Auto focus function to focus on an
object at the center of the display and record still images.
You can also record a still image in the TV style (P.27).
ˎ The minimum allowable distance for the Auto focus between the camera and an object is 20 cm using [Normal
mode] and 10 cm using [Closeup mode].
ˎ You cannot use the Auto focus when you set the Select scene to [Night scene]/[Low Light] for recording still
images.
Press
for over a second in the stand-by display.
The Camera mode display appears.
Camera
Point the camera at the object and press
(Shoot).
The white-framed focusing window is used to adjust the focus. When
the image comes into focus, the confirmation sound is heard, and
the focusing window turns green. A still image is recorded with the
shutter sound and the screen for confirming whether to save the image
appears.
ˎ While you record a still image, the photo light (low light) flashes.
ˎ When failed to adjust the focus, the white-framed focusing window turns red.
To focus on an area other than the center of the display
Press
) first to activate the Auto focus, point the camera at
the object, and press
(Shoot).
To switch to the In-camera
From the Function menu, select [Shoot] → [Switch camera] → [In
camera]. When using the In-camera, the white-framed focusing
window does not appear, indicating that the Auto focus function is
disabled.
To record images using
Press
. When you press
halfway down, the Auto focus is
activated. When the image comes into focus, press
all the way
down.
To record in the TV style
You can use the Viewing Touch Key to operate the zoom or Auto
focus, or turn on/off the photo light.
Press
(Save).
The still image is saved.
To attach to mail
Press
(Func) for over a second. The still image is saved and the Edit mail display
appears.
To cancel a recorded image
Press
and select [Yes].
To add location information
From the Function menu, select [Rcv loc. Info] (P.237).
To save as a mirror image during In-camera recording
From the Function menu, select [Save mirror img]. To switch between Normal-img and
Mirror-img, from the Function menu, select [Mirror image]/[Normal image].
142
● When there is not enough memory or the number of saved images exceeds the maximum number, the
message appears. Change the place to save the image or delete unnecessary images.
● When you switch to the Shoot by photo mode from the Movie shoot mode, the following items are reset.
Item
Switch camera
Photo light
Zoom magnification
White balance
EV
Default setting
Out camera
OFF
×1
AUTO
±0.0EV
Item
Auto timer
Change screen
Select scene
Photometry
Picture effect
Default setting
OFF
to vertical
AUTO
Center
OFF
Camera
● The image may not be saved when you receive a call before the shutter sound ends.
● Depending on the object of shooting and the recording conditions, you may not be able to adjust focus or
an unexpected portion may be brought into focus.
● When you record an object under the following conditions, the Auto focus may not be able to adjust the
focus of the object.
- The object does not have color contrast.
- You are recording while moving the FOMA terminal.
- The object is moving.
- There is a light within range of the camera view.
- You are recording in a dark place.
Recording Still Images in the Continuous Mode
You can record four still images continuously at an interval of about 0.2 seconds with a
(Shoot) or
single press of
ˎ The size of the images in the Continuous mode is [VGA(640×480)]. You cannot change the size of images.
ˎ If you set the Shoot mode to [Continuous mode] while the Select scene is set to [Night scene] or [Low Light],
the Select scene is changed to [AUTO].
ˎ When the Shoot mode is set to [Continuous mode], the Image stabilize function is temporarily set to [OFF].
Press
(Func) in the Camera mode display, select [Shoot] → [Shoot mode] →
[Continuous mode], and press
Press
(Close).
The Shoot mode is set to [Continuous mode] and “
Point the camera at the object and press
” appears.
(Shoot).
The white-framed focusing window is used to adjust the focus. When the image comes into
focus, the confirmation sound is heard, and the focusing window turns green. Images are
recorded continuously with the burst sound, and the screen for confirming whether to save
the images appears.
Press
(Save).
Four continuous images are saved.
Continued
143
Recording Images with Frames
You can record an image with a frame, which can be selected from the preinstalled
frames or downloaded frames.
ˎ For Out-camera recording, you can select a frame size of [sQCIF(128×96)], [QCIF(176×144)], [QVGA(240×
320)], [CIF(352×288)], and [Stand-by(480×864)]. For In-camera recording, you can select the frame size of
[sQCIF(128×96)], [QCIF(176×144)], and [CIF(352×288)].
ˎ The size of images recorded with a frame is determined according to the frame you selected and cannot be
changed.
Press
(Func) in the Camera mode display, select [Shoot] → [Shoot mode] →
[Shoot with frame], and press
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ｆｒａｍｅ ｓｉｚｅ
Camera
ｓＱＣＩＦ（１２８×９６）
ＱＣＩＦ（１７６×１４４）
ＱＶＧＡ（２４０×３２０）
ＣＩＦ（３５２×２８８）
Ｓｔａｎｄ−ｂｙ（４８０×８６４）
Select a frame size and press
The Stamp&Frame display appears.
Select a frame and press
To check a frame
Move the cursor to a frame and press
Press
(Play).
(Close).
The Shoot mode is set to [Shoot with frame] and “
Point the camera at the object and press
” and the selected frame appear.
(Shoot).
The white-framed focusing window is used to adjust the focus. When the image comes into
focus, the confirmation sound is heard, and the focusing window turns green. A still image
is recorded with the shutter sound and the screen for confirming whether to save the image
appears.
Press
(Save).
The image is saved.
144
Recording a Still Image Using the BestPic™ Mode
Just by bringing an object into focus using the Auto focus function and pressing the
shutter, you can record a total of nine continuous still images in a moment before and
after you press the shutter, from which you can select the best shot.
ˎ The image size of BestPic™ is [3M(2048×1536)], the zoom magnification is [×1], and the image quality is
[Standard]. The image size, zoom magnification, and image quality cannot be changed.
ˎ When you set the Shoot mode to [BestPic™] while the Auto focus setting is [OFF], the Auto focus setting is
changed to [Normal mode].
ˎ When the Shoot mode is set to [BestPic™], the Image stabilize and Auto save are temporarily set to [OFF].
Press
(Func) in the Camera mode display, select [Shoot] → [Shoot mode] →
[BestPic™] and press
Press
The Shoot mode is set to [BestPic™] and “
Camera
(Close).
” appears.
Ｌｏｃｋ Ａｕｔｏ ｆｏｃｕｓ
Point the camera at the object and press
).
The white-framed focusing window is used to adjust the focus. When the image comes into
focus, the confirmation sound is heard, and the focusing window turns green.
Press
(Shoot).
Images are recorded continuously with the shutter sound, and the screen for confirming
whether to save the images appears.
Use
to select an image and press
(Save).
The selected image is saved and the screen for confirming whether to save another image
appears.
To save another image
Select [Yes], select an image, and press
(Save).
To return to the Camera mode display
Select [No].
145
Recording Movies

You can make movie recordings with the built-in camera.
You can also record a movie in the TV style (P.27).
ˎ The movie recording time varies depending on where to save a movie (P.140).
Press
(Func) in the Camera mode display, select [Shoot] → [Switch mode] →
[Movie shoot], and press
The display switches to the Movie shoot display and “
” appears.
Camera
Point the camera at the object and press
(Shoot).
The recording start tone is heard and the movie is recorded. “
” changes to “
”.
ˎ While you record a movie, the photo light (low light) is turned on and the estimated recordable time is
displayed by both a bar and numbers under the image.
To pause recording
Press
(Pause). The recording pause tone sounds and “
” appears. To restart the
recording, press
(Record).
To record movies using
Press
. To end the recording, press
To record in the TV style
You can use the Viewing Touch Key to operate the zoom or turn on/off the photo light.
Press
(Stop) to end recording.
The recording end tone is heard, the recording is stopped, and the screen for confirming
whether to save the movie appears.
Press
(Save).
The movie is saved.
To cancel movie recording
Press
and select [Yes].
To check before saving
Press
(Play).
To attach to mail
Press
(Mail). The movie is saved and the Edit mail display appears.
146
● When there is not enough memory or the number of recorded time of saved movies exceeds the maximum
number, the message appears. Change the place to save the movie or delete unnecessary movies. Even if
recording is possible, the maximum recording time may not be achieved.
● When you switch to movie recording from still image recording, the following items are reset.
Item
Shoot
Auto timer
Zoom magnification
White balance
EV
Default setting
Regular
OFF
×1
AUTO
±0.0EV
Item
Switch camera
Photo light
Select scene
Photometry
Picture effect
Default setting
Out camera
OFF
AUTO
Center
OFF
Camera
● If you fold the FOMA terminal while you are recording a movie, the recording is stopped and the screen for
confirming whether to save the movie appears. When the Auto save is set to [ON], the movie is saved automatically.
● Noise in the form of a mosaic may appear in an image or the image or sound may be interrupted while you
are recording a movie. Note that this is not malfunction.
● The movie sound is recorded via the microphone of the FOMA terminal. If you operate the keys or block the
microphone during recording, the recording may be affected by the sound of the keys and other noise.
● The motion of the recorded movie may be rough depending on the object you are shooting and the
recording conditions.
Changing the Camera Settings
ˎ In the TV style, the Function menu in the Camera mode display cannot be displayed.
Selecting an Image Size
You can select the size of a still image and movie to be recorded from nine and four
types, respectively.
ˎ When the Shoot mode of the still image is set to [Continuous mode], [Shoot with frame], or [BestPic™], you
cannot select the image size.
ˎ The sizes of images that can be recorded by the In-camera are [sQCIF(128×96)], [QCIF(176×144)], and
[CIF(352×288)] (Still image only).
ˎ When the size of a movie is set to [QVGA(320×240)] or [VGA(640×480)], the image quality of the movie is
changed to [Super fine]. When the size of a movie whose image quality is [Super fine] is set to [sQCIF(128×
96)], the image quality of the movie is changed to [Standard].
ˎ When the size of a movie is set to [sQCIF(128×96)] or [QCIF(176×144)], the Change screen is changed to [to
vertical]. Also, when the size of a movie is set to [VGA(640×480)], the Change screen is changed to [to horizontal].
Press
(Func) in the Camera mode display, select [Shoot] → [Select size], and press
The menu for selecting an image size appears.
ˎ You can also display the menu for selecting an image size by pressing
Select an image size and press
in the Camera mode display.
The image size is set and the icon for the current image size appears.
ˎ When the image size for recording still images is set to [VGA(640×480)], [1M(1280×960)], [2M(1632
×1224)], or [3M(2048×1536)], the recording direction indication “ ” appears. It is recorded as the
screen points upward.
Still image
sQCIF(128×96)
QCIF(176×144)
QVGA(240×320)
CIF(352×288)
VGA(640×480)
Stby(480×864)
1M(1280×960)
2M(1632×1224)
3M(2048×1536)※
※ When the Image stabilize is set to [AUTO], the image size is set to [3M(2000×1500)].
Movie
sQCIF(128×96)
QCIF(176×144)
QVGA(320×240)
VGA(640×480)
Continued
147
Switching the Camera Used for Recording
You can switch between the Out- and In-cameras for recording.
ˎ When the Shoot mode is set to [Continuous mode] or [Best Pic™], you cannot switch the camera.
ˎ When the Shoot mode is set to [Shoot with frame] and the image size is set to [QVGA(240×320)] or [Stby(480×
864)], you cannot switch the camera from the Out-camera to In-camera.
ˎ When you switch the camera from the Out-camera to In-camera, the image size is changed to [QCIF(176×
144)] if it is not supported by the In-camera.
Press
press
(Func) in the Camera mode display, select [Shoot] → [Switch camera], and
The menu for switching the camera appears.
ˎ You can also display the menu for switching the camera by pressing
Camera
Select [Out camera]/[In camera] and press
in the Camera mode display.
The camera is switched.
Using the Auto Timer
The Auto timer allows you to record yourself or others without holding the FOMA terminal.
You can also set the interval until recording is started after you press the shutter.
Press
press
(Func) in the Camera mode display, select [Shoot] → [Auto timer], and
The menu for selecting a time for the Auto timer appears.
Select a time until recording is started after you press the shutter and press
Select from [OFF], [10sec], [5sec], and [2sec].
The Auto timer is set and “ ” appears.
● If there is an incoming call or you fold the FOMA terminal when you are recording with the Auto timer, the
recording stops.
● After recording, the Auto timer is automatically reset to [OFF].
Turning on the Photo Light
The FOMA terminal’s built-in photo light can be used when recording by the Out-camera
in a dark place, etc.
Press
) in the Camera mode display.
Every time you press
), the photo light is switched to [ON]/[OFF].
When switched to [ON], the photo light is turned on and “
” appears.
For the TV style
Pat in the Camera mode display.
● The photo light is for helping you record in a dark place. You cannot expect as much amount of light from
the photo light as from the electric flash of a normal camera.
● Even if the photo light is set to [OFF], the photo light is not turned off completely but lights (low light) always.
148
Switching the Direction for Recording Movies
You can switch the direction for recording movies of [QVGA(320×240)] size.
ˎ When the image size is set to [sQCIF(128×96)], [QCIF(176×144)], or [VGA(640×480)], you cannot select the
Change screen.
Press
(Func) in the Camera mode display, select [Shoot] → [Switch mode] →
[Movie shoot], and press
The display switches to the Movie shoot display.
Press
(Func), select [Shoot] → [Change screen], and press
The menu for switching the screen appears.
Select the recording direction and press
Camera
[to vertical]
: Record a movie while holding the FOMA terminal in the landscape orientation.
[to horizontal] : Record a movie while holding the FOMA terminal in the portrait orientation. It is recorded
as the screen points upward shown “ ”.
The direction for recording a movie is set.
Setting Movies to Play Back on Another FOMA Terminal
You can set recorded movies to play back on another FOMA terminal.
ˎ When the Com. replay mode is set to either [High quality] or [Long play], the settings of the camera are
changed, as follows.
Item
Image size
Image quality
File size
Shoot mode
High quality
[QCIF(176×144)]
Super fine
Attach(S)
Image+Sound
Long play
[sQCIF(128×96)]
Fine
Attach(S)
Image+Sound
Press
(Func) in the Camera mode display, select [Shoot] → [Switch mode] →
[Movie shoot], and press
The display switches to the Movie shoot display.
Press
(Func), select [Shoot] → [Com. replay mode], and press
The screen for selecting the Com. replay mode appears.
[OFF]
: Record a movie regularly.
[High quality] : Record a movie focused on the image quality to be clearer.
[Long play]
: Record a movie focused on the recording time to be longer.
Select a common replay mode and press
The Com. replay mode is set and the icon for the current common replay mode appears.
ˎ No icon appears for [OFF].
High quality
Long play
149
Adjusting the Camera during Recording
ˎ In the TV style, the Function menu in the Camera mode display cannot be displayed.
Adjusting Zoom
You can adjust the zoom of an image when you record using the Out-camera. The zoom
magnifications that can be adjusted for each image size are as follows.
When recording a still image
Camera
Image size
[sQCIF(128×96)]
[QCIF(176×144)]
[QVGA(240×320)]
[CIF(352×288)]
[VGA(640×480)]
[Stby(480×864)]
[1M(1280×960)]
[2M(1632×1224)]
[3M(2048×1536)]
Use
When recording a movie
Maximum magnification display
About ×16 (33 levels)
About ×10.6 (31 levels)
About ×6.4 (27 levels)
About ×6.4 (27 levels)
About ×6.4 (27 levels)
About ×6.4 (27 levels)
About ×6.4 (27 levels)
About ×6.4 (27 levels)
About ×6.4 (27 levels)
Image size
[sQCIF(128×96)]
[QCIF(176×144)]
[QVGA(320×240)]
[VGA(640×480)]
Maximum magnification display
About ×16 (33 levels)
About ×10.6 (31 levels)
About ×6.4 (27 levels)
About ×6.4 (27 levels)
in the Camera mode display.
to increase the zoom and
to decrease it. When you press these keys
ˎ Use
for over a second, an image is zoomed in/out continuously.
ˎ You can also adjust the zoom by the JOG. Scroll it upward to zoom in and scroll
it downward to zoom out.
The zoom is adjusted and the current magnification is indicated on the
zoom bar.
For the TV style
Use / in the Camera mode display.
Switching the Recording Scene
When you record a movie by the Out-camera, you can automatically adjust the camera
settings in accordance with a scene. When you change a scene, the White balance,
Photometry, EV, and Picture effect settings are reset.
ˎ When the Shoot mode is set to [Continuous mode] or [Best Pic™] or while recording a movie, you cannot select
[Night scene] and [Low Light].
ˎ When the Shoot mode of movie is set to [Sound only], you cannot use the Select scene.
Press
Ｓｈｏｏｔ
(Func) in the Camera mode display, select [Adjust] → [Select scene], and press
Ａｄｊｕｓｔ
Ｓｅｔ
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ｓｃｅｎｅ
ＡＵＴＯ
Ｂｅａｃｈ／ｓｎｏｗ
Ｗｈｉｔｅ ｂａｌａｎｃｅ
ＰｈｏｔｏｍｅｔｒｙＰｅｏｐｌｅ
Ｐａｒｔｙ
ＥＶ
Ｎｉｇｈｔ ｓｃｅｎｅ
Ｐｉｃｔｕｒｅ ｅｆｆｅｃｔ
Ｒｅｓｅｔ ａｌｌ Ｌａｎｄｓｃａｐｅ
Ｓｐｏｒｔｓ
Ｌｏｗ Ｌｉｇｈｔ
150
in the Camera
ˎ The Select scene display can be also displayed by pressing
mode display.
[AUTO]
: Record an image by automatically adjusting the color and brightness.
[Beach/snow] : Record the bright colors of the ocean, lake, and snow scene even
more vividly.
[People]
: Make a clear recording of a person’s skin in bright and warm
tones of color.
[Party]
: Make a clear recording of a party scene by enhancing the mood
of the illumination in a room.
[Night scene] : Record night scenes without compromising the atmosphere of darkness.
[Landscape] : Make a clear recording of an outdoor scene with a vivid
expression of the color of ocean, sky, and trees.
[Sports]
: Record an object that is moving in a brightly lit place such as the outdoors.
[Low Light]
: Increase the film speed in a dark place to record the scene as
brightly as possible.
2
Select a scene and press
The Select scene is set and the icon for the current scene type appears.
ˎ No icon appears for [AUTO].
Beach/snow
Landscape
People
Sports
Party
Low Light
Night scene
Adjusting White Balance
The color balance of the image can be adjusted depending on the lighting condition. If
a recording image appears in unnatural colors, set the white balance in accordance with
the recording environment.
Press
press
(Func) in the Camera mode display, select [Adjust] → [White balance], and
Camera
The menu for selecting a white balance appears.
ˎ You can also display the menu for selecting a white balance by pressing
display.
[AUTO]
: Adjust the color balance automatically.
[Bulb]
: Set when recording under bulbs or incandescent lamps.
[Fluorescent] : Set when recording under fluorescent lamps.
[Fine]
: Set when recording outdoors on a clear day.
[Cloudy]
: Set when recording outdoors on a cloudy day or in the shade.
Select a white balance type and press
in the Camera mode
The White balance is set and the icon for the current white balance type appears.
ˎ No icon appears for [AUTO].
Bulb
Fluorescent
Fine
Cloudy
Setting a Position for Automatic Adjustment of the Exposure
You can set what position on the screen to use as a reference for the image brightness
(EV) adjustment.
Press
press
(Func) in the Camera mode display, select [Adjust] → [Photometry], and
The menu for selecting a photometry mode appears.
in the Camera mode
ˎ You can also display the menu for selecting a photometry mode by pressing
display.
[Center] : Photometry mode for centerweighted metering of the display, including the periphery.
[Average] : Photometry mode for average metering of the whole display.
[Spot]
: Photometry mode for metering only a part in the center of the display. Aim the object at the
Spot photometry point “ ” in the center of the display. You can use this mode effectively when
recording an object against light or an object with the strong contrast to the background.
Select a photometry mode and press
The Photometry mode is set and the icon for the current photometry mode appears.
Center
Average
Spot
Continued
151
Adjusting Brightness
The image brightness (EV: Exposure Value) can be adjusted according to the ambient
condition. The exposure can be adjusted in 13 levels from ‒2.0EV to +2.0EV for recording with
the Out-camera and in seven levels from ‒1.0EV to +1.0EV for recording with the In-camera.
Press
(Func) in the Camera mode display, select [Adjust] → [EV], and press
The menu for selecting the EV value appears.
ˎ You can also display the menu for selecting the EV value by pressing
Select the EV value and press
in the Camera mode display.
The brightness is adjusted and the icon “
” to “
” for the current EV value appears.
● When the place is extremely bright or dark, the brightness may not be changed even after being adjusted.
Camera
Adding a Picture Effect
The images can be recorded with a special effect.
ˎ When you record an image using the In-camera, you cannot select the [Negative art] and [Solarization].
Press
press
(Func) in the Camera mode display, select [Adjust] → [Picture effect], and
The menu for selecting a picture effect appears.
ˎ You can also
display.
[OFF]
[Negative art] :
[Solarization] :
[Sepia]
[Black&White] :
display the menu for selecting a picture effect by pressing
in the Camera mode
Cancel the picture effect.
Set the color and brightness of the image as in a negative.
Set the image as an illustration with sharp tones.
Set the image sepia-toned like an old photograph.
Set the image monochrome (black and white).
Select a special effect and press
The Picture effect is set.
Restoring the Default Camera Settings
You can reset the camera settings to the default settings. The camera settings listed
below can be reset.
Item
Zoom magnification
White balance
EV
Press
press
Default setting
×1
AUTO
±0.0EV
Item
Select scene
Photometry
Picture effect
Default setting
AUTO
Center
OFF
(Func) in the Camera mode display, select [Adjust] → [Reset all], and
The screen for confirming whether to perform the Reset all appears.
ˎ You can also display the screen for confirming whether to perform the Reset all by pressing
Camera mode display.
Select [Yes] and press
The default settings are restored.
152
in the
Setting the Camera Operation
ˎ In the TV style, the Function menu in the Camera mode display cannot be displayed.
Selecting Where to Save Images
You can set the place to save recorded images.
Example: Selecting the microSD memory card to save the recorded still images
Press
press
(Func) in the Camera mode display, select [Set] → [Select save to], and
The menu for selecting a place to save to appears.
Select [microSD] and press
Camera
[Data Box] : Save images in the Data Box. Select a folder for saving still images and movies from My
picture and i-motion, respectively.
[microSD] : Save images in the microSD memory card. Still images are saved in the [Camera] folder in
My picture, movies with video and sound tracks and with video track only in the [Distribute
contents] folder in i-motion, and movies with sound track only in MM file, respectively.
The place to save images is set and the icon for the selected place appears.
※
Data Box
microSD memory card
※ Does not appear when no microSD memory card is inserted.
Setting Whether Recorded Images Are Automatically Saved
You can set the save method of an image recorded.
Press
press
(Func) in the Camera mode display, select [Set] → [Auto save], and
The menu for selecting whether to automatically save the recorded images appears.
[ON] : After recording, the image is automatically saved.
[OFF] : After recording, press
(Save) on the screen for confirming whether to save the image if you
want to save it.
Select [ON]/[OFF] and press
The image save method is set.
● When the Shoot mode is set to [Regular], [Continuous mode], or [Shoot with frame] or when a movie is
recorded in the TV style, the recorded still image or movie is saved automatically regardless of the Auto
save setting.
Continued
153
Selecting the Image Quality
You can select the image quality for recording images.
ˎ When the size of a movie is set to [QVGA(320×240)] or [VGA(640×480)], you can only select [Super fine] for
the image quality. When the size of a movie is set to [sQCIF(128×96)], you cannot select [Super fine] for the
image quality.
Press
press
(Func) in the Camera mode display, select [Set] → [Image quality], and
The menu for selecting an image quality appears.
Still image
[Fine]
: Higher image quality mode. The file size is larger.
[Standard] : Standard image quality mode.
[Economy] : Lowest image quality mode. The file size is smaller.
Camera
Movie
[Super fine]
[Fine]
[Standard]
[Economy]
Higher image quality mode. The file size is larger and the recording time is shortest.
Image quality mode for smoother movement in movies.
Standard image quality mode.
Lowest image quality mode. The file size is smaller and the recording time is longest.
Select the image quality and press
The image quality is set and the icon for the current image quality appears.
Super fine (Movie only)
Fine
Standard
Economy
Changing the Shutter Sound
The shutter sound can be selected from three types when the Shoot mode for still images
is [Regular], [Shoot with frame], or [Best Pic™].
ˎ The shutter sound volume is fixed and cannot be adjusted or muted. The shutter sound is heard even if the
Manner mode is set.
Press
press
(Func) in the Camera mode display, select [Set] → [Shutter sound], and
The menu for selecting a shutter sound appears.
Select a shutter sound and press
The Shutter sound is set.
To check the shutter sound
Move the cursor to the shutter sound and press
154
(Play).
Setting the Effective Distance of the Auto Focus
You can set the effective distance of the Auto focus function when you record still images
with the Out-camera.
Press
press
(Func) in the Camera mode display, select [Set] → [Auto focus], and
The menu for selecting the Auto focus type appears.
: Record an image by focusing the object. The minimum focusing distance is about
20 cm.
[Closeup mode] : Record an image by focusing a close object. The minimum focusing distance is about
10 cm.
[OFF]
: Record an image without using the Auto focus.
[Normal mode]
Select the Auto focus type and press
Camera
For the TV style
Pat
in the Camera mode display. Every time you pat
mode]/[Closeup mode]/[OFF].
, the mode changes [Normal
The Auto focus is set and the icon for the current Auto focus type appears.
ˎ No icon appears for [Normal mode].
OFF
Closeup mode
Correcting Camera Shake
You can set whether to use the Image stabilize when you record still images with the Outcamera.
ˎ When you set the Image stabilize, the shoot range (angle of view) is changed.
Press
press
(Func) in the Camera mode display, select [Set] → [Image stabilize], and
The menu for selecting whether to correct camera shake appears.
Select [AUTO]/[OFF] and press
The Image stabilize is set and the icon for the current Image stabilize setting appears.
AUTO
OFF
● While recording movies, the Image stabilize is set to [AUTO] if you use the Out-camera and [OFF] if you use
the In-camera.
● The Image stabilize function is to reduce camera shake. Its effect may differ depending on the object of
shooting and recording conditions.
● In the following cases, the effect of the Image stabilize may be small.
- When camera shake is too strong
- When using the zoom function
- When [Night scene] or [Low Light] is set for the Select scene
● When recording a moving object, an afterimage may remain in the image. In this case, set the Image
stabilize to [OFF].
Continued
155
Resetting File Numbers
When a still image with the file number (P.139) “999-9999” is saved in the microSD
memory card, no more still images can be saved even if there is a vacant space in these
memories. The Reset file No. allows you to reset the file numbers up to the largest file
number saved in the microSD memory card. To reset the file numbers, delete still images
that have file numbers larger than that you want to reset beforehand.
ˎ The images cannot be saved even if the file numbers are reset when the microSD memory card has no free
space. In this case, change the microSD memory card or delete data saved in the microSD memory card.
Press
press
(Func) in the Camera mode display, select [Set] → [Reset file No.], and
The screen for confirming whether to perform the Reset file No. appears.
Camera
Select [Yes] and press
The file numbers are reset.
Restricting the Size of a File Used for Movie Recording
You can restrict the size of a movie file to a file size that can be attached to i-mode mail.
Press
(Func) in the Camera mode display, select [Shoot] → [Switch mode] →
[Movie shoot], and press
The display switches to the Movie shoot display.
Press
(Func), select [Set] → [File size], and press
The menu for selecting a file size restriction appears.
[Attach(S)] : You can record up to about 500K bytes.
[Attach(L)] : You can record up to about 2M bytes.
[No limit]
: No file size restriction. You can record up to about one hour. Selectable when [microSD] is
set as the place to save to.
Select a file size restriction type and press
The file size restriction for movie is set and the icon for the current file size restriction type
appears.
Attach(S)
Attach(L)
No limit
● Depending on the recording conditions and object of shooting, the recording may be stopped before the
maximum file size set in the file size restriction is reached.
Selecting the Shoot Mode of Movie
You can select the shoot mode of movie from three types.
Press
(Func) in the Camera mode display, select [Shoot] → [Switch mode] →
[Movie shoot], and press
The display switches to the Movie shoot display.
156
2
Press
(Func), select [Set] → [Shoot mode], and press
The menu for selecting a shoot mode appears.
[Image+Sound] : Record a movie with video and sound tracks.
[Image only]
: Record a movie with video track only. No sound is recorded.
[Sound only]
: Record a movie with sound track only. No movie is recorded.
Select a shoot mode and press
The Shoot mode is set and the icon for the current shoot mode appears.
Image+Sound
Image only
Using the Bar Code Reader
Sound only

Camera
You can use the Out-camera to scan JAN or QR code. The scanned text data can be
used for Phone To (AV Phone To), Mail To, Web To and i-αppli To functions, Bookmark
and Phonebook entries, and also for displaying and copying/pasting text. You can also
obtain a ToruCa card, and play and save the scanned images and melodies.
ˎ To scan the JAN/QR code, hold the Out-camera more than about 20 cm in [Normal mode] and 10 cm in [Closeup
mode] away from the code to be scanned. When the code cannot be scanned, change the distance between
the code and the Out-camera, angle, or direction.
ˎ The FOMA terminal may not be able to scan JAN or QR code if it is scratched, smudged, damaged, of poor
print quality, too small in size, or in certain light reflection conditions. It also may not be able to scan some QR
code versions.
ˎ The FOMA terminal cannot scan a bar code/2-dimensional code other than JAN and QR codes.
■ What is JAN code?
A bar code that represents numbers using vertical lines (bars) of
different widths.
The FOMA terminal can scan 13-digit and 8-digit JAN codes.
“Example: 4942857131932”
■ What is QR code?
One of the 2-dimensional codes that represent data in the vertical and
horizontal directions. This data includes alphanumeric characters,
character strings (kanji, kana, pictographs), melodies, still images, and
ToruCa cards.
ˎ Up to 16 QR codes can be scanned serially so that they connect to each
other and saved as a single data set. When scanning multiple segmented QR
codes, the message prompting you to scan the next QR code appears after
you scan the first one. Scan the QR code in response to the message.
“Example: FOMA SO905i”
Scanning JAN/QR Code
You can scan JAN or QR code and save the maintained data for later use. Specifically,
you can use text data from the scanned JAN or QR code to enter information in a textbox
while entering text (P.341).
From the Menu, select [LifeKit] → [Bar code reader] → [Scan code] and press
The bar code reader is activated and “ ” appears.
To change the effective distance of the Auto focus
Press
(Normal/Closeup). Every time you press this key, the mode is switched between
[Normal] and [Closeup].
Continued
157
2
Locate the JAN/QR code at the center of the display and press
(Scan).
The scanning of the JAN/QR code starts.
When the scanning is completed, the end sound is heard and the data
that has been scanned is displayed in the normal display.
To save scanned data such as a phone number
Move the cursor to data such as a phone number and from the
Function menu, select [Add to phonebook] → [Yes] and save the
scanned data in the Phonebook.
Ｓｃａｎｎｉｎｇ
ˎ Follow the same steps as in “Add to FOMA terminal phonebook” (P.91, step
3 to 6) or “Add to UIM phonebook” (P.93, step 3 to 4).
Ｆｉｘ ｃａ ｍ ｅｒａ
Camera
Press
To save a scanned URL as a bookmark
Move the cursor to the URL and from the Function menu, select [Add
bookmark] → [Yes] → a folder.
(Save).
The data from the scanned JAN/QR code is saved.
● Some QR codes allow you to save data such as a name, phone number, and mail address all at once in the
Phonebook just by scanning them.
● When scanned characters cannot be entered in the text editing display, they are replaced with as many
spaces (blanks).
● A scanned image may not be saved depending on its image or file size.
Displaying the Saved Data
You can save up to 10 data entries for JAN or QR codes that are scanned.
ˎ When a total of 10 data entries is saved and a new JAN/QR code is scanned, unprotected data is overwritten
from the oldest.
From the Menu, select [LifeKit] → [Bar code reader] → [Saved data] and press
Ｄａｔａ ｌｉｓｔ
２００７／１１／１４
２００７／１１／０７
２００７／１０／２８
２００７／１０／２８
２００７／１０／２３
２００７／１０／１２
２００７／１０／０３
２００７／１０／０３
２００７／０９／３０
２００７／０９／３０
１３：５６
２３：１３
１４：２５
１０：４２
１６：２１
１３：２９
１９：２８
０９：４７
１４：０５
１３：５０
Select the data and press
２００７／１１／１４ １３：５６
Ａｄｄ ｔｏ ｐｈｏｎｅｂｏｏｋ
Ｎａｍｅ：ＤｏＣｏＭｏ Ｔａｒｏ
Ｒｅａｄｉｎｇ：ＤｏＣｏＭｏＴａｒｏ
ＴＥＬ：０３ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ
Ｅ−ｍａｉｌ：ｄｏｃｏｍｏ．ｔａｒｏ． △△ ＠
ｄｏｃｏｍｏ．ｎｅ．ｊｐ
158
To delete data
Move the cursor to the data and from the Function menu, select
[Delete] → [Delete one] → [Yes]. To delete several data, from the
Function menu, select [Delete] → [Select&delete], select data, press
(Complete), and then select [Yes]. To delete all data, from the
Function menu, select [Delete] → [Delete all], enter the Security code,
and select [Yes].
To protect data
Move the cursor to the data and from the Function menu, select
[Protect ON/OFF] → [Yes]. “ ” changes to “ ”.
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
※ i-mode is a paid service that requires a subscription.
What is i-mode? ................................................................................................................. 160
Displaying the i-mode Menu .........................................................................  160
■ Displaying a Site
Displaying Sites .................................................................................................................. 161
Using Sites ......................................................................................................................... 162
Saving a Site in My Menu .................................................................................  164
Changing the i-mode Password .................................................  164
Displaying Internet Sites .....................................................................  164
Saving a Site to Display It Quickly ....................................................................  165
Saving a Site in the Screen Memo .............................................................. 166
■ Downloading Graphics, Melodies or Other Data from Sites
Obtaining Graphics from a Site/Message ..................................................  167
Downloading Data from Sites ...........................................................................  167
■ Useful Functions for Using i-mode
Using the Phone To/Mail To/Web To/i-αppli To/Media To ................................................... 168
■ Make Settings for i-mode
Setting i-mode ............................................................................................  169
■ Using Certificates
Operating the SSL List ...............................................................................  171
Setting the FirstPass .................................................................................  171
Changing the Host for Certificate Issue .......................................................... 172
■ Using i-motion
What is i-motion? ............................................................................................................... 173
Downloading an i-motion from Sites ....................................................  173
Setting Whether to Play Back i-motion Automatically .......................... 173
■ Using i-Channel
What is i-Channel? ............................................................................................................. 174
Displaying the i-Channel .................................................................................................... 174
Changing the i-Channel Settings ....................................................................................... 175
159
What is i-mode?
i-mode allows you to use the i-mode compatible FOMA
terminal (hereinafter referred to as i-mode terminal) to
access various online services such as site (program)
connection, Internet connection, and i-mode mail.
Displaying the i-mode Menu

Press
(i-mode) in the stand-by display.
ˎ i-mode is a paid service that requires a subscription.
ˎ For details on i-mode, see the “Mobile Phone User’s Guide
【i-mode】”.
Important information about using i-mode
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
● The data on sites (programs) or Internet sites is generally
protected by the copyright laws. Part or all of the data
such as documents and graphics obtained to the i-mode
terminal from these sites (programs) or Internet sites
cannot be sold or redistributed, whether they are changed
or not, without consent of the copyright holders except for
personal use.
● When the UIM is switched to another card, or the i-mode
terminal is powered on without inserting the UIM, some
of the terminal models may not be able to display/play
back still images/movies/melodies downloaded from sites,
attached files (still images/movies/melodies, etc.) sent/
received by mail, screen memos, and Message R/F.
● If you set a file whose display/playback is restricted by
the UIM for the stand-by display, ring tone, and/or other
applications, those settings are reset to the initial settings if
the UIM is switched to another card or the FOMA terminal
is powered on without inserting a UIM.
ＴＡＳＫ
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ
Ｋｉｓｅｋａｅ
Menu name
i Menu
Bookmark
Screen Memo
Last accessed
URL
Go to location
i-Channel
MessageR/F
Check new
msg
i-mode setting
Full Browser
Function
Connect the FOMA terminal to the i-mode
center (P.161).
Display favorite sites and Internet sites
(P.165).
Display sites saved in the FOMA terminal
(P.166).
Display sites and Internet sites displayed
last (P.161).
Connect the FOMA terminal to the Internet
(P.164).
Display the channel menu (P.174).
Display the list of Message R/Message F
received (P.199).
Check if the i-mode center holds mail,
Message R, and Message F (P.186, 199).
Set the i-mode settings on the FOMA
terminal (P.105, 119, 169, etc.).
Display the Full Browser menu (P.258).
To display i Menu while displaying a site
From the Function menu, select [i Menu].
160
Reconnecting to the Web Page
Displayed Last
Displaying Sites
Various sites offered by IP (information service
providers) can be displayed (the subscription is
necessary for some sites).
From the i-mode menu, select [i Menu] → [メニュー/
検索] (Menu/Search) and press
The site displayed when you last connected to i-mode
is recorded as the Last accessed URL. You can directly
connect to this site from the Last accessed URL.
ˎ Some web pages cannot be recorded as Last accessed URL.
From the i-mode menu, select [Last accessed URL]
and press
Ｌａｓｔ ａｃｃｅｓｓｅｄ ＵＲＬ
ｈｔｔｐ：／／ｗｗｗ． △△△△ ．□□．ｊｐ
To delete the Last accessed URL
Press
(Delete) and select [Yes].
To copy the Last accessed URL
Press
(Copy).
Press
(Cnct).
Select a site and press
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
The FOMA terminal is connected to the site displayed last.
The FOMA terminal is connected to the site.
● Some of the connected sites may request you to send the
“manufacturer’s serial number of the mobile phone/UIM
(FOMA card)” before you access the site.
The “manufacturer’s serial number of the mobile phone/UIM
(FOMA card)” that you send is used by IP (information
service providers) to identify you in order to provide
information customized for you and to determine whether
the content provided by IP is compatible with your FOMA
terminal.
Since the “manufacturer’s serial number of the mobile
phone/UIM (FOMA card)” is sent to IP via the Internet, it
might be accessed by a third party. Note, however, that IP
is not notified of your phone number, address, age, and
sex by this operation.
● When you receive a request from a site about information
of music you play back on your FOMA terminal, the screen
for confirming whether to send the music information
appears.
If you select [Yes], the music information (names of title
and artist and date of playing back) played back on your
FOMA terminal is sent.
The sent music information is used by IP (information
service providers) to provide a customer with the
customized information.
Displaying SSL Site
You can display SSL-compatible sites (SSL page)
using an operation similar to that for general sites.
ˎ To display an SSL site, make sure to set the date and time
with the Date/time setting beforehand.
The message on the left appears
Ｅｓｔａｂｌｉｓｈｉｎｇ
when connecting to an SSL site. “ ”
ＳＳＬ ｓｅｓｓｉｏｎ
appears when displaying an SSL
（Ａｕｔｈｅｎｔｉ−
site.
ｃａｔｉｎｇ）
To display the certificate
From the Function menu, select
[Certificates].
ＳＳＬ ｓｅｓｓｉｏｎ
ｉｓ ｒｅｌｅａｓｅｄ
The message on the left appears
when moving from an SSL site to a
non-SSL site. “ ” disappears when
displaying a non-SSL site.
Ｙｅｓ
Ｎｏ
● The confir mation message may appear when the
connected site may not be secure. Select [Yes] to connect
to the SSL site, or select [No] to cancel connecting to the
SSL site.
● If there are any problems such as an invalid certificate of
the server, the SSL site may not be displayed.
161
Reloading a Page
Using Sites
Selecting Links or Other Items of Choice
When using a site, you may display a linked site, enter
texts (textbox) or select an item from multiple options
(radio button, check box, and pull-down menu).
Ｆｏｒ ｍｏｒｅ ｉｎｆｏ
Ｙｏｕｒ ｍａｉｌ ａｄｄｒｅｓｓ：
Ｓｅｘ：
Ｍａｌｅ
Ｆｅｍａｌｅ
Ｍｏｎｔｈ／Ｙｅａｒ ｏｆ Ｂｉｒｔｈ：
Ｎｏｖ ２００７
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ｙｏｕｒ ｆａｖｏｒｉｔｅ
ｐｒｏｇｒａｍｓ：
Ｄｒａｍａ
Ｆｉｌｍ
Ｖａｒｉｅｔｙ
Ｓｐｏｒｔｓ
Ｓｅｎｄ
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
Link
Go to the related web page.
Textbox
Enter a text.
ˎ The mode and number of characters you
can use depend on the textbox.
ˎ When you enter a code such as the i-mode
password, it may be masked by “＊”.
Radio button
Select one item. “ ” of the selected item
changes to “ ”.
Pull-down menu
Select an item from the item list.
Check box
Select one or more items. “ ” of the
selected items changes to “ ”.
ˎ To cancel the selection, select the check
box again.
Displaying the Previous/Next Page
The FOMA terminal stores up to 20 most recently
displayed site pages in its cache.
The stored site pages are deleted when i-mode is
terminated.
When the left or right arrow is displayed in the guide
display, the pages stored in the cache can be used
for display using
without accessing the site.
Note, however, that if the recorded site pages exceed
the cache size or when a site page is programmed
always to download the latest information, network
communication is performed.
ˎ The text or setting you entered in a site is not stored in the
cache.
ˎ The cache is a place in the terminal used for temporarily
storing the displayed screen data.
Ｆｕｎｃ
ＭＥＮＵ
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ
: Indicates that the previous page
is recorded. Use
to display the
previous page.
: Indicates that the next page is
recorded. Use
to display the next
page.
Example: When viewing site pages in the order of Ƀ→Ʉ→Ʌ
→Ʉ→Ɇ
Ƀ
Ʉ
Ʌ
Ɇ
Assuming that you view site pages in the order of Ƀ→Ʉ→Ʌ
and go to a new site page Ɇ after going back to Ʉ as shown
in the above illustration, the history for Ʉ→Ʌ is cleared and
starts afresh for Ʉ→Ɇ at the time you go to a new site page Ɇ.
162
The page, which is displayed incorrectly or updated
frequently, can be reloaded so that the latest data is
displayed.
While displaying a site, press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Reload] and press
The display of the page is updated.
Displaying a Site URL
The URL of the currently displayed site can be
displayed.
While displaying a site, press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [URL] and press
The URL of the site is displayed.
To copy the URL
Press
(Copy).
Sending a URL by Mail
The URL of the currently displayed site can be sent by
mail.
While displaying a site, press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Compose message] and press
The Edit mail display appears.
The site URL is already entered in the main body.
Compose mail and send it.
ˎ Follow the same steps as in “Compose and send mail”
(P.179, step 2 to 5).
Displaying a Site Correctly
What is Flash?
If the display of the text is incorrect on a site, you can
reload the page after changing the character code.
While displaying a site, press
(Func).
Flash is an animation technology that uses animation
and sound. Flash movies enhance site content for
richer expression. You can set a Flash movie for the
stand-by display and other applications.
The Function menu appears.
Select [Word translate] → [Convert]/[Auto select]
and press
● The page may not be displayed correctly even if the
character code is changed. Note that changing the
character code when the page is displayed correctly may
cause the page to be displayed incorrectly.
Changing the Display to Full Browser
You can change the current site display to Full Browser.
While displaying a site, press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [To Full Browser] → [OK] and press
The display is switched to Full Browser.
ˎ For information on the operations of Full Browser, see
P.258.
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
[Convert]:
Sequentially convert the character codes and display
the page again. If the text is still incorrectly displayed,
repeat this operation. The original display reappears
when you repeat [Word translate] → [Convert] several
times.
[Auto select]:
Automatically select and convert the character code and
display the page.
The character code is converted and the page is displayed
again.
● When a Flash movie is displayed, the action may differ
from other sites.
(Select) is displayed, you may not be able to
● Even if
use the Select function.
● Some Flash movies may be accompanied by a sound effect.
To mute the sound effect, set the Sound effect to [OFF].
● If you do not operate the FOMA terminal for more than
about 30 seconds while the Flash movie is played back,
the playback pauses. To operate a Flash movie again,
display the Flash movie entirely and from the Function
menu, select [Retry].
● Even if a Flash movie is displayed, it may not operate
properly in some cases.
● When you save a Flash movie using the Save image
function or save it in Screen Memo, a portion of it may not
be saved or it may appear differently from the one you
viewed on the site.
● When you play back a Flash movie saved in the Data Box,
Screen Memo, or microSD memory card, the image may
be displayed differently depending on the saved places.
● If an error occurs during a Flash movie playback, this
Flash movie cannot be saved.
● Some of the Flash movies vibrate the FOMA terminal
during playback. Note that this could happen even if the
vibrator is set to [OFF].
● Some Flash movies may have to use data saved in the
i-mode terminal. To allow such a Flash movie to use saved
data, set the Use phone info of the i-mode setting to [Yes]
(P.170). This item is set to [Yes] at the time of purchase.
Saved data that may be used by a Flash movie is as follows.
- Battery level
- Reception level
- Clock information
- Sound effect setting - Language setting - Terminal type
- Model information
Terminating i-mode
1 Press
during i-mode, select [Yes], and press
i-mode is terminated and “ ” disappears.
163
Saving a Site in My Menu 
If you save the frequently used sites in My Menu, you
can access them easily from next time. Up to 45 sites
can be saved in My Menu.
ˎ Only i-mode sites can be saved in My Menu. To save Internet
sites, use the Bookmark.
While displaying a site, select [マイメニュー登録]
(Save My Menu) and press
Displaying Internet Sites

i-mode compatible Internet site can be displayed from
the i-mode terminal.
ˎ Sites that are not compatible with i-mode may not be
displayed correctly.
ˎ The location of [マイメニュー登録] (Save My Menu) and
the menu structure may vary depending on each site.
The Enter URL display appears.
ˎ When the URL has been entered before, the URL
entered previously is displayed.
ˎ The beginning of the URL “http://” is entered beforehand.
Enter the i-mode password at [ｉモードパスワード]
(i-mode Password).
The password is masked by “＊＊＊＊”.
Select [決定] (OK) and press
(Edit) and enter the URL.
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
Press
(Cnct).
The FOMA terminal is connected to the site.
ˎ Operations while displaying Internet sites are the same
as while displaying the i-mode sites.
Changing the i-mode Password

The “i-mode password” is used for saving/deleting
My Menu and changing i-mode mail settings, etc.
The i-mode password is set to “0000” at the time of
subscription. Change it to your own i-mode password.
Make sure to keep the i-mode password confidential.
ˎ If you forget the i-mode password, you must bring your official
identification (such as driver’s license), the FOMA terminal,
and UIM with you to the nearest DoCoMo shop.
Displaying Using the URL History
Up to 50 sites that have been displayed by entering
their URLs are saved in the URL history. The sites can
be directly accessed from the URL history.
ˎ If a total of 50 URLs is saved in the URL history, the URL is
overwritten from the oldest.
Ｎｅｗ Ｐａｓｓｗｏｒｄ
Ｎｅｗ Ｐａｓｓｗｏｒｄ
（Ｃｏｎｆｉｒｍａｔｉｏｎ）
Press
(Cnct).
The FOMA terminal is connected to the site of the selected
URL.
Enter the current i-mode password at [Current
Password].
The password is masked by “＊＊＊＊”.
Enter the new password at [New Password].
Enter the new password at [New Password
(Confirmation)].
Select [Select] and press
The i-mode password is changed.
Select a URL and press
The URL history display appears.
To copy a URL
Press
(Copy).
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ
※Ｙｏｕ ｗｉｌｌ ｕｓｅ
ｙｏｕｒ ｉ−ｍｏｄｅ
ｐａｓｓｗｏｒｄ ｔｏ
ｓｕｂｓｃｒｉｂｅ ａｎｄ
ｕｎｓｕｂｓｃｒｉｂｅ
ｓｉｔｅｓ ａｎｄ ｓｅｔ
ｔｏ ｙｏｕｒ
ｏｐｔｉｏｎｓ．
From the i-mode menu, select [Go to location] →
[URL history] and press
The URL history display appears.
To delete a URL
Move the cursor to the URL and from the Function menu,
select [Delete one] → [Yes]. To delete several URLs,
from the Function menu, select [Select&delete], select
URLs, press
(Complete), and select [Yes]. To delete
all URLs, from the Function menu, select [Delete all],
enter the Security code, and select [Yes].
From the i-mode menu, select [i Menu] → [English
iMenu] → [Options] → [Change i-mode Password]
and press
Ｃｈａｎｇｅ ｉ−ｍｏｄｅ
Ｐａｓｓｗｏｒｄ
Ｃｕｒｒｅｎｔ Ｐａｓｓｗｏｒｄ
164
Press
Enter the URL including “http://” within 256 half-width
alphanumeric characters and symbols.
The site is saved in My Menu.
● The site is saved automatically in My Menu when you
subscribe to a paid site.
From the i-mode menu, select [Go to location] →
[Enter URL] and press
Saving a Site to Display It
Quickly

Up to 200 URLs of the sites you display frequently can
be saved in the Bookmark. The sites can be directly
accessed from the Bookmark.
Displaying a Site
A site can be displayed using a bookmark.
A list of bookmark folders appears.
ˎ The following icons show the type of folder.
ˎ Both i-mode and Internet sites can be saved as bookmarks,
but with some exceptions.
ˎ The text or setting you entered on the site, etc. is not saved in
the Bookmark.
(Yellow) Preset folder
(Blue) User-created folder
Saving a Site in the Bookmark
While displaying a site, press
(Func).
The bookmark is saved in the selected folder.
When the maximum number of bookmarks has been
reached
The screen for confirming whether to overwrite a
bookmark appears. To overwrite a bookmark, select [Yes]
and select a bookmark to overwrite.
● A title of up to 12 full-width or 24 half-width characters can
be saved in the Bookmark. If the length of the title exceeds
the limit, extra characters are deleted. If there is no title on
the bookmark, the URL appears instead.
Select a bookmark and press
(Cnct).
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
Select [Add bookmark] → a folder and press
The FOMA terminal is connected to the site of the selected
bookmark.
To check the URL
Move the cursor to the bookmark and press
(Check).
To copy a bookmark URL
Move the cursor to the bookmark and press
(Check)
and
(Copy).
To change the title
Move the cursor to the bookmark and from the Function
menu, select [Edit title]. Enter the title within 12 full-width
or 24 half-width characters.
To display other site while displaying a site
From the Function menu, select [Bookmark] → a folder
→ a bookmark.
The Function menu appears.
Select a folder and press
A list of bookmarks appears.
A URL including “http://” of up to 256 half-width
alphanumeric characters and symbols can be saved
as a bookmark.
From the i-mode menu, select [Bookmark] and
press
● “ ” for the i-mode bookmark and “ ” for the Full Browser
bookmark appear on the list of bookmarks of the microSD
memory card
Adding/Deleting Folders
Folders in which bookmarks are saved can be added
or deleted. Up to 10 folders can be used to manage
bookmarks and folder names can also be changed.
ˎ You cannot delete the preset folders.
Example: Adding a folder
From the i-mode menu, select [Bookmark] and
press
, then press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Edit folder] → [Create folder] and press
, then enter a folder name.
Enter a name within 10 full-width or 20 half-width
characters.
The folder is added.
To change a folder name
Move the cursor to a folder and from the Function menu,
select [Edit folder] → [Edit folder name]. Enter a name
within 10 full-width or 20 half-width characters.
To delete a folder
Move the cursor to a folder and from the Function menu,
select [Edit folder] → [Delete folder]. Enter the Security
code and select [Yes].
Continued
165
Moving a Bookmark to a Different
Folder
Saving a Site in the Screen
Memo

Bookmarks can be moved to a different folder using
three methods.
Example: Moving a bookmark
From the i-mode menu, select [Bookmark] → a
folder and press
To move all bookmarks in the folder
From the Function menu, select [Move] → [Move all] →
[Yes] → a folder.
To move several bookmarks
From the Function menu, select [Move] → [Select&move],
select bookmarks, and press
(Complete). Select [Yes]
→ a folder.
Select a bookmark and press
ˎ You can save up to 100 screen memos, each up to 100K
bytes. The number of screen memos that can be saved may
decrease depending on the data to be saved.
ˎ The text or setting you entered on the site, etc. is not saved in
the Screen Memo.
Saving a Screen Memo
(Func).
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
Select [Move] → [Move one] → [Yes] and press
Select a folder and press
The selected bookmark is moved to the different folder.
Deleting a Bookmark
You can delete bookmarks using four methods.
Example: Deleting a bookmark
From the i-mode menu, select [Bookmark] and
press
To delete all bookmarks
From the Function menu, select [Delete all], enter the
Security code, and select [Yes].
Select a folder and press
Select a bookmark and press
Saved screen memos can be displayed. The following
icons show the status of the screen memo.
Normal screen memo
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
4 Select [Delete] → [Delete one] → [Yes] and press
The selected bookmark is deleted.
Select [Add screen memo] and press
Displaying a Screen Memo
To delete all bookmarks in the folder
From the Function menu, select [Delete] → [Delete all],
enter the Security code, and select [Yes].
To delete several bookmarks
From the Function menu, select [Delete] →
[Select&delete], select bookmarks, press
(Complete),
and select [Yes].
(Func).
The screen memo is saved.
When there is not enough memory
The screen for confirming whether to overwrite a screen
memo appears. To overwrite, select [Yes], select
unnecessary screen memos, press
(Complete), and
select [Yes].
When the maximum number of screen memos has been
reached
The screen for confirming whether to overwrite a screen
memo appears. To overwrite, select [Yes] and select a
screen memo to overwrite.
The Select move to display appears.
While displaying a site, press
The Function menu appears.
The Function menu appears.
You can save sites as your favorite ones in the Screen
Memo. You can also instantaneously call up a saved
screen memo.
Protected screen memo
From the i-mode menu, select [Screen Memo] and
press
A list of screen memos appears.
Select a screen memo and press
The screen memo is displayed.
To check the URL
Move the cursor to the screen memo and from the
Function menu, select [URL].
To change the title
Move the cursor to the screen memo and from the
Function menu, select [Edit title]. Enter the title within 10
full-width or 20 half-width characters.
● To operate the Flash movie or GIF animation again, display
the Flash movie entirely and from the Function menu,
select [Retry].
166
3
Protecting a Screen Memo
Select a screen memo from the screen memo list
and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
To cancel the protection
Move the cursor to the protected screen memo and
press
(Func).
Select [Protect ON/OFF] → [Yes] and press
The screen memo is protected and “
”.
” changes to “
Deleting a Screen Memo
You can delete screen memos using three methods.
Example: Deleting a screen memo
From the i-mode menu, select [Screen Memo] and
press
To delete all screen memos
From the Function menu, select [Delete] → [Delete all],
enter the Security code, and select [Yes].
To delete several screen memos
From the Function menu, select [Delete] → [Select&delete],
select screen memos, press
(Complete), and select
[Yes].
Select a screen memo and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Delete] → [Delete one] → [Yes] and press
The selected screen memo is deleted.
Obtaining Graphics from a Site/
Message

You can obtain images and frames from sites and
screen memos, and save them in My picture.
ˎ You can save up to 100K bytes for each image entry. The
number of images that you can save varies depending on the
free memory space on the place to save to and data size.
Example: Saving a graphic displayed in a site
While displaying a site, press
Select a place to save to and press
The graphic is saved in the selected place to save to.
When there is not enough memory or the maximum number
of graphics has been reached
The screen informing insufficient memory or that the
maximum number has been reached appears. To save
the new graphic, select [Sel. delete file] → a folder → a
file, press
(Complete), and select [Yes].
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
The selected image is displayed in a frame and the screen
for selecting the place to save to appears.
[Data Box]:
Save an image in the Data Box. Select a folder to save to.
[microSD]:
Save an image in the microSD memory card.
To perform the Display setting after saving an image
Select [Save&setting] → an image → a place to save to
→ the Display setting.
To save the frame/stamp/Deco-mail pictograph
Select [Save] → an image. The image is saved in an
appropriate folder in My picture of the Data Box.
You can protect screen memos from being overwritten.
You can protect up to 50 screen memos.
Select [Save] → a graphic and press
● You cannot save a GIF image exceeding [UXGA(1600×
1200)] and a GIF animation exceeding [Stby(480×864)]
in the Data Box. You may also not be able to save some
JPEG images in the Data Box.
Downloading Data from Sites 
You can download melodies, PDF data, Chara-den,
ToruCa cards, Deco-mail templates, dictionaries, Kisekae
Tool, and mail (vMessage format) from related sites.
■ Files that can be downloaded
Type
Melody (SMF/MFi)※
PDF data※
Chara-den
ToruCa※
ToruCa(detail)※
Deco-mail template
Dictionary data
Kisekae Tool
Mail (vMessage)※
Maximum downloadable size
100K bytes
2M bytes
100K bytes
1K bytes
100K bytes
200K bytes
100K bytes
2M bytes
200K bytes
※ The number of files that you can save varies depending on
the free memory space on the place to save to and data size.
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Acquire image] and press
To save the background image
Select [Acquire BG image].
Continued
167
Example: Downloading a melody from a related site
While displaying a site, select a melody and
press
You can use highlighted information in a site, message,
mail main body, i-αppli, ToruCa card, PDF data,
i-Channel channel list, and data broadcasting to place
a call, compose mail, display an Internet website, start
i-αppli, activate One Seg, and set a timer for watching/
recording a One Seg program.
Ｄｏｗｎｌｏａｄ
ｃｏｍｐｌｅｔｅｄ
Ｐｌａｙ
Ｓａｖｅ
Ｂａｃｋ
The melody is downloaded and the screen for confirming
whether to save the melody appears.
To check the melody before saving
Select [Play].
To cancel the saving
Select [Back] → [Yes].
Select [Save] and press
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
Select a place to save to and press
The melody is saved.
To download a Chara-den/Deco-mail/template/dictionary
data
While displaying the site, select data and select [Save].
To download a Kisekae tool
While displaying the site, select a Kisekae tool and
select [Save]/[Save temporary]/[Save&setting].
To download PDF data
While displaying the site, select PDF data and select
[Data Box]/[microSD].
To download a ToruCa card
While displaying the site, select a ToruCa card and
select [Yes] → a folder.
To download mail
While displaying the site, select mail and select [Save]
/[Save in mail box].
ˎ When you select [Save in mail box], the mail is saved
in the Mail box. If the data contains several mails, only
the first mail is saved.
When there is not enough memory
The screen for confirming whether to overwrite the data
appears. To overwrite, select unnecessary data (P.294).
● Downloaded melodies may not be played back properly.
● PDF data whose size is unknown is downloaded until the
downloaded size of it reaches 2M bytes.
● You may be able to display the PDF data you failed to
download by downloading it again. However, some PDF
data may be disabled for display.
● If you have deleted preinstalled Chara-den
files or PDF data, you can download them
from “SO@Planet”.
[i Menu] → [メニュー/検索] (Menu/Search)
→ [ケータイ電話メーカー] (Mobile Phone
Manufacturers) → [SO@Planet] (Japanese only)
168
ˎ Sometimes, you may not be able to select an item for
establishing a link to the displayed phone number/mail
address/URL/i-αppli/program information. Whether you can
use the function depends on sites, mail, messages, software,
ToruCa cards, i-Channel contents, and data broadcasting.
Placing a Call from the Current Display
The screen for selecting where to save appears.
[Data Box]:
Save melodies in the Data Box of the FOMA terminal.
Select a folder for saving melodies.
[microSD]:
Save melodies in the microSD memory card.
Using the Phone To/Mail To/
Web To/i-αppli To/Media To
You can place a voice or videophone call or originate a
PushTalk call from a phone number currently displayed
in the display (Phone To, AV Phone To).
ˎ When 2in1 is set to the B mode, you cannot originate a
PushTalk call.
Select a phone number in the display and press
The screen for confirming whether to place a call appears.
Select [Yes] → [Voice call]/[Videophone]/[PushTalk]
and press
ˎ Follow the same steps as in “Placing a call by specifying
a condition” (P.57, step 1 to 3).
Composing/Sending Mail from the
Current Display
Activating One Seg from the Current
Display
You can compose/send mail to a mail address currently
displayed in the display (Mail To).
ˎ When 2in1 is set to the B mode, you cannot use the Mail To
function.
Select a mail address in the display and press
You can activate One Seg from a program information
link currently displayed in the display or set a timer for
watching/recording a One Seg program (Media To).
The Edit mail display appears.
The selected mail address is entered as the address.
The display for One Seg watching or booking reservation
appears.
ˎ Follow the same steps as in “Watching One Seg” (P.243)
or “Setting a Timer for Watching/Recording a One Seg
Program” (P.247, step 4 to 5).
Compose mail and send it.
ˎ Follow the same steps as in “Compose and send mail”
(P.179, step 3 to 5).
Accessing a Site from the Current Display
Select a link (URL) in the display and press
● Even if the link is highlighted, the Media To may not be
used.
Setting i-mode

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
You can connect to a site by i-mode of Full Browser
from a URL currently displayed in the display (Web To).
Select a program information link in the display and
press
Setting the Connection Timeout
The FOMA terminal is connected to the linked site.
Running i-αppli from the Current Display
You can start i-αppli software from a link currently
displayed in the display. The software can also be
started using the infrared communication (i-αppli To).
The duration before disconnecting the FOMA terminal
automatically can be set when you cannot send or
receive data due to heavy traffic at the i-mode center.
ˎ Download software that can be started by the i-αppli To
beforehand.
ˎ i-αppli cannot be started to run when the i-αppli To is set to
[No] (P.209).
Select i-αppli link in the display and press
[60sec]:
Disconnect automatically when unable to send/receive
data for 60 seconds.
[90sec]:
Disconnect automatically when unable to send/receive
data for 90 seconds.
[Unlimited]:
Do not set the connection timeout (however, the
connection can be disconnected due to the radio wave
condition or other reasons).
The screen for confirming whether to start i-αppli appears.
Select [Yes] and press
From the i-mode menu, select [i-mode setting] →
[Common setting] → [Connection timeout] and
press
The software is started to run.
Select the waiting duration and press
The Connection timeout is set.
Continued
169
Changing the i-mode Host
(ISP Connection Communication)
※ You do not need to change the Host setting when
using the i-mode service of DoCoMo.
You can set up to 10 hosts for receiving services other
than the services provided by i-mode (DoCoMo). When
you change a host to other than [i-mode(UIM)], you
cannot use i-mode.
ˎ You must always enter [Host name], [Host number], and [Host
address].
From the i-mode menu, select [i-mode setting] →
[Common setting] → [Host selection] and press
ｉ−ｍｏｄｅ（ＵＩＭ）
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
To edit the settings of the set host
Move the cursor to the set host and from the Function
menu, select [Edit], and enter the Security code. Edit
each item.
To delete the set host
Move the cursor to the set host and from the Function
menu, select [Delete one], enter the Security code, and
select [Yes].
Press
(Create).
The Security code screen appears.
Enter the Security code and press
From the i-mode menu, select [i-mode setting] →
[Use phone info] and press
Select [Yes]/[No] and press
The Use phone info is set.
Disabling the Display of Graphics
From the i-mode menu, select [i-mode setting] →
[Display img] and press
Select [ON]/[OFF] and press
The Display img is set.
When set to [OFF], “ ” is displayed instead of a graphic.
● Some graphics may not be displayed correctly even if the
Display img is [ON].
● The setting of the Display img is synchronized with that of
the Display img of One Seg (P.255).
Displaying a Site Automatically with
the Correct Character Code
Ｈｏｓｔ ｎａｍｅ
Ｈｏｓｔ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ
You can set to identify the character code of a site
automatically.
Ｈｏｓｔ ａｄｄｒｅｓｓ
Ｈｏｓｔ ａｄｄｒｅｓｓ２
[Host name]:
Enter a host name within eight full-width or 16 half-width
characters.
[Host number]:
Enter a host number within 99 half-width alphanumeric
characters and symbols.
[Host address]/[Host address2]:
Enter a host address within 30 half-width alphanumeric
characters and symbols.
Enter each item.
Press
(Complete).
The entered host is saved.
Select the host and press
The host is changed.
● Note that packet communication is not covered by the
Pake-Houdai/Pake-Houdai Full service if a host of the
packet communication is set to other than [i-mode(UIM)].
170
(OK).
Ｈｏｓｔ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
You can set whether to use the saved data (P.163)
when you play back a Flash movie displayed on a site
or saved in the Screen Memo.
You can set whether to display graphics when
displaying sites or screen memos.
Ｈｏｓｔ ｓｅｌｅｃｔｉｏｎ
Setting Whether to Use the Saved Data
for Flash Movies
From the i-mode menu, select [i-mode setting] →
[Auto detect.] and press
Select [ON]/[OFF] and press
The Auto detect. is set.
● Even if the Auto detect. is [ON], some sites may not be
displayed correctly.
Operating the SSL List 
You can set to validate/invalidate the certificate that is
required to connect to an SSL site.
From the i-mode menu, select [i-mode setting] →
[SSL list] and press
ＳＳＬ ｌｉｓｔ
１３
ＣＡ ｃｅｒｔ． １
ＣＡ ｃｅｒｔ． ２
ＣＡ ｃｅｒｔ． ３
ＣＡ ｃｅｒｔ． ４
ＣＡ ｃｅｒｔ． ５
ＣＡ ｃｅｒｔ． ６
ＣＡ ｃｅｒｔ． ７
ＣＡ ｃｅｒｔ． ８
ＣＡ ｃｅｒｔ． ９
ＣＡ ｃｅｒｔ．１０
ＣＡ ｃｅｒｔ．１１
ＤｏＣｏＭｏ ｃｅｒｔ．１
You can issue and download the user certificate from
the FirstPass Center.
The user certificate certifies that you are a FOMA
subscriber. The downloaded user certificate is saved
on the green/white UIM (FOMA card) and enables you
to use FirstPass-compatible sites.
ＦｉｒｓｔＰａｓｓ
・ＦｉｒｓｔＰａｓｓをご利用いた
だくためには、ユーサ゛証明書
の発行申請、タ゛ウンロート゛が必
要です。
・「次へ」を選択して、ユーサ゛
証明書の発行申請、タ゛ウンロー
ト゛を行ってください。
・当サイトの閲覧／ご利用にあ
たってのハ゜ケット通信料は無
料です。
次へ／Ｅｎｇｌｉｓｈ
Select [Valid]/[Invalid] and press
Ｒｅｑｕｅｓｔ ｙｏｕｒ ｃｅｒｔｉｆｉｃａ
ｔｅ
Ｄｏｗｎｌｏａｄ ｙｏｕｒ ｃｅｒｔｉｆｉｃ
ａｔｅ
Ｏｔｈｅｒ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇｓ
Ｔｈｅ ｕｓａｇｅ ｒｅｇｕｌａｔｉｏｎ （
Ｊａｐａｎｅｓｅ ｏｎｌｙ）
(OK).
The Valid/Invalid display appears.
Select [English] and press
ＦｉｒｓｔＰａｓｓ
(Set).
Enter the Security code and press
From the i-mode menu, select [i-mode setting] →
[User certificate] and press
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
Select an SSL certificate and press
The Security code screen appears.

ˎ You cannot use the user certificate using the blue UIM.
ˎ To connect to the FirstPass Center, set the date and time
(P.43).
ˎ The screens and operation methods displayed by the
FirstPass Center may change.
ˎ While the FOMA terminal is connected to the FirstPass Center,
you cannot send/receive mail or receive Message R/F.
ˎ The User certificate is not available overseas.
[CA cert.]:
An authentication company issues these certificates.
They are saved in the FOMA terminal at the time of
purchase.
[DoCoMo cert.]:
This certificate is required for connecting to the FirstPass
Center and FirstPass-compatible sites and is saved on
the UIM (green/white).
[User cert.]:
This certificate is downloaded from the FirstPass Center
by [User certificate] and is saved in the UIM (green/
white).
To check the certificate
Move the cursor to the certificate and press
Setting the FirstPass
The SSL certificate is set.
When set to [Invalid], “ ” changes to “ ”. The SSL
communication is canceled when connecting to an SSL
site that requires a certificate.
Select [Request your certificate] → [Continue] and
press
The PIN2 code input screen appears.
To void the issued certificate
Select [Other settings] → [Revoke your certificate] →
[Yes], enter the PIN2 code, and select [Continue] →
[Continue] → [Continue].
Enter the PIN2 code and press
(OK).
ˎ If you do not enter the PIN2 code within 15 seconds, the
request for issuing your certificate is canceled.
Select [Download] → [Continue] and press
ＦｉｒｓｔＰａｓｓ
Ｒｅｑｕｅｓｔｉｎｇ ａ ｃｅｒｔｉｆｉｃａｔｅ
ｉｓ ｃｏｍｐｌｅｔｅｄ．
Ｄｏｗｎｌｏａｄ ｔｈｅ ｃｅｒｔｉｆｉｃａｔｅ
．
Ｄｏｗｎｌｏａｄ／Ｍｅｎｕ
The user certificate is downloaded and added to the list of
SSL certificates (P.171).
Continued
171
Precautions on the use of FirstPass
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
● The packet communication charge is free when you
connect to the FirstPass Center.
● The packet communication performed when connecting to
a FirstPass-compatible site is covered by the Pake-Houdai/
Pake-Houdai Full service. However, data communication
with a PC connected is not covered by the Pake-Houdai/
Pake-Houdai Full service.
● FirstPass is an electronic authentication service provided
by DoCoMo. Using FirstPass enables client authentication,
which is performed between the site and FOMA terminal
user by exchanging certificates and verifying the received
certificate of the other side for mutual authentication.
● FirstPass can be used for Internet communication from the
FOMA terminal as well as for Internet communication by
connecting the FOMA terminal to a PC. To use on a PC,
you must install the FirstPass PC software on the supplied
CD-ROM.
● When you request the user certificate to be issued,
carefully read the displayed “FirstPass Agreement” and
then make the request if you accept the terms.
● You need to enter the PIN2 code in order to use the user
certificate (P.123).
You are liable for all operations performed after you enter
the PIN2 code. Therefore, exercise care to prevent the use
of your UIM or PIN2 code by others.
● If you have lost or stolen your UIM, you can invalidate
your user certificate at the “General Inquiries” numbers
provided on the backcover of this manual.
● DoCoMo shall have no liability for any content and
information provided by FirstPass-compatible sites. Any
problem must be resolved between you and the FirstPasscompatible site.
● DoCoMo and the authentication company do not
guarantee the security for using FirstPass and SSL.
Therefore, you must use them at your own discretion and
responsibility.
Changing the Host for
Certificate Issue
※ Normally, you do not need to change the setting.
When you want a service other than FirstPass services,
you can set one host. Note that if you change the
setting, you cannot connect to the FirstPass Center.
ˎ You cannot set this function during i-mode connection.
From the i-mode menu, select [i-mode setting] →
[Select host] and press
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ｈｏｓｔ
ドコモ
To edit the set host
Move the cursor to the set host and from the Function
menu, select [Edit] and enter the Security code. Edit
each item.
To restore the default host setting
From the Function menu, select [Reset], enter the
Security code, and select [Yes].
Press
(Create).
The Security code screen appears.
Enter the Security code and press
(OK).
Ｈｏｓｔ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ｈｏｓｔ ｎａｍｅ
Ｈｏｓｔ ａｄｄｒｅｓｓ
[Host name]:
Enter a host name within 99 half-width alphanumeric
characters and symbols.
[Host address]:
Enter a host address within 100 half-width alphanumeric
characters and symbols.
Enter each item.
Press
(Complete).
The entered host is saved.
Select a host and press
The host is changed.
172

What is i-motion?
※ Some i-motion cannot be saved.
Downloading an i-motion from
Sites

Select a place to save to and press
The i-motion is saved.
● Some i-motion may not be played back/saved properly
even if its data is downloaded successfully.
● The playback may be stopped or the image may
be distorted when you play back i-motion while
downloading data depending on the radio wave condition,
communication line conditions, or the communication
speed. A standard type i-motion allows you to play back
as many times as you want after downloading (using the
saved data). However, a streaming type i-motion does not
allow further playback once it is played back (unless you
download it again).
● If you fold the FOMA terminal or execute another
function while downloading/playing back an i-motion, the
downloading/playing back may be stopped depending on
some i-motion.
● You cannot download or play back an i-motion in the ASF
format.
You can download i-motion from a site and save it to
the FOMA terminal.
Setting Whether to Play Back
i-motion Automatically 
ˎ You can save up to 150 i-motion, each up to 10M bytes.
The number of i-motion that can be saved may decrease
depending on the data to be saved.
You can set whether to automatically play back
standard type i-motion.
While displaying a site, select an i-motion and
press
ｉ−ｍｏｔｉｏｎ
Ｐｌａｙ
Ｓａｖｅ
Ｆｉｌｅ ｐｒｏｐｅｒｔｙ
Ｂａｃｋ
The i-motion is downloaded to the FOMA terminal.
When the i-motion auto replay is set to [ON], playback
of the i-motion starts automatically after the downloading
is completed. (For i-motion that can be played back
while being downloaded, playback starts after halfway
downloading data.)
ˎ The operations during playback is the same as those
described for i-motion in the Data Box (P.270).
ˎ Even if you stop playback while the downloading is in
progress, the downloading continues.
From the i-mode menu, select [i-mode setting] →
[i-motion auto replay] and press
Select [ON]/[OFF] and press
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
Category
Description
Playback method
Playback is performed P l a y b a c k s t a r t s a f t e r
while loading data
halfway dow nl oad i ng
(10M bytes maximum) i-motion data and proceeds while downloading
the rest of the data.
Playback is performed P l a y b a c k s t a r t s a f t e r
after loading data
all i-motion data is
(10M bytes maximum) downloaded.
Playback is performed P l a y b a c k s t a r t s a f t e r
Streaming
while loading data
halfway d ow nl oad i ng
type
(Not allowed (10M bytes maximum) i-motion data and proto be saved)
ceeds while downloading
the rest of the data. The
i-motion data is deleted
once it is played back.
The screen for selecting where to save appears.
[Data Box]:
Save the i-motion in i-motion of the Data Box of the
FOMA terminal. Select a folder for saving data.
[microSD]:
Save the i-motion in the microSD memory card.
To play back data
Select [Play].
To display detailed information
Select [File property].
i-motion is movie data that contains both video and
sound tracks. You can play back an i-motion on the
FOMA terminal and set a saved i-motion for the standby display.
The i-motion can be of the following types. The type
of i-motion varies depending on a site and cannot be
selected.
Type
Standard
type
(Allowed to
be saved※)
Select [Save]/[Save temporary] and press
[ON]:
Automatically play back the i-motion during or after
downloading.
[OFF]:
Do not automatically play back the i-motion during or
after downloading and display the download completion
screen.
173
What is i-Channel?
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
The i-Channel service provided by DoCoMo or
another IP (information service providers) distributes
news, weather, etc. as graphics-based information to
i-Channel-compatible terminals.
You can run the latest information updates in the
stand-by display as Telop text by automatically getting
this information on a regular basis. You can also display
a list of channels and view the channel you want by
pressing
(P.174). The channel you select from the
channel list gives you access to rich and detailed
information.
i-Channel is a paid service that requires a subscription.
(To apply for the i-Channel service, the subscription to
i-mode is required.)
There are two types of channels: “Basic channel”
and “Favorite channel”. “Basic channel” is provided
by DoCoMo and is pre-registered, and therefore
you can use it from the moment you start using
the i-Channel service. The packet communication
charge required for automatic updates of information
distributed for the “Basic channel” is free of charge.
IP (information service providers) other than DoCoMo
offers “Favorite channel” that you can register and use
according to your needs. The packet communication
charge required for automatic updates of information
distributed for “Favorite channel” is not included in the
i-Channel service charge.
However, the packet communication charge is required
in addition to the i-Channel service charge when you
view detailed information of “Basic channel” and
“Favorite channel” from the channel list.
Also, note that the packet communication charge
is required for automatic updates of information
distributed for “Basic channel” during international
roaming is not included in the i-Channel service
charge.
ˎ i-Channel is available only in Japanese.
ˎ For details on i-Channel, see the “Mobile Phone User’s Guide
【i-mode】”.
● You can set the display speed of the Telop text and also
turn off the Telop text (P.175).
174
Displaying the i-Channel
Press
(i.ch) in the stand-by display.
The channel list appears.
Select a channel and press
● You may receive specific information when the channel list
is displayed, depending on the terms of use.
When You Receive i-Channel
Changing the i-Channel Settings
Setting the Telop Text
You can set the display speed of the Telop text and
also turn off the Telop text.
→
最高１５℃
１０
The Ticker display appears.
[Stand-by]:
Set the Telop text of the stand-by display used for the
main display.
[Sub display]:
Set the Telop text used for the sub-display.
Telop
When you receive infor mation, the infor mation is
automatically run as Telop text on the stand-by display.
To display the channel list
Press
(i.ch).
To display the Telop text on the sub-display
Fold the FOMA terminal and press
(P.33).
Set the speed for displaying the Telop text at
[Stand-by]/[Sub display].
Select from [Fast], [Std], and [Slow].
To turn off the Telop text
Select [OFF].
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
● When you receive i-Channel information, “ ”→“ ” flashes.
Even if you receive information, the FOMA terminal does
not sound the ring tone or vibrate, and the incoming
indicator does not operate, either.
● If you change the host, the Telop text may be turned off
and information may not be automatically updated. To
receive latest information, press
(i.ch) and display the
channel list. The Telop text starts running automatically.
● You can change the i-Channel host using the Host
selection (P.169). Normally, you do not need to change the
host.
● When the FOMA terminal is powered off, outside of the
service area, or in poor radio wave condition, you may
not be able to receive information. When you receive
information by pressing
(i.ch), the Telop text is
automatically displayed in the stand-by display.
● Telop text is not displayed in the following cases.
- When the Lock all is set
- When the Personal data lock is set
- When the Omakase Lock is set
- When the Public mode (Drive mode) is set
- When the UIM is not inserted
- When the i-Channel or i-mode service is canceled
From the i-mode menu, select [i-Channel] →
[Ticker] and press
● When 2in1 is used, you can set the Ticker for each 2in1
mode.
Restoring the Default Settings
You can delete saved i-Channel data and reset the
Ticker settings to the default settings.
ˎ If an i-motion or i-αppli is set for the stand-by display, the
Ticker settings are not reset.
From the i-mode menu, select [i-Channel] → [Reset
i-Channel] and press
The screen for confirming whether to reset the i-Channel
data appears.
Select [Yes] and press
The i-Channel is reset.
175
Mail
What is i-mode Mail? .......................................................................................................... 178
Displaying the Mail Menu ................................................................................. 178
■ Composing i-mode Mail/Deco-mail
Composing and Sending i-mode Mail ..........................................  179
Composing and Sending Deco-mail .....................................  180
Using a Template to Send Mail ........................................................................................... 183
File Attachment ......................................................................................... 183
Saving i-mode Mail to Send Later ....................................................................  184
■ Receiving/Manipulating i-mode Mail
Receiving i-mode Mail ...................................................................................  185
Selecting to Receive i-mode Mail ..............................................................  186
Checking New i-mode Mail ................................................................  186
Replying to i-mode Mail ................................................................................  187
Forwarding i-mode Mail ................................................................................  187
Saving the Mail Address/Phone Number in the Phonebook .............................................. 187
Playing Back/Saving a File Attachment Received in i-mode Mail ...................................... 188
■ Manipulating the Mail Box
Displaying Received/Sent/Saved Mail ................................................................................ 189
■ Setting Mail
Setting the Mail Function of the FOMA Terminal ............................................  194
■ Using the Message Service
Receiving a Message ............................................................................  198
Checking a New Message .................................................................  199
Displaying a Message ....................................................................  199
■ Using Area Mail
What is Area Mail? .............................................................................................................. 201
Receiving Area Mail ............................................................................... 201
Setting Area Mail ...................................................................................... 201
■ Using SMS
Composing and Sending SMS ....................................................  202
Receiving SMS ............................................................................................  203
Checking New SMS ................................................................................  203
Setting SMS ..................................................................................................  203
177
What is i-mode Mail?
When subscribing to the i-mode service, mail can be
exchanged with i-mode terminals as well as e-mail over
the Internet.
In addition to the main body of text, you can attach
up to 10 files (JPEG, ToruCa, PDF data, etc.) of up
to 2M bytes in total. The i-mode mail function also
provides Deco-mail support, and you can change the
font color/size and background color of the mail main
body text. Since there are many preinstalled Decomail pictographs that can be inserted in an i-mode mail
message in the same manner as other pictographs,
you can easily compose and send expressive mail.
ˎ For details on the i-mode mail, see the “Mobile Phone User’s
Guide【i-mode】”.
About SMS
Mail
You can exchange messages between FOMA terminals
without subscribing to i-mode.
ˎ
ˎ
ˎ
ˎ
Sending SMS (P.202)
Receiving SMS (P.203)
Checking new SMS (P.203)
See DoCoMo’s website to send/receive SMS to/from an
overseas telecommunication company other than DoCoMo.
If Unable to Receive SMS
The SMS received at the SMS center is immediately
sent to your FOMA terminal. When your FOMA terminal
is powered off or cannot receive radio waves because
it is outside of the i-mode service area or due to other
reasons, the SMS is held at the SMS center.
Displaying the Mail Menu

Press
Ｃｍｐｓ ｍｓｇ
ＴＡＳＫ
(Mail) in the stand-by display.
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ
Ｋｉｓｅｋａｅ
Menu name
Inbox
Function
Display, reply to or forward received
mail (P.187, 189).
Outbox
Display or edit sent mail (P.189).
Draft
Display mail that was saved without
being sent and sent unsuccessfully
(P.189).
Compose
Compose and send new i-mode mail
message
(P.179).
WEB Mail
Connect to the WEB mail site to display
mail addressed to Address B and
compose/send mail from Address B at
the site (P.352).
Compose SMS Compose and send new SMS (P.202).
Templates
Display the list of Deco-mail templates
(P.183).
Check new msg Obtain mail, Message R, and Message
F held at the i-mode center (P.186, 199).
Check new SMS Obtain SMS held at the SMS center
(P.203).
Receive option Select and receive mail held at the
i-mode center (P.186).
Mail setting
Set items relating to i-mode mail, SMS,
and Area Mail on the FOMA terminal
(P.119, 194, 203, etc.).
● For details on the WEB mail, see the “Mobile Phone User’s
Guide【2in1】”.
178
Composing and Sending
i-mode Mail

Sent mail is saved in [Outbox].
ˎ Mail may not be displayed correctly on the recipient’s phone
depending on the radio wave condition.
From the Mail menu, select [Compose message]
and press
ˎ You can also display the mail compose display by
pressing
(Cmps msg) in the Mail menu.
Ｅｄｉｔ ｍａｉｌ
Number of entered bytes
０
Enter an address at [
].
Enter an address within 50 half-width alphanumeric
characters and symbols.
Enter a subject at [
].
Enter a subject within 100 full-width or 200 half-width
characters.
Enter the main body at [
].
Enter the main body within 5,000 full-width or 10,000 halfwidth characters.
You can enter a Deco mail pict. to compose Deco-mail
(P.180).
To obtain the location information
From the Function menu, select [Rcv loc. Info] (P.237).
To display the preview image
From the Function menu, select [Preview].
Press
Adding an Address
You can send i-mode mail containing the same
information up to five addresses all at once by adding
these addresses. You can select the type of address
from To, Cc, and Bcc.
Press
(Func) in the Edit mail display.
The Function menu appears.
(Send).
The mail is sent.
To save the main body of text as signature
From the Function menu, select [Save signature].
Mail
● While editing mail, when you change the font size, from
the Function menu, from [Input method] → [Font size],
the setting is only applied for the font size in the matching
word list. The setting for the font size of an address,
subject, and main body text is changed from the next time
when you activate mail (P.119).
● When the number of saved draft mail has reached 50 or
there is not enough memory left for draft mail, you cannot
compose new mail nor edit draft mail.
● If new mail is sent when the number of saved sent mail
has reached 500 or there is not enough free space, the
unprotected sent mail is overwritten from the oldest.
● If mail you send to several addresses is sent successfully
to some and unsuccessfully to other addresses, the same
mail is saved in [Outbox] as sent mail and in [Draft] as
unsent mail/mail sent unsuccessfully.
● Even if the mail is sent successfully, you may receive the
error message “Transmission failed” depending on the
radio wave condition and the mail is saved in [Draft].
● When 2in1 is set to the B mode, you cannot compose any
i-mode mail.
● You cannot send i-mode mail using Address B.
● When you obtain location information and attach the
location information URL, “ ” appears in front of the
location information URL in the main body. Attached
location information URL is counted as the characters in
the mail main body.
● All the part of a title may not be received depending on the
recipient’s terminal model.
Select [Add receiver] → address type (To/Cc/Bcc)
and press
T h e a d d re s s f i e l d o f t h e s e l e c t e d a d d re s s t y p e
([ ]/[ ]/[ ]) is added.
Enter an address in the added address field
[ ]/[ ]/[ ].
To delete an address
Move the cursor to an address and from the Function
menu, select [Delete receiver] → [Yes].
To change the address type
Move the cursor to an address and from the Function
menu, select [Change addr type] → an address type
(To/Cc/Bcc).
Compose mail and send it.
ˎ Follow the same steps as in “Compose and send mail”
(P.179, step 3 to 5).
● The mail addresses entered in To and Cc are displayed
in the recipient’s terminal display. Note, however, that they
may not be displayed depending on the terminal, device, or
mail software of the recipient. The mail addresses entered
in Bcc are not displayed in the recipient’s terminal display.
Continued
179
Entering an Address from the Mail List
You can send mail to several recipients saved in the
mail list.
Press
The Edit mail display appears.
(Func) in the Edit mail display.
Select [Mail list] → a mail list and press
All the members in the list are entered in the address box.
To select a specific address from the mail list
Press
(Each) in the Mail list display and select a
member.
Enter an address and subject.
ˎ Follow the same steps as in “Compose and send mail”
(P.179, step 2 to 3).
The Function menu appears.
From the Mail menu, select [Compose message]
and press
Compose mail and send it.
ˎ Follow the same steps as in “Compose and send mail”
(P.179, step 3 to 5).
Enter/decorate the main body at [
].
Enter the main body within 5,000 full-width or 10,000 halfwidth characters.
ˎ Number of characters permitted in the main body may
be reduced depending on the type and volume of
decoration you use.
Press
in the Main body input display to display the
decoration menu.
Ｉｎｐｕｔ
Composing and Sending
Deco-mail

Ｄｅｃｏ． ｓｌｃｔｅｄ ｔｘｔ
Mail
You can compose and send Deco-mail, i-mode mail
that has a decorated main body.
ˎ Deco-mail may not be received or displayed correctly
depending on the recipient’s terminal model.
Main body input display
Ｉｎｐｕｔ
Ｎｅｗｃｏｍｍｅｒｓ
Deco-mail
Ｓａｓｈａ ａｎｄ Ｂｅｃｋｉｅ ａｒｅ ｖｅｒ
ｙ ｃｕｔｅ ａｎｄ ｓｏ ｆｒｉｓｋｙ． Ｔｈ
ｅｙ ａｒｅ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ ｔｈｒｏｕｇｈｏｕ
ｔ ｔｈｅ ｈｏｕｓｅ ｔｉｒｅｌｅｓｓｌｙ．
Icons for the specified decoration
items
Ｗｈｙ ｎｏｔ ｓｅｅ ’ｅｍ
Ｉｆ ｙｏｕ ｍｉｓｓ ｔｈｉｓ ｃｈａｎｃｅ，
ｙｏｕ ｗｉｌｌ ｎｅｖｅｒ ｓｅｅ ｓｕｃｈ
ｃｕｔｅ ｌｉｔｔｌｅ ｋｉｔｔｅｎｓ．
Blink/Move
Ｒ．ａｂ４０６１
漢カナＡａ１２
Preview display
Ｐｒｅｖｉｅｗ
Ｎｅｗｃｏｍｍｅｒｓ
Color/Size/Align
Ｓａｓｈａ ａｎｄ Ｂｅｃｋｉｅ ａｒｅ ｖｅｒ
ｙ ｃｕｔｅ ａｎｄ ｓｏ ｆｒｉｓｋｙ． Ｔｈ
ｅｙ ａｒｅ ｒｕｎｎｉｎｇ ｔｈｒｏｕｇｈｏｕ
ｔ ｔｈｅ ｈｏｕｓｅ ｔｉｒｅｌｅｓｓｌｙ．
Background color
Insert image
Ｗｈｙ ｎｏｔ ｓｅｅ ’ｅｍ
Ｉｆ ｙｏｕ ｍｉｓｓ ｔｈｉｓ ｃｈａｎｃｅ，
ｙｏｕ ｗｉｌｌ ｎｅｖｅｒ ｓｅｅ ｓｕｃｈ
ｃｕｔｅ ｌｉｔｔｌｅ ｋｉｔｔｅｎｓ．
Ｒ．４０６１
180
漢カナＡａ１２
Insert line
Ｄｅｃｏｒａｔｅ ｔｈｅ ｓｅｌｅｃｔｅｄ ｔｅｘｔ
Set the decorations and press
(Close) to end the
decoration menu.
The following table indicates the decoration items, buttons
displayed in the decoration menu, and icons which
appear in the title field of the Main body input display after
decoration.
Decoration
menu
Icon
[1]:
Color/Size
[2]:
Quick deco.
Mail
−
[3]:
Blink/Move/
Align
[5]:
Deco. slcted
txt
[6]:Insert line
−
−
−
−
[7]:Close
[8]:
Background
color
[9]:Reset all
−
−
Use
to select a font size
from three types, large/medium/
small and
to select font and
line colors from 20 colors.
ˎ When you select a font color,
the color of a pictograph is also
changed. To reset to the normal
pictograph color, select [None].
ˎ You cannot change the size of
the Deco-mail pictograph.
You can specify the background
and font colors of Deco-mail all at
once and also insert a decoration
line above and below the text by
selecting a pattern image and its
color scheme (P.182).
Use
to select whether
or not to allow the text to blink
(ON/OFF) and
to select the
alignment (left justified/centered/
right justified) or move (none/
Telop text/swing).
You can insert up to 20 types
of images (90K bytes) from My
picture of the Data Box. You
can also select a Deco-mail
pictograph.
After specifying the range of the
main body, you can decorate it.
You can decorate the mail using
[Color/Size] and [Blink/Move/
Align], one after the other (P.181).
The line in the color set in [Color/
Size] is inserted.
you can quit the decoration menu.
You can select the background
color from 20 colors.
You can cancel the all decorations.
● Even if you delete a decorated character, the data used
for decoration may not be erased and the number of
characters in the mail main body that you can enter could
be reduced. After canceling the decoration, delete the
character. When you press
for over a second, both
the character and the decoration data are deleted.
● Blinking, motion, and animation stop automatically after a
certain period of time.
● When Deco-mail exceeding 10,000 bytes is sent to a
terminal of other than the following models※, it is received
as ordinary mail in which a URL for viewing the Deco-mail
is included. However, some terminals may receive mail
only of the main body in which no URL for viewing the
Deco-mail is included.
※ 903i series, 904i series, 905i series, 703i series
(excluding P703iμ), and 704i series (excluding P704iμ)
Specifying Decoration After Entering
the Main Body
Press
in the main body input display.
The decoration menu appears.
Mail
[4]:
Insert image
Description
Select [
Select the decoration start point and press
] and press
The first character to be decorated is set.
Select the decoration end point and press
The range of the text to be decorated is set and the Cross
Deco-palette appears.
Select the font size/color and press
Use
to select the font size (large/medium/small) and
to select the font color.
ˎ If you do not set the font size/color, press
Select the text blink/move/alignment and press
Use
to select whether or not to allow the text to blink
(ON/OFF) and
to select the alignment (left justified/
centered/right justified) or move (none/Telop text/swing).
ˎ If you do not set the text blink/move/alignment, press
ˎ You can set a decoration by entering a digit in front of
the name of the decoration menu.
To undo the last decoration setting
Press
(Undo).
To check the decoration settings
Press
(Close) and from the Function menu, select
[Preview].
To enter Deco mail pict.
Press
(Pict/Sym) to select Deco mail pict.
Deco mail pict. is a Deco-mail pictograph that can be
entered only in the Edit mail, Edit template, and Edit
signature displays.
Press
(Close) and then press
(Send).
To save the composed Deco-mail as a template
From the Function menu, select [Save template] → [Yes].
The Deco-mail is saved in Templates.
Continued
181
Specifying Decoration All at Once
” from the decoration menu, all the specified
ˎ If you select “
decorations are canceled.
Press
Select [
in the main body input display.
] and press
in the main body input display.
Select the decoration and press
The Cross Deco-palette appears.
When you select “
”
Use
to select the font size
Ｉｎｐｕｔ
(“ ” large/“ ” medium/“ ”
small) and
to select the font
color.
The Cross Deco-palette appears.
Ｉｎｐｕｔ
Ｑｕｉｃｋ ｄｅｃｏ． Ｍａｉｌ
Press
The decoration menu appears.
The decoration menu appears.
Entering the Main Body After
Specifying Decoration
Ｃｏｌｏｒ／Ｓｉｚｅ
Font color
Font size
Background color
Font color
Font color [none]
Ｓａｍｐｌｅ
Ｓａｍｐｌｅ
Select the font/background color and press
When you select “
Ｉｎｐｕｔ
Mail
Use
to select the font color and
to select the
background color.
ˎ If you do not set the font/background color, press
Ｉｎｐｕｔ
Ｂｌｉｎｋ／Ｍｏｖｅ／Ａｌｉｇｎ
”
Use
to select whether or
not to allow the text to blink (“ ”
ON/“ ” OFF) and
to select
the alignment (“ ” left justified/
“ ” centered/“ ” right justified)
or move (“ ” none/“ ” Telop text/
“ ” swing).
Blink
Move
Align
Ｓａｍｐｌｅ
Ｑｕｉｃｋ ｄｅｃｏ． Ｍａｉｌ
Select a pattern image/color scheme and press
When you select “
”
Select an image from My picture of the Data Box.
When you select “
”
Insert a line at the line where the cursor is displayed.
When you select “
”
Use
to select the background
Ｉｎｐｕｔ
color.
Use
to select a pattern image to be inserted above
and below the text and
to select a pattern image/
color scheme.
ˎ If you do not set a pattern image/color scheme, press
Press
(Close) and enter the main body.
Ｂａｃｋｇｒｏｕｎｄ ｃｏｌｏｒ
Enter text within 5,000 full-width or 10,000 half-width
characters.
ˎ Number of characters permitted in the main body may
be reduced depending on the type and volume of
decoration you use.
● You can also select the Quick deco. Mail after entering the
main body.
182
Background color
Background color [none]
Ｓａｍｐｌｅ
Press
(Close) and enter the main body.
Enter text within 5,000 full-width or 10,000 half-width
characters.
ˎ Number of characters permitted in the main body may
be reduced depending on the type and volume of
decoration you use.
Using a Template to Send Mail
A template is a model used for Deco-mail, which is
preset with decorations for the main body. You can use
templates to easily compose/send Deco-mail.
You can download a template from a site and also
save up to 50 composed/received/sent Deco-mails as
templates (P.181).
ˎ You cannot edit or delete a preinstalled template.
From the Mail menu, select [Templates] and
press
Ｔｅｍｐｌａｔｅｓ
To check a template
Select a template.
To change the title
Move the cursor to a template and from the Function
menu, select [Edit title]. Enter the title within 10 full-width
or 20 half-width characters.
To delete a template
Move the cursor to a template and from the Function
menu, select [Delete] → [Delete one] → [Yes]. To delete
several templates, from the Function menu, select
[Delete] → [Select&delete], select templates, press
(Complete), and select [Yes]. To delete all templates,
from the Function menu, select [Delete] → [Delete all],
enter the Security code, and select [Yes].
To edit a template
Move the cursor to a template and press
(Edit).
Select a template and press
(Mail).
The Edit mail display appears.
Compose mail and send it.
ˎ Follow the same steps as in “Compose and send Decomail” (P.180, step 2 to 4).
● When you save Deco-mail containing an image that
cannot be sent as a mail attachment or Deco-mail with a
file attachment as a template, the image or file attachment
is not saved.

Yo u c a n s e n d i - m o d e m a i l w i t h u p t o 1 0 f i l e
attachments, 2M bytes in total, including still images,
movies/i-motion, melodies, ToruCa cards, PDF data,
Phonebook, Schedule, Bookmark, My data, and other
files.
■ Files that can be attached
Type
Restrictions, etc.
Image (GIF/JPEG/SWF) ˎ A JPEG image exceeding 2M
bytes is automatically converted
to a file of 2M bytes or less. (It is
only the first file attachment that
can be selected for conversion.)
Movie/i-motion (MP4)
ˎ A movie/i-motion file exceeding
2M bytes is automatically clipped
from the beginning within 2M
bytes. (It is only the first file
attachment that can be selected
for conversion.)
ˎ A movie/i-motion whose image
size is set to [VGA(640×480)] or
less can be attached.
ˎ An attached movie may appear
grainy or may be displayed
after being converted into
several continuous still images
depending on the recipient’s
terminal model.
ˎ Some i-motion files may not be
attached.
(Green) Melody (SMF) ˎ A m e l o d y m a y n o t b e s e n t
(Orange) Melody (MFi)
properly to mobile phones other
than SO905i.
ToruCa
ˎ You may not be able to send
some ToruCa cards.
PDF data (PDF)
ˎ PDF data that you obtained by
page cannot be attached.
Tool data
ˎ The Phonebook, My data,
Schedule, and Bookmark data
can be attached.
Other files
−
Mail
浜でお散歩
海でぷかぷか
らぶらぶ
ＳＥＥ ＹＯＵ
いってらっしゃーい
ガンバレ！
これってラッキー？
元気？
男の子
お化け
きのこ
きらり
File Attachment
ˎ Files that cannot be attached to mail and files prohibited from
being retrieved out of the FOMA terminal cannot be attached.
ˎ When you reply to mail saved in the microSD memory card,
you cannot attach a file (P.282).
Press
(Func) in the Edit mail display.
The Function menu appears.
Continued
183
2
Select [Add attach file] and press
Mail
The Select attach file display appears.
[Image]:
Select an image from My picture of the Main memory/
microSD.
[i-motion]:
Select a movie/i-motion from i-motion of the Main
memory/microSD.
[Melody]:
Select a melody from Melody of the Main memory/
microSD.
[ToruCa]:
Select data from ToruCa of the Main memory/microSD.
[PDF]:
Select PDF data from My document of the Main memory/
microSD.
[Phonebook]:
Select data from Phonebook of the Main memory/
microSD. However, when the Save/attach image of the
Phonebook is set to [Invalid], the image is not attached.
[My data]:
Attach My data.
[Schedule]:
Select data from Schedule of the Main memory/microSD.
[Bookmark]:
Select data from Bookmark of the Main memory/
microSD.
[Others]:
Select data from Others of the microSD.
[Activate camera]:
Select [Camera]/[Movie] and record images/movies
using the camera (P.142, 146).
Select a file type and press
To check the contents of a file
Move the cursor to a file and press
(Play).
Select a folder → a file and press
Ｅｄｉｔ ｍａｉｌ
２００７１１１４１８３００６． １１．４ＫＢ
● It may take time to send mail depending on the size of a
file attachment.
● When you send mail to an i-mode terminal which does
not support 2M-byte file transmission, you can only attach
files of the supported types and size within the capacity of
the recipient’s terminal. If you attach files of unsupported
types or size exceeding the capacity, the file attachments
are deleted and only the mail main body is sent to the
recipient.
When you send a movie as a file attachment to i-mode
terminals of other than the following models※, a movie
that is recorded with [High quality] or [Long play] set at
the Com. replay mode is recommended.
※ 903i series, 904i series, 905i series, 703i series
(excluding P703iμ), and 704i series (excluding P704iμ)
● When you send mail to an i-mode terminal for the Mova
service, file attachment is restricted to one JPEG image,
melody of the MFi format, or i-motion file. The recipient
receives it as mail with a URL linked to the file. If you
attach multiple files or an unsupported file, the attached
files are deleted and only the mail main body is sent to the
recipient.
Deleting a File Attachment
Select a file in the Edit mail display and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Del attach file] → [Yes] and press
The file attachment is deleted.
Saving i-mode Mail to Send
Later

If you do not want to send composed mail immediately,
you can save it in [Draft].
Press
(Func) in the Edit mail display.
The Function menu appears.
Select [Save] and press
The composed mail is saved as unsent mail in [Draft].
To edit saved mail
From the Mail menu, select [Draft] → [Draft] → mail.
０
The file is attached and “ ”, “ ”, “ ”(Green), “ ”(Orange),
“ ”, “ ”, “ ”, or “ ” appears.
When you select the image that is added the location
information
The screen for confirming whether to attach the location
information URL to the main body appears. If you select
[Yes], “ Location information URL” is entered at the
end of the main body.
Compose mail and send it.
ˎ Follow the same steps as in “Compose and send mail”
(P.179, step 2 to 5).
184
Receiving i-mode Mail

When mail is sent to the i-mode center, the FOMA
terminal automatically receives them.
While receiving mail, “ ” flashes.
To cancel receiving mail
Press
(Cancel). “ ” appears
in the next display informing
the completion of reception.
Receiving may be completed
depending on the timing of
cancellation.
Ｒｅｃｅｉｖｉｎｇ ｍａｉｌ
Ｕｎｒｅａｄ ｍａｉｌ／ｍｅｓｓａｇｅ
１
０
０
Mail
Ｍａｉｌ
ＭｅｓｓａｇｅＲ
ＭｅｓｓａｇｅＦ
When receiving is completed, “ ” is
displayed, the indicator flashes, the
ring tone sounds, and the number
of received mail is displayed.
T h e d i s p l a y b e f o re re c e i v i n g
reappears after about 15 seconds.
ˎ When returning to the stand-by
display, the notification icon “ ”
(New mail) appears. Press
(Link) and select “ ” to display
the Inbox display.
● You can automatically receive up to 100K bytes of data
in each mail, including the file attachment. You have to
manually obtain a file attachment exceeding 100K bytes
from the i-mode center (P.189).
● If new mail is received when the number of saved received
mail has reached 1,000 or there is not enough free space,
the unprotected read mail is overwritten from the oldest.
● When you receive multiple mail at the same time, the ring
tone, call picture, and indicator color of the last received
mail have priority.
● Mail that has been sent to you in the following situations is
held at the i-mode center.
- During a videophone call
- When the FOMA terminal is powered off
- When the FOMA terminal is outside of the i-mode
service area
- During PushTalk communication
- While receiving SMS
- While the Self mode is set
- While the Omakase Lock is set
- During the infrared communication
- During the iC communication
- While updating the software
- While connected to the FirstPass Center
- While connected to the Data Security Service Center
● Some mail is held at the i-mode center when “ ” appears
(sometimes “ ” does not appear even if mail is held at the
i-mode center).
If the maximum number of mail is held at the i-mode
center, “ ” appears. In this case, check the contents of
unread mail, delete unnecessary received mail, or cancel
protection of received mail before performing the Check
new message.
● When the size of received mail (number of characters
and file attachment size) has exceeded the number
of characters (data size) specified at Limit Mail Size
accessible through [i Menu] → [English iMenu] →
[Options] → [Mail Settings], the file attachment cannot be
received automatically.
185
Selecting to Receive i-mode
Mail

You can check through mail held at the i-mode center,
where you can select mail to receive and delete mail
without receiving it based on the information such as
mail subject. To use this function, set the Recv option
setting to [ON]. When the Recv option setting is set to
[ON], i-mode mail is not received automatically.
ˎ When the Recv option setting is set to [ON], the Mail tone
does not sound and when the Manner mode or Vibrator is set,
the vibrator does not operate.
When receiving mail, the notification
icon “ ” (Mail at center) appears.
To check mail
Press
(Link) in the stand-by
display and select “ ” → [Yes].
The FOMA terminal is connected
to the i-mode center.
Select [受信/削除] (Receive/Delete) and press
１／２ﾍﾟｰｼﾞまで選択したﾒｰﾙ
を
受信／削除
−−−−−−−−
ｉﾓｰﾄﾞｾﾝﾀｰから全てのﾒｰﾙを
削除
To delete all mail
Select [削除] (Delete) below [ｉモードセンターから全て
のメールを] (All mail from the i-mode center).
Select [決定] (OK) and press
The selected mail is received.
Checking New i-mode Mail

New mail held at the i-mode center while the FOMA
terminal is powered off or outside of the i-mode service
area can be checked.
ˎ Depending on the radio wave condition, you may not be able
to check new mail.
Mail
Ｍａｉｌ ａｔ ｃｅｎｔｅｒ
Receiving i-mode Mail after Selecting
Connect to the i-mode center and select mail to
receive.
ˎ When 2in1 is set to the B mode, the Receive option cannot be
performed.
From the Mail menu, select [Receive option] and
press
ﾒｰﾙ選択受信
（１／２ﾍﾟｰｼﾞ）
−−−−−−−−
選択受信説明
[１] 保留
０７／１１／１２ １７：５４
Ｓｏｒｒｙ ｆｏｒ ｄｅｌａｙ
ｄｏｃｏｍｏｔａｒｏ＠ △△ ．□□□．ｃｏ．ｊ
ｐ
サイス゛：１．３Ｋハ゛イト
The call is connected to the i-mode center and the list of
i-mode mail saved at the center appears.
ˎ When the mail contains a file attachment, the following
icons appear.
Still image file attachment
i-motion attachment
Melody attachment
ToruCa card attachment
Other file attachment
Select [保留] (Holding) for the mail and press
[受信] (Receive):
Receive a selected i-mode mail.
[削除] (Delete):
Delete a selected i-mode mail.
[保留] (Holding):
Hold a selected i-mode mail at the i-mode center.
186
Select [受信] (Receive) and press
Press
display.
(Mail) for over a second in the stand-by
The FOMA terminal is connected to the i-mode center, and
an inquiry result is displayed.
To check mail
Select [Mail].
Replying to i-mode Mail

You can compose and send replies to the received
mail.
ˎ You may not be able to reply to some received mail.
From the received mail list, select mail and press
(Quote).
Compose mail and send it.
Saving the Mail Address/Phone
Number in the Phonebook
Saving the Sender’s/Recipient’s Mail
Address in the Phonebook
You can save the mail address of a received mail
sender and recipient or sent/saved mail recipient in the
Phonebook.
Example: Saving the mail address of a received mail sender to
the FOMA terminal phonebook as a new entry

From the received mail list, select mail and press
(Func).
Select [New] and press
The screen for selecting where to save appears.
When you select [Add]
Select an entry to which you want to add the mail
address from the Phonebook.
When there are multiple mail addresses
Select mail addresses → [New]/[Add].
Select [Main memory] and press
The Edit phonebook display appears.
To save to the UIM phonebook
Select [UIM].
Save other items.
ˎ Follow the same steps as in “Add to FOMA terminal
phonebook” (P.91, step 3 to 5) or in “Add to UIM
phonebook” (P.93, step 3).
You can forward received mail to another person. A file
attachment is also forwarded.
Select [Save address] and press
The screen for selecting how to save to the Phonebook
appears.
Forwarding i-mode Mail
The Function menu appears.
ˎ Follow the same steps as in “Compose and send mail”
(P.179, step 3 to 5).
The reply mail is sent and “ ” appears.
● No quote is used for a file attachment, a melody or i-αppli
To link that is inserted in the mail main body, and an image
in Deco-mail that cannot be redistributed.
● You cannot reply to the i-mode mail sent to Address B of
2in1.
From the received mail list, select mail, press
and press
(Func).
Mail
The Edit mail display appears.
The mail address as address, “Re: title of the received
mail” as subject, and “>main body of the received mail” as
main body are entered beforehand.
ˎ When the subject including “Re:” exceeds 100 full-width
or 200 half-width characters, the extra characters are
automatically deleted.
ˎ When the subject of the received mail includes more
than one “Re:”, some “Re:” are brought together in one
automatically.
To reply to mail without the sender’s message
Move the cursor to mail and press
(Reply).
To reply to broadcast mail
Select mail, press
(Quote) or
(Reply), and select
[Reply to sender]/[Reply all].
● A melody or i-αppli To link inserted in the mail main body,
an image in Deco-mail that cannot be redistributed, and a
file not yet downloaded are not forwarded.
Press
(Complete).
The entry is saved in the FOMA terminal phonebook.
The Function menu appears.
Select [Forward] and press
The Edit mail display appears.
“Fw: title of the received mail” as subject and “main body of
the received mail” as main body are entered beforehand.
ˎ When the subject including “Fw:” exceeds 100 full-width
or 200 half-width characters, the extra characters are
automatically deleted.
ˎ When the subject of the received mail includes more
than one “Fw:”, some “Fw:” are brought together in one
automatically.
Compose mail and send it.
ˎ Follow the same steps as in “Compose and send mail”
(P.179, step 2 to 5).
The mail is forwarded and “ ” appears.
Continued
187
Saving the Phone Number/Mail
Address in Display in the Phonebook
The mail addresses or phone numbers currently
displayed in the site, received mail/sent mail, or ToruCa
card can be saved in the Phonebook.
ˎ Depending on the site, the displayed phone number or mail
address may not be saved.
Example: Saving the phone number contained in the main body
of the received mail to the FOMA terminal phonebook
as a new entry
From the received mail list, select mail and press
, and then select the phone number and press
(Func).
Playing Back/Saving a File
Attachment Received in i-mode Mail
You can display/play back/save/delete a file that
is attached or pasted in i-mode mail or a message
including an image, movie/i-motion, melody, ToruCa
card, PDF data, Phonebook, Schedule, Bookmark, and
My data.
■ File attachments that can be played back and saved
Format
Image (JPEG/GIF/
SWF)
The Function menu appears.
Select [Add to phonebook] and press
The screen for selecting how to save to the Phonebook
appears.
Select [New] and press
Movie/i-motion
(MP4)
Melody (SMF/MFi)
Mail
The screen for selecting where to save appears.
When you select [Add]
Select an entry to which you want to add the phone
number from the Phonebook.
Select [Main memory] and press
The Edit phonebook display appears.
To save to the UIM phonebook
Select [UIM].
PDF data (PDF)
Tool data
Save other items.
ˎ Follow the same steps as in “Add to FOMA terminal
phonebook” (P.91, step 3 to 5) or in “Add to UIM
phonebook” (P.93, step 3).
ToruCa card
Press
Other files
(Complete).
The entry is saved in the FOMA terminal phonebook.
Restrictions
ˎ You can save a Deco-mail pictograph
and stamp/frame in the Data Box only.
ˎ You cannot play back a Flash movie of
100K bytes or more. You can save a
Flash movie of 100K bytes or more in
the microSD memory card only.
−
ˎ You cannot play back a melody of 100K
bytes or more. You can save a melody
of 100K bytes or more in the microSD
memory card only.
ˎ You may not be able to play back
correctly a melody sent from a mobile
phone other than SO905i.
ˎ You cannot play back a ToruCa card of
1K bytes or more and a ToruCa(detail)
card of 100K bytes or more.
−
ˎ You can save the Phonebook, Schedule,
and Bookmark data.
ˎ When you save a file using [Save
attached], you cannot select the Main
memory.
ˎ You can save other files in the microSD
memory card only.
ˎ The number of files that you can save varies depending on
the free memory space on the place to save to and data size.
Example: Saving a file attachment received in mail
1 From the received mail list, select mail and press
Select a file attachment and press
The Function menu appears.
To display/play back a file attachment
Move the cursor to the file attachment and press
188
(Func).
3
Select [Save attached] and press
Deleting a File Attachment
The Save to display appears.
[Data Box]:
Save a file attachment in the Data Box. Select a folder to
save to.
[microSD]:
Save a file attachment in the microSD memory card.
To play back a melody pasted in a message
Select [Play melody].
To save a melody pasted in a message
Select [Save melody] → a place to save to.
To check a melody title
Select [Confirm title].
To display details about an inserted image
Select [Insert img info] → an image. The detailed
information appears.
To save an inserted image
Select [Save insert img] → an image → a place to save
to.
Select a place to save to and press
ˎ You cannot obtain a file attachment whose retention period is
expired.
Select “
” and press
The obtaining operation starts and the file attachment is
obtained.
● If you obtain a file attachment not yet existing when there
exist already 1,000 received mails or there is no more
free memory space in the FOMA terminal, the obtained
data overwrites the unprotected read mail from the oldest
one. Depending on the size of the file attachment to be
obtained, multiple mails may be overwritten by it.
Select a file attachment and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Del attach file] → [Yes] and press
The file attachment is deleted.
Displaying Received/Sent/
Saved Mail
You can display received/sent/saved mail any time you
want to. Received and sent mail can be saved in [Inbox]
and [Outbox], respectively. Mail that was saved without
being sent or sent unsuccessfully, is saved in [Draft].
ˎ You can save up to 1,000 received mails, up to 500 sent
mails, up to 50 saved mails, and up to 30 Area Mail. The
number of files that can be saved may decrease depending
on the data to be saved.
ˎ For SMS saved in the UIM, some function menu items are not
available.
From the Mail menu, select [Inbox]/[Outbox]/[Draft]
and press
２５／６６
Ｉｎｂｏｘ
ＭｅｓｓａｇｅＲ
ＭｅｓｓａｇｅＦ
You can obtain a file attachment exceeding 100K
bytes and one for which the Attached file pref. is set to
[Invalid].
1 From the received mail list, select mail and press
Ｉｎｂｏｘ
Receiving a File Attachment Selectively
From the received mail list, select mail and press
Example: Deleting a file attached to the received mail
Received mail
● Some of the received image and movie/i-motion may not
be played back correctly.
ˎ You cannot delete an i-αppli To link that is displayed in the
mail main body.
Mail
The file is saved.
To display Tool data
Move the cursor to the file attachment, press
, and
select [Confirm].
To save Tool data in the FOMA terminal
Move the cursor to the file attachment, press
select [Register], enter the Security code, and select
[Add]/[Overwrite].
When there is not enough memory
The screen for confirming whether to overwrite the data
appears. To overwrite, select unnecessary data (P.294).
You can delete a file that is attached to i-mode mail.
ˎ The number of saved mail in the folder at the cursor/the
total number of mail is displayed at the right end of the
title line.
ˎ The following icons show the status of the folder. Next to
the icon, the folder name is displayed.
(Yellow)
(Blue)
Preset folder/Mail security is set
User-created folder/Mail security is set
Folder created by i-αppli with mail/Mail
security is set
ˎ If there is unread mail, “ ” appears at the lower left
of the icon.
ˎ When 2in1 is set to Address B, sent and saved mail
cannot be displayed.
To display the SMS list in the UIM
Press
(UIM).
ˎ When 2in1 is set to the B mode, the SMS list cannot
be displayed.
Continued
189
2
Select a folder and press
The received/sent/saved mail list appears.
Received mail
Ｉｎｂｏｘ
１／２５
１５：５１ ドコモ一郎
Ｐｈｏｔｏ ｃｏｎｔｅｓｔ
１２：３４ ドコモ二郎
Ｃｏｎｃｅｒｔ ｔｉｃｋｅｔ ｎｅｘｔ ｍｏ
１１／１３ 携帯なつ子
Ｙｅｓｔｅｒｄａｙ’ｓ ｓｕｂｊｅｃ
１１／１２ 携帯なつ子
Ｔｈｅ ａｐｐｌｉｃａｔｉｏｎ ｄｅａｄｌｉｎｅ
Ｈａｐｐｙ
Ｂｉｒｔｈｄａｙ
ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｘｔ
ｐｈｏｔｏ ｃｏｎｔｅ
ｓｔ １１／１１
ｉｓ ｔｈｅｄｏｃｏｍｏ．ｔａｒｏ
ｄａｙ ａｆｔｅｒ ｔｏｍｏ
ｒｒｏｗ．
Ｔｏ ｓｅｔ
ａｐｐｌｙ，
Ｐｌａｃｅ
ｆｏｒ ｅｉｔｈｅｒ
ｍｅｅｔｉｎ ｒ
ｅｐｌｙ ｔｏ ｔｈｉｓ ｍａｉｌ ｏｒ ｃａｌ
１１／１０
ｌ ｕｓ．
Ｗｅ 携帯はる子
ｈｏｐｅ ｔｏ ｈｅａｒ ｆｒ
ｏｍ
ｙｏｕ． ２０ ｍｉｎｕｔｅｓ ｌ ｗｉ
Ｓｏｒｒｙ，
Received date/time
Sender
Subject
Read mail (Protect ON)
Replied mail (Protect ON)
Forwarded mail (Protect ON)
Sent mail (Protect ON)
Mail type
SMS
SMS in the UIM (Received/sent mail only)
Area Mail (Received mail only)
Sent date/time
Recipient
Subject
Mail used by i-αppli with mail
File attachment type
With image attachment
With movie attachment
With melody attachment
With ToruCa card attachment
Mail
With i-αppli To
With PDF data attachment
With Tool data attachment (Phonebook,
Schedule, Bookmark)
Saved mail
１／２５
１５：５１ ドコモ二郎
Ｉ’ｖｅ ｇｏｔ ｔｈｅ ｔｉｃｋ
１１／１３ ｄｏｃｏｍｏ．ｔａｒｏ
Ｇｉｖｅ ｍｅ ａ ｃａｌｌ
１１／１３ 携帯はる子
Ｈｏｗ ａｂｏｕｔ ｓｋｉｉｎｇ
１１／１２ ドコモ二郎
Ｓｏｒｒｙ！
１１／１２ ドコモ一郎
Ｓｏｕｖｅｎｉｒ ｆｏｒ ｙｏｕ
１１／１１ 携帯はる子
Ｍａｐ ｔｏ ｔｈｅ ｅｖｅｎｔ
Saved date/time
Recipient
Subject
You can change the display style of the mail list (P.195).
ˎ The received/sent/saved date/time field indicates the
time when the mail is received/sent/saved today, and
otherwise the date. When the date/time is corrected to
the local time during international roaming, “ ” appears
(P.43).
ˎ For SMS, the beginning of the mail main body is
displayed instead of the subject.
ˎ For Area Mail, “エリアメール” and the beginning of the
mail main body are displayed instead of the sender and
the subject, respectively.
ˎ All the part of a title may not be displayed.
ˎ When 2in1 is used, mails for each Address A and
Address B are colored differently.
ˎ The following icons show the status and type of the mail
and the type of the file attachment.
190
Unable to reply mail (Received mail only)
１／２５
２０：１２ 携帯はる子
Ｄｅｐａｒｔｕｒｅ ｄａｔｅ ａｎ
１０：２４ ｄｏｃｏｍｏ．ｔａｒｏ
Ｉｔ’ｓ ａ ｌｏｎｇ ｔｉｍｅ ｓｉｎｃｅ
１１／１３ ドコモ一郎
Ｐｒｅｓｅｎｔ
１１／１２ 携帯はる子
Ｌｏｎｇ ｄｅｓｉｒｅｄ ＸＸＸ！ Ｔｈｅ ｌｏ
ｍｅｌｏｄｙ
ｎｇ Ｎｅｗ
ａｗａｉｔｅｄ
ｄｅｐａｒｔｕｒｅ ｉｓ
ｃｌｏｓｅ
ａｔ ドコモ二郎
ｈａｎｄ．
１１／１１
Ｌｅｔ’ｓ
ｍｅｅｔ ｔｏｇｅｔｈｅｒ
ａｔ Ｘ
Ｓｎａｐｓｈｏｔｓ
ｄｕｒｉｎｇ ｔｈｅ
ＸＸ ｏｎ １６ｔｈ ａｔ ５：４５ ｐｍ．
１１／１１ −携帯なつ子
ＥＮＤ −
Ｓｃｈｅｄｕｌｅ ｆｏｒ ｔｏｍｏｒｒｏｗ
Ｄｒａｆｔ
Unread mail
Unsent mail/mail sent unsuccessfully
Sent mail
Ｏｕｔｂｏｘ
Mail status
With other file attachment
To display mail addresses or phone numbers
When saved in the Phonebook, the name is displayed
instead of the mail address/phone number. Press
to
switch the display temporarily between the names and
mail addresses/phone numbers.
to change
ˎ While displaying the mail list, press
the display.
For 2lines
Name of sender ←→ Mail address/phone number
For 1line
Subject → Name of sender → Mail address/phone number
↑
ˎ When the Secret display is set to [ON], the name is
displayed even if a caller or recipient is saved as
Secret in the Phonebook.
To place a call
When a mail address and phone number is saved in
the Phonebook, you can place a call to this number.
Move the cursor to the mail and from the Function menu,
select [Call back].
3
Select mail and press
Received mail
Ｉｎ
２００７／１１／１２
携帯なつ子
Ｈａｐｐｙ Ｂｉｒｔｈｄａｙ
Storing the Mail at the Data Security
Service Center
Sent mail
４
１１：５４
Ｈａｐｐｙ ｂｉｒｔｈｄａｙ！ Ｉｔ’ｓ ａｌｒ
ｅａｄｙ ｏｎｅ ｙｅａｒ ｓｉｎｃｅ ｙｏｕ
ｌｅｆｔ． Ｙｏｕ ｓｕｒｅｌｙ ｆａｍｉｌｉａ
ｒｉｚｅ ｙｏｕｒｓｅｌｆ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｌ
ｏｃａｌ ｃｕｌｔｕｒｅ． Ｉ ｈｏｐｅ ｙｏｕ
ｅｎｊｏｙ ｙｏｕｒ ｃｏｍｉｎｇ ｙｅａｒ．
Ａｔｔａｃｈｅｄ ｉｓ ｏｕｒ ｍｅｍｏｒｉａｌ
ｓｏｎｇ．
０７１１１２．ｍｉｄ
０．９ＫＢ
− ＥＮＤ −
Address
type
Received
date/time
Sender
Subject
Ｏｕｔ
１
２００７／１１／１４
２０：１２
携帯はる子
携帯なつ子
ドコモ一郎
Ｄｅｐａｒｔｕｒｅ ｄａｔｅ ａｎｄ ｔｉ
Ｌｏｎｇ ｄｅｓｉｒｅｄ ＸＸＸ！ Ｔｈｅ ｌｏ
ｎｇ ａｗａｉｔｅｄ ｄｅｐａｒｔｕｒｅ ｉｓ
ｃｌｏｓｅ ａｔ ｈａｎｄ．
Ｌｅｔ’ｓ ｍｅｅｔ ｔｏｇｅｔｈｅｒ ａｔ Ｘ
ＸＸ ｏｎ １６ｔｈ ａｔ ５：４５ ｐｍ．
０７１１１４．ｍｉｄ
０．９ＫＢ
− ＥＮＤ −
Sent
date/time
Recipient
Recipient
(Cc)
Recipient
(Bcc)
Subject
ˎ The following icons show the details of mail. Other icons
are the same as in step 2.
File attachment type
With movie attachment (Invalid data)
With ToruCa card attachment (Invalid data)
With PDF data attachment (Invalid data)
With Tool data attachment (Phonebook,
Schedule, Bookmark) (Invalid data)
Not loaded file attachment
File attachment loading in progress
File attachment loading error
File attachment already deleted
To change the font size
Press
for over a second. Every time you press
for over a second, the font size changes to one level
bigger than it. When the font size is [Extra extra large],
the font size changes to [Small].
To display the previous or next mail
Use
to display the previous mail or
to display the
next mail.
ˎ Data Security Service is a paid service that requires a
subscription. For details on this service, see the “Mobile
Phone User’s Guide【i-mode】”.
ˎ You can also store an image inserted in Deco-mail.
ˎ You cannot store a file attachment and also a mail file
exceeding 100K bytes.
Example: Storing received mail
Press
(Func) in the received mail list.
The Function menu appears.
Select [Store in Center] and press
The Security code screen appears.
Enter the Security code and press
(OK).
The Select mail display appears.
Select mail and press
Mail
Invalid pasted data (when several data is
pasted)
( ) With SMF-format melody attachment
(Green) (Invalid data)
( ) With MFi-format melody attachment
(Orange) (Invalid data)
( ) With image attachment (Invalid data)
You can use the Data Security Service to store up to 10
i-mode mails, SMS messages, or Area Mail at one time
at the Data Security Service Center.
ˎ To store several mails, repeat step 4.
Press
(Complete).
The screen for confirming whether to store the mail
appears.
Select [Yes] and press
The call is connected to the Data Security Service Center
and mail is stored. When the storing is completed, the
storing result display appears.
● You cannot store SMS report.
● You can set the received/sent/saved mail not to be
displayed by folder (Mail security) (P.132).
Continued
191
Adding/Deleting Folders
Moving Mail to a Different Folder
In addition to [Inbox]/[Outbox], you can create up to
20 folders each to manage received and sent mail.
Besides these folders, additional five folders are
reserved for i-αppli with mail each in [Inbox]/[Outbox]/
[Draft]. You can also change a folder name or sort the
folders.
ˎ You cannot delete the preset folders, folders including
protected mail, mail folders supported by i-αppli with mail
software, and [MessageR]/[MessageF]. Folders of i-αppli
with mail can be deleted if there is no supporting software for
that i-αppli with mail. In this case, the other folders of that
i-αppli with mail in the received, sent, or saved mail list are
also deleted.
ˎ You cannot change the names of the preset folders, folders of
i-αppli with mail, and [MessageR]/[MessageF].
Example: Adding a folder for received mail
From the Mail menu, select [Inbox], press
press
(Func).
, and
Mail
Select [Edit folder] → [Create folder], press
and enter a folder name.
192
Example: Moving received mail
From the Mail menu, select [Inbox] → a folder and
press
To move all mail in a folder
From the Function menu, select [Move] → [Move all] →
[Yes] → a folder.
To move several mails
From the Function menu, select [Move] →
[Select&move], select mails, and press
(Complete).
Select [Yes] → a folder.
Select mail and press
(Func).
Select [Move] → [Move one] → [Yes] and press
The Select move to display appears.
Enter a name within 10 full-width or 20 half-width
characters.
The folder is added.
To change a folder name
Move the cursor to a folder and from the Function menu,
select [Edit folder] → [Edit folder name]. Enter a name
within 10 full-width or 20 half-width characters.
To reorder folders
From the Function menu, select [Edit folder] → [Reorder
folders] → a folder. Move the cursor to a position to
move to, press
(Move), and press
(Complete).
To delete a folder
Move the cursor to a folder and from the Function menu,
select [Edit folder] → [Delete folder]. Enter the Security
code and select [Yes].
● After downloading i-αppli with mail, the folders of i-αppli
with mail are automatically created in [Inbox], [Outbox],
and [Draft].
● When you delete a folder, all mail for both Address A and
Address B and SMS for both Number A and Number B
within the folder are deleted, regardless of the 2in1 mode.
ˎ You cannot move messages in the [MessageR]/[MessageF]
folder to another folder or mail from another folder to the
[MessageR]/[MessageF] folder.
The Function menu appears.
The Function menu appears.
You can move received/sent mail to another folder
using three methods.
Select a folder and press
The selected mail is moved to the different folder.
● When you perform the Move all, only the displayed mail of
each 2in1 mode are moved.
Example: Deleting received mail
Protecting Mail
Received or sent mail can be protected from being
overwritten. Up to 500 received mails and 250 sent
mails can be protected.
From the received mail list, select mail and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
To cancel the protection
Move the cursor to the protected mail and press
(Func).
Select [Protect ON/OFF] → [Yes] and press
Deleting Mail
Delete a mail in the folder.
Delete several mails in a folder. Up to
30 mails can be selected at a time.
Delete read msg (for Delete all read mail.
received mail only)※1
Delete all※1
Delete all mail in the folder.
Delete read msg (for Delete all read mail in the folder.
received mail only)※1
Delete all※2
Delete all received or sent mail.
Select mail and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
4 Select [Delete] → [Delete one] → [Yes] and press
Mail
Delete one※1
Select&delete※1
Select a folder and press
The received mail list appears.
To delete all read mail in the folder
From the Function menu, select [Delete] → [Delete read
msg], enter the Security code, and select [Yes].
To delete all mail in the folder
From the Function menu, select [Delete] → [Delete all],
enter the Security code, and select [Yes].
To delete several mails
From the Function menu, select [Delete] →
[Select&delete], select mails, press
(Complete), and
select [Yes].
The mail is protected and “ / / ” appears.
To cancel the protection of all mail
From the Function menu, select [Unprotect all] → [Yes].
You can delete the received or sent mail using the
following six methods.
To delete all received mail
From the Function menu, select [Delete] → [Delete all],
enter the Security code, and select [Yes].
To delete all read mail
From the Function menu, select [Delete] → [Delete read
msg], enter the Security code, and select [Yes].
ˎ You cannot set protection for unread mail, unsent mail/mail,
and Area Mail sent unsuccessfully.
Example: Protecting received mail
From the Mail menu, select [Inbox] and press
The selected mail is deleted.
※1 Deleting only displayed mail at each 2in1 mode.
※2 Deleting all mail for both Address A and Address B and
SMS for both Number A and Number B within the folder,
regardless of the 2in1 mode.
Continued
193
Displaying i-αppli Mail as Regular Mail
Sorting Mail
i-αppli mail can be displayed as regular mail. If after
the i-αppli with mail software is deleted, mail saved in
the folder of the i-αppli with mail can be displayed in
the same way as regular mail.
Received or sent mail in a folder can be sorted for
display temporarily.
Example: Sorting received mail
Example: Displaying received i-αppli mail
From the Mail menu, select [Inbox] and press
Select the folder of i-αppli with mail and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [i-mode mail form] and press
The i-αppli mail can be displayed as regular mail.
Checking the Number of Mail Saved
The number of mail saved can be checked for each folder.
Example: Checking the number of received mail saved
Mail
From the Mail menu, select [Inbox] and press
Select a folder and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Memory status] and press
Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ ｓｔａｔｕｓ
Ｔｔｌ
Ｆｏｌｄｅｒ
１
２２
２
２５
(Func) in the received mail list.
The Function menu appears.
Press
Ａｌｌ
１
５５
１０
６６
The number of received mail saved in the selected folder
and the total number of received mail saved are displayed.
Received mail
Number of unread mail
Number of read mail
Select [Sort] → a sorting order and press
Received mail
[Date]:
Sort mail from newest to oldest received date.
[From address]:
Sort mail by the sender’s mail address in alphabetical
order.
[Subject]:
Sort mail by the subject in Japanese alphabetical order.
[Size]:
Sort mail by the mail file size from the largest (including
an obtained file attachment).
Sent mail
[Date]:
Sort mail from newest to oldest sent date.
[To address]:
S o r t m a i l b y t h e re c i p i e n t ’s m a i l a d d re s s i n
alphabetical order.
[Subject]:
Sort mail by the subject in Japanese alphabetical order.
[Size]:
Sort mail by the mail file size from the largest (including
a converted file attachment).
The mail is listed in the selected order.
● When you select [Subject], sorting may not be performed
exactly in Japanese alphabetical order if, for example,
some subjects contain a mixture of full-width and halfwidth characters. For SMS, sorting may not be performed
exactly in Japanese alphabetical order because it is
treated as mail without the subject.
Number of protected read mail
Sent mail
Number of sent mail
Number of protected sent mail
Saved mail
The number of saved mail in the selected folders and
the total number of saved mail are displayed.
194
Setting the Mail Function of the
FOMA Terminal

ˎ When 2in1 is set to the B mode, the following functions are
not available.
- Sort outbox
- Edit signature
- Signature
- Recv option setting
- Mail list
- Attached file pref.
- Clear Send/Recv ranking
Setting How to Display a List of Mails
You can select the display style of Inbox, Outbox, and
Draft lists using the following four methods. The set
display style is applies to all folders.
2lines+body
2lines
Ｉｎｂｏｘ
１／２５
１５：５１ ドコモ一郎
Ｐｈｏｔｏ ｃｏｎｔｅｓｔ
１２：３４ ドコモ二郎
Ｃｏｎｃｅｒｔ ｔｉｃｋｅｔ ｎｅｘｔ ｍｏ
１１／１３ 携帯なつ子
Ｙｅｓｔｅｒｄａｙ’ｓ ｓｕｂｊｅｃ
１１／１２ 携帯なつ子
Ｔｈｅ ａｐｐｌｉｃａｔｉｏｎ ｄｅａｄｌｉｎｅ
Ｂｉｒｔｈｄａｙ
ｏｆＨａｐｐｙ
ｔｈｅ ｎｅｘｔ
ｐｈｏｔｏ ｃｏｎｔｅ
ｓｔ １１／１１
ｉｓ ｔｈｅｄｏｃｏｍｏ．ｔａｒｏ
ｄａｙ ａｆｔｅｒ ｔｏｍｏ
ｒｒｏｗ．
Ｔｏ ｓｅｔ
ａｐｐｌｙ，
Ｐｌａｃｅ
ｆｏｒ ｅｉｔｈｅｒ
ｍｅｅｔｉｎ ｒ
ｅｐｌｙ ｔｏ ｔｈｉｓ ｍａｉｌ ｏｒ ｃａｌ
１１／１０
ｌ ｕｓ．
Ｗｅ 携帯はる子
ｈｏｐｅ ｔｏ ｈｅａｒ ｆｒ
ｏｍ
ｙｏｕ． ２０ ｍｉｎｕｔｅｓ ｌ ｗｉ
Ｓｏｒｒｙ，
Ｉｎｂｏｘ
1line+body
Ｉｎｂｏｘ
１／２５
You can save requirements to sort received or sent mail
so that they can be automatically assigned to folders.
Up to 30 sorting requirements can be saved.
Example: Setting a sorting requirement for received mail
From the Mail menu, select [Mail setting] → [Sort
inbox] and press
Ｓｏｒｔ ｉｎｂｏｘ
Sorting requirement field
1line
Ｉｎｂｏｘ
１／２５
Ｐｈｏｔｏ ｃｏｎｔｅｓｔ
Ｃｏｎｃｅｒｔ ｔｉｃｋｅｔ ｎｅｘｔ
Ｙｅｓｔｅｒｄａｙ’ｓ ｓｕｂｊ
Ｈａｐｐｙ Ｂｉｒｔｈｄａｙ
Ｐｌａｃｅ ｓｅｔ ｆｏｒ ｍｅｅｔ
Ｓｏｒｒｙ， ２０ ｍｉｎｕｔｅｓ Ｉ
Ｐｌａｎ ｆｏｒ ｎｅｘｔ ｗｅｅｋ
Ｌｏｎｇ ｔｉｍｅ ｎｏ ｓｅｅ ｙｏｕ
Ｐｌａｃｅ ｃｈａｎｇｅｄ
Ｃｈｅｃｋ ａｔｔｅｎｄｅｅｓ
Ｃｏｎｔｅｓｔ ｒｅｓｕｌｔ
Ｉｎｆｏ ｏｎ ｃｌａｓｓ ｒｅ
From the Mail menu, select [Mail setting] → [Mail
list setting] and press
Select the display style and press
To set a sorting requirement for sent mail
From the Mail menu, select [Mail setting] → [Sort outbox].
To delete a sorting requirement
Move the cursor to the sorting requirement field and
from the Function menu, select [Delete] → [Delete one]
→ [Yes]. To delete several sorting requirements, from
the Function menu, select [Delete] → [Select&delete],
select sorting requirements, press
(Complete), and
select [Yes]. To delete all sorting requirements, from the
Function menu, select [Delete] → [Delete all], enter the
Security code, and select [Yes].
To reorder the sorting requirements
From the Function menu, select [Reorder] → a sorting
requirement, move the cursor to a folder to move to,
press
(Move), and press
(Complete).
To cancel editing
From the Function menu, select [Cancel].
The display style of a mail list is set.
● When [2lines+body] or [1line+body] is set, the beginning
of the mail at the cursor is displayed.
Even if the mail is previewed, the status is still to be read.
● For the Draft list, the preview display does not appear.
● The preview display may not appear depending on the
character string (URL, etc.) in mail.
in the Mail list display, the display
● When you press
can be changed (P.190).
Select the sorting requirement field and press
Mail
Ｐｈｏｔｏ ｃｏｎｔｅｓｔ
Ｃｏｎｃｅｒｔ ｔｉｃｋｅｔ ｎｅｘｔ
Ｙｅｓｔｅｒｄａｙ’ｓ ｓｕｂｊ
Ｈａｐｐｙ Ｂｉｒｔｈｄａｙ
Ｐｌａｃｅ ｓｅｔ ｆｏｒ ｍｅｅｔ
Ｓｏｒｒｙ， ２０ ｍｉｎｕｔｅｓ Ｉ
Ｐｌａｎ ｆｏｒ ｎｅｘｔ ｗｅｅｋ
Ｔｈｅ ａｐｐｌｉｃａｔｉｏｎ ｄｅａｄｌｉｎｅ
ｓｅｅ ｃｏｎｔｅ
ｙｏｕ
ｏｆＬｏｎｇ
ｔｈｅ ｔｉｍｅ
ｎｅｘｔ ｎｏ
ｐｈｏｔｏ
ｓｔ ｉｓＰｌａｃｅ
ｔｈｅ ｄａｙ
ａｆｔｅｒ ｔｏｍｏ
ｃｈａｎｇｅｄ
ｒｒｏｗ．
Ｔｏ ａｔｔｅｎｄｅｅｓ
ａｐｐｌｙ， ｅｉｔｈｅｒ ｒ
Ｃｈｅｃｋ
ｅｐｌｙ ｔｏ ｔｈｉｓ ｍａｉｌ ｏｒ ｃａｌ
ｌ ｕｓ．Ｃｏｎｔｅｓｔ
Ｗｅ ｈｏｐｅｒｅｓｕｌｔ
ｔｏ ｈｅａｒ ｆｒ
ｏｍ ｙｏｕ．Ｉｎｆｏ ｏｎ ｃｌａｓｓ ｒｅ
１／２５
１５：５１ ドコモ一郎
Ｐｈｏｔｏ ｃｏｎｔｅｓｔ
１２：３４ ドコモ二郎
Ｃｏｎｃｅｒｔ ｔｉｃｋｅｔ ｎｅｘｔ ｍｏ
１１／１３ 携帯なつ子
Ｙｅｓｔｅｒｄａｙ’ｓ ｓｕｂｊｅｃ
１１／１２ 携帯なつ子
Ｈａｐｐｙ Ｂｉｒｔｈｄａｙ
１１／１１ ｄｏｃｏｍｏ．ｔａｒｏ
Ｐｌａｃｅ ｓｅｔ ｆｏｒ ｍｅｅｔｉｎ
１１／１０ 携帯はる子
Ｓｏｒｒｙ， ２０ ｍｉｎｕｔｅｓ ｌ ｗｉ
Assigning Separate Folders for Mail
Ｓｏｒｔ ｒｕｌｅ１
Ｓｏｒｔｉｎｇ ｃｒｉｔｅｒｉａ
Ｆｏｌｄｅｒ ｔｏ ｓｏｒｔ ｉｎｔｏ
Select the sorting method at [Sorting criteria].
[Address]:
Specify a mail address. The mail address portion after
the @ mark is required. However, when you set the mail
address to “phone number@docomo.ne.jp”, enter the
phone number only.
[Group]:
Specify a group.
[Subject]:
Enter a subject or a part of it within 100 full-width or 200
half-width characters.
[None]:
Sort mail that does not meet any specified sorting
requirement.
Continued
195
4
Select a folder to be used for sorted mail at [Folder
to sort into].
When no folder is specified
Mail is sorted to [Inbox]/[Outbox].
Press
(Complete).
Adding a Signature Automatically
The saved signature can be automatically attached to
the main body when you compose mail.
From the Mail menu, select [Mail setting] →
[Signature] and press
Select [Auto]/[No] and press
The sorting requirement is saved.
Mail
● If mail satisfies several sorting requirements, the sorting
requirement with a lower number in the list has higher
priority. If you set [None] for sorting requirement, the
sorting requirements lower than the number you set
become invalid, and mail is sorted to the folder for which
[None] is set.
● If you delete a folder for which the sorting requirement was
set, [Inbox]/[Outbox] is used as a sort destination folder.
● If data saved as Secret is contained in a group that has
been set as a sorting requirement, and if you receive mail
from a sender or send mail to a recipient who is relevant
to the data, it is saved in [Inbox]/[Outbox]. To enable the
sorting requirement, set the Secret display to [ON].
● An i-αppli with mail is automatically sorted to the
corresponding i-αppli with mail folder regardless of the
sorting requirement.
● Mail received before the sorting requirement is set is not
sorted automatically.
● When 2in1 is set to ON, the sorting requirement of the
Group may become invalid.
You need to set the sorting requirement from the Address,
Subject, or None.
● Even if the Signature is set to [No], you can attach the
signature manually. From the Function menu in the Input
text display, select [Add signature].
● Even if the Signature is set to [Auto], you cannot attach
a signature to a reply mail using the Quote function or a
forwarded mail.
Setting the Type of Mail/Message to be
Checked
You can set whether to receive mail, Message R, and
Message F when making inquiries to the i-mode center.
Example: Setting the i-mode inquiry set for mail
From the Mail menu, select [Mail setting] → [Common
setting] → [i-mode inquiry set] and press
ｉ−ｍｏｄｅ ｉｎｑｕｉｒｙ ｓｅｔ
Ｍａｉｌ
ＭｅｓｓａｇｅＲ
ＭｅｓｓａｇｅＦ
Adding a Signature to Mail
When saved beforehand, your signature can be
attached at the end of the main body of mail.
The Signature is set.
Ｖａｌｉｄ
Ｖａｌｉｄ
Ｖａｌｉｄ
Select [Mail] → [Valid]/[Invalid] of the i-mode inquiry
set.
The i-mode inquiry set is set.
Saving a Signature
The signature attached to mail can be created and
saved.
From the Mail menu, select [Mail setting] → [Edit
signature] and press
The Edit signature display appears.
ˎ If you have saved a signature before, it is displayed.
Press
(Edit) and enter a signature.
Setting to Select and Receive Mail
You can set whether to selectively receive i-mode mail.
ˎ Even if the Recv option setting is [ON], all mail is received
if you use the Check new message. If you do not want to
receive mail, set [Mail] to [Invalid] in the i-mode inquiry set
(P.196).
Enter a signature within 5,000 full-width or 10,000 halfwidth characters.
You can enter a Deco mail pict. to compose Deco-mail.
Press
From the Mail menu, select [Mail setting] → [Recv
option setting] and press
The Recv option setting display appears.
[ON]:
Sent mail is held at the i-mode center and not received
by the FOMA terminal. To receive, use the Receive
option (P.186).
[OFF]:
Sent mail is received automatically by the FOMA
terminal.
(Complete).
The signature is saved.
● You can also decorate a signature (P.180).
Select [ON]/[OFF] and press
The Recv option setting is set.
196
Setting a Mail List
By saving mail addresses in a mail list, you can send
mail to all members in the list at the same time.
Up to 10 mail lists can be saved. Up to five mail
addresses can be saved in each mail list.
From the Mail menu, select [Mail setting] → [Mail
list] → a mail list and press
Ｌｉｓｔ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Playing a Melody Automatically from
Mail
The melody can be set to be played back automatically
when displaying mail or message.
From the Mail menu, select [Mail setting] → [Common
setting] → [Melody auto play] and press
Select [ON]/[OFF] and press
リスト５
Ｍｅｍｂｅｒ ｌｉｓｔ
０／５
Enter a list name at [List].
Enter a list name within eight full-width or 16 half-width
characters.
The Melody auto play is set.
Ｌｉｓｔ
Select [Member list] and press
● When mail has several melody attachments, the melodies
are played back in the order they were attached to the
mail. Melodies in the MFi format has lower priority than
those in the SMF format.
● When the Manner mode is set or when the message is
displayed automatically, the Melody auto play is disabled.
Ｆｒｉｅｎｄ
Member field
Setting the Receiving Operation
during Multitasking
Mail
You can set whether the incoming mail or received mail
display should appear when you receive mail, SMS, or
Message R/F while you are using the FOMA terminal
for other tasks.
To delete a member
Move the cursor to the member field and from the
Function menu, select [Delete] → [Delete one] → [Yes].
To delete all members, from the Function menu, select
[Delete] → [Delete all], enter the Security code, and
select [Yes].
Press
(Complete).
The member list is set.
[Prefer alarm]:
Display the incoming mail or received mail display.
[Prefer operat.]:
Do not display the incoming mail or received mail
display. “ ”, “ ”, or “ ” flashes while you are receiving
mail/message and “ ”, “ ”, “ ”, or “ ” appears after
reception.
Enter the mail address or the phone number in the
member field.
Enter a mail address or phone number within 50 half-width
alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Press
(Complete).
The mail list is set.
To delete a mail list
Move the cursor to a mail list in the Mail list display and
from the Function menu, select [Delete one] → [Yes]. To
delete several mail lists, from the Function menu, select
[Select&delete], select mail lists, press
(Complete),
and select [Yes]. To delete all mail lists, from the Function
menu, select [Delete all], enter the Security code, and
select [Yes].
From the Mail menu, select [Mail setting] →
[Common setting] → [Dur multi task disp] and
press
Select [Prefer alarm]/[Prefer operat.] and press
The receiving operation during multitasking is set.
● Regardless of the setting, SMS is received with [Prefer
operat.] while placing (originating)/receiving a voice,
videophone, or PushTalk call, during a voice call,
videophone call, or PushTalk communication, while
recording a still image/movie, running i-αppli, or receiving
mail.
● Even if you change the contents of the Phonebook after
saving a member to the mail list, the saved contents on the
mail list do not change.
Continued
197
Enabling the Receiving of a File
Attachment
You can set whether to automatically receive the file
attached to i-mode mail.
From the Mail menu, select [Mail setting] →
[Attached file pref.] and press
Receiving a Message 
When a message is received while in the stand-by
display, the contents of the message are automatically
displayed. Up to 20 Message R and Message F each
can be saved in the FOMA terminal.
When receiving a message, “ ”/“ ”
/“ ” flashes.
Ａｔｔａｃｈｅｄ ｆｉｌｅ ｐｒｅｆ．
Ｉｍａｇｅ
Ｍｅｌｏｄｙ
ｉ−ｍｏｔｉｏｎ
ＴｏｒｕＣａ
ＰＤＦ
Ｔｏｏｌ ｄａｔａ
Ｏｔｈｅｒｓ
Ｖａｌｉｄ
Ｖａｌｉｄ
Ｖａｌｉｄ
Ｖａｌｉｄ
Ｖａｌｉｄ
Ｖａｌｉｄ
Ｖａｌｉｄ
Ｒｅｃｅｉｖｉｎｇ
ＭｅｓｓａｇｅＲ
Select [Valid]/[Invalid] for each item.
Mail
[Valid]:
Automatically receive a file attachment.
[Invalid]:
Do not automatically receive a file attachment. To obtain
a file attachment, from the Inbox display, select “ ”
(P.189).
The Attached file pref. is set.
● Even if you set the Attached file pref. to [Valid], a file
attachment exceeding 100K bytes is not received
automatically.
Deleting the Send/Receive Ranking
List
Up to 20 each of most frequent senders and recipients
are automatically saved in the Send and Receive
ranking lists. You can select a recipient from this list
when you compose mail. The Send and Receive
ranking lists can be cleared at once.
Example: Deleting the Receive ranking list
From the Mail menu, select [Mail setting] → [Clear
Recv ranking] and press
To delete the Send ranking list
From the Mail menu, select [Mail setting] → [Clear Send
ranking].
Select [Clear all] and press
All Receive ranking list data is deleted.
198
When receiving is completed, “ ”/“ ”/“ ” is displayed, the
indicator flashes, the ring tone sounds, and the number of
received messages is displayed.
The contents of the message appear automatically after
about 15 seconds. The display before receiving reappears
after about 15 seconds when no operations are made.
ˎ Messages that are automatically displayed are saved as
unread.
● When the number of saved received messages has
reached 20 and a new message is received, the
unprotected message is overwritten from the oldest.
● You can also disable Auto-display of messages (P.199).
● Messages are held at the i-mode center when “ ”, “ ”,
“ ”, “ ”, “ ”, “ ”, “ ”, “ ”, or “ ” appears (sometimes “ ”,
“ ”, “ ”, “ ”, “ ”, “ ”, “ ”, “ ”, or “ ” do not appear even if
messages are held at the i-mode center).
If the maximum number of messages is held at the i-mode
center, “ ”, “ ”, “ ”, “ ”, “ ”, “ ”, “ ”, “ ”, “ ” appears. In
this case, perform the Check new message after checking
contents of the unread messages, delete unnecessary
messages, and cancel protection of the messages.
● Message R/F that has been sent to you in the following
situations is held at the i-mode center.
- During a videophone call
- When the FOMA terminal is powered off
- When the FOMA terminal is outside of the i-mode
service area
- During PushTalk communication
- While receiving SMS
- While the Self mode is set
- While the Omakase Lock is set
- During the infrared communication
- During the iC communication
- While updating the software
- While connected to the FirstPass Center
- While connected to the Data Security Service Center
Setting Auto-display
Displaying a Message 
You can set to display the contents of the message
automatically when it is received while in the standby display. You can also select which message should
be displayed first when receiving both Message R and
Message F at the same time.
From the Mail menu, select [Mail setting] →
[Common setting] → [Auto-display] and press
Select a display method and press
Fr o m t h e M a i l m e nu , s e l e c t [ I n b ox ] → t h e
[MessageR]/[MessageF] folder and press
ＭｅｓｓａｇｅＲ
１／８
２００７／１１／２８ １０：５０
Ｎｅｗｓ
２００７／１１／２８ １０：００
Ｗｅａｔｈｅｒ Ｆｏｒｅｃａｓｔ
２００７／１１／２７ ０９：５２
Ｈｏｒｏｓｃｏｐｅ
２００７／１１／２６ １０：００
Ｂｅｓｔ ｃｈｏｉｃｅ ｆｏｒ
２００７／１１／２５ １１：４５
Ｓａｌｔ ａｎｄ Ｐｅｐｐｅｒ
２００７／１１／２５ ０９：４８
Ｒｅｃｏｍｍｅｎｄｅｄ ｓｔｏ
ˎ The following icons show the status and type of the
message.
Unread message
Read message
Protected read message
Mail
[Prefer msgR]:
Display automatically Message R first when receiving
Message R and Message F at the same time.
[MessageR only]:
Display automatically Message R only.
[Prefer msgF]:
Display automatically Message F first when receiving
Message R and Message F at the same time.
[MessageF only]:
Display automatically Message F only.
[Display off]:
Do not display automatically.
To set from the i-mode menu
From the i-mode menu, select [i-mode setting] →
[Common setting] → [Auto-display].
The list of received messages can be displayed.
With melody attachment
With still image attachment
With ToruCa card attachment
To display from the i-mode menu
From the i-mode menu, select [MessageR/F] → the
[MessageR]/[MessageF] folder.
The Auto-display is set.
Checking a New Message

New messages held at the i-mode center while the
FOMA terminal is powered off or outside of the i-mode
service area can be checked.
ˎ Depending on the radio wave condition, you may not be able
to check new messages.
Press
display.
(Mail) for over a second in the stand-by
The FOMA terminal is connected to the i-mode center, and
an inquiry result is displayed.
To check messages
Select [MessageR] or [MessageF].
● You can select an inquiry item (P.196).
Continued
199
2
Select a message and press
ＭｅｓｓａｇｅＲ
２００７／１１／２７
Ｈｏｒｏｓｃｏｐｅ
３
０９：５２
Deleting a Message
Received date/time
Subject
You can delete messages using four methods.
０７１１２７．ｍｉｄ ０．９ＫＢ
Example: Deleting Message R
Ｓａｇｉｔｔａｒｉｕｓ
Ｍｏｎｅｙ ☆☆
Ｌｏｖｅ
☆☆☆☆
Ｊｏｂ
☆☆
Ｈｅａｌｔｈ ☆☆☆
Ｓｏｍｅ ｏｖｅｒｔｉｍｅ ｉｓ ｕｎａｖｏｉｄ
ａｂｌｅ ｂｅｃａｕｓｅ ｏｆ ｏｖｅｒｌａｐｐ
ｉｎｇ ｊｏｂｓ． Ｈｏｗｅｖｅｒ， ｉｆ ｉｔ
ｔｒｉｇｇｅｒｓ ａ ｃｈａｎｃｅ ｔｏ ｍｅ
ｅｔ ａ ｄｒｅａｍ ｐａｒｔｎｅｒ， ｉｔ ｗ
ｉｌｌ ｂｅ ｌｕｃｋｙ．
To delete Message F
From the Mail menu, select [Inbox] → the [MessageF]
folder.
To delete from the i-mode menu
From the i-mode menu, select [MessageR/F] → the
[MessageR]/[MessageF] folder.
To delete all messages
From the Function menu, select [Delete] → [Delete all],
enter the Security code, and select [Yes].
ˎ In the received mail list, from the Function menu,
select [Delete] to delete a message.
To delete all read messages
From the Function menu, select [Delete] → [Delete read
msg], enter the Security code, and select [Yes].
ˎ In the received mail list, from the Function menu,
select [Delete] to delete a message.
To delete several messages
From the Function menu, select [Delete] →
[Select&delete], select messages, press
(Complete),
and select [Yes].
The message appears and “ ” changes to “ ”.
ˎ The following icons show the details of a message.
Other icons are the same as in step 1.
File attachment type
Mail
Failed to obtain the image
With invalid image attachment
With image attachment (When the UIM is
not inserted or other than that used when
the message was received)
(Green)※ With SMF-format melody attachment
(Orange)※ With MFi-format melody attachment
(Orange) With invalid MFi-format melody attachment
With image attachment
※
With ToruCa card attachment
※ “ ” appears when the UIM is not inserted.
ˎ For details about the operation of the file attachment,
see P.188.
To display the previous or next message
Use
to display the previous message or
to display
the next message.
Message R or Message F can be protected from being
overwritten.
ˎ An unread message cannot be protected.
Example: Protecting Message R
Fr o m t h e M a i l m e nu , s e l e c t [ I n b ox ] → t h e
[MessageR] folder and press
To protect Message F
From the Mail menu, select [Inbox] → the [MessageF]
folder.
To set from the i-mode menu
From the i-mode menu, select [MessageR/F] → the
[MessageR]/[MessageF] folder.
Select a message and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
To cancel the protection
Move the cursor to the protected message and press
(Func).
Select [Protect ON/OFF] → [Yes] and press
The message is protected and “
200
Select a message and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
3 Select [Delete] → [Delete one] → [Yes] and press
The selected message is deleted.
● You can delete all messages or read messages by
selecting [Delete] from the Function menu at the folder list
display of received mail.
Protecting a Message
Fr o m t h e M a i l m e nu , s e l e c t [ I n b ox ] → t h e
[MessageR] folder and press
” changes to “
”.
What is Area Mail? (to be offered)
Area Mail is a service that allows you to receive mail
such as the urgent earthquake news flash delivered by
the Japan Meteorological Agency.
ˎ You can receive Area Mail without subscribing to the i-mode
service.
Setting Area Mail
Setting Whether to Receive Area Mail
The default setting of the Receive setting is [OFF].

Receiving Area Mail

The FOMA terminal automatically receives Area Mail
when it is sent. You can save up to 30 received Area
Mails in [Inbox] separated from up to 1,000 mails of
the normal received mail. When there are already 30
received Area Mails, the unprotected read mail from
the oldest one is deleted.
Ｒｅｃｅｉｖｅｄ
Ａｒｅａ Ｍａｉｌ
From the Mail menu, select [Mail setting] → [Area
Mail setting] → [Receive setting] and press
Ｒｅｃｅｉｖｅ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ｎｏｔｉｃｅ
（Ｒｅａｄ ｔｈｅｓｅ
Ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎｓ）
ＤｏＣｏＭｏ ｗｉｌｌ ｐｒｏｖｉｄｅ
Ａｒｅａ Ｍａｉｌ ｉｎ
ａｃｃｏｒｄａｎｃｅ ｗｉｔｈ
ｃｏｎｔｒａｃｔ ｓｔｉｐｕｌａｔｉｏｎｓ
ｏｆ ｔｅｌｅｃｏｍｍｕｎｉｃａｔｉｏｎ
ｓｅｒｖｉｃｅｓ． Ａｒｅａ Ｍａｉｌ
ｅｎａｂｌｅｓ ｙｏｕ ｔｏ ｒｅｃｅｉｖｅ
ａｒｅａ ｉｎｆｏｒｍａｔｉｏｎ ｂａｓｅｄ
Confirm the contents, select [Yes]/[No], and press
Mail
ˎ To receive Area Mail, you need to set the Receive setting.
※ To set the Receive setting of Area Mail, see P.201.
ˎ You may not be able to receive Area Mail in the following
cases.
- During a call (voice/videophone call)
- During the packet communication (i-mode, data, or
PushTalk communication)
- While updating the software
In the following cases, you cannot receive Area Mail at all.
- While the Omakase Lock is set
- While the international roaming service is used
- While the Self mode is set
※ The message which cannot be received because of
the reasons such as above ones, you cannot receive it
again.

The Receive setting is set.
ˎ You may receive messages from different areas other
than your current area.
Setting to Save Receiving Entry of
Area Mail
You need to save a name and Message ID of Area
Mail including information you want to receive rather
than Area Mail of the urgent earthquake news flash.
To receive emergency information, you do not need to
save receiving entry.
From the Mail menu, select [Mail setting] → [Area
Mail setting] → [Receive entry] and press
Ｒｅｃｅｉｖｅ ｅｎｔｒｙ
When Area Mail is received, “ ” appears, the incoming
indicator flashes, the beep or ring tone of Area Mail
sounds, and then the screen informing the Area Mail
reception appears.
After about 15 seconds, the display prior to the Area Mail
reception reappears.
ˎ Some Area Mail may activate the vibrator after the
reception is completed.
ˎ Some Area Mail may show the Area Mail main body after
the reception is completed. Confirm the contents and
press
(OK),
, or
Ｅｍｅｒｇｅｎｃｙ ｉｎｆｏｒｍａｔｉｏｎ
To edit the settings of the set entry
Move the cursor to the set entry, press
enter the Security code. Edit each item.
To delete the set entry
Move the cursor to the set entry, press
the Security code, and select [Yes].
Press
(Edit), and
(Delete), enter
(Create).
The Security code screen appears.
● You cannot adjust the volume of the beep of Area Mail
of the urgent earthquake news flash. [Pattern1] is used
for the vibrator (P.103). The vibration pattern cannot be
changed. But the Beep and Beep time can be set (P.202).
While the Manner mode is set, the setting follows that set
in the Manner mode.
● When you receive Area Mail except Area Mail of the
urgent earthquake news flash, the ring tone volume of the
incoming Area Mail follows the setting of the Mail volume.
Continued
201
3
Enter the Security code and press
(OK).
Ｅｄｉｔ Ａｒｅａ Ｍａｉｌ ｎａｍｅ
Ａｒｅａ Ｍａｉｌ ｎａｍｅ
Ｍｅｓｓａｇｅ ＩＤ
（Ａ４００−Ａ７ＦＦ）
[Area Mail name]:
Enter the Area Mail name within 15 full-width or 30 halfwidth characters.
[Message ID]:
Enter the Message ID from A400 to A7FF (in
hexadecimal).
ˎ You can exchange SMS with recipients/senders who
subscribe to an overseas telecommunication company other
than DoCoMo. See the NTT DoCoMo website for information
about countries and overseas telecommunication companies
you can use for sending/receiving SMS.
ˎ Even if the Notify caller ID is set to [Not notify], an SMS
recipient is notified of the sender’s phone number.
ˎ The text of sent message may not be displayed correctly
on the recipient’s terminal depending on the radio wave
condition or the type of characters to be sent.
From the Mail menu, select [Compose SMS] and
press
Ｅｄｉｔ ＳＭＳ
Enter each item.
Press
(Complete).
The entered entry is saved.
● You cannot edit/delete the pre-saved [Emergency
information].
Mail
Setting the Operation While Receiving
Area Mail
Ｒ．７０ｃｈａｒ
From the Mail menu, select [Mail setting] → [Area
Mail setting] and press
Ａｒｅａ Ｍａｉｌ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
ＯＮ
Ｒｅｃｅｉｖｅ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ｒｅｃｅｉｖｅ ｅｎｔｒｙ
Ｂｅｅｐ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ｐｅｒｍｉｓｓｉｏｎ
１０ ｓｅｃ
Ｂｅｅｐ ｔｉｍｅ
（０１−３０）
Enter the ring time of the beep at [Beep time].
Enter the ring time within 01 to 30 seconds.
Composing and Sending SMS

Regardless of whether you subscribe to i-mode, you
can send/receive text messages between FOMA
terminals.
202
].
Enter a main body at [
].
When you set [Language] to [JPN] for the SMS setting,
enter the SMS main body within 70 characters regardless
of full-width or half-width.
When you set it to [ENG], enter the main body within 160
half-width characters (excluding `, 。,「, 」, 、,・, ”, and ゜).
Use of the symbols (|^{}[] ~ ¥) reduces the number of
characters that can be sent.
Select [Permission]/[Non-permission] at [Beep
setting].
[Permission]:
The beep sounds and the vibrator is active.
[Non-permission]:
Neither the beep nor the vibrator activates.
Enter a phone number at [
Enter a phone number within 21 digits.
When a recipient subscribes to an overseas
telecommunication company other than DoCoMo
Enter “+” (press
for over a second), “Country
code”, and “recipient’s mobile phone number”, in this
order. When the mobile phone number starts with “0”,
enter the number without “0”. You can also send SMS by
entering “010”, “Country code”, and “recipient’s mobile
phone number”, in this order. (To reply to SMS received
from overseas, use the latter method using “010”.)
You can set whether to sound the beep and activate
the vibrator when you receive Area Mail of the urgent
earthquake news flash, and the ring time of the beep.
The Beep setting is set to [Permission] and the Beep
time is set to [10sec] at the time of purchase.
Press
(Send).
The SMS is sent.
To save SMS without sending it
From the Function menu, select [Save]. The SMS is
saved in [Draft].
● While editing SMS, when you change the font size, from
the Function menu, from [Input method] → [Font size],
the setting is only applied for the font size in the matching
word list. The setting for the font size of an address and
main body text is changed from the next time when you
activate mail (P.119).
● When you subscribe to the Multi Number Service, set
[Basic Number] for the Set Multi Number.
● When 2in1 is set to the B mode, you cannot compose
SMS.
● You cannot send SMS from Number B.
Receiving SMS

The FOMA terminal automatically receives SMS. You
can save up to 1,000 received SMS including i-mode
mail in [Inbox].
While receiving SMS, “ ” flashes.
Setting SMS

※ Normally, you do not need to change the SMSC,
Type of Number, and address settings.
From the Mail menu, select [Mail setting] → [SMS
setting] and press
ＳＭＳ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ｌａｎｇｕａｇｅ
Ｒｅｃｅｉｖｉｎｇ ＳＭＳ
ＪＰＮ
ＳＭＳ ｒｅｐｏｒｔ
Ｉｎｖａｌｉｄ
３ｄａｙｓ
Ｖａｌｉｄｉｔｙ
ＤｏＣｏＭｏ
ＳＭＳＣ
Ｔｙｐｅ ｏｆ Ｎｕｍｂｅｒ
Ｉｎｔｅｒｎａｔｉｏｎａｌ
Ａｄｄｒｅｓｓ
８１９０３１０１６５２
Ｕｎｒｅａｄ ｍａｉｌ／ｍｅｓｓａｇｅ
１
０
０
● You can compose and send a reply to the received SMS
and forward it (P.187).
● Some characters in a received SMS message are replaced
with as many spaces (blanks).
● You cannot reply to SMS sent to Number B of 2in1.
Checking New SMS

New SMS held at the SMS center while the FOMA
terminal is powered off or outside of the service area
can be checked.
ˎ Depending on the radio wave condition, you may not be able
to check new SMS.
Set each item.
Press
Mail
Ｍａｉｌ
ＭｅｓｓａｇｅＲ
ＭｅｓｓａｇｅＦ
[Language]:
Select whether a message to be sent is going to be
displayed in Japanese or English. The number of
characters that can be sent varies depending on the
type of characters.
[SMS report]:
Set whether you require a delivery report when SMS is
sent.
[Validity]:
Select the period for holding your SMS at the SMS
center when a recipient is unable to receive the SMS
you sent.
[SMSC]:
Set when you receive SMS services provided by
companies other than DoCoMo.
[Type of Number]:
When you select [Others] at [SMSC], select
[International]/[Unknown].
ˎ When “ ” or “#” is included in the address entered at
[Address], select [Unknown].
[Address]:
When you select [Others] at [SMSC], enter an address.
You can enter up to 20 half-width digits.
When SMS reception is completed,
“ ” is displayed, the incoming
indicator flashes, the ring tone
sounds, and the number of received
SMS appears.
After about 15 seconds, the
display prior to the SMS reception
reappears.
ˎ When returning to the stand-by
display, the notification icon “ ”
(New mail) appears. Press
(Link) and select “ ” to display
the Inbox display.
(Complete).
The SMS setting is set.
From the Mail menu, select [Check new SMS] and
press
The FOMA terminal is connected to the SMS center and
receives SMS if some are held at the center.
● Even if you check new SMS, it may take time to receive
SMS.
203
i-αppli
What is i-αppli? ................................................................................................................. 206
Downloading i-αppli from a Site ........................................................................................ 206
Running i-αppli .............................................................................................. 208
Running i-αppli Automatically .........................................................................  213
Setting i-αppli for the Stand-by Display ..................................................  214
Managing i-αppli ............................................................................................................... 214
Displaying i-αppli Data in microSD memory card .................................  217
Using Various i-αppli Functions ........................................................................................ 217
205
3
What is i-αppli?
Perform the Software setting.
ＳＷ ｉｎｉｔ． Ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
ＮＷ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
By downloading i-αppli from its site, the i-mode
terminal can be made much more useful in many ways.
For example, you can enjoy many kinds of games by
downloading them to it. There are also i-αppli from
which you can directly save data to the Phonebook and
Schedule, as well as i-αppli that can be linked with
Data Box for saving/loading images.
Ｙｅｓ
ｐｐｌｉ ｓｔａｎｄ−ｂｙ
Ｎｏ
Ｕｓｅ ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ ｉｎｆｏ
Ｙｅｓ
Ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｇｕｉｄｅ ｋｅｙ
Ｎｏ
ˎ There are items that cannot be changed depending on
the software.
To connect to the network automatically when the software
is started
Select [NW setting] → [Yes].
ˎ Settings you made are applied to the NW setting and
Stand-by NW setting of the Individual set (P.209).
To set the software for the i-αppli stand-by display
Select [i αppli stand-by] → [Yes].
To use the location information
Select [Use location info] → [Yes].
To set the software to start using the Program guide key
when you watch One Seg
Select [Program guide key] → [Yes]. The software
already set to the Program guide key is canceled.
ˎ The software that can be set to the Program guide
key is only one of the software that is able to work with
One Seg.
ˎ For details on i-αppli, see the “Mobile Phone User’s Guide
【i-mode】”.
ˎ Some i-αppli cannot be used when 2in1 is set to either the B
or Dual mode.
Downloading i-αppli from a Site
You can download i-αppli software from sites and
save it.
i-αppli
ˎ You can save up to 100 i-αppli software, each software
maximum 1M bytes. The number of i-αppli software that can
be saved may decrease depending on the data to be saved.
ˎ When downloading ends in failure due to the radio wave
condition, the software is not saved.
ˎ When downloading i-αppli with mail, software cannot be
downloaded if there are already five mail folders for i-αppli
with mail or if software using the same mail folder already
exists.
While displaying the site, select the software and
press
The software is downloaded.
When the screen for confirming whether to download the
software appears
Select [Yes] or [Download].
Select a folder and press
The downloaded software is saved in the selected folder.
206
Press
(Complete).
The screen for confirming whether to run the software
appears.
Select [Yes] and press
The downloaded software is started.
Checking i-αppli Information When
Downloading
The software information can be displayed when
i-αppli software is downloaded from a site.
From the Menu, select [i-appli] → [i αppli setting]
→ [SW description] and press
Select [Yes]/[No] and press
The SW description is set.
i-αppli
● If you have deleted preinstalled software, you can
download it from “SO@Planet”.
[i Menu] → [メニュー/検索] (Menu/Search) → [ケータイ電
話メーカー] (Mobile Phone Manufacturers) → [SO@Planet]
(Japanese only)
● The message “Terminal and UIM ID will be sent” may
appear when downloading. Select [Download] to
download. Since the “serial number of your mobile
phone/UIM (FOMA card)” is sent to IP (information service
providers) via the Internet, it might be accessed by a third
party.
● The message “This software uses saved data” may appear
when downloading. Information on the saved data to be
used can be confirmed by pressing [Description]. Select
[Download] to download the software. The i-αppli uses
the saved data in this case.
● If you lock the IC card function while downloading an
Osaifu-Keitai-compatible i-αppli, the downloading is
stopped.
● After downloading i-αppli with mail, i-αppli with mail
folder is automatically created in Inbox, Outbox, and Draft.
The folder is named based on the downloaded i-αppli
with mail and cannot be changed.
● If only the mail folder to be used remains when
downloading i-αppli with mail, that folder can be used. If
a folder name is different from the name of a downloaded
i-αppli, this folder name is changed to the downloaded
i-αppli name. If the i-αppli with mail does not use that
folder, it can be deleted and a new folder can be created.
Note that the i-αppli with mail cannot be downloaded
without creating a new folder.
● Even if there is enough memory, you may not be able to
download an Osaifu-Keitai-compatible i-αppli depending
on the volume of data saved on your IC card. If you cannot
perform a download, delete unnecessary software data in
accordance with the confirmation screen and download
the i-αppli again. (You may not be able to delete some
software data.) In some cases, you may need to start up
the software before deleting related data on the IC card.
207
ͧ
Running i-αppli
) : Osaifu-Keitai-compatible i-αppli software
(While the service is unavailable)
: Software downloaded from an SSL site
: GPS-compatible i-αppli software
: Software set for automatic startup
ͨ Software icon
ˎ An icon assigned to each software appears. If there
is no icon assigned to software, the following icons
appear.
: i-αppli software
: i-αppli DX software
: Osaifu-Keitai-compatible i-αppli software
ͩ Title image of selected software
ˎ A title image assigned to each software appears.
If there is no title image assigned to software, the
following icons appear.
: i-αppli software
: i-αppli DX software
: Osaifu-Keitai-compatible i-αppli software

i-αppli software can be set to run manually.
Press
(i-mode) for over a second in the stand-by
display.
The i-αppli folder list appears.
ˎ The following icons show the type of folder.
(Yellow) Preset folder
(Blue) User-created folder
Select a folder and press
Icon(L)
ソフト一覧
１／８
ͦ
ͧ
ͨ
ͩ
i-αppli
Icon(S)
ソフト一覧
１／８
ͦ
ͧ
ͨ
List
ソフト一覧
１／８
スーハ゜ーモンキーホ゛ール ｆｏｒ ＳＯ
地図アフ゜リ
ＦＯＭＡ通信環境確認アフ゜リ
Ｇカ゛イト゛番組表リモコン
ｉアフ゜リハ゛ンキンク゛
ｉＤ 設定アプリ
ＤＣＭＸクレシ゛ットアフ゜リ
楽オク出品アフ゜リ２
Ｓｅａｒｃｈ ｂｙ ｉ−ｍｏｄｅ
ͦ
208
ͦ
ͧ
)※ : Software supporting i-αppli stand-by
display (While setting)
( )※ : Software supporting i-αppli DX stand-by
display (While setting)
( )※ : Software supporting i-αppli with mail
stand-by display (While setting)
: Software not supporting i-αppli stand-by
※
display
: Software not supporting i-αppli DX stand※
by display
: Software not supporting i-αppli with mail
※
stand-by display
: Search by i-mode
※ “ ” appears to the lower right of the icon for the
software while downloading in progress.
Select the software and press
The software is started up and “ ” or “ ” appears.
To quit i-αppli software
Press
and select [Yes].
To check the detailed information
Move the cursor to the software and from the Function
menu, select [Soft description].
ˎ Displayed items may vary depending on the software.
ˎ The name of the software listed in the Soft description
display cannot be changed.
To display the certificate
Move the cursor to the software and from the Function
menu, select [Certificates].
Setting i-αppli Operating Conditions
ˎ It may not be possible to change some items of the saved
software.
From the list of i-αppli software, select the software
and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Individual set] and press
Ｉｎｄｉｖｉｄｕａｌ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
ＮＷ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ｙｅｓ
Ｓｔａｎｄ−ｂｙ ＮＷ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ｙｅｓ
ｐｐｌｉ Ｔｏ
Ｙｅｓ
Ｕｓｅ ｉｃｏｎｓ
Ｙｅｓ
Ｃｎｇ． ｒｉｎｇ ｔｏｎｅ／ｉｍｇ．
Ｙｅｓ
Ｐｈｏｎｅｂｏｏｋ／Ｒｅｃｏｒｄｓ
Ｙｅｓ
[NW setting]:
Set whether to permit the software that uses network
communication to connect to the network or alternatively
set it to ask confirmation every time you start it.
[Stand-by NW setting]:
Set whether the FOMA terminal should connect to the
network when you set an i-αppli software that uses
network communication as the stand-by display.
[i αppli To]:
Set whether to start the software from the currently
displayed i-αppli link.
[Use icons]:
Set whether to use icon information (mail, message,
radio wave condition, battery level, and Manner mode).
[Cng. ring tone/img.]:
Set whether to permit the software to change the ring
tone or image. Otherwise, set the software to ask for
your permission every time before changing it.
[Phonebook/Records]:
Set whether to permit the software to look up the
Phonebook, Redial/Received record, unread mail, or
ToruCa cards.
[Use location info]:
Set whether to use location information.
[Program guide key]:
Set whether to start the software using the Program
guide key when you watch One Seg.
i-αppli
● Some software applications start up immediately from the
site. This means that the software has been downloaded,
but not saved. Also note that you cannot save some
downloaded software.
● Some software applications that start up immediately from
the site may require NW setting while it is running.
● The software is interrupted when the Alarm, Schedule
alarm, or Booking alarm time comes while running the
software. Press
or
to return to the previous
display.
● The software can be interrupted and the phone can be
answered when you receive a voice, videophone, or
PushTalk call while running the software. The previous
display returns when a call is finished. When receiving a
videophone or PushTalk call while i-αppli communication
is in progress, the setting for the V.ph while packet or the
i-mode arrival act is applied, respectively.
● When you receive mail/message/Area Mail while running
the software, “ ”, “ ”, “ ”, or “ ” appears.
When the Receive option setting is [ON], “ ” appears if
you receive mail while running the software. “ ” (Mail at
center) appears when you display the stand-by display. To
check mail, use the Receive option (P.186).
● Images used by i-αppli software※ and some of the data
you entered may be automatically sent to a server via the
Internet.
※ Images used by i-αppli software include those
recorded by the camera activated from within i-αppli
software with camera interface, obtained using the
infrared communication function of i-αppli software,
obtained from sites or Internet home pages using
i-αppli software, and obtained from the Data Box by
i-αppli software.
● You can save data of some software applications in a
microSD memory card. The data saved in a microSD
memory card may not be used by other terminal models.
Also, when you set [Output of Rec] to [microSD], some
software may end or may not operate properly at the time
the recording starts. You can check the software which
can be used a microSD memory card at “Displaying
i-αppli data in microSD memory card” (P.217).
● There is i-αppli software that starts the specified software
so that you can enjoy the software without returning to the
software list. If software to start is not specified, you need
to select it. Even if software to start is specified, however,
you need to download it if it is not included in the software
list.
● Some software cannot start with One Seg, MUSIC Player,
or Music&Video Channel simultaneously.
● Some software may be displayed in the full-screen display.
While displaying in the full-screen, the icons other than the
communication icon are not displayed.
Set each item.
Continued
209
i-αppli
● If you set the NW setting or Stand-by NW setting to [No],
the software may not be started and information may not
be provided in a timely manner.
● If you set the NW setting or Stand-by NW setting to [Yes],
i-αppli automatically connects to the network. When the
FOMA terminal is connected to the network, the packet
communication charge is required.
● When you set [Yes] for the Use icons, icon information
might be accessed by a third party since it is sent to IP
(information service providers) via the Internet just as it is
the case with the “serial number of your mobile phone/UIM
(FOMA card)”.
● The software that can be set to the Program guide key is
only one of the software that are able to work with One
Seg. When you set [Yes] for the software that is not set to
the Program guide key currently, the software already set
to the Program guide key is canceled. The software which
is activated from [Program guide] in the 1Seg menu is also
changed accordingly.
● When you set [No] for the software that is set to the
Program guide key currently, “Gガイド番組表リモコン”
(G-GUIDE TV Program List Remote Control) is set to the
Program guide key.
● “Gガイド番組表リモコン” (G-GUIDE TV Program List
Remote Control) cannot change the Program guide key of
the Individual set from [Yes] to [No].
● Depending on the settings of the Individual set, the
network connection and use of icon information (such as
unread mail and battery level) from i-αppli software may
not be available.
Preinstalled Software
● スーパーモンキーボールモバイル fo r S O ( S UP E R
MONKEY BALL Mobile for SO)
©SEGA
This is the mobile phone appli that is the very famous home
action game called “スーパーモンキーボール” (SUPER MONKEY
BALL).
This is the action game to roll a ball where a monkey character
stays for the goal.
Clear various worlds (scenes) and daedal stages for the goal.
To operate by moving the FOMA terminal
Moving the FOMA terminal up, down, and to the left and right
allows you to operate it as using the 4-way keys of the FOMA
terminal.
The ball where the monkey stays is rolled to the direction
where the FOMA terminal is moved.
To operate by a player’s movement
Check the player location by the In-camera and the ball is
rolled to the direction where the player moves.
ˎ For more details about operations, see the “スーパーモンキー
ボールの遊び方” (How to play SUPER MONKEY BALL).
From the Menu, select [Data Box] → [My document] →
[Preinstall] → [スーパーモンキーボールの遊び方] and press
. The appli appears.
■ Warning
This appli is the game played by titling or shaking the FOMA
terminal. It may injure or damage by hitting a person or
object due to some reasons such as shaking too hard.
When you play it, hold the FOMA terminal tightly and do not
shake or move the FOMA terminal too much or too hard.
Make sure to secure the surroundings to be safe as to play.
● 地図アプリ (Map appli)
You can check your current location, search a map by
addresses or phone numbers, or use the FOMA terminal to
navigate you to the destination. The i-αppli allows you to use
GPS functions (P.228).
ˎ When you use a GPS-compatible i-αppli, the location
information is sent to IP (information service providers) of the
i-αppli being used.
ˎ When you use the GPS function with a GPS-compatible
i-αppli, set the Use location info of the i-αppli being used to
[Yes].
210
● FOMA 通信環境確認アプリ (FOMA communication
environment check i-appli)
※ The display shown is an image for
explanatory purpose and may be
different from the actual display.
FOMA通信環境確認アプリ (FOMA communication environment
check i-appli) is an appli to check whether the FOMA terminal
can be used the FOMA HIGH-SPEED Area.
ˎ To use FOMA通信環境確認アプリ (FOMA communication
environment check i-appli), you need to accept “ご利用上の
注意” (Usage Precautions).
ˎ W h e n t h e c o m m u n i c a t i o n e n v i ro n m e n t i s c h e c k e d ,
different confirmation results or the result informing that it is
outside of the service area may appear depending on the
communication environment (such as weather, radio wave
condition, or network congested) even if you use it in the
same place and same time.
ˎ When you use another function while using this appli, it may
not be checked correctly.
● Gガイド番組表リモコン (G-GUIDE TV Program List
Remote Control)
This convenient i-αppli is a TV program list integrated with an
audiovisual remote control function and it is free.
It enables you to get terrestrial digital/analog or BS digital TV
program information for your preferred hour from anywhere, any
time. The information includes a TV program title, details of the
program, start/end time, etc. You can also activate One Seg
from a program list or vice versa.
If you find any program interesting, you can let the DVD hard
disk recorder to schedule recording of it remotely via the
Internet. (A DVD hard disk recorder that features a remote
scheduling function is required. Before using this function, the
initial setting for this appli is also required.)
You can also search for program information by entering a
keyword such as a TV program category or your favorite TV
personality. Furthermore, you can also perform remote control
operation of a TV/video player/DVD player (P.247). (Some
models are not compatible with this function.)
ˎ When you use the “G-GUIDE TV Program List Remote Control”
for the first time, you need to perform initial registration and
accept the Terms of Use.
ˎ An additional packet communication charge is required for
using this function.
ˎ When you use this appli overseas, you need to set the time of
the FOMA terminal to Japan time.
ˎ For details on Gガイド番組表リモコン (G-GUIDE TV Program
List Remote Control), see the “Mobile Phone User’s Guide
【i-mode】”.
ˎ You cannot use this appli when 2in1 is set to the B mode
because it uses mail.
About program booking function
You can set a timer for watching One Seg by selecting a
program you want to watch from the program list provided by
this appli.
ˎ Booking programs
Start this appli, select a program you want to watch, select
“視聴予約” (Book program) → “予約実行” (Execute booking)
from the menu to run the reservation scheduler, and continue
the operations as instructed by the displayed guidance.
About the remote timer recording function
If you have a DVD hard disk recorder that supports a remote
timer recording function, you can book recording of a program
from the program list provided by this appli.
To use this function, the initial setting for this appli is required.
ˎ Making initial setting
1. Set the DVD hard disk recorder to connect to the Internet.
(For more information, see the user’s manual supplied with
your DVD hard disk recorder.)
2. Start this appli, select “リモート録画予約” (Remote timer
recording) from the menu, and continue the initial setting
as instructed by the displayed guidance.
ˎ Booking recording of a program
Once you complete the initial setting, by selecting a desired
program and selecting “リモート録画予約” from the menu,
you can connect to the DVD hard disk recorder that has
an entry in this appli via the Internet and let it to schedule
recording of the program.
ˎ An additional packet communication charge is required for
using this function.
Continued
i-αppli
※ The display shown is an image for
explanatory purpose and may be
different from the actual display.
The TV program list is displayed
according to your location.
About timer recording function
You can set a timer for recording a One Seg program by
selecting a program you want to record from the program list
provided by this appli.
ˎ Booking timer recordings
Start this appli, select a program you want to record, select
“＃ワンセグ録画予約” (One Seg timer recording) → “予約実
行” (Execute booking) from the menu to run the reservation
scheduler, and continue the operations as instructed by the
displayed guidance. (You can also set a timer for recording
by selecting a program and pressing
after starting this
appli.)
211
● ｉアプリバンキング (i-αppli Banking)
※ The display shown is an image for
explanatory purpose and may be
different from the actual display.
i-αppli
This i-αppli is for using the mobile banking service conveniently.
Mobile banking is a service that allows you to check the
balance and usage details of deposit or withdrawal, transfer
between accounts, and make a transfer, from anywhere and at
anytime. By entering the password which you set when you start
this i-αppli, you can use up to two mobile banking services
provided by financial institutions.
ˎ To use a mobile banking service by ｉアプリバンキング
(i-αppli Banking), you need to open an account at a financial
institution which provides the mobile banking service and
subscribe to a mobile banking service of each financial
institution.
ˎ An additional packet communication charge is required for
using this function.
ˎ For details, see the “Mobile Phone User’s Guide【i-mode】”.
ˎ F o r i n f o r m a t i o n o n ｉアプリバンキング
(i-αppli Banking), see the i-mode site.
i-mode site : [ｉMenu] → [メニュー/検索]
(Menu/Search)→[モバイルバ
ンキング] (Mobile banking) →
[ｉアプリバンキング](i-αppli
Banking)
● iD 設定アプリ (iD setting appli)
● DCMXクレジットアプリ(DCMX credit appli)
※ The display shown is an image for
explanatory purpose and may be
different from the actual display.
“DCMX” is an “iD” compatible credit service provided by NTT
DoCoMo group. Two types of services are available in DCMX:
DCMX mini in which the total amount of credit is limited to
¥10,000 per month and DCMX which allows you to use more
amount than DCMX mini as well as get DoCoMo points.
DCMX mini provides immediate use of a mobile credit service
with an easy subscription that can be made from within this
software.
What you can do on this software
Subscription and Examination ※1
Setting card information
Using
No need for troublesome charging!
You can enjoy shopping simply by holding the mobile
phone that has been configured for the service close to a
reading device without signature ※3.
Checking ※2
You can check the available balance of the credit and the
usage details for this month from within the software!
※ The display shown is an image for
explanatory purpose and may be
different from the actual display.
The chargeless e-cash iD is a service that enables you to make
payments for shopping by simply holding up the Osaifu-Keitai
or a credit card that is employed iD to a reader. It provides you
with a convenient way of shopping because you do not need to
give your signature as you did before. Some credit card issuing
companies support cash withdrawals as well.
ˎ To use iD, a subscription to each credit card issuing company
that adopts the iD brand and the Osaifu-Keitai whose settings
are completed by the iD appli and Card appli of a credit card
issuing company or a credit card that is employed iD are
needed.
ˎ For using iD by the Osaifu-Keitai, you start the iD appli, agree
with “ご利用上の注意” (Usage precautions), complete the
settings for the iD appli, download or start a Card appli, and
then perform the settings for the Card appli.
ˎ A fee for using a service that adopts the iD brand (annual
membership fee, etc.) varies depending on each credit card
issuing company.
ˎ T h e p a c k e t c o m m u n i c a t i o n c h a r g e i s re q u i re d f o r
downloading the iD appli and a Card appli.
ˎ For information on iD, see the i-mode site for
iD.
i-mode site : [ i M e n u ] → [ メニュー/検索]
(Menu/Search) → [iD]
Changing
You can also make necessary settings from within the
software when you get the card updated or the FOMA
terminal changed!
※1 We make an online examination for your qualification
when we receive your subscription to DCMX mini. If your
subscription is to other than DCMX mini, the connection is
redirected to the i-mode site for subscription information.
※2 A function, such as for checking the usage status is
available only when you are a member of DCMX mini.
※3 You may be asked to enter a security code at a given
condition.
ˎ For information on the contents of the service
and on how to subscribe to the service, see
the i-mode site for DCMX.
i-mode site : [i Menu] → [DCMX iD]
● When you start this software for the first time, you are
asked to agree with “ご利用上の注意” (Note on using the
program). Agree with it to continue.
● Packet communication charge is required for settings and
operations on this software.
Precaution on the Osaifu-Keitai-compatible i-αppli
software
● Under no condition will DoCoMo be held liable for any
information set in the IC card.
212
● 楽オク出品アプリ2 ( A p p l i fo r s e l l i n g i t e m s a t
Rakuten)
Select [Auto-start] and press
Ｕｓｅｒ ｓｅｔ
ＳＷ ｓｅｔ
Enabling/Disabling Auto-Start
From the Menu, select [i-appli] → [i αppli setting]
→ [Auto-start] and press
Select [Yes]/[No] and press
Whether to enable the Auto-start is set.
Setting the Start Date and Time
The i-αppli software can be started automatically. You
can set the starting date/time and day of the week and
whether to use the software’s automatic start for each
i-αppli software.
From the list of i-αppli software, select the software
and press
(Func).
Ｕｓｅｒ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ｓｔｙｌｅ
Ｄａｔｅ
Ｔｉｍｅ
Ｄａｙ
ＯＦＦ
２００７／１１／０１ Ｔｈｕ
０９：０５
Ｍｏｎ
Select a style of the Auto-start time at [Style].
[OFF]:
Do not set the start time.
[D/T]:
Start the software automatically at the specified date
and time.
[Eyd]:
Start the software automatically at the specified time
everyday.
[Week]:
Start the software automatically at the specified time on
every specified day of the week.

You can set whether to star t i-αppli software
automatically on the FOMA terminal.
Select [User set] and press
i-αppli
Running i-αppli Automatically
ＯＦＦ
Ｉｎｖａ
[User set]:
Set the staring date/time and day of the week for each
software.
[SW set]:
Set whether to start the software using the software’s
auto-start function.
※ The display shown is an image for
explanatory purpose and may be
different from the actual display.
“楽オク出品アプリ2” (Appli for selling items at Rakuten) is a
convenient appli for selling items at 楽オク (Rakuten Auction)
from anywhere and at anytime easily.
The appli helps you sell an item with the guide display, making it
easy even for first-time users. Also, there are functions such as
shooting a photo, editing a photo, and saving a history to sell an
item faster than doing it from the site.
ˎ When you use the “Appli for selling items at Rakuten” for the
first time, you need to accept “利用規約” (Terms of use).
ˎ An additional packet communication charge is required for
using this function.
ˎ For details on 楽オク (Rakuten Auction), see the “Mobile
Phone User’s Guide【i-mode】”.
ˎ To sell items at 楽オク (Rakuten Auction), you need to sign up
for the Rakuten Membership and register as an auctioneer.
ˎ For information on 楽オク (Rakuten Auction),
see the i-mode site.
i-mode site : [i Menu] → [楽オク -オーク
ション-]
Ａｕｔｏ ｓｔａｒｔ
Enter the date/time/day of the week.
ˎ Enter the date/time/day of the week according to the
style of the auto-start time selected in step 4.
Press
Select [SW set] and press
(Complete).
The SW set display appears.
Select [Valid]/[Invalid] of the Auto-start function of
the software at [Set].
The Auto-start is set.
● The Auto-start does not operate in the following cases.
- When the FOMA terminal is powered off
- During a call/communication
- When the date/time is not set
- When another function is executed
- When the Alarm/Schedule alarm/Booking alarm is set to
start at the same time as the Auto-start
- When the Lock all/Personal data lock is set
- When the Omakase Lock is set
- When 2in1 is set to the B mode (when i-αppli with mail
software is used or i-αppli uses mail)
The Function menu appears.
213
Setting i-αppli for the Stand-by
Display

Only one supporting software can be set for the i-αppli
stand-by display. The software that supports the
i-αppli stand-by display is identified by “ / / ”.
ˎ When the software using network transmission is set for
the i-αppli stand-by display, it may not operate properly
depending on the radio wave condition.
ˎ When you set the i-αppli stand-by display from the i-αppli
software list display, the image set for the stand-by display in
the Stand-by display is also changed.
Terminating the i-αppli Stand-by
Display
The i-αppli stand-by display is terminated and the
normal stand-by display is set.
The Function menu appears.
From the list of i-αppli software, select the software
and press
(Func).
Select [Stand-by display] → [Yes] and press
Select [Stand-by display] → [Cancel] and press
The i-αppli stand-by display is set and the icon (P.208)
changes to indicate that the software is set for the stand-by
display.
To operate the software set for the i-αppli stand-by display
Press
( ) in the i-αppli stand-by display.
i-αppli
● The message confirming whether to start the i-αppli
stand-by display appears when the FOMA terminal is
powered on if the i-αppli stand-by display is set. Select
[No] not to start it. Select [Yes] or leave it for a while to
start the i-αppli stand-by display.
● If the Lock all or Personal data lock is set or 2in1 is set
to the Dual or B mode while you set the i-αppli stand-by
display, the i-αppli stand-by display is temporarily
terminated. When you cancel the Lock all or Personal data
lock, the i-αppli stand-by display reappears.
● The Web To cannot be used from the i-αppli stand-by
display.
● If an error which could terminate the i-αppli stand-by
display occurs, the time of error occurrence can be
checked in the stand-by error history.
● If a security error occurs in the i-αppli stand-by display,
“ ” (Stand-by SW error) appears in the stand-by display.
Managing i-αppli
ˎ For some software, IP (information service providers) may
access the software saved in the mobile phone and directly
stop the use of it. In this case, most operations including
starting the software, setting the software for the stand-by
display, and upgrading the software are disabled and only
deleting the software and displaying the software information
are available. To use the software again, you need to request IP
to resume the use of the software. For more details, contact IP.
ˎ For some software, IP (information service providers) may
send data to the software saved in the mobile phone.
ˎ When IP (information service providers) sends a stop/
resume request or data to the software, the mobile phone
starts to communicate with IP and “ ” flashes. No packet
communication charge is required.
Upgrading i-αppli
The software saved in the FOMA terminal can be
upgraded if a newer version of the downloaded
software is available on a site.
From the list of i-αppli software, select the software
and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Upgrade] → [Yes] and press
Download of the new version of the software starts.
● Some software can be upgraded automatically when it is
started.
● When the FOMA terminal is connected to the network for
software upgrade, the packet communication charge is
required.
214
[End]:
End the i-αppli stand-by display once and redisplay
without terminating it.
[Cancel]:
Terminate the i-αppli stand-by display.
The i-αppli stand-by display is terminated.
The Function menu appears.
From the list of i-αppli software, select the software
and press
(Func).
Adding/Deleting Folders
Deleting i-αppli
Folders in which software are saved can be added
or deleted. Up to 10 folders can be used to manage
software and folder names can also be changed.
ˎ You cannot delete the preset folders.
You can delete software using four methods.
Example: Deleting a software
Example: Adding a folder
Select [Edit folder] → [Create folder], press
and enter a folder name.
You can move software to a different folder using three
methods.
Example: Moving a software
Press
(i-mode) for over a second in the stand-by
display, select a folder, and press
To move all software in the folder
From the Function menu, select [Move] → [Move all] →
[Yes] → a folder.
To move several software
From the Function menu, select [Move] →
[Select&move]. Select software and press
(Complete).
Select [Yes] → a folder.
Select the software and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Move] → [Move one] → [Yes] and press
Select the software and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
4 Select [Delete] → [Delete one] → [Yes] and press
The selected software is deleted.
i-αppli
Moving i-αppli to a Different Folder
Select a folder and press
To delete all software in the folder
From the Function menu, select [Delete] → [Delete all],
enter the Security code, and select [Yes].
To delete several software
From the Function menu, select [Delete] →
[Select&delete] and select software. Press
(Complete)
and select [Yes].
Enter a name within 10 full-width or 20 half-width characters.
The folder is added.
To change a folder name
Move the cursor to a folder and from the Function menu,
select [Edit folder] → [Edit folder name]. Enter a name
within 10 full-width or 20 half-width characters.
To delete a folder
Move the cursor to a folder and from the Function menu,
select [Edit folder] → [Delete folder]. Enter the Security
code and select [Yes].
To delete all software
From the Function menu, select [Delete all], enter the
Security code, and select [Yes].
Press
(i-mode) for over a second in the stand-by
display and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Press
(i-mode) for over a second in the stand-by
display.
● When deleting i-αppli with mail or deleting all software
including i-αppli with mail, you can select whether to
delete the automatically created mail folder at the same
time. However, if the i-αppli with mail folder contains
protected mail at the time you select to delete both of
them, neither the software nor the folder can be deleted.
When you select to delete only the software and keep the
folder intact, you can display only the mail main body from
the Function menu (P.194).
● Some Osaifu-Keitai-compatible i-αppli software may not
be deleted. Some software requires to run i-αppli software
and delete data stored in the IC card before you can
delete the software.
● When the IC card lock is set, you cannot delete an OsaifuKeitai-compatible i-αppli.
● “Gガイド番組表リモコン” (G-GUIDE TV Program List
Remote Control) cannot be deleted.
● If you delete the software that is set to the Program guide
key, “Gガイド番組表リモコン” (G-GUIDE TV Program List
Remote Control) is set to the Program guide key.
The Select move to display appears.
Select a folder and press
The selected software is moved to the different folder.
● “Gガイド番組表リモコン” (G-GUIDE TV Program List
Remote Control) cannot be moved.
Continued
215
Setting How to Display a List of
Software
You can select the display style of a software list using
the following three methods. The set display style is
applied to all folders.
Icon(L)
ソフト一覧
１／８
Icon(S)
ソフト一覧
１／８
Checking Error History and Trace
Result
The error histories for the i-αppli stand-by display and
the results output by the i-αppli trace feature can be
displayed.
Stand-by err hist When an i-αppli stand-by display is terminated
by an error, such as being unable to continue
operation, up to 10 records including the time
of error occurrence, etc. are displayed.
Security err. hist. When i-αppli software is terminated by an
error, such as being unable to use the saved
data, up to 10 records including the time of
error occurrence, etc. are displayed.
When i-αppli software supporting the trace feature
Trace result
is terminated, up to 16 trace results are displayed.
Auto-start err hist When i-αppli software fails to operate the
Auto-start, up to 10 records including the time
of error occurrence, etc. are displayed.
Example: Displaying the stand-by error history
From the Menu, select [i-appli] → [i αppli history]
and press
ｐｐｌｉ ｈｉｓｔｏｒｙ
i-αppli
Ｓｔａｎｄ−ｂｙ ｅｒｒ ｈｉｓｔ
Ｓｅｃｕｒｉｔｙ ｅｒｒ． ｈｉｓｔ．
Ｔｒａｃｅ ｒｅｓｕｌｔ
Ａｕｔｏ ｓｔａｒｔ ｅｒｒ ｈｉｓｔ
List
ソフト一覧
Press
１／８
(Func) in the i-αppli software list display.
The Function menu appears.
Select [Change display] → the display style and
press
The display style of an i-αppli software list is set.
216
Ｓｔｂｙ ｅｒｒ ｈｉｓｔ
スーハ゜ーモンキーホ゛ール ｆｏｒ ＳＯ
地図アフ゜リ
ＦＯＭＡ通信環境確認アフ゜リ
Ｇカ゛イト゛番組表リモコン
ｉアフ゜リハ゛ンキンク゛
ｉＤ 設定アプリ
ＤＣＭＸクレシ゛ットアフ゜リ
楽オク出品アフ゜リ２
Ｓｅａｒｃｈ ｂｙ ｉ−ｍｏｄｅ
Select [Stand-by err hist] and press
２００７／１１／１４ １５：１１
ＸＸＸｇａｍｅ
２００７／１１／１３ １２：３４
ＸＸＸｈｏｒｏｓｃｏｐｅ
To display the security error history
Select [Security err. hist.].
To display the trace result
Select [Trace result].
To display the auto-start error history
Select [Auto-start err hist].
To delete the error history or trace result
Press
(Delete) and select [Yes].
● To i-αppli authors
If the software does not operate properly during its
programming, the trace result may be useful as a
reference.
Displaying i-αppli Data in
microSD memory card 
You can display i-αppli data saved in the microSD
memory card, using a folder name.
From the Menu, select [i-appli] → [i αppli(microSD)]
and press
ｐｐｌｉ ｄａｔａ
Ｆｏｌｄｅｒ１
Ｆｏｌｄｅｒ２
Ｆｏｌｄｅｒ３
Ｆｏｌｄｅｒ４
The i-αppli(microSD) folder list display appears.
To delete a folder
Move the cursor to a folder and from the Function menu,
select [Delete folder]. Enter the Security code and select
[Yes].
Select a folder and press
Using Various i-αppli Functions
ˎ There are some data that cannot be exchanged even if the
other device is equipped with the infrared communication
function.
ˎ The startup procedure of the infrared communication varies
depending on the software.
While running the software, start the infrared
communication.
Select [Yes] and press
The infrared communication is started.
Obtaining a ToruCa Card from i-αppli
You can use the camera function (P.142) from the
software running on the FOMA terminal.
ˎ Images are used and saved in the software.
ˎ Items that can be set and the startup procedure of the
camera vary depending on the software.
ˎ You can obtain up to 100 ToruCa or ToruCa(detail) cards
each up to 1K bytes for a ToruCa card or 100K bytes for
a ToruCa(detail) card. The number of cards that can be
obtained may decrease depending on the data to be
obtained.
ˎ The obtaining method of ToruCa cards varies depending on
the software.
i-αppli
Using the Camera Function from
i-αppli
While running the software, select a ToruCa card
and press
The screen for confirming whether to save data appears.
Select [Yes] and press
The ToruCa card is obtained.
While running the software, start the camera function.
The Camera mode display appears.
You can use the infrared communication (P.295) from
the software running on the FOMA terminal.
You can obtain ToruCa cards from the software running
on the FOMA terminal and save them.
The SW description display appears.
Using Infrared Communication from
i-αppli
Point the camera at the object and press
Saving the Alarm from i-αppli
The image is recorded.
Using the Bar Code Reader from
i-αppli
You can use the bar code reader (P.157) from the
software running on the FOMA terminal.
You can save the Alarm from the software running on
the FOMA terminal.
While running the software, perform the settings of
the Alarm.
Select [OK] and press
The Alarm is saved.
ˎ The startup procedure of the bar code reader varies
depending on the software.
ˎ The scanned data may be used in the software.
While running the software, start the bar code reader.
The Bar code reader display appears.
Locate at the JAN/QR code at the center of the
display and press
The JAN/QR code is scanned.
217
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
What is Osaifu-Keitai? ........................................................................................................ 220
What is the iC transfer service? .......................................................................................... 220
Starting an Osaifu-Keitai-compatible i-αppli ..................................................................... 220
What is ToruCa? ................................................................................................................. 221
Obtaining a ToruCa Card ..................................................................  222
Displaying a ToruCa Card .........................................................................  222
Managing ToruCa Cards .................................................................................................... 223
Setting the ToruCa Details ..........................................................................  224
Setting Whether to Notify That within the Communication Range ................  225
Locking the IC Card Function ......................................................................... 226
219
What is Osaifu-Keitai?
“Osaifu-Keitai” provides convenient i-mode functions
(i-mode FeliCa) that can be performed using the IC
card inserted in an i-mode terminal.
FeliCa adopts a contactless IC card technology that
enables data to be read/written just by scanning.
You can simply hold up your Osaifu-Keitai to a reading
device in stores that provide the FeliCa service to pay
using e-money, or use it as an airplane ticket or point
card. With features like Osaifu-Keitai, your mobile
phone becomes an increasingly handy tool.
This latest FeliCa is even more convenient to use
compared with previous versions of the FeliCacompatible contactless IC card. For example, you
can deposit e-money in Osaifu-Keitai on the IC card,
and check the balance and purchase history using
communications.
※ To use Osaifu-Keitai-compatible services, you need to make
the necessary settings using i-αppli software (IC appli)
supporting IC card function (check with IP (information
service providers) for more details).
※ For precautions on the use of each Osaifu-Keitai-compatible
service, see the “Mobile Phone User’s Guide【i-mode】”.
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
● The data on the IC card could be lost/changed due to
an Osaifu-Keitai trouble (Note that, as a rule, when your
Osaifu-Keitai is left with us such as for repairs, we can
take it only when all data is deleted. Therefore, you are
requested to delete the data yourself). You are requested
to use the backup services provided by IP (information
service providers) to support for reissuing, restoring,
holding temporarily, or transferring data except transferring
data by the iC transfer service. Check with IP (information
service providers) whether the backup service is provided,
for the usage conditions (such as necessary prior
procedures or fees), or whether the iC transfer service
is supported beforehand because those vary from one
service to another. Please make sure to use the services
supporting the backup services for important data.
● DoCoMo shall not be liable for any data loss/change of the
information saved on the IC card or any damage occurred
relating to using Osaifu-Keitai-compatible services
regardless of any reasons such as trouble or changing to
another FOMA terminal.
● If you should lose the Osaifu-Keitai or have it stolen,
immediately contact the Osaifu-Keitai-compatible service
provider you use for operations which have to be done in
this situation. For this FOMA terminal, both the Omakase
Lock (P.127) and IC card lock (P.226) can be used.
What is the iC transfer service?
The iC transfer service※1 is a service provided for
transferring all data stored on the IC card at once※2
to a new Osaifu-Keitai※3 when the Osaifu-Keitai
is replaced such as for changing to another FOMA
terminal or trouble repair. Once the data stored in the
IC card is transferred to the new Osaifu-Keitai, you
can use Osaifu-Keitai-compatible services by simply
downloading the Osaifu-Keitai-compatible i-αppli.
You can use the iC transfer service at our service
counter of your local DoCoMo shop, etc.
For details, see the “Mobile Phone User’s Guide
【i-mode】”.
※1 There is a processing charge for the use of the iC transfer
service. (There are some cases where no charges
apply.) Packet communication charges apply for IC appli
downloads and various settings.
※2 There are some Osaifu-Keitai-compatible services that do
not support the all data transfer function. Unsupported
services are deleted when you use the iC transfer service.
Therefore, utilize the backup service of each Osaifu-Keitaicompatible service or delete them before you use the iC
transfer service.
※3 The iC transfer service can be used only the Osaifu-Keitai
where the data is transferred to has to be the compatible
model with the iC transfer service.
Starting an Osaifu-Keitaicompatible i-αppli
You have access to useful functions, for example,
reading/writing data on the IC card using an OsaifuKeitai-compatible i-αppli in order to deposit e-money
(such as train ticket deposit) or look up the balance or
purchase history from the mobile phone.
ˎ When you start an Osaifu-Keitai-compatible i-αppli software
for the first time or download one, the message “Current
UIM necessary to use IC card?” appears. If you select [Yes],
you cannot use the IC card function without inserting the
associated UIM.
When you use the FOMA terminal with another UIM, you once
need to delete all Osaifu-Keitai-compatible i-αppli software
with the associated UIM inserted in the FOMA terminal to use
the IC card function.
From the Menu, select [Osaifu-Keitai] → [IC card
content] and press
ＩＣ ｃａｒｄ ｃｏｎｔｅｎｔ
１／２
ケータイクレシ゛ット「ｉＤ」
ＤＣＭＸクレシ゛ットアフ゜リ
Ｓｅａｒｃｈ ｂｙ ｉ−ｍｏｄｅ
Select the software and press
The software is started up and “
220
” or “
” appears.
● Reading/writing of data on the IC card from the software
is interrupted in the following cases. Partially read/written
data may be discarded.
- When the time preset for the Schedule alarm, Booking
alarm, or Alarm occurs
- When receiving a voice, videophone, or PushTalk call
(The operation that takes place after you hang up the
call may be different depending on the service you use.)
- When the battery runs out
Using the Osaifu-Keitai
When you hold up and show the FeliCa mark “ ” side
of the FOMA terminal to a reading device, you can use
the FOMA terminal for payment as e-money or use it in
place of a train ticket. You can use this function without
starting up the associated software.
What is ToruCa?
ToruCa is an e-card that can be obtained using
Osaifu-Keitai. This convenient e-card can be used for
applications such as flier, restaurant card, or coupon.
You can obtain ToruCa cards from a reading device
or site. These e-cards can be easily exchanged by
way of e-mail, infrared communication, or the microSD
memory card.
The ToruCa card you obtained is saved in [ToruCa] of
the [Osaifu-Keitai] menu.
You need a ToruCa-compatible terminal to use ToruCa.
For details, see the “Mobile Phone User’s Guide【i-mode】
”.
Flow of ToruCa Operation
ˎ You can use Osaifu-Keitai by holding up and showing the
FeliCa mark to a reading device during a call or i-mode
connection. You cannot start the software.
ˎ Holding up and showing the FeliCa mark to a reading device
may cause the associated software to be executed.
Beep!
When the FOMA terminal comes within the
communication range with the reading device, the
FeliCa Sign lights in green. The vibrator vibrates when
the communication starts.
● If the FeliCa mark on the FOMA terminal is not recognized
by a reading device, move the terminal back and forth and
side to side as you hold it up to the device.
● Even if the FOMA terminal is powered off, you can use the
Osaifu-Keitai by holding up and showing the FeliCa mark
to a reading device. You cannot use it if the battery pack
is not attached. You may not be able to use Osaifu-Keitai
if the attached battery pack has not been used for a long
period of time or has not been charged after the battery
alarm was sounded. In this case, charge the battery
pack and power on the FOMA terminal. When the FOMA
terminal is powered off, you cannot start an Osaifu-Keitaicompatible i-αppli to read/write data on the IC card.
● Note that if you leave the FeliCa Sign lighting, the battery
drains faster.
● When the FOMA terminal comes within the communication
range with the reading device while charging the battery,
the Charge indicator and FeliCa Sign light at the same
time.
１／８
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
ＴｏｒｕＣａ
Hold up and show the Osaifu-Keitai
to a reading device in order to obtain
a ToruCa card.
When the FOMA terminal comes
within the communication range with
the reading device, the FeliCa Sign
lights in green. The vibrator vibrates
and the FeliCa Sign flashes when the
communication starts.
１２：４５ 赤坂
炭火・焼肉レストラン
１１／１３ 築地
江戸前 ○○○
１１／０８ 銀座
とんかつ △△△
１１／０８ 六本木
サロン △□△
１１／０７ 赤坂
フレンチ ○□○
１１／０５ 品川
割烹 ○△○
Select an obtained ToruCa card from the ToruCa list.
Methods for Obtaining a ToruCa Card
Reading device
Site
microSD memory card
Mail
QR code
i-αppli
Infrared/
iC communication
Exchange a ToruCa card between
i-mode terminals
● When you exchange a ToruCa card using i-mode
communication, the regular packet communication charge
is required.
● Some ToruCa cards may not allow you to update or
redistribute using mail or infrared communication, etc.
depending on the settings by IP (information service
providers).
221
Obtaining a ToruCa Card
Select a folder and press
ＴｏｒｕＣａ

１２：４５ 赤坂
炭火・焼肉レストラン
１１／１３ 築地
江戸前 ○○○
１１／０８ 銀座
とんかつ △△△
１１／０８ 六本木
サロン △□△
１１／０７ 赤坂
フレンチ ○□○
１１／０５ 品川
割烹 ○△○
You can hold up and show the FOMA terminal to a
reading device to obtain a ToruCa or ToruCa(detail)
card.
ˎ You can obtain up to 100 ToruCa cards, each up to 1K bytes
for a ToruCa card and up to 100K bytes for a ToruCa(detail)
card. The number of ToruCa cards that can be obtained may
decrease depending on the data to be obtained.
ˎ While the IC card lock is set, you cannot obtain a ToruCa card
from a reading device.
Ｎｅｗ ＴｏｒｕＣａ
１
When you obtain a ToruCa card
from a reading device, the FeliCa
Sign flashes in green, a beep
sounds to notify you that the card
has been obtained, the ToruCa
card is displayed, and the previous
display reappears after about 15
seconds. The notification icon “ ”
(New ToruCa) appears in the standby display.
To display the ToruCa card
Press
(Link) in the stand-by
display and select “ ”.
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
● Some ToruCa cards may not allow you to send mail with
ToruCa cards attached, send data using iC or infrared
communication, or copy them to the microSD memory
card.
１／８
Obtained date/time
Index
Category icon
The ToruCa list appears.
ˎ The following icons show the status of the ToruCa card.
Unread ToruCa card/Expired unread ToruCa
card
Read ToruCa card/Expired read ToruCa
card
Select a ToruCa card and press
Index
Category icon
Select [詳細] (Detail) → [Yes] and press
Displaying a ToruCa Card

You can display a saved ToruCa or ToruCa(detail) card
any time. You can also obtain a ToruCa(detail) card
from the ToruCa card.
From the Menu, select [Osaifu-Keitai] → [ToruCa]
and press
ＴｏｒｕＣａ
８／１２
ＴｏｒｕＣａ
Ｆｏｌｄｅｒ１
Ｕｓｅｄ
The ToruCa folder list appears.
ˎ The following icons show the status of the folder.
(Yellow) Preset folder
(Blue) User-created folder
ˎ If there is an unread ToruCa card, “
lower right of the icon.
222
” appears at the
You obtain a ToruCa(detail) card.
To update a ToruCa(detail) card to the latest status
From the Function menu, select [Updated ToruCa] →
[Yes].
To save data such as a phone number in the Phonebook
Move the cursor to the phone number, etc. and from the
Function menu, select [Add to phonebook].
ˎ Follow the same steps as in “Saving the Redial/
Received Record in the Phonebook” (P.94, step 4 to 7).
● When you obtain a ToruCa card from a reading device
while displaying a list such as the ToruCa list, the ToruCa
folder list appears. Select [ToruCa] once again to display
the obtained ToruCa card.
Deleting a ToruCa Card
Managing ToruCa Cards
ˎ You cannot move, sort, or search a ToruCa card in the [Used]
folder.
You can delete ToruCa cards using four methods.
Example: Deleting a ToruCa card
Adding/Deleting Folders
You can create and delete a folder for saving a ToruCa
card. You can manage up to 22 folders. You can also
change the name of a folder or sort folders in the list.
ˎ You cannot delete or change the names of the preset folders.
To delete all ToruCa cards
From the Function menu, select [Delete all], enter the
Security code, and select [Yes].
Press
(Func) in the ToruCa folder list.
The Function menu appears.
Select [Edit folder] → [Create folder], press
and enter a folder name.
You can move ToruCa cards to another folder using
three methods.
ˎ You cannot move a ToruCa card to [Used].
Example: Moving a ToruCa card
From the ToruCa folder list, select a folder and
press
To move all ToruCa cards in the folder
From the Function menu, select [Move] → [Move all] →
[Yes] → a folder.
To move several ToruCa cards
From the Function menu, select [Move] →
[Select&move], select ToruCa cards, and press
(Complete). Select [Yes] → a folder.
Select a ToruCa card and press
Select a ToruCa card and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Delete] → [Delete one] → [Yes] and
press
The selected ToruCa card is deleted.
Sorting the List
You can temporarily sort the ToruCa cards in a folder
and display them.
Press
(Func) in the ToruCa list.
The Function menu appears.
Moving a ToruCa Card to Another Folder
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
Enter a folder name within 10 full-width or 20 half-width
characters.
The folder is added.
To change a folder name
Move the cursor to the folder and from the Function
menu, select [Edit folder] → [Edit folder name]. Enter
a folder name within 10 full-width or 20 half-width
characters.
To reorder the folders
From the Function menu, select [Edit folder] → [Reorder
folders] → a folder. Move the cursor to a position to
move to, press
(Move), and press
(Complete).
To delete a folder
Move the cursor to the folder and from the Function
menu, select [Edit folder] → [Delete folder], enter the
Security code, and select [Yes].
Select a folder and press
To delete all ToruCa cards in the folder
From the Function menu, select [Delete] → [Delete all],
enter the Security code, and select [Yes].
To delete several ToruCa cards
From the Function menu, select [Delete] →
[ S e l e c t & d e l e t e ] , s e l e c t To r u C a c a r d s , p r e s s
(Complete), and select [Yes].
Example: Adding a folder
From the Menu, select [Osaifu-Keitai] → [ToruCa]
and press
Select [Sort] → a sorting order and press
[Date]:
Sort by obtained date/time from newest to oldest.
[Genre]:
Sort by genre that identifies the type of ToruCa.
[Index]:
Sort by index in Japanese alphabetical order.
[By kana]:
Sort by “kana” in the data saved on a ToruCa card.
The ToruCa cards are displayed in accordance with the
selected sort method.
● When you sort ToruCa cards using [Index], the order of
sorting may not follow the Japanese alphabetical order if
both full-width and half-width characters are used.
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Move] → [Move one] → [Yes] and press
The Select move to display appears.
Select a folder and press
The selected ToruCa card is moved to another folder.
Continued
223
Searching a ToruCa Card
You can search for ToruCa cards by genre.
Press
(Func) in the ToruCa folder list.
The Function menu appears.
To search for ToruCa cards in the folder
Press
(Func) in the ToruCa list.
Select [Search] and press
Assigning Separate Folders for ToruCa
Cards
You can save requirements to sort ToruCa cards
obtained from a reading device so that they can be
automatically assigned to folders. Up to 20 sorting
requirements can be saved.
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ｃａｔｅｇｏｒｙ
From the Menu, select [Osaifu-Keitai] → [Settings]
→ [ToruCa setting] → [Sort folder] and press
Ｓｏｒｔ ｆｏｌｄｅｒ
Ｒｅｓｔａｕｒａｎｔ
Ｔｏｗｎ ｉｎｆｏ
Ｓｕｐｅｒｍａｒｋｅｔ
ｔｒａｖｅｌ／ｒｅｃｒｅａｔｉｏｎ
ｆａｓｈｉｏｎ／ａｃｃｅｓｓｏｒｙ
ｂｅａｕｔｙ／ｒｅｌａｘａｔｉｏｎ
ｇａｍｅ／ｈｏｒｏｓｃｏｐｅ
ｈｏｂｂｙ／ｅｎｔｅｒｔａｉｎｍｅｎｔ
Ｅｄｕｃａｔｉｏｎ
Ｏｔｈｅｒｓ
Category icons
Select a genre and press
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
To delete a sorting requirement
Move the cursor to the sorting requirement and from the
Function menu, select [Delete] → [Delete one] → [Yes].
To delete several sorting requirements, from the Function
menu, select [Delete] → [Select&delete], select sorting
requirements, press
(Complete), and select [Yes]. To
delete all sorting requirements, from the Function menu,
select [Delete] → [Delete all], enter the Security code,
and select [Yes].
To reorder the sorting requirements
From the Function menu, select [Reorder] → a sorting
requirement, move the cursor to a folder to move to,
press
(Move), and press
(Complete).
The search result appears.
To delete all searched ToruCa cards
From the Function menu, select [Delete] → [Delete all
item], enter the Security code, and select [Yes].
To move all searched ToruCa cards
From the Function menu, select [Move] → [Move all
item] → [Yes] → a folder.
Setting the ToruCa Details

Setting Whether to Obtain a ToruCa
Card
Ｓｏｒｔｉｎｇ ｒｅｑｕｉｒｅｍｅｎｔ１
Ｓｏｒｔｉｎｇ ｃｒｉｔｅｒｉａ
You can set whether to obtain ToruCa cards from a
reading device or using the iC communication.
From the Menu, select [Osaifu-Keitai] → [Settings]
→ [ToruCa setting] → [ToruCa receive] and
press
Ｆｏｌｄｅｒ ｔｏ ｓｏｒｔ ｉｎｔｏ
Select [Yes]/[No] and press
Select the sorting method at [Sorting criteria].
[Genre]:
Specify a genre of ToruCa cards.
[Title]:
Specify a part of a title within 10 full-width or 20 halfwidth characters.
[Index]:
Specify a part of an index within 10 full-width or 20 halfwidth characters.
[None]:
Do not specify any sorting method.
[Yes]:
Obtain a ToruCa card from a reading device or using the
iC communication.
[No]:
Do not obtain a ToruCa card from a reading device or
using the iC communication.
Select a place to save the sorting requirement to
and press
The ToruCa receive is set.
Select a folder to be used for sorted ToruCa cards
at [Folder to sort into] and press
When no folder is specified
ToruCa cards are sorted to [ToruCa].
Press
(Complete).
The sorting requirement is saved.
224
● If a ToruCa card satisfies several sorting requirements,
the sorting requirement with a lower number in the list has
higher priority.
● If you delete a folder for which the sorting requirement is
set, [ToruCa] is used as a sort destination folder.
● ToruCa cards received before the sorting requirement is
set are not sorted automatically.
● You cannot set [Used] as a sort destination folder.
● Only ToruCa cards obtained from the reading device are
sorted automatically.
Setting Whether to Check the
Duplication of a ToruCa(Detail) Card
You can set the FOMA terminal to check if the
ToruCa(detail) card you are trying to obtain has been
obtained already when you obtain the card from a
reading device.
[ON]:
Check if a target ToruCa(detail) card is already obtained.
Do not obtain a ToruCa card that you have obtained
already. Obtain a ToruCa card only when you have not
obtained it yet.
[OFF]:
Do not check if a target ToruCa(detail) card is already
obtained.
Setting Whether to Automatically
Recognize a ToruCa(Detail) Card
You can set whether to let a reading device recognize
available ToruCa cards automatically when you hold
up and show the FOMA terminal to it in order to use
ToruCa.
ˎ Up to 20 ToruCa cards are saved in [Used]. When the number
of saved cards exceeds 20, the cards with the oldest date/
time are deleted, in that order.
From the Menu, select [Osaifu-Keitai] → [Settings]
→ [ToruCa] → [Auto recognition] and press
Select [ON]/[OFF] and press
Select [ON]/[OFF] and press
The Duplication check is set.
Setting Whether to Notify That within the
Communication Range

You can set the FOMA terminal whether to notify you
of being within the FeliCa communication range or the
FeliCa communication being started by vibration or the
FeliCa Sign when you are close to a reading device
with the FOMA terminal powered on.
The Auto recognition is set.
When you select [ON]
Select [Yes].
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
[ON]:
Available ToruCa cards are automatically recognized by
the reading device and saved in [Used].
[OFF]:
Available ToruCa cards are not recognized by the
reading device.
To display the explanation about the Auto recognition
Move the cursor to [Auto recognition] and press
(Help).
From the Menu, select [Osaifu-Keitai] → [Settings]
→ [ToruCa] → [Duplication check] and press
From the Menu, select [Osaifu-Keitai] → [Settings]
→ [IC act. notice] and press
ＩＣ ａｃｔ． Ｎｏｔｉｃｅ
Ｂｙ ｖｉｂｒａｔｏｒ
ＯＮ
Ｂｙ ＬＥＤ
● When the Lock all or Personal data lock is set, a ToruCa
card does not move to [Used] even if it is to be deleted
regardless of the Auto recognition being set to [ON].
● If you hold up and show the FOMA terminal to a reading
device with the Auto recognition set to [OFF], a message
confirming whether to use the Automatic reading function
or stating that the Automatic reading function is OFF may
appear. To use the Automatic reading function, select [Yes]
to set the Auto recognition to [ON].
ＯＮ
[By vibrator]:
Set whether to activate the vibrator when the
communication starts.
[By LED]:
Set whether to turn on the FeliCa Sign when you enter
the range in which communication is enabled or when
the communication starts.
Select [ON]/[OFF] of the vibrator at [By vibrator].
Select [ON]/[OFF] of the FeliCa Sign at [By LED].
● When the Public mode (Drive mode) is set, the FeliCa Sign
does not light and the vibrator does not operate even if the
By vibrator and By LED are set to [ON].
225
Locking the IC Card Function

You can lock the IC card function to prevent others
from using it.
Press
display.
( ) for over a second in the stand-by
The IC card function is locked and “ ” appears.
To cancel the IC card lock
Press
( ) for over a second in the stand-by display,
enter the Security code, and press
(OK).
Locking the IC Card Function When
the FOMA Terminal Is Powered Off
You can set to automatically lock the IC card function
when the FOMA terminal is powered off.
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
From the Menu, select [Osaifu-Keitai] → [Settings]
→ [IC card lock] and press
Enter the Security code and press
The Security code screen appears.
(OK).
ＩＣ ｃａｒｄ ｌｏｃｋ
ＩＣ ｃａｒｄ ｌｏｃｋ
ＯＦＦ
ＩＣ ｌｏｃｋ（ｐｏｗｅｒ−ｏｆｆ）
Ｌａｓｔ ｓｔａｔｕｓ
[IC card lock]:
Set whether to lock the IC card function.
[IC lock(power-off)]:
Set whether to automatically lock the IC card function
when the FOMA terminal is powered off.
Select [Last status]/[Locked] at [IC lock(power-off)].
[Last status]:
Keep the current status even after the FOMA terminal is
powered off.
[Locked]:
Lock the IC card function when the FOMA terminal is
powered off.
226
GPS Function
Precautions on the Use of GPS Functions ......................................................................... 228
Checking Your Location ...........................................................................  228
Using the GPS-compatible i-αppli .........................................................................  229
Providing Your Current Location Information upon Request ..................  233
Notifying Your Current Location Information ..............................................  236
Displaying the History of Location Positioning .........................................  237
Using the Location Information from Each Function .......................................................... 237
Setting the GPS Functions ............................................................................  238
227
Precautions on the Use of GPS
Functions
GPS Function
228
ˎ You may need i-mode subscription for the use of the GPS
function.
ˎ GPS is operated by the U.S. Department of Defense.
Therefore, GPS radio wave condition may be controlled
(degradation of accuracy, suspension of radio wave
transmission, etc.) at the discretion of the U.S. Department of
Defense.
ˎ Note that radio waves may not be received or it may be
difficult to receive radio waves in the following conditions,
since GPS uses radio waves from a satellite.
- Inside or immediately under a building
- Inside a basement or tunnel, and below the ground or
water
- Inside a bag or box
- High-rise building district or densely populated residential
area
- Inside or under a thick covering of trees
- Near a high-voltage cable
- In a car, inside a train compartment
- Bad weather such as heavy rain or snow
- When there are obstructions (people or objects) near a
mobile phone
- When you are covering the main display or earpiece of
your mobile phone with your hand.
The obtained location information may deviate by 300 m or
more under the above conditions.
ˎ When the FOMA terminal is outside of the service area (or it is
overseas), the GPS function is not available.
ˎ There are about 24 GPS satellites in orbit at an altitude of
about 20,000 km, and each satellite takes about 12 hours
to travel around the earth. Therefore, radio wave reception
condition may vary depending on the date/time even if the
operating environment is the same. For example, a significant
deviation could occur to the location information or it may not
be possible to identify a location.
ˎ Please note that DoCoMo shall have no liabilities for any
purely economic loss including those due to missing a
chance to check the measurement (communication) results
because of external factors (including the running out of the
battery), such as a failure, malfunction, or any other problems
of the FOMA terminal or the power failure.
ˎ You cannot use the FOMA terminal as a navigation device for
an aircraft, vehicle, and person. Please note that DoCoMo shall
have no liabilities whatsoever even if you suffer damage or loss
while performing a navigation using the location information.
ˎ You cannot use the FOMA terminal as a high-accuracy
measurement GPS. Please note that DoCoMo shall have no
liabilities whatsoever even if you suffer damage or loss due to
a deviation of the location information.
ˎ The Position location, Location notice, and Location provision
cannot be used in the following cases.
- While the Lock all is set※1
- While the Omakase Lock is set※1
- While the Personal data lock is set※1
- While the Self mode is set
- When the UIM is not inserted
- While updating the software
- While the Key dial lock is set※2
※1 The Location provision is available.
※2 The Position location, Location provision, and Location
notice from the Loc. service client list are available.
Checking Your Location

You can measure your current location to determine where
you are. You can display a map based on the location
information you obtain, mail the location information, or
save the location information in the Phonebook.
ˎ No communication charge is required for confirming your
current location. Note, however, that there is an extra packet
communication charge for displaying a map based on your
current location information.
Example: Displaying a map of your current location
From the Menu, select [LifeKit] → [GPS] → [Position
location] and press
ˎ You can also check your current location by pressing
for over a second in the stand-by display. After
positioning, the operations follow the settings of the GPS
button setting (P.238).
“ ” flashes and the incoming
Ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎｉｎｇ ｌｏｃ．
indicator flashes.
The progress of accuracy is
indicated by the bar.
To quit the Position location
Press
(Cancel).
Ａｃｃｕｒａｃｙ： ★ ☆ ☆
To display the result for identifying a
location right away
Press
(Use).
Ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ
Ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎｉｎｇ
ｃｏｍｐｌｅｔｅｄ．
Ａｃｃｕｒａｃｙ ★ ★ ★
Ｒｅａｄ ａ Ｍａｐ
Ｒｕｎ ｉ ａｐｐｌｉ
Ｐａｓｔｅ ｔｏ ｍａｉｌ
Ａｄｄ ｔｏ ｐｈｏｎｅｂｏｏｋ
Ａｔｔａｃｈ ｔｏ ｉｍａｇｅ
To retry the operation
Press
(Retry).
Accuracy
★ ★ ★: Nearly accurate location
information (with an error less
than approximately 50 m)
★ ★ ☆: Relatively accurate location
information (with an error less
than approximately 300 m)
★ ☆ ☆: Approximate location
information (with an error
more than approximately
300 m)
ˎ Use the positioning accuracy as a guide. The accuracy
may vary depending on the radio wave condition of the
vicinity.
Select [Read a Map] and press
The map of determined current location is displayed.
ˎ After displaying the map, you can search for the
neighborhood information using “ｉエリア−周辺情報−”
(i-mode area –Neighbor info–). For details about “ｉエリ
ア−周辺情報−”, see the DoCoMo’s website.
To use the location information with GPS-compatible i-αppli
software
Select [Run i appli] → software to be used.
To paste the location information to mail
Select [Paste to mail] → [Yes].
location URL” that has a link to the location
ˎ “
information is entered in the mail main body.
ˎ The location information URL being sent is only
displayed on the i-mode compatible terminals.
To save the location information in the Phonebook
Select [Add to phonebook] → [New]/[Add].
ˎ Follow the same steps as in the Add to FOMA terminal
phonebook (P.91, step 3 to 6).
To add location information on an image
Select [Attach to image] → an image from My picture of
the Data Box.
Using the GPS-compatible
i-αppli

You can use the location information with GPScompatible i-αppli software.
ˎ When you use a GPS-compatible i-αppli, the location
information is sent to the information provider of the software
being used.
ˎ When you use the GPS function with a GPS-compatible
i-αppli, set the Use location info of the software being used
to [Yes].
ˎ The method of using the location infor mation varies
depending on the software.
From the Menu, select [LifeKit] → [GPS] → [i appli]
and press
The GPS software list display appears.
Select a software and press
The software is started up and “
” or “
Basic Service and Additional Service
There are the basic services and additional services for
this software.
Basic service
: Services provided by DoCoMo for
free of charge.
Additional service : Services provided by ZENRIN
DataCom that require an additional
charge.
You can use the additional services except the traffic
information up to 90 days after you activate the
software for the first time.
After 90 days, if you wish to keep using the additional
services, you need to apply for a membership (paid)
t o “ ゼンリン 地図＋ナビ” ( Z E N R I N M a p s + N a v i )
provided by ZENRIN DataCom.
If you apply for a membership while still using it, you
do not need to download the software again. You can
keep using the software.
Menu
今いる場所
(Current
location)
ˎ
ˎ
” appears.
The preinstalled “地図アプリ(Map appli)” uses the GPS
function and a map to display your current location
or specified location, to search the information on
neighborhood, and to navigate you to the destination
by public transportation, walk, or car.
ˎ An additional packet communication charge is required
for using this function. It is recommended to use the PakeHoudai/Pake-Houdai Full for this software.
ˎ When you have deleted the software but you want to restore
it, download it from “ｉエリア−周辺情報−” (i-mode areaNeighbor info-).
ˎ You cannot use this software when 2in1 is set to the B mode
because it uses mail.
ˎ Please note that DoCoMo will not guarantee any result such
as of the accuracy and immediacy of information such as
map or route.
ˎ While driving a car, please let a person other than the driver
operate it .
周辺を調べる ˎ
(Search
neighborhood)
ˎ
地図を見る
ˎ
(View a map)
ˎ
ˎ
ナビをする
(Navigation)
ˎ
ˎ
乗換案内
(Transfer
information)
ˎ
設定/直感★
(Settings/
Aperch)
ˎ
ˎ
ˎ
Continued
GPS Function
Using 地図アプリ(Map appli)
Up to
After
90 days 90 days
Free
Use the GPS function to Free
show the map of your current
location or send a map
attached to mail.
Leave your footmark of your
current location, follow the
track, and check others’
footmarks.
Free
Search information such as Free
shops, facilities, iD-available
stores around your current
location or specified location
and obtain a coupon from
gourmet information.
Check weather or
availabilities of parking lot
near the location.
Search a map by entering Free
Free
information such as
keywords, a genre, address,
and phone number.
Check a map of the location Free
Paid
saved in the software, server,
or Phonebook or searched
before.
Save a map of a location in a
server to use the information
on a PC as well.
Navigate the route to the Free
Paid
destination by public
transportation, walk, or car.
Navigate the route to your
house whose information is
saved before.
Check transfer information Free
Paid
and time table of trains.
Check the train route on a
map and set an alarm before
departure.
Move the FOMA terminal to Free
Free
move a 3D map or map.
Set the items such as map Free
Free
and navigation displays and
check how to use it.
Contents
229
Menus and Operations of the Top Display of “地図
アプリ” (Map appli)
ˎ When you use “地図アプリ” (Map appli) for the first time, the
Terms of Use and precautions are displayed.
ˎ The display shown is an image for explanatory purpose and
may be different from the actual display.
Display and Operations of a Map
ˎ The display shown is an image for explanatory purpose and
may be different from the actual display.
Map display
Top display
©ZENRIN DataCom CO.,LTD. 2007
Key operations while displaying a map
Each menu is displayed in the Top display. When you close the
menu, the last searched map appears.
■ A f t e r 9 0 d ay s w i t h o u t a s u b s c r i p t i o n fo r a
membership
Key operation
Action
メニュー(Menu) Display the menu.
Display the quick access menu.
拡縮 (Zoom)
When you use the software for the first time after 90 days, the
message informing that available functions are limited and the
message inquiring for a subscription for a membership appear.
When you select an additional service, those messages appear
as well.
D i s p l a y t h e z o o m b a r. P re s s
to
display a wider range, or
to display
the detailed area. Press
(閉じる)
(Exit) to determine the zoom and the bar
disappears.
Move the map horizontally or vertically.
GPS Function
Close the menu or send you back to the
first searched result position.
Rotate the map counterclockwise.
Rotate the map faced to north.
Rotate the map clockwise.
Key operations while displaying the quick access menu
You can subscribe for a membership from the software
accessed to the “ゼンリン 地図＋ナビ” (ZENRIN Maps+Navi)
site.
Key operation
周辺を調べる
(Search neighbor)
ココへナビ
(Navi here)
ココを送信
(Send here)
ココを登録
(Save here)
地図へ
(To Map)
3D・パノラマ
(3D/Panorama)
Action
Search the neighboring information based
on the center of the displayed map.
Search the route from the set departure
point to the center of the displayed map.
Send mail with the URL of the displayed
map.
Save the location information on the
center of the map in the software, server,
or Phonebook. When you save it in the
server, you can access it from a PC as
well.
Close the quick access menu.
Display the points where you can display
a 3D intersection or panoramic image.
Select the point to view them.
ビル テナント Display a building existed around and if
(Building Tenant)
there is a tenant, you can click to check it.
230
Display and Operations of the Search Result of
Neighboring Information
ˎ It explains only for the display and operations of the search
result displayed on the map, and it does not apply for the
display and operations selected from the list.
ˎ The display shown is an image for explanatory purpose and
may be different from the actual display.
While activating the software, press
(メニュー)
(Menu), select [ナビをする] (Navigation) → [ナビを
する] (Navigation), and press
Select [出発地] (Departure point), press
set the departure point by the items below.
現在地(GPS)
(Current location
(GPS))
フリーワード検索
(By keyword)
地図上で指定
(Specify on map)
TEL/〒検索
(By phone
number/code)
住所一覧から
(From address
list)
ジャンルから
(From genre)
履歴から
(From history)
登録地点から
(From saved
location)
自宅 (Home)
Search result display of neighboring information
©ZENRIN DataCom CO.,LTD. 2007
Key operations while displaying the search result display of
neighboring information
ˎ When the cursor does not point at searched information such
as a store, the quick menu is displayed.
Key operation
Search by phone number/postal code.
Select an address to set.
Select a genre to set.
Set from the previously displayed map.
Set from the location information saved
in the software, server, or Phonebook.
Select [目的地] (Destination), press
, and set
the destination following the similar steps at Step 2.
Select [時間指定] (Specify time), press
select an item below.
D i s p l a y t h e z o o m b a r. P re s s
to
display a wider range, or
to display
the detailed area. Press
(閉じる)
(Exit) to determine the zoom and the bar
disappears.
現時刻で指定
(Current time)
出発時刻指定
(Start time)
到着時刻指定
(Arrival time)
終電を利用
(Last train)
Navigating the Searched Route with Sound and
Display to the Destination
You can set the departure point and the destination to
search the route. The route is displayed traveling by
walk, public transportation, or car. After the route is
searched, you can be navigated to the destination with
sound and display.
Set the departure point on the map.
GPS Function
拡縮 (Zoom)
Search by keyword.
Show the next search result.
メニュー (Menu) Display the menu.
Position the current location and set it.
Set the location information on your
home.
Check information on the departure
出発地の確認
(Check departure point.
point)
Action
Check the detailed information on the
search result.
Move the map horizontally or vertically.
Search again based on the displayed
map to be center.
Show the previous search result.
, and
, and
Check the route using the current time.
Set the start time and check the route.
Set the arrival time and check the
route.
Check the route with the last train of
the day.
Select [条件設定] (Condition), press
, select an
item below, select [上記で設定] (Set as above), and
press
乗換条件
(Transfer)
徒歩ルート
(Walking route)
特急利用
(Express)
通常利用車種
(Type of car in
regular use)
S e l e c t f r o m [ 早い] ( F a s t ) , [ 安い]
(Budget), or [楽々] (Easy) for transfer
selection criteria.
Select from [おまかせ] (Recommended),
[屋根多い] (Many roofs), or [階段少ない]
(Less up-and-down) for route selection
criteria.
Select whether to use express even if
the total route distance is within 100 km.
Select a type of car in regular use.
Continued
231
6
で検索]/[
Select [
のみで検索] and press
You can search a route by using the total navigation: [
で検索] and the car navigation: [ のみで検索]. Routes
(up to six routes) are displayed as a search result. If there
is another transfer route, an icon shows the characteristics
of the route.
Icon
早 (Fast)
安 (Budget)
Key operations while using the navigation
Key operation
Action
メニュー(Menu) End the navigation and display the Top
menu.
Display the quick access menu.
拡縮 (Zoom)
Meaning
Fastest route to reach the destination.
Most budget route to reach the
destination.
Route with less numbers of transfers to
reach the destination.
Meet the above three conditions.
楽 (Easy)
D i s p l a y t h e z o o m b a r. P re s s
to
display a wider range, or
to display
the detailed area. Press
(閉じる)
(Exit) to determine the zoom and the bar
disappears.
Move the map horizontally or vertically.
Go back to the current location.
Switch to the intersection mode.
オススメ
(Recommended)
Car route taking toll roads.
有料 (Toll)
Car route taking local roads.
一般 (Local)
End/start the navigation.
Rotate the map counterclockwise.
Rotate the map faced to north.
Rotate the map clockwise.
To save the route
Select [ルートを登録] (Save route).
Key operations while displaying the quick access menu
Select a route, select [ナビ・ルート確認] (Check
N a v i / r o u t e ) → [ ナビ] / [ ナビ( 省電力) ] ( N a v i /
Navi(power saver)), and press
Key operation
結果&設定
(Result&Settings)
The “ご利用上の注意” (Usage precautions) appears.
To check a route
Select a route and select [ルート確認] (Check route).
To check the time table
Select a route and select [時刻表] (Time table).
GPS Function
Select [はい] and press
The navigation to the destination starts.
Display and operations of route (car)/navigation
(car)
ˎ The display shown is an image for explanatory purpose and
may be different from the actual display.
Route (car) display
Action
Display the search result of a route (time,
fee, etc.) and perform settings for the
navigation.
Search the route adding up to three
経由地の決定
(Decide the passing passing points toward the destination.
point)
Search the route from the departure to the
リルート
(Search the route
destination again.
again)
Delete the displayed route.
ルート消去
(Delete route)
Switch to the intersection mode.
モード切替
(Switch mode)
Display the traffic information linked to the
渋滞情報
(Traffic information) displayed map.
※ Only for the car
route
Using the Setting/Help
Route to the destination
©ZENRIN DataCom CO.,LTD. 2007
Navigation (car) display
Current location/traveling direction
Route to the destination
©ZENRIN DataCom CO.,LTD. 2007
232
From the menu of the Top display, select [設定/直感
, and select items
★] → [設定・ヘルプ], press
from the followings.
Check whether you sign up for [ゼ
会員情報確認
(Check membership) ンリン 地図＋ナビ] ( Z E N R I N
Maps+Navi).
Set the settings related to the
基本設定
(Basic settings of
software itself such as the display
appli)
color of the map and font size.
Set the setting related to the
ナビ設定
(Navi setting)
navigation function such as リルー
ト (Re-route) and volume of audio
guidance.
Save your home location.
自宅設定
(Set your home)
Delete the usage history of maps
履歴系クリア
(Delete history)
and navigations.
Check the explanation of usage,
使い方の説明/よく
FAQ, and agreement for use.
ある質問/利用規約
(Explanation of usage/
FAQ/Agreement for use)
Providing Your Current Location Information
upon Request

You can provide your current location information when
there is a request from another party.
ˎ Before using the Location provision, set the Location request
to [ON] or [Permission sch.]. The default setting is set to
[OFF]. You may also need to perform the usage settings for
each service (P.234). (When you use “imadoco-search”, you
need to set “位置情報利用設定” (Settings to use location
information) (settings for imadoco-search) in i Menu (“オプ
ション設定” (Options) of “料金＆お申込・設定” (Charge &
Subscription/Settings)).)
ˎ To use the Location provision, you may need to subscribe to
a service provider that supports this function. There may be a
charge for the use of the service.
ˎ To use the Location provision, follow the information provided
by the service provider and DoCoMo’s website.
ˎ When the Location request is set to [ON] or [Permission sch.],
the location information may be sent to a searcher without
operating the FOMA terminal.
When Your Location Information Is
Requested
When the provision of the location information is
requested by the preset GPS host, the Location
provision is started.
ドコモ一郎
Ａｃｃｕｒａｃｙ： ★ ☆ ☆
Ｌｏｃ．Ｒｅｑ．ｆｒｏｍ:
イマドコサーチ
ドコモ一郎
Ｓｅｎｄ Ｌｏｃ．
Ｎｏｔ Ｓｅｎｄ Ｌｏｃ．
Select [Send Loc.].
Ｐｒｏｖｉｄｉｎｇ ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ
イマドコサーチ
０９０ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ
ドコモ一郎
Ａｃｃｕｒａｃｙ： ★ ☆ ☆
“ ” flashes, the Loc. provide/check
tone sounds, and the incoming
indicator flashes.
To quit the Location provision
Press
(Cancel).
● If there is a request for your location information when
the Public mode (Drive mode) is set, the FOMA terminal
operates as follows.
- When the settings for using each service is set to “許
可” (accept), it is indicated only in the display and the
location information is provided. The Loc. provide/accept
tone, vibrator, and incoming indicator do not operate.
- When the settings for using each service is set to “毎回
確認” (Check every time), the location information is not
provided.
● When the location information is requested from a person
who uses “imadocokantan search”, the FOMA terminal
operates as follows.
- The confirmation screen appears every time you
are requested. If you select [Send Loc.], the rough
positioning result is immediately notified to the person
who requests it. After you select [Send Loc.], the
GPS positioning display appears. The high-detailed
positioning result is notified after the GPS positioning.
- After you select [Send Loc.] and you cancel providing
the location, the rough positioning result is notified to the
person who requests it. In this case, the Location history
is saved but location information is not displayed.
● The location information may be sent depending on the
timing of cancellation.
● Even if the location information may have been sent, the
service provider that supports the Location provision
function may not have received it depending on the radio
wave condition.
● When 2in1 is used, the location information is provided,
regardless of the 2in1 mode.
● Some Service client IDs may not be displayed.
Continued
GPS Function
ˎ During a voice call or PushTalk communication, the vibrator
does not operate.
When the settings for using each service is set to “許可” (accept)
“ ” flashes, the Loc. provide/accept
Ｐｒｏｖｉｄｉｎｇ ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ
tone sounds, and the incoming
イマドコサーチ
indicator flashes.
To quit the Location provision
Press
(Cancel).
０９０ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ
When the settings for using each service is set to “毎回確認”
(Check every time)
233
Setting Whether to Provide Your
Location Information
You can set whether to accept or reject the request to
provide your current location information.
From the Menu, select [LifeKit] → [GPS] → [GPS
settings] → [Loc. request menu] → [Location
request] and press
The Security code screen appears.
Enter the Security code and press
The Location request display appears.
[ON]:
Provide the location information to requesting party. The
location information may be sent to a searcher without
operating the FOMA terminal.
[OFF]:
Do not provide location information to requesting party.
[Permission schedule]:
Provide the location information to requesting party
during the permitted period.
Select a way to provide the location information
and press
Operations When the Period to Permit for
Providing Location Information is Set
Example: When the current date and time is “2007/11/23 14:00”
Starting time: 15:00
Ending time: 22:00
Settings
Repeat
Valid period
type
None
−
specified
Everyday Start date 2007/11/28
End date 2007/12/28
Start date 2007/11/23
End date 2007/12/28
Start date 2007/11/23
End date None specified
Specified Start date 2007/11/28
day
End date 2007/12/28
Start date 2007/11/23
End date 2007/12/28
Start date 2007/11/23
End date None specified
Starting time: 09:00
GPS Function
Repeat
Valid period
type
None
−
specified
Everyday Start date 2007/11/28
End date 2007/12/28
Start date 2007/11/23
End date 2007/12/28
Start date 2007/11/23
End date None specified
Specified Start date 2007/11/28
day
End date 2007/12/28
Start date 2007/11/23
End date 2007/12/28
Start date 2007/11/23
End date None specified
234
From 2007/11/23 15:00 to
2007/11/23 22:00
From 2007/11/28 15:00 to
2007/12/28 22:00
Everyday (from 15:00 to 22:00)
From 2007/11/23 15:00 to
2007/12/28 22:00
Everyday (from 15:00 to 22:00)
After 2007/11/23 15:00
Everyday (from 15:00 to 22:00)
Specified day from 2007/11/28
15:00 to 2007/12/28 22:00 (from
15:00 to 22:00)
Specified day from 2007/11/23
15:00 to 2007/12/28 22:00 (from
15:00 to 22:00)
Specified day after 2007/11/23
15:00 (from 15:00 to 22:00)
Ending time: 22:00
Settings
The Location request is set. If you set [ON] or [Permission
sche], “ ” appears.
When you select [Permission schedule]
Set a period to permit for providing location information.
Enter the time both at [Start time] and [End time] in
24-hour format and select the repeat type at [Repeat].
If you set [Eyd] or [Day], enter dates both at [Start day]
and [End day].
To perform the setting via the Initial setting
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Management] →
[Initial setting] → [Location request], enter the Security
code, and select [Yes]/[No].
Period for providing location
information
Period for providing location
information
From 2007/11/23 14:00 to
2007/11/23 22:00
From 2007/11/28 09:00 to
2007/12/28 22:00
Everyday (from 09:00 to 22:00)
From 2007/11/23 14:00 to
2007/12/28 22:00
Everyday (from 09:00 to 22:00)
After 2007/11/23 14:00
Everyday (from 09:00 to 22:00)
Specified day from 2007/11/28
09:00 to 2007/12/28 22:00 (from
09:00 to 22:00)
Specified day from 2007/11/23
14:00 to 2007/12/28 22:00 (from
09:00 to 22:00)
Specified day after 2007/11/23
14:00 (from 09:00 to 22:00)
Starting time: 15:00
Ending time: 10:00
Settings
Repeat
Valid period
type
None
−
specified
Everyday Start date 2007/11/28
End date 2007/12/28
Start date 2007/11/23
End date 2007/12/28
Start date 2007/11/23
End date None specified
Specified Start date 2007/11/28
End date 2007/12/28
day
Start date 2007/11/23
End date 2007/12/28
Start date 2007/11/23
End date None specified
Starting time: 09:00
Period for providing location
information
From 2007/11/23 15:00 to
2007/11/24 10:00
From 2007/11/28 15:00 to
2007/12/29 10:00
Everyday (from 15:00 to 10:00
at the next day)
From 2007/11/23 15:00 to
2007/12/29 10:00
Everyday (from 15:00 to 10:00
at the next day)
After 2007/11/23 15:00
Everyday (from 15:00 to 10:00
at the next day)
Specified day from 2007/11/28
15:00 to 2007/12/29 10:00 (from
15:00 to 10:00 at the next day)
Specified day from 2007/11/23
15:00 to 2007/12/29 10:00 (from
15:00 to 10:00 at the next day)
Specified day after 2007/11/23
15:00 (from 15:00 to 10:00 at
the next day)
Setting the User-defined Host
※ Normally, you do not need to change this setting.
You can set one host for using the GPS service besides
the Initial host set at the time of subscription.
Ｈｏｓｔ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ｉｎｉｔｉａｌ ｈｏｓｔ
Ｕｎｒｅｇｉｓｔｅｒｅｄ
To edit the set host
Move the cursor to the set host, press
(Edit), and
enter the Security code. Edit each item.
To delete the set host
Move the cursor to the set host, press
(Delete), enter
the Security code, and select [Yes].
To reset the host to the default setting
Select [Initial host].
Start date 2007/11/23
End date None specified
Specified Start date 2007/11/28
day
End date 2007/12/28
Start date 2007/11/23
End date 2007/12/28
Start date 2007/11/23
End date None specified
Enter the Security code and press
(OK).
Ｈｏｓｔ ｎａｍｅ
Ｈｏｓｔ ａｄｄｒｅｓｓ
GPS Function
Start date 2007/11/23
End date 2007/12/28
(Edit).
Ｒｅｇｉｓｔｅｒ ｈｏｓｔ
Period for providing location
information
From 2007/11/23 14:00 to
2007/11/24 09:00
From 2007/11/28 09:00 to
2007/12/29 09:00
Everyday (from 09:00 to 09:00
at the next day)
From 2007/11/23 14:00 to
2007/12/29 09:00
Everyday (from 09:00 to 09:00
at the next day)
After 2007/11/23 14:00
Everyday (from 09:00 to 09:00
at the next day)
Specified day from 2007/11/28
09:00 to 2007/12/29 09:00 (from
09:00 to 09:00 at the next day)
Specified day from 2007/11/23
14:00 to 2007/12/29 09:00 (from
09:00 to 09:00 at the next day)
Specified day after 2007/11/23
14:00 (from 09:00 to 09:00 at
the next day)
Select [Unregistered] and press
The Security code screen appears.
Ending time: 09:00
Settings
Repeat
Valid period
type
None
−
specified
Everyday Start date 2007/11/28
End date 2007/12/28
From the Menu, select [LifeKit] → [GPS] → [GPS
settings] → [Loc. request menu] → [Host setting]
and press
[Host name]:
Enter a host name within 99 half-width alphanumeric
characters and symbols.
[Host address]:
Enter a host address within 100 half-width alphanumeric
characters and symbols.
Enter each item.
Press
(Complete).
The entered host is saved.
Select a host and press
The user-defined host is changed.
Continued
235
Performing Settings for Using the GPS
Service
You can connect to the GPS service settings site and
perform setting necessary for providing the location
information.
From the Menu, select [LifeKit] → [GPS] → [GPS
settings] → [Loc. request menu] → [Ser vice
settings] and press
The FOMA terminal is connected to the GPS service
settings site.
Set each item.
ˎ For details about how to set the services, contact your
service provider.
● When 2in1 is used, the location information is notified by
Number A, regardless of the 2in1 mode.
● The location information may be sent depending on the
timing of cancellation.
● Even if the location information may have been sent, the
service provider that supports the Location notice function
may not have received it depending on the radio wave
condition.
Saving a Party to Be Notified
You can save a party to be notified of your current
location information as a location service client. Up to
five parties can be saved.
ˎ Make sure to enter [Loc. serv. client] and [Service client ID].
● While you are connecting to the GPS service settings site,
available Function menus are different from the ones displayed
during i-mode. The URL history is also not recorded.
● If you connect to the GPS service settings site during
international roaming, an error message appears on the
display and a communication charge is required.
Ｌｏｃ． ｓｅｒｖｉｃｅ ｃｌｉｅｎｔ
To display the details of a party
Move the cursor to the party and press
(Detail).
To edit the information of a party
Move the cursor to the party and from the Function
menu, select [Edit]. Edit each item.
To delete a party
Move the cursor to the party and from the Function
menu, select [Delete] → [Delete one] → [Yes]. To delete
all parties, from the Function menu, select [Delete] →
[Delete all], enter the Security code, and select [Yes].
To save a party in the Phonebook
Move the cursor to the party and from the Function menu,
select [Add to phonebook] → [Main memory]/ [UIM].
ˎ Follow the same steps as in the Add to FOMA terminal
phonebook (P.91, step 3 to 6) or in the Add to UIM
phonebook (P.93, step 3 to 4).
Notifying Your Current Location
Information

GPS Function
You can notify a specific party (a service provider that
supports the Location notice function) of the location
information of your current location.
ˎ To use the Location notice, you may need to subscribe to a
service provider that supports this function. There may be a
charge for the use of the service.
ˎ To use the Location notice, follow the instructions provided by
the service provider or on the DoCoMo’s website. There is a
charge for the use of the Location notice function.
From the Menu, select [LifeKit] → [GPS] →
[Location notice] and press
○○サービス
Ｓｅｒｖｉｃｅ ｃｌｉｅｎｔ ＩＤ
Ｐｈｏｎｅ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ
Ａｕｔｏ Ｎｏｔｉｃｅ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ｃｏｎｆｉｒｍ
“ ” flashes and the incoming
indicator flashes.
When the current location is
notified, the location notice tone
sounds and the location information
is notified to a recipient.
[Loc. serv. client]:
Enter a name of the party to be notified.
[Service client ID]:
Enter a notified party ID specified by the service
provider.
[Phone number]:
Enter a phone number.
[Auto Notice setting]:
Set whether to notify your current location automatically
when you place a voice/videophone call to the number
set at [Phone number].
Ａｃｃｕｒａｃｙ： ★ ☆ ☆
To enter a party to be notified and notify location information
Select [Direct input], enter the service client ID, and
press
(OK).
To quit the Location notice
Press
(Cancel).
(Create).
Ｌｏｃ． ｓｅｒｖ． ｃｌｉｅｎｔ
Select [Loc. service client] → a party to be notified
and press
Ｎｏｔｉｆｙｉｎｇ ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ
Press
Ｒｅｇ． ｓｅｒｖｉｃｅ ｃｌｉｅｎｔ
The screen for selecting the method for activating the
Location notice appears.
From the Menu, select [LifeKit] → [GPS] → [GPS
settings] → [Reg. service client] and press
Enter a name of a party to be notified at [Loc. serv.
client].
Enter the name within 16 full-width or 32 half-width characters.
Enter a notified party ID specified by the service
provider at [Service client ID].
Enter the ID within 12 half-width numeric characters
including “＊” or “#”.
236
5
Select [Phone number] → [Direct input], press
and enter a phone number.
Ｌｏｃ． ｈｉｓｔｏｒｙ
Enter the phone number within 26 half-width numeric
characters including “ ”, “#”, “+”, or “P”.
ˎ The phone number which is already saved as a location
service client cannot be saved again.
To quote from the Phonebook
Select [Phonebook].
Press
(Complete).
The party is set as a location service client.
Displaying the History of Location
Positioning

ˎ When the number of location information records exceeds 50,
the records are deleted starting from the location information
with the oldest date/time.
From the Menu, select [LifeKit] → [GPS] →
[Location history] and press
Ｌｏｃ． ｈｉｓｔｏｒｙ
１１／１４
１１／１２
１１／１２
１１／１１
１１／１１
１１／１１
１１／１１
１１／１１
１１／１１
１１／１０
１１／１０
１１／１０
Accuracy
(Detail).
Positioning date/time
Type:
Either Position location,
Location notice, or Location
provision is displayed.
Location information:
Latitude (degree, minute,
second), Longitude (degree,
minute, second)
“N” and “E” indicate northern
latitude and eastern longitude,
respectively.
Datum: W G S 8 4 ( Wo r l d G e o d e t i c
System)
The geodetic system is the
standard used for indicating
a location on earth by its
longitude/latitude.
● When the Location notice or Location provision is
performed, it is recorded in the Location history even if the
Position location fails or is canceled. However, note that
some items are not displayed.
● A location history record for which location information is
not obtained cannot be used by any function.
● Even if the result of the Location provision or Location
notice is left in the history, the service provider may not
have received the location information.
● When you provide your location information while 2in1
is used, the name of the party who requests the location
information is displayed by each 2in1 mode following the
Phonebook 2in1 setting.
● The location information and accuracy saved in the
Location history may differ from those sent to the Location
provision destination/Location service client depending on
some reasons such as radio wave condition.
GPS Function
Up to 50 results of location information positioned by
the Position location, Location provision, and Location
notice are recorded as history. You can perform various
operations from the location information recorded in the
history.
２００７／１１／１４ １０：２０：１０
Ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ
ＮＸＸ° ＸＸ’ ＸＸ．ＸＸＸ”
ＥＸＸＸ° ＸＸ’ ＸＸ．ＸＸＸ”
Ｄａｔｕｍ：ＷＧＳ８４
Ａｃｃｕｒａｃｙ： ★ ★ ☆
Select the notification method at [Auto Notice
setting].
[Yes]:
Notify your current location automatically.
[No]:
Do not notify your current location automatically.
[Confirm]:
When you place a voice/videophone call, confirm
whether to notify your current location.
Select a location history and press
Using the Location Information
from Each Function
１／２５
１０：２０：１０
１０：００：０８
９：３２：００
２１：２８：３７
２１：２２：１５
１５：４３：１０
１５：０９：５１
１４：４９：３３
１４：４０：３９
２２：５４：２２
２２：３４：０８
１０：５５：１７
When the location infor mation is
available, “ ” appears.
Type of positioning
ˎ The following icons show the type of positioning used.
Position location
Location notice
Location provision
To use the location information
Press
(Use).
ˎ For details about how to use the location information,
see P.237.
To delete a location history record
Move the cursor to the location history record and press
(Use), select [Delete] → [Delete one] → [Yes]. To
delete several location history records, from the Function
menu, select [Delete] → [Select&delete], select records,
press
(Complete), and select [Yes]. To delete all
location history records, from the Function menu, select
[Delete] → [Delete all], enter the Security code, and
select [Yes].
You can display a map based on the location
information added to the Phonebook, sites, screen
memos, ToruCa cards, Message R/F, or images. You
can also paste the location information URL to mail.
Adding the Location Information
You can add the location information to an image or
the FOMA terminal phonebook or paste the location
information URL in the main body of mail.
Example: Adding the location information to the mail main body
by obtaining it by the Position location
Press
(Func) in the mail main body input display,
select [Rcv loc. Info], and press
Ｒｃｖ ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ ｉｎｆｏ
Ｆｒｏｍ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ ｌｏｃ．
Ｆｒｏｍ ｌｏｃ． ｈｉｓｔｏｒｙ
Ｆｒｏｍ ｐｈｏｎｅｂｏｏｋ
Ａｔｔａｃｈ ｆｒｏｍ ｉｍａｇｅ
To add the location information to the FOMA terminal
phonebook
Select “ ” in the Edit FOMA terminal phonebook
display.
Continued
237
2
Select [From position loc.], press
(OK).
The screen for confirming whether to paste the location
URL appears.
To add the location information by selecting from the
Location history
Select [From loc. history] → a location history and press
(OK).
To add the location information by selecting from the
Phonebook
Select [From phonebook] → a phonebook.
ˎ You cannot select it when you save the location
information in the Phonebook.
To add the location information from an image
Select [Attach from image] → an image from My picture
of the Data Box.
ˎ You cannot select it when you add the location
information on an image.
To save the location information in the Phonebook
Select [Add to phonebook] → [New]/[Add].
ˎ Follow the same steps as in the Add to FOMA terminal
phonebook (P.91, step 3 to 6).
, and press
Setting the GPS Functions

Setting the GPS Keys
You can set the actions when performing the Position
location by pressing
for over a second in the
stand-by display.
ＧＰＳ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Select [Yes] and press
Ｒｅａｄ ａ Ｍａｐ
Ｒｕｎ ｉ ａｐｐｌｉ
Ｐａｓｔｅ ｔｏ ｍａｉｌ
Ａｄｄ ｔｏ ｐｈｏｎｅｂｏｏｋ
Ａｔｔａｃｈ ｔｏ ｉｍａｇｅ
Ｃｏｎｆｉｒｍ
“ location URL” that has a link to the location information
is entered in the mail main body.
Using the Added Location Information
[Read a Map]:
Display the map showing your current location that is
positioned.
[Run i appli]:
Use the GPS-compatible i-αppli.
[Paste to mail]:
Attach the location information into mail.
[Add to phonebook]:
Save the location information in the Phonebook.
[Attach to image]:
Attach the location information to an image.
[Confirm]:
Select a function every time you use.
You can use the location information added to the
image, FOMA terminal phonebook, sites, screen
memos, ToruCa cards, or Message R/F.
GPS Function
ˎ Items you can use vary depending on the type of data
which is attached location information. The available items
depending on the type of data are followings.
Type of data
Image
Phonebook
Site, Screen memo,
ToruCa, or MessageR/F
Available item
Read a Map, Paste to mail, Run i appli,
and Add to phonebook
Read a Map, Paste to mail, Run i appli,
and Attach to image
Read a Map, Paste to mail, and Run i appli
Example: Displaying a map of the location information added to
the Phonebook
From the Phonebook, select data → [
and press
The GPS button setting is set.
Setting the Positioning Accuracy
You can set to prioritize either the speed or accuracy of
positioning.
Ｒｅａｄ ａ Ｍａｐ
Ｒｕｎ ｉ ａｐｐｌｉ
Ｐａｓｔｅ ｔｏ ｍａｉｌ
Ａｔｔａｃｈ ｔｏ ｉｍａｇｅ
Select [Read a Map] and press
Select a function to be performed automatically
and press
Has loc. Info]
Ｕｓｅ ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ ｉｎｆｏ
From the Menu, select [LifeKit] → [GPS] → [GPS
settings] → [GPS button setting] and press
The map of the location information appears.
ˎ After displaying the map, you can search for the
neighborhood information using “ｉエリア−周辺情報−”
(i-mode area –Neighbor info–). For details about “ｉエリ
ア−周辺情報−”, see the DoCoMo’s website.
To use the location information with GPS-compatible i-αppli
software
Select [Run i appli] → software to be used.
To paste the location information to mail
Select [Paste to mail] → [Yes].
location URL” that has a link to the location
ˎ “
information is entered in the mail main body.
To add the location information on an image
Select [Attach to image] → an image from My picture of
the Data Box.
From the Menu, select [LifeKit] → [GPS] → [GPS
settings] → [Positioning mode] and press
Ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎｉｎｇ ｍｏｄｅ
Ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ
Ｓｔａｎｄａｒｄ ｍｏｄｅ
Ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ ｎｏｔｉｃｅ
Ｓｔａｎｄａｒｄ ｍｏｄｅ
Ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ ｐｒｏｖｉｓｉｏｎ
Ｓｔａｎｄａｒｄ ｍｏｄｅ
Select a positioning mode at each item.
[Standard mode]:
Perform positioning in preference to the speed.
[Quality mode]:
Perform positioning in preference to the accuracy. It
may take time longer than [Standard mode] to perform
positioning.
Press
(Complete).
The Positioning mode is set.
238
One Seg
About One Seg ................................................................................................................... 240
Before Using One Seg ....................................................................................................... 241
Setting Channels .......................................................................................  242
Watching One Seg ......................................................................................  243
Using the Program Guide i-αppli .............................................................. 247
Setting a Timer for Watching/Recording a One Seg Program ........................  247
Using Data Broadcasting ................................................................................................... 251
Using TVlink ..........................................................................................................  252
Recording One Seg While Watching ....................................................... 252
Starting Time Shift Play While Watching ..........................................................  253
Receiving Mail While Watching One Seg ............................................................................ 254
Various Settings for One Seg ........................................................................<1Seg setting> 255
239
About One Seg
What is One Seg?
One Seg is a digital terrestrial broadcasting for mobile
devices and provides data broadcasting as well as
video and sound broadcasting. You can also receive
more detailed program information, join panel shows,
enjoy TV shopping, and more using i-mode.
ˎ For details on the “One Seg” service, see the website below.
The Association for Promotion of Digital Broadcasting
PC
: http://www.dpa.or.jp/
i-mode : http://www.dpa.or.jp/1seg/k/
About Using One Seg
One Seg
ˎ One Seg is a service provided by TV broadcasters (broadcast
stations).
ˎ You can receive video, sound, and data broadcasting of One
Seg that is broadcasted without any subscription and free of
charge.
ˎ The two types of information are available in the area of
the data broadcasting: “data broadcasting” and “data
broadcasting site”. “Data broadcasting” is carried in airwave
with video and sound, and “data broadcasting site” is
available by accessing sites provided by TV broadcasters
(broadcast stations). Also, “i-mode site” can be accessed
with this service. To access sites, you need to subscribe to
services such as i-mode.
ˎ The packet communication charge is required to access a
site such as “data broadcasting site” or “i-mode site”.
Depending on a site, an additional information charge may be
required for using sites (i-mode paid sites).
About Radio Wave
One Seg is one of the broadcasting services and uses
the different radio wave (airwave) from the FOMA
service. Therefore, regardless of whether you are
outside/inside of the FOMA service area, you cannot
receive One Seg broadcasting in a place where the
airwave does not reach or in a time zone when it is out
of service.
Even if you are in the digital terrestrial broadcasting
service area, the receiving condition may become
worse or you cannot receive anything in the following
places.
- Places where are far away from the radio wave tower which
send airwaves
- Places such as interfered by mountains, covered with a
building where the radio wave is interrupted by features or
buildings
- Places such as in the tunnel, basement, or building where the
radio wave is weak or does not reach at all
To make the radio wave condition better, extend the
One Seg Antenna fully. Changing the orientation of the
antenna, placing the FOMA terminal closer or further to
the body, or moving to another location may make the
radio wave condition better.
240
Display When Using One Seg for the First Time
After the purchase, when you use One Seg for the
first time, the display for confirming the notabilia of
the service appears. Check the contents and press
(OK).
● When you insert another UIM or perform the Reset all
data&set, the display for confirming the notabilia of the
service appears again.
What is Broadcast Storage Area?
The broadcast storage area is a storage area inside the
terminal that is exclusive for One Seg. The information
you input according to the instructions provided by the
data broadcast program you are watching is saved
in the broadcast storage area as specified by the
settings of TV broadcasters (broadcast stations). The
information to be saved may contain answers for quiz,
as well as personal information such as membership
number, gender, age, or occupation.
The saved information may be displayed, or be sent to
TV broadcasters (broadcast stations) without another
input of information when you browse to the data
broadcasting site.
To delete information in the broadcast storage area,
see P.255.
When you replace the UIM with another one, the screen
for confirming whether to reset the broadcast storage
area appears. Select [Yes] to reset it.
■ Using information in the broadcast storage area
When information in the broadcast storage area is
used while you are watching a program, the message
“Use saved info? It may include info used by the same
broadcasting gr.” appears. When you select [Yes], the
confirmation screen does not appear as long as you
watch the same program. If you select [Yes,from then
on], the confirmation screen no longer appears even if
the program is changed.
Other Features
● One-touch channel selection by the remote-control
numbers (P.244)
● Switching between the main sound and sub sound
(P.246)
● Using the program guide i-αppli (P.247)
● Setting a timer for watching (P.247)
● Setting a timer for recording (P.247)
● Displaying and using the data broadcasting (P.251)
● Using TVlink (P.252)
● Recording a video and still image (P.252)
● Time shift play while watching (P.253)
● Rapid play with sound at about 1.3x speed (P.277)
■ The display that appears when One Seg is used for
the first time
When One Seg is activated for the first time, the display
for confirming the notabilia of the service appears.
When the FOMA terminal is in the TV style, switch to
the Normal style, and then check the contents and
press
(OK) (P.240).
Before Using One Seg
Step to Watch One Seg
Example: When you watch One Seg for the first time
Step 1 Set channel list (P.242)
Save a channel list suitable for the area you
use.
Step 2 Activate One Seg (P.243)
Extend the One Seg Antenna and activate
One Seg.
■ One Seg Antenna
When you use the One Seg function, extend the One
Seg Antenna as illustrated below. When the One Seg
reception is poor, change the direction of the One Seg
Antenna or the location of the FOMA terminal.
ˎ Do not use force to change the direction of the One Seg
Antenna.
Pull out the One Seg Antenna.
Raise the One Seg Antenna.
Change the direction.
Putting the One Seg Antenna back
Change the direction back.
Push the One Seg Antenna back while aligning the
top of the One Seg Antenna with the counter part
until it stops.
ˎ If you use force to put the antenna back without
confirming the correct orientation, it may cause
malfunction.
ˎ When receiving a voice, videophone, or PushTalk call while
watching One Seg, you can answer the call by pausing
video and sound. After the call is terminated, the screen for
confirming whether to use Time shift play appears. When you
select [Yes], Time shift play is started.
ˎ When receiving i-mode mail, SMS, Message R/F while
watching One Seg, the incoming mail display appears. The
display restores when mail reception is completed. (When the
Mail telop disp set is set to [OFF] and Dur multi task disp is
set to [Prefer operat.])
ˎ When the Alarm, Schedule alarm, or Booking alarm time comes
while watching One Seg, the alarm is displayed. The display
restores when you stop the Alarm or Schedule alarm and press
or
in the display informing the release of the alarm.
When you stop the Booking alarm, the screen for confirming
whether to activate One Seg appears depending on the setting
of the Cfm. activation (P.248) and you can activate it.
One Seg
ˎ If you try to activate One Seg with the battery level low, the
screen for confirming whether to activate One Seg appears.
If you select [Yes], One Seg is activated. When the battery
level becomes low while watching One Seg, the screen for
confirming whether to quit One Seg appears. When you
select [Yes], One Seg is terminated.
ˎ When the battery level becomes low, the screen informing
that the battery level becomes low appears, “ ”/“ ”/“ ”
flashes while watching One Seg, and “ ”/“ ”/“ ” flashes
while recording a One Seg program.
ˎ When the battery level becomes extremely low while watching
or recording a One Seg program, One Seg is terminated.
When you are recording a One Seg program, the video
recorded up to this point is saved automatically.
■ When there is an incoming call, etc. while watching
One Seg
Using the One Seg Antenna
■ Battery level
● When the UIM is not inserted, you cancel the subscription
to DoCoMo, or you temporarily suspend using the FOMA
service, you cannot watch One Seg.
● Even when you insert the UIM for which you subscribe
to DoCoMo, you may not be able to activate One Seg if
you repeatedly watch One Seg in the condition the FOMA
terminal cannot communicate such as when the FOMA
terminal is outside of the service area or in the Self mode.
In that case, try to activate One Seg in the condition the
FOMA terminal can communicate by moving into the
FOMA service area.
● When you activate One Seg for the first time, activate it
within the FOMA service area.
● Even if the data may be lost or changed as a result
of malfunction, repair, or other handling of the FOMA
terminal, under no condition will DoCoMo be held liable
for any damaged or lost data saved in the FOMA terminal.
Furthermore, note that the saved information (such as
One Seg recorded videos or still images, TV links, or
information saved in the broadcast storage area) cannot
be moved when you change your FOMA terminal or have
it repaired.
● If you continue watching One Seg for a long period of time
with the battery being charged, the life of the battery pack
may become shorter.
241
Setting Channels

To use One Seg, you need to perform the channel
setting and save the channel list beforehand. When
you watch One Seg, select a channel list suitable for
the current location.
You can save up to 10 channel lists, 62 broadcast
stations for each list.
Saving a Broadcast Station to the Channel
List Automatically

B ro a d c a s t s t a t i o n s t h a t c a n b e re c e i v e d a re
automatically searched and saved to a channel list.
ˎ You need to set it within the Terrestrial digital TV broadcasting
service area.
ˎ When you perform the Auto channel set, extend the One Seg
Antenna fully.
From the Menu, select [1 Seg] → [Set channel list]
and press
● When the multiple broadcast stations which have the same
remote-control number are retrieved, the message to the
effect that the remote-control number is doubled appears.
Press
and select the current location you are in from
the Select service area display. The channels in the area
you select are preferentially assigned to remote-control
numbers 1 to 12, and channels in the area you do not
select are assigned to remote-control numbers 13 to 62
onward.
● It takes about 40 to 60 seconds to complete searching
broadcast stations. However, the searching time varies
and it may exceed 60 seconds depending on the number
of broadcast stations or the condition of airwave.
Saving a Broadcast Station into the
Channel List Manually
You can save broadcast stations to a channel list by
selecting a service area, prefecture, and area.
The Set channel list display appears.
When no channel list is saved
Follow step 3 to 5.
Ｓｅｔ ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ ｌｉｓｔ
チャンネルリスト１
東京
大阪
神奈川
From the Menu, select [1 Seg] → [Set channel list]
and press
Select a place to save to and press
(Create).
The screen for creating a channel list appears.
Select [Select Serv Area] and press
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ｓｅｒｖｉｃｅ ａｒｅａ
One Seg
Ｈｏｋｋａｉｄｏ
Ｔｏｈｏｋｕ
Ｋａｎｔｏ
Ｋｏｓｈｉｎｅｔｓｕ／Ｈｏｋｕｒｉｋｕ
Ｔｏｋａｉ
Ｋｉｎｋｉ
Ｃｈｕｇｏｋｕ
Ｓｈｉｋｏｋｕ
Ｋｙｕｓｙｕ／Ｏｋｉｎａｗａ
When no channel list is saved
Follow step 3 to 4.
Select a place to save to and press
(Create).
The screen for creating a channel list appears.
Select [Auto channel set] → [Yes] and press
Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ ｓｃａｎｎｉｎｇ
Select a service area → a prefecture → an area
and press
The screen for confirming the channel information of the
selected service area appears.
Ｒｅｃｅｉｖｅ ｃｈ．
Ｐｈｙｓｉｃａｌ ｃｈ． ２７ｃｈ
○○テレビ
Press
(OK), select [Yes], and press
The channel list is saved.
● Depending on the area you use, you may not be able
to save a broadcast station correctly even if you set the
Select Serv Area. In this case, use the Auto channel set.
Searching broadcast stations starts. The Channel scan
result display appears when the search is completed.
To cancel searching broadcast stations
Press
(Cancel) and select [Yes].
Press
(OK), select [Yes], press
a name of a channel list.
, and enter
Enter a name within 10 full-width or 20 half-width characters.
The channel list is saved.
242
Selecting a Channel List to be Used
You can select a channel list suitable for your current
location. Also, you can edit the saved channel lists.
Select a channel list and press
Editing Remote-control Numbers
The Function menu appears.
Ｅｄｉｔ ＲＣ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ
○○テレビ
△△ テレビ
○ △ テレビ
□□テレビ
To delete a broadcast station
Move the cursor to a broadcast station and from the
Function menu, select [Delete one] → [Yes].
Select a broadcast station and press
The remote-control number input screen appears.
ͦ
ͧ
群れのペンギンたちが、み
んないっせいに同じ方向を
見た。なにかを見つけたの
だろうか。
○ △ の不思議
毎週木曜よる１０時∼
ͪ
第２２５回
ペンギンの一生
○ × ｃｈ ○○テレビ
Ｒｅｃ
群れのペンギンたちが、み
んないっせいに同じ方向を
見た。なにかを見つけたの
だろうか。
ͨ
○ △ の不思議
毎週木曜よる１０時∼
ͩ
○ △ の不思議
Ͳ
ͧ
ͫ
ͪ
ͯ Ͱͱ
第２２５回
ペンギンの一生
○ × ｃｈ ○○テレビ
ͬ ͭ
Enter a remote-control number.
ͨ
ͩ
○ △ の不思議
ͫ
ͮ ͯ Ͱͱ
TV style
ͦ
ͪ
○ × ｃｈ ○○テレビ
ͬ
ͭ
ͮ
ͱ
ͫ
○ △ の不思議
ͧ
Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ
Ｒｅｃ
Ｆｕｎｃ
Ｑｕｉｔ
ͨ
Ͳ
ͦ Display status
Watching One Seg
Recording One Seg
ͧ Video
ͨ Subtitle
ͩ Data broadcasting/displaying mail
ˎ The display varies depending on the Mail disp set (P.256).
※ It is not displayed in the TV style.
ͪ Remote-control number
ͫ Name of the channel/program
ͬ Recording status
ͭ Recording progress bar
ͮ Estimated recordable time
※ The recordable time changes according to the progress
of recording. It may increase or suddenly decrease while
recording, depending on the contents of the program to
be recorded.
ͯ Volume
Ͱ Operating mode
Video mode
Data broadcasting mode
Video mode while displaying mail
Mail mode
ͱ Airwave reception level
Outside of the broadcast
service area
weak)
(strong
One Seg
Select a channel list in the Set channel list display
and press
(Func).
Select [Edit RC number] and press
Normal style (Recording)
ͦ
Ｖｏｌｕｍｅ
A remote-control number which can be used for
selecting a station is already assigned to each
broadcast station. Remote-control numbers can be
changed.
Normal style (Watching)
群れのペンギンたちが、みんないっ
せいに同じ方向を見た。なにかを見
つけたのだろうか。
The channel list to be used is set.

Using the Display for Watching One Seg
From the Menu, select [1 Seg] → [Set channel list]
and press
The Set channel list display appears.
To activate One Seg from the channel list
Move the cursor to a channel list, press
(Ch. list),
move the cursor to a broadcast station in the channel
list, and press
(Watch).
To change the name of a channel list
Move the cursor to a channel list and from the Function
menu, select [Edit title]. Enter a name within 10 full-width
or 20 half-width characters.
To delete a channel list
Move the cursor to a channel list and from the Function
menu, select [Delete one] → [Yes].
ˎ The currently used channel list cannot be deleted.
To reset the channel list
From the Function menu, select [Reset], enter the
Security code, and select [Yes].
To display detailed information of a broadcast station
Move the cursor to a channel list, press
(Ch. list),
move to the cursor to a broadcast station in the channel
list, and press
(Detail).
Watching One Seg
Ͳ Guide display
Enter a number within 01 to 62.
The remote-control number is changed.
When the remote-control number is already assigned to
another broadcast station
Select [Yes]. The saved broadcast station is replaced
with the new one.
Continued
243
Watching One Seg in the Normal Style
You can watch One Seg in the Normal style.
From the Menu, select [1 Seg] → [Activate 1Seg]
and press
○ △ の不思議
毎週木曜よる１０時∼
第２２５回
ペンギンの一生
■豆知識
■クイズ
■撮影裏話
■次回予告
○ × ｃｈ ○ △ の不思議
Ｒｅｃ
The channel which you watched previously is displayed.
for
ˎ You can also activate One Seg by pressing
over a second in the stand-by display.
Operating method
Video mode
Operation
Key operation
)/
).
UP/DOWN channel Use
Select a station in order/reverse
select
order of the remote-control numbers.
One-touch channel Remote-control number
select
1 to 9 :
to
10
11
12
Channel search
One Seg
244
Use
) /
) for over a
second.
Search broadcast stations which
can be received.
Volume adjustment Use
)/
).
The volume can be adjusted in 32
levels: 0 to 31.
S w i t c h b e t w e e n Press
(TV/DATA) (P.251).
video and data
broadcasting modes
Start the program Press
(EPG).
guide i-αppli
Time shift
Press
(T.shft).
Pause watching a program and play
it back in time-shift mode (P.253).
Record a still image Press
Record a video
Press
Quit 1Seg
Press
for over a second.
and select [Yes].
Data broadcasting mode
Operation
Display the previous/
next page
Switch the data
broadcasting screen
between half and full
screens
Key operation
Use
while using the data
broadcasting site.
Press
(TV/DATA) for over a
second.
When no channel list is saved
The screen informing that no channel list is saved
appears. Select how to save a channel and save one
(P.242).
To display the program information
From the Function menu, select [Program info.]. When
you press
, the details of the program is displayed.
To display the information of the previous/next program,
press
(Previous) /
(Next).
To set the 1Seg setting
From the Function menu, select [1Seg setting].
To compose mail containing program information
From the Function menu, select [Prog info mail].
ˎ When you send the program information to the
FOMA terminal which is compatible with the Media
To function, the recipient can select it to activate One
Seg.
To select a program when multiple services (programs) are
broadcasted on the same channel
From the Function menu, select [Select service] → a
program.
To save the broadcast station into a channel list while
watching it
From the Function menu, select [Add channel].
Watching One Seg in the TV Style
When you switch the FOMA terminal to the TV style,
you can watch One Seg in the horizontal orientation.
ˎ See “About the Style” (P.27) to switch the FOMA terminal to
the TV style.
ˎ The data broadcasting cannot be displayed in the TV style.
Switch to the TV style in stand-by status.
The Viewing Touch Key lights and it can be operated.
ˎ You can set functions to be activated when switching to
the TV style (P.328).
When you set other functions to be activated, activate
One Seg in the stand-by status and then switch to the
TV style.
Setting While Watching One Seg
Watching One Seg with Subtitles
You can display subtitles while watching a program.
ˎ You can set it either in the Normal style or in the TV style.
Example: For the TV style
Ｖｏｌｕｍｅ
Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ
Ｒｅｃ
Ｆｕｎｃ
Press
for over a second.
Display the Function Press
menu
Quit 1Seg
Press
for over a second and
select [Yes].
To display the program information
From the Function menu, select [Program info.]. When
you pat
(Chg.Info), the details of the program is
displayed. To display the information of the previous/next
program, pat / (Back/Next).
● Depending on the receiving condition of airwave, sound
interruption or video pause may occur, black-shaped noise
may appear on the picture, or a dark display without video
or data broadcasting may appear.
● Depending on the radio wave condition, videos and data
broadcasting may not be displayed even if the status of
the airwave reception level is other than the outside of the
broadcast service area.
● When you activate One Seg while the Manner mode is
set, the screen for confirming whether to output sound
appears. When you select [Yes], you hear the sound.
● Colors of the guide display, etc. may change slightly while
watching One Seg.
● The Viewing Touch Key is turned off about 15 seconds
after it lights. Pat the Viewing Touch Key or press
, or
to light it again.
to select [Caption disp set] and
Use
press
to select a type of subtitles and
The subtitle is set.
● Whether subtitles are provided or not depends on the
program.
● When no subtitle is provided on a program, the subtitle is
not displayed regardless of the Caption disp set.
One Seg
Record a video
Use
press
The Caption disp set menu appears.
[Language1]:
The subtitle of Language 1 is displayed.
[Language2]:
The subtitle of Language 2 is displayed.
[OFF]:
The subtitle is not displayed.
Ｑｕｉｔ
Operation
Key operation
UP/DOWN channel Use / .
select
Select a station in order/reverse
order of the remote-control numbers.
Channel search
Use / for over a second.
Search broadcast stations which
can be received.
Volume adjustment Use
The volume can be adjusted in 32
levels: 0 to 31.
Record a still image Press
(Func) while watching One Seg.
The Function menu appears.
For the Normal style
From the Function menu, select [Caption disp set] → a
type of subtitles.
○ × ｃｈ ○ △ の不思議
The channel which you watched previously is displayed.
Operating method
Press
Displaying the Guide Display All the Time
You can set whether to display the guide display, icon,
etc. all the time in the TV style.
ˎ You can set it only in the TV style.
Press
(Func) while watching One Seg.
The Function menu appears.
Use
press
to select [Guide always on] and
The Guide always on setting menu appears.
Use
to select [ON]/[OFF] and press
The Guide always on is set.
● When the guide display, icon, etc. are displayed, part of
video may not be seen.
Continued
245
2
Adjusting the Image Quality
ˎ You can set it either in the Normal style or in the TV style.
Press
(Func) while watching One Seg.
The Function menu appears.
For the Normal style
From the Function menu, select [Image quality] → an
image quality.
Use
to select [Image quality] and press
The Image quality menu appears.
[Normal]:
The standard image quality emphasized naturalness.
[Sharp]:
Sharply edged image quality.
[Dynam.]:
The clear image quality in which an edge and contrast
of an image is emphasized.
3 Use
to select an image quality and press
You can set whether to adjust automatically the main
display light brightness by the Brightness Sensor to
adapt for the surrounding brightness while watching
One Seg.
ˎ You can set it either in the Normal style or in the TV style.
One Seg
Example: For the TV style
Use
Use
to select [Auto Disp light] and press
to select [ON]/[OFF] and press
to select brightness and press
Switching between the Primary/Secondary Sounds
ˎ You can switch the sound only in the Normal style.
Press
(Func) while watching One Seg.
The Function menu appears.
Select [Switch sound] and press
The screen for selecting the Switch sound appears.
[Primary sound]:
The primary sound is played back.
[Secondary sound]:
The secondary sound is played back.
Select a sound and press
● Even if the Switch sound is set to [Secondary sound], the
primary sound is played back when there is no secondary
sound for the program which you are watching.
Switching between the Main/Sub Sounds
You can switch the sound between the main and sub
sounds.
(Func) while watching One Seg.
Select [Main/Sub] and press
The screen for selecting the Main/Sub appears.
[Main sound]:
The main sound is played back.
[Sub sound]:
The sub sound is played back.
[Main+Sub sound]:
The main sound is played back from the left speaker and
the sub sound is played back from the right speaker.
The Auto Disp light is set.
Press
The Function menu appears.
The Auto Disp light display appears.
[ON]:
Adjust the light automatically.
[OFF]:
Do not adjust the light automatically.
Use
ˎ You can switch the sound only in the Normal style.
(Func) while watching One Seg.
The Function menu appears.
For the Normal style
From the Function menu, select [Auto Disp light] →
[ON]/[OFF].
The Switch sound is set.
Setting to Adjust the Light Automatically
Press
to select [Display light] and press
You can switch the sound between the primary and
secondary sounds.
The image quality is set.
Select brightness from [1 to 5].
Example: For the TV style
Use
The Display light menu appears.
You can set the image quality of the video portion.
Select a sound and press
The Main/Sub is set.
Adjusting the Brightness of the Display
You can set the main display light brightness when you
watch One Seg.
ˎ You can set it either in the Normal style or in the TV style.
Example: For the TV style
Press
(Func) while watching One Seg.
The Function menu appears.
For the Normal style
From the Function menu, select [Display light] →
brightness.
246
● Even if the Main/Sub is set to [Sub sound]/[Main+Sub
sound], the main sound is played back when there is no
sub sound for the program which you are watching.
Using the Sleep Timer
You can set to terminate One Seg automatically after
the certain period of time.
ˎ You can set it either in the Normal style or in the TV style.
Example: For the TV style
Press
(Func) while watching One Seg.
The Function menu appears.
For the Normal style
From the Function menu, select [Sleep] → a time before
terminating One Seg automatically.
Use
to select [Sleep] and press
The Sleep setting menu appears.
Use / to select a time before terminating One
Seg automatically and press
Select from [OFF], [30min], [60min], [90min], and [120min].
Using the Program Guide
i-αppli

Using the program guide i-αppli, you can activate One
Seg by selecting a program from within the program
guide and set a timer for watching or recording a
program.
Setting a Timer for Watching/Recording
a One Seg Program

You can set a timer for watching or recording a One
Seg program. When you set a timer for watching a
program, the alarm sounds to notify you of the start of
the program at the specified date/time. You can save
up to 50 timer settings for watching and recording
programs.
ˎ When the channel list is not set, you cannot set a timer for
watching or recording a program.
ˎ The copy control signal (indicating that “the program cannot
be recorded (Copy Never)”, “the program can be recorded
only once (Copy Once)”, or “the program can be recorded
without restrictions (Copy Free)”) is placed in One Seg. They
are set by each broadcast station.
ˎ If the copy control signal of a program is one of “the program
can be recorded only once (Copy Once)” and “the program
can be recorded without restrictions (Copy Free)”, the
program can be recorded.
ˎ When the copy control signal changes to “the program cannot
be recorded (Copy Never)” while recording a program, the
recording stops. Video data recorded up to that point is
saved.
ˎ When you set a microSD memory card as a place to save a
recorded video, insert a microSD memory card beforehand.
ˎ “Gガイド番組表リモコン” (G-GUIDE TV Program List Remote
Control) is preinstalled as the program guide i-αppli (P.211).
For details, see the “Mobile Phone User’s Guide【i-mode】”.
Ｒｓｒｖ ｄａｔａ ｌｉｓｔ
From the Menu, select [1 Seg] → [Program guide]
and press
※ The display shown is an image
for explanatory purpose and
may be different from the actual
display. The TV program list is
displayed according to your
location.
The program guide i-αppli is started and “ ” or “ ”
appears.
To start the program guide i-αppli while watching in the
Normal style
Press
(EPG). You can also start the program guide
i-αppli when, from the Function menu, select [Program
guide].
To change the software to be activated by the Program
guide key
Move the cursor to the software in the list of i-αppli
software and from the Function menu, select [Individual
set] → [Program guide key] → [Yes]/[No] (P.209).
● When you select a program in the “Gガイド番組表リモコン”
(G-GUIDE TV Program List Remote Control) display, you
can watch the selected program by pressing
(TV起動).
１／１
２００７／１１／２８ Ｗｅｄ１８：００
○○テレビ
明日の天気
One Seg
From the Menu, select [1 Seg] → [Booking list] and
press
The Res. data list display appears.
To delete a timer for watching/recording a program
Move the cursor to a timer and from the Function menu,
select [Delete] → [Delete one] → [Yes]. To delete all
timers, from the Function menu, select [Delete] → [Delete
all], enter the Security code, and select [Yes].
To edit a timer for watching/recording a program
Move the cursor to a timer and press
(Edit).
To display the detailed information of a timer for watching/
recording a program
Move the cursor to a timer and press
Press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Create] and press
Ｅｄｉｔ Ｒｅｓｅｒｖａｔｉｏｎ
Ｂｏｏｋｉｎｇ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ
２００７／１１／２８ Ｗｅｄ
１８：００
２００７／１１／２８ Ｗｅｄ
２０：００
○○テレビ
明日の天気
ＯＮ
３０ｓｅｃ．ｂｅｆｏｒｅ
Ｅｙｄ
１０ Ｃｏｕｎｔ
Ｔｏ ２００７／１２／０７
Continued
247
4
Save each item.
○: Allowed to be saved
Icon
−: Not allowed to be saved
Setting data
Select [Booking program] (Blue)/
[Timer recording] (Pink).
Enter a starting date within the range
from 2000/01/01 to 2050/12/31.
Enter a starting time in 24-hour format.
Enter an ending date from the starting
date to 2050/12/31.
Enter an ending time in 24-hour format.
Select a channel.
One Seg
248
Enter a program name within 48 fullwidth or 96 half-width characters.
Select [ON]/[OFF] of the alarm.
ˎ When you set to [ON], you can
select how many minutes before
the starting time of timer the alarm
should sound. If you want to sound
the alarm at the same time as the
starting time, select [00sec.before].
Select the repeat type.
[OFF] : Do not repeat the timer.
[Eyd]
: Repeat the timer every day.
[Day]
: Repeat the timer on the
same day of the week.
[Month] : R e p e a t t h e t i m e r e v e r y
month on the same day.
ˎ When the repeat type is set to other
than [OFF], enter the repeat count
within 01 to 99 times.
Cfm. activation
Select whether to display the Cfm.
activation display when the Booking
alarm is activated.
[ON] : Display the Cfm. activation
display.
[OFF] : D o n o t d i s p l a y t h e C f m .
activation display.
ˎ When the alarm is set to [OFF], it
cannot be set.
Dur multitask Rec
Select whether to display the screen
for confirming to start recording when
the time to start recording comes while
another function which cannot be
activated at the same time is running.
[Pref. recording]:
Terminate the executed function
automatically and start recording.
[Prefer operat.]:
Display the screen for confirming
whether to terminate the executed
function. When you select [Yes],
terminate the executed function
and star t recording. When you
select [No], a timer for recording a
program is canceled.
Output of Rec
Select [Data Box]/[microSD] as a place
to save a recorded video.
Booking Timer
program recording
○
○
○
○
○
○
−
○
−
○
○
○
○
○
○
−
○
○
○
−
−
○
−
○
Press
(Complete).
A timer for watching/recording a program is saved.
ˎ To play back a recorded video, see “Displaying/Playing
Back One Seg” (P.277).
To set a timer for recording a program
The display for confirming the notabilia of the service
appears. To save a timer for recording a program,
confirm the contents and select [Yes]. If you do not want
to display the confirmation display next time, select
[Yes,from then on]. The confirmation display no longer
appears.
ˎ To restore the display for confirming the notabilia of
the service, perform the Rset permission set (P.256).

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
XMP Toolkit                     : 3.1-702
Modify Date                     : 2007:10:30 18:11:23+01:00
Create Date                     : 2007:10:23 09:00:03+02:00
Metadata Date                   : 2007:10:30 18:11:23+01:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : untitled
Document ID                     : uuid:a820f64f-d27d-40f7-a12b-95dc1e9e5b8e
Instance ID                     : uuid:faa219b6-bf5c-43b2-99a3-71541f78c5b9
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 7.0 (Windows)
Page Count                      : 250